Loading...
REVIEWED BLD2021-1386+Manufacturer_Specifications_and_Installation_Instructions+10.6.2021_5.52.30_PM+2449077Table of Contents Part1 - General.........................................................................................................................................................3 1.01 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION R2-SERIES (SIMULTANEOUS HEAT/COOL).............................................3 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE...........................................................................................................................4 1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING..............................................................................................5 Part2 - Warranty......................................................................................................................................................5 Part3 - Outdoor Units...............................................................................................................................................5 3.01 R2-SERIES HIGH EFFICIENCY (HEAT RECOVERY), AIR COOLED OUTDOOR UNITS ................6 3.02 BRANCH CIRCUIT (BC) CONTROLLERS AS REQUIRED FOR SIMULTANEOUS HEAT/COOL SYSTEMS...............................................................................................................................................................12 Part4 - Indoor Units...............................................................................................................................................14 4.01 WALL MOUNTED INDOOR UNIT........................................................................................................14 4.02 4-WAY CEILING -RECESSED CASSETTE WITH GRILLE INDOOR UNIT.......................................16 4.03 4-WAY CEILING -RECESSED CASSETTE WITH GRILLE FOR 2X2 GRID INDOOR UNIT ...........18 4.04 1-WAY CEILING -RECESSED CASSETTE WITH GRILLE INDOOR UNIT.......................................21 4.05 MEDIUM STATIC CEILING -CONCEALED DUCTED INDOOR UNIT..............................................22 4.06 LOW PROFILE CEILING -CONCEALED DUCTED INDOOR UNIT...................................................24 4.07 HIGH STATIC, CEILING -CONCEALED DUCTED INDOOR UNIT...................................................26 Part5 - Controls......................................................................................................................................................28 5.01 OVERVIEW..............................................................................................................................................28 5.02 ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS......................................................................................................30 5.03 CITY MULTI CONTROLS NETWORK..................................................................................................30 5.04 GRAPHICAL USER INTERFACE...........................................................................................................32 5.05 CMCN: SYSTEM INTEGRATION..........................................................................................................34 5.06 ENERGY APPOINTMENT METHOD FOR CITY MULTI CENTRALIZED CONTROLLERS ..........34 5.07 CMCN: REMOTE CONTROLLERS........................................................................................................37 5.08 INPUT/OUTPUT (I/O) BOARDS.............................................................................................................46 5.09 CENTRALIZED CONTROLLER (WEB-ENABLED).............................................................................46 5.10 CENTRAL CONTROLLER (NON-WEB)................................................................................................55 5.11 ..........................................................................................................................................................................28 5.12 CMCN REMOTE CONTROLLERS: SYSTEM INTEGRATION...........................................................58 Part6 - Diamond Controls......................................................................................................................................63 6.01 GENERAL................................................................................................................................................. 63 6.02 SUMMARY...............................................................................................................................................64 6.03 DC-8000 Controller...................................................................................................................................66 6.04 DC -PRO SOFTWARE...............................................................................................................................69 6.05 SUBMITTALS: ......................................................................................................................................... 72 6.06 AGENCY AND CODE APPROVALS.....................................................................................................72 6.07 SOFTWARE OWNERSHIP......................................................................................................................73 6.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING............................................................................................74 6.09 JOB CONDITIONS...................................................................................................................................74 6.10 QUALITY ASSURANCE.........................................................................................................................74 6.11 SPECIFICATION NOMENCLATURE....................................................................................................74 6.12 MATERIALS.............................................................................................................................................78 6.13 BAS SERVER & WEB BROWSER GUI.................................................................................................82 6.14 LIC-CHARGE...........................................................................................................................................90 6.15 LIC-PERSONAL WEB.............................................................................................................................93 6.16 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................................................... 96 6.17 PROJECT CLOSEOUT.............................................................................................................................96 Part 7 - HVAC Equipment Alternate (General Information)..................................................................................98 7.01 R2-SERIES, HIGH EFFICIENCY, N-GENERATION...........................................................................100 Part 1 - General 1.01 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION R2-SERIES (SIMULTANEOUS HEAT/COOL) Per the equipment schedule, the variable capacity, heat pump heat recovery air conditioning system basis of design is Mitsubishi Electric CITY MULTI VRF (Variable Refrigerant Flow) zoning system(s). Acceptable alternative manufacturers, assuming compliance with these equipment specifications, are Daikin, Panasonic, and Hitachi. Contractor bidding an alternate manufacturer does so with full knowledge that that manufactures product may not be acceptable or approved and that contractor is responsible for all specified items and intents of this document without further compensation. Simultaneous heating/cooling (heat recovery) systems shall consist of an outdoor unit, BC (Branch Circuit) Controller (or comparable branch devices), multiple indoor units, and an integral DDC (Direct Digital Controls) system. Each indoor unit or group of indoor units shall be capable of operating in any mode independently of other indoor units or groups. System shall be capable of changing mode (cooling to heating, heating to cooling) with no interruption to system operation. To ensure owner comfort, each indoor unit or group of indoor units shall be independently controlled and capable of changing mode automatically when zone temperature strays 1.8 degrees F from set point for ten minutes. No additional branch circuit controllers (or comparable branch devices) than shown on the drawings/schedule may be connected to any one outdoor unit. Contractors proposing alternate systems requiring more branch devices than those included as the basis of design are responsible for additional piping & electrical costs and are required to identify additional costs & installation time required of other trades with their bid. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1. The units shall be listed by Electrical Testing Laboratories (ETL) and bear the ETL label. 2. All wiring shall be in accordance with the National Electrical Code (N.E.C.). 3. The units shall be manufactured in a facility registered to ISO 9001 and ISO14001 which is a set of standards applying to environmental protection set by the International Standard Organization (ISO). 4. All units must meet or exceed the 2010 Federal minimum efficiency requirements and the ASHRAE 90.1 efficiency requirements for VRF systems. Efficiency shall be published in accordance with the Air - Conditioning, Heating, and Refrigeration Institute (AHRI) Standard 1230. 5. System start-up supervision shall be a required service to be completed by the manufacturer or a duly authorized, competent representative that has been factory trained in system configuration and operation. The representative shall provide proof of manufacturer certification indicating successful completion within no more than two (2) years prior to system installation. This certification shall be included as part of the equipment and/or controls submittals. 1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING 1. Unit shall be stored and handled according to the manufacturer's recommendation. Part 2 - Warranty The CITY MULTI units shall be covered by the manufacturer's limited warranty for a period of one (1) year parts and seven (7) year compressor to the original owner from date of installation. Installing contractor shall meet manufacturer requirements to obtain extended manufacturer's limited parts and compressor warranty for a period of ten (10) years to the original owner from date of installation. This warranty shall not include labor. Manufacturer shall have a minimum of fifteen (15) years continuous experience providing VRF systems in the U.S. market. All manufacturer technical and service manuals must be readily available for download by any local contractor should emergency service be required. Registering and sign -in requirements which may delay emergency service reference are not allowed. The CITY MULTI VRF system shall be installed by a contractor with extensive CITY MULTI install and service training. The mandatory contractor service and install training should be performed by the manufacturer. Part 3 - Outdoor Units 3.01 R2-SERIES HIGH EFFICIENCY (HEAT RECOVERY), AIR COOLED OUTDOOR UNITS General: The outdoor unit modules shall be air-cooled, direct expansion (DX), multi -zone units used specifically with VRF components described in this section and Part 5 (Controls). The outdoor unit modules shall be equipped with a single compressor which is inverter -driven and multiple circuit boards —all of which must be manufactured by the branded VRF manufacturer. Each outdoor unit module shall be completely factory assembled, piped and wired and run tested at the factory. 1. Outdoor unit systems may be comprised of multiple modules with differing capacity if a brand other than basis of design is proposed. All units requiring a factory supplied twinning kits shall be piped together in the field, without the need for equalizing line(s). If an alternate manufacturer is selected, any additional material, cost, and labor to install additional lines shall be incurred by the contractor. Contractor responsible for ensuring alternative brand compatibility in terms of availability, physical dimensions, weight, electrical requirements, etc. 2. Outdoor unit shall have a sound rating no higher than 68 dB(A) individually or 70 dB(A) twinned. Units shall have a sound rating no higher than 52 dB(A) individually or 55 dB(A) twinned while in night mode operation. Units shall have 5 levels sound adjustment via dip switch selectable fan speed settings. If an alternate manufacturer is selected, any additional material, cost, and labor to meet published sound levels shall be incurred by the contractor. 3. Refrigerant lines from the outdoor unit to the indoor units shall be insulated in accordance with the installation manual. 4. The outdoor unit shall have the capability of installing the main refrigerant piping through the bottom of the unit. 5. The outdoor unit shall have an accumulator with refrigerant level sensors and controls. Units shall actively control liquid level in the accumulator via Linear Expansion Valves (LEV) from the heat exchanger. 6. The outdoor unit shall have a high pressure safety switch, over -current protection, crankcase heater and DC bus protection. 7. VRF system shall meet performance requirements per schedule and be within piping limitations & acceptable ambient temperature ranges as described in respective manufacturers' published product catalogs. Non - published product capabilities or performance data are not acceptable. 8. The outdoor unit shall be capable of operating in heating mode down to - 25F ambient temperatures or cooling mode down to 23F ambient temperatures, without additional low ambient controls. If an alternate manufacturer is selected, any additional material, cost, and labor to meet low ambient operating condition and performance shall be incurred by the contractor. 9. The outdoor unit shall have a high efficiency oil separator plus additional logic controls to ensure adequate oil volume in the compressor is maintained. Oil return sequences must be enabled only during extended periods of reduced refrigerant flow to ensure no disruption to correct refrigerant flow to individual zones during peak loads. Systems which might engage oil return sequence based on hours of operation risk oil return during inopportune periods are not allowed. Systems which rely on sensors (which may fail) to engage oil return sequence are not allowed. 10. Unit must defrost all circuits simultaneously in order to resume full heating more quickly during extreme low ambient temperatures (below 23F). Partial defrost, also known as hot gas defrost which allows reduced heating output during defrost, is permissible only when ambient temperature is above 23F. 11. While in hot gas defrost the system shall slow the indoor unit fan speed down to maintain a high discharge air temperature, systems that keep fan running in same state shall not be allowed as they provide an uncomfortable draft to the indoor zone due to lower discharge air temperatures. 12. In reverse defrost all refrigerant shall be bypassed in the main branch controller and shall not be sent out to the indoor units, systems that flow refrigerant through indoor units during reverse defrost shall not be allowed. 13. The outdoor unit shall be capable of operating in cooling mode down to - 101F with optional manufacturer supplied low ambient kit. • Low ambient kit shall be provided with predesigned control box rated for outdoor installation and capable of controlling kit operation automatically in all outdoor unit operation modes. • Low ambient kit shall be listed by Electrical Laboratories (ETL) and bear the ETL label. • Low ambient kit shall be factory tested in low ambient temperature chamber to ensure operation. Factory performance testing data shall be available when requested. 14.The outdoor unit shall be provided with a manufacturer supplied 20 gauge hot dipped galvanized snow /hail guard. The snow/hail guard protects the outdoor coil surfaces from hail damage and snow build-up in severe climates. 15.VRF four -legged outdoor unit mounting systems shall be provided by manufacturer. Stand shall be made from 7 gauge plate steel with thermally fused polyester powder coat finish that meets ASTM D3451-06 standards. Stands shall be provided with galvanized mounting hardware and meets all ASCE 7 overturning safety requirement. Unit Cabinet: 1. The casing(s) shall be fabricated of galvanized steel, bonderized and finished. 2. Outdoor unit components shall be coated with the Seacoast Protection Coating (Brine Spray — BS coating) to protect components from premature corrosion due to a seacoast environment. Coating shall be applied to components before original outdoor unit assembly to ensure manufacturer quality standards are not compromised and shall meet the following minimum requirements: • >_85prn thermoset polyester -resin powder coating on External Front Panel • >_70pm thermoset polyester -resin powder coating on External Panel Base, Pillar, Compressor Cover, Fan Motor Support, Electrical Box • >_1 dam cellulose and polyurethane -resin coating on heat exchanger fins • >_10prn polyurethane coating on printed circuit boards 3. The outdoor unit shall be tested in compliance with ISO9277 such that no unusual rust shall develop after 960 hours of salt spray testing. 4. Panels on the outdoor unit shall be scratch free at system startup. If a scratch occurs the salt spray protection is compromised and the panel should be replaced immediately. Fan: 1. Each outdoor unit module shall be furnished with direct drive, variable speed propeller type fan(s) only. Fans shall be factory set for operation at 0 in. WG. external static pressure, but capable of normal operation with a maximum of 0.32 in. WG. external static pressure via dipswitch. 2. All fan motors shall have inherent protection, have permanently lubricated bearings, and be completely variable speed. 3. All fans shall be provided with a raised guard to prevent contact with moving parts. Refrigerant and Refrigerant Piping: 1. R410A refrigerant shall be required for systems. 2. Polyolester (POE) oil —widely available and used in conventional domestic systems —shall be required. Prior to bidding, manufacturers using alternate oil types shall submit material safety data sheets (MSDS) and comparison of hygroscopic properties for alternate oil with list of local suppliers stocking alternate oil for approval at least two weeks prior to bidding. 3. Refrigerant piping shall be phosphorus deoxidized copper (copper and copper alloy seamless pipes) of sufficient radial thickness as defined by the VRF equipment manufacturer and installed in accordance with manufacturer recommendations. 4. All refrigerant piping must be insulated with '/2" closed cell, CFC-free foam insulation with flame -Spread Index of less than 25 and a smoke - development Index of less than 50 as tested by ASTM E 84 and CAN / ULC S-102. R value of insulation must be at least 3. 5. Refrigerant line sizing shall be in accordance with manufacturer specifications. Future changes to indoor unit styles or sizes must be possible without resizing/replacing refrigerant piping to any other branch devices or indoor units. Coil: 1. Outdoor Coil shall be constructed to provide equal airflow to all coil face surface are by means of a 4-sided coil 2. Outdoor Coil shall be elevated at least 12" from the base on the unit to protect coil from freezing and snow build up in cold climates. Manufacturer's in which their coil extends to within a few inches from the bottom of their cabinet frame shall provide an additional 12" of height to their stand or support structure to provide equal protection from elements as Mitsubishi Electric basis of design. Any additional support costs, equipment fencing, and tie downs required to meet this additional height shall be responsibility of Mechanical Contractor to provide. 3. The outdoor heat exchanger shall be of zinc coated aluminum construction with turbulating flat tube construction. The coil fins shall have a factory applied corrosion resistant finish. Uncoated aluminum coils/fins are not allowed. 4. The coil shall be protected with an integral metal guard. 5. Refrigerant flow from the outdoor unit shall be controlled by means of an inverter driven compressor. 6. Unit shall have prewired plugs for optional panel heaters in order to prevent any residual ice buildup from defrost. Panel heaters are recommended for operating environments where the ambient temperature is expected to stay below -1 F for 72 hours. 7. Condenser coil shall have active hot gas circuit direct from compressor discharge on lowest coil face area to shed defrost condensate away from coil and protect from Ice formation after returning to standard heat pump operation. While in Heat Pump operation this lower section of the Outdoor Evaporator coil shall continually run hot gas from the compressor discharge to protect the coil from ice buildup and coil rupture. Manufacturers who do not have an active hot gas circuit in the lower section of the Outdoor coil to protect coil from freezing shall not be allowed to bid on project in markets where the outdoor unit will see temperatures below freezing. Compressor: 1. Each outdoor unit module shall be equipped with only inverter driven scroll hermetic compressors. Non inverter -driven compressors, which may cause inrush current (demand charges) and require larger generators for temporary power shall not be allowed. 2. Each compressor shall be equipped with a multi -port discharge mechanism to eliminate over compression at part load. Manufacturer's that rely on a single compressor discharge port and provide no means of eliminating over compression and energy waste at part load shall not be allowed. 3. Crankcase heat shall be provided via induction -type heater utilizing eddy currents from motor windings. Energy -wasting "belly -band" type crankcase heaters are not allowed. Manufacturers that utilize belly -band crankcase heaters will be considered as alternate only. 4. Compressor shall have an inverter to modulate capacity. The capacity for each compressor shall be variable with a minimum turndown not greater than 15%. 5. The compressor shall be equipped with an internal thermal overload. 6. Field -installed oil equalization lines between modules are not allowed. Prior to bidding, manufacturers requiring equalization must submit oil line sizing calculations specific to each system and module placement for this project. 7. Manufacturers that utilize a compressor sump oil sensor to equalize compressor oil volume within a single module shall not be allowed unless they actively shut down the system to protect from compressor failure. Controls: 8. Outdoor unit shall include Variable Evaporator Temperature or comparable method of varying system evaporator (refrigerant) temperature in order to reduce compression ratio and power consumption during light load or mild ambient temperatures. Multiple evaporator refrigerant temperature settings shall be required in order to optimize efficiency within required system -specific performance and installation constraints. System shall reduce compression ratio only when/if all indoor units are within 1.8F of setpoint; reducing compression ratio based solely on ambient temperature risks discomfort and is not allowed. Variable Evaporator Temperature or comparable method shall incorporate override or disable capability based on external signal to allow for space humidity control or load demand.The unit shall be an integral part of the system & control network described in Part 5 (Controls) and react to heating/cooling demand as communicated from connected indoor units over the control circuit. Required field -installed control voltage transformers and/or signal boosters shall be provided by the manufacturer. 9. Each outdoor unit module shall have the capability of 4 levels of demand control based on external input. Electrical: 1. The outdoor unit electrical power shall be 208/230 volts, 3-phase, 60 hertz or 460 volts, 3-phase, 60 hertz per equipment schedule. 2. The outdoor unit shall be controlled by integral microprocessors. 3. The control circuit between the indoor units, BC Controller and the outdoor unit shall be 24VDC completed using a 2-conductor, twisted pair shielded cable to provide total integration of the system. 3.02 BRANCH CIRCUIT (BC) CONTROLLERS AS REQUIRED FOR SIMULTANEOUS HEAT/COOL SYSTEMS General 1. BC (Branch Circuit) Controllers (or comparable branch devices) shall include multiple branches to allow simultaneous heating and cooling by allowing either hot gas refrigerant to flow to indoor unit(s) for heating or subcooled liquid refrigerant to flow to indoor unit(s) for cooling. Refrigerant used for cooling must always be subcooled for optimal indoor unit LEV performance; alternate branch devices which do not include controlled refrigerant subcooling risk bubbles in liquid supplied to indoor unit LEVs and are not allowed. 2. BC Controllers (or comparable branch devices) shall be equipped with a circuit board that interfaces to the controls system and shall perform all functions necessary for operation. The unit shall have a galvanized steel finish and be completely factory assembled, piped and wired. Each unit shall be run tested at the factory. This unit shall be mounted indoors, with access and service clearance provided for each controller. BC Controllers (or comparable branch devices) shall be suitable for use in plenums in accordance with UL1995 ed 4. BC Unit Cabinet: 1. The casing shall be fabricated of galvanized steel. 2. Each cabinet shall house a liquid -gas separator and multiple refrigeration control valves. 3. The unit shall house two tube -in -tube heat exchangers. Refrigerant Piping (specifications in addition to those for outdoor unit): 1. All refrigerant pipe connections shall be brazed. 2. Future changes to indoor unit quantities or sizes served by BC Controller or comparable branch device must be possible with no piping changes except between the branch device and indoor unit(s) changing. Systems which might require future piping changes between branch device and outdoor unit —if changes to indoor unit quantities or sizes are made —are not considered equal and are not allowed. Refrigerant valves: 1. Service shut-off valves shall be field-provided/installed for each branch to allow service to any indoor unit without field interruption to overall system operation. Future Use Branch: 1. Each VRF system shall include at least one (1) unused branch or branch device for future use. Future -use branches or branch devices shall be fully installed & wired in central location with capped service shutoff valve & service port. Condensate Management: 1. BC Controller (or comparable branch device) must have integral resin drain pan or insulate refrigeration components with removable insulation that allows easy access for future service needs. Cabinets filled with solid foam insulation do not allow for future service and are not allowed. Electrical: 1. The unit electrical power shall be 208/230 volts, 1 phase, 60 Hertz. The unit shall be capable of satisfactory operation within voltage limits of 187- 228 (208V/60Hz) or 207-253 (230/60Hz). 2. The BC Controller shall be controlled by integral microprocessors 3. The control circuit between the indoor units and outdoor units shall be 24VDC completed using a 2-conductor, twisted pair shielded cable to provide total integration of the system. 4. Part 4 - Indoor Units 4.01 WALL MOUNTED INDOOR UNIT General: 1. The wall -mounted indoor unit shall be factory assembled, wired and run tested. Contained within the unit shall be all factory wiring, piping, electronic modulating linear expansion device, control circuit board and fan motor. The unit shall have a self -diagnostic function, 3-minute time delay mechanism, an auto restart function, and a test run switch. Indoor unit and refrigerant pipes shall be charged with dehydrated air before shipment from the factory. Unit Cabinet: 1. All casings, regardless of model size, shall have the same white finish 2. Multi directional drain and refrigerant piping offering four (4) directions for refrigerant piping and two (2) directions for draining are required. 3. There shall be a separate back plate which secures the unit firmly to the wall. Fan: 1. The indoor fan shall be statically and dynamically balanced to run on a single motor with permanently lubricated bearings. 2. A manual adjustable guide vane shall be provided with the ability to change the airflow from side to side (left to right). 3. A motorized air sweep louver shall provide an automatic change in airflow by directing the air up and down to provide uniform air distribution. Filter: 1. Return air shall be filtered by means of an easily removable, washable filter. Coil: 1. Basis of design indoor units include factory -installed LEV/EEV. Alternative brands which require field -installed, accessory LEV or EEV kits are permissible only with written Engineer and Architect approval for the location of kits being submitted two weeks prior to bid date. EEV kits mounted in cavities inside fire -rated interior walls shall be mounted inside three hour fire rated enclosures with access panels supplied by the manufacturer. Enclosure type and placement require prior approval. 2. The indoor coil shall be of nonferrous construction with smooth plate fins on copper tubing. The tubing shall have inner grooves for high efficiency heat exchange. All tube joints shall be brazed with phos-copper or silver alloy. 3. The coils shall be pressure tested at the factory. Electrical: 1. The unit electrical power shall be 208/230 volts, 1-phase, 60 hertz. 2. The system shall be capable of satisfactory operation within voltage limits of 187-228 volts (208V/60Hz) or 207-253 volts (230V/6OHz) Controls: 1. The unit shall include an IR receiver for wireless remote control flexibility 2. Indoor unit shall compensate for the higher temperature sensed by the return air sensor compared to the temperature at level of the occupant when in HEAT mode. Disabling of compensation shall be possible for individual units to accommodate instances when compensation is not required. 3. Control board shall include contacts for control of external heat source. External heat may be energized as second stage with 1.8°F — 9.0°F adjustable deadband from set point. 4. Indoor unit shall include no less than four (4) digital inputs capable of being used for customizable control strategies. 5. Indoor unit shall include no less than three (3) digital outputs capable of being used for customizable control strategies. 4.02 4-WAY CEILING -RECESSED CASSETTE WITH GRILLE INDOOR UNIT General: 1. The ceiling -recessed indoor unit shall be factory assembled, wired and run tested. Contained within the unit shall be all factory wiring, piping, electronic modulating linear expansion device, control circuit board and fan motor. The unit shall have a self -diagnostic function, 3-minute time delay mechanism, an auto restart function, an emergency operation function, a test run switch, and the ability to adjust airflow patterns for different ceiling heights. Indoor unit and refrigerant pipes shall be charged with dehydrated air before shipment from the factory. The unit shall be suitable for use in plenums in accordance with UL1995 ed 4. Unit Cabinet: 1. The cabinet panel shall have provisions for a field installed filtered outside air intake. 2. Branch ducting shall be allowed from cabinet. 3. Four-way grille shall be fixed to bottom of cabinet allowing two, three or four-way blow. 4. The grille vane angles shall be individually adjustable from a wired remote controller to customize the airflow pattern for the conditioned space Fan: 1. The indoor fan shall be an assembly with a statically and dynamically balanced turbo fan direct driven by a single motor with permanently lubricated bearings. 2. The indoor unit shall include an AUTO fan setting capable of maximizing energy efficiency by adjusting the fan speed based on the difference between controller set -point and space temperature. The indoor fan shall be capable of five (5) speed settings, Low, Mid1, Mid2, High and Auto. 3. The indoor unit shall have an adjustable air outlet system offering 4-way airflow, 3-way airflow, or 2-way airflow. 4. The indoor unit fan logic must include multiple setting that can be changed to provide optimum airflow based on ceiling height and number of outlets used. 5. The indoor unit vanes shall have 5 fixed positions and a swing feature that shall be capable of automatically swinging the vanes up and down for uniform air distribution. 6. The vanes shall have an Auto -Wave selectable option in the heating mode that shall randomly cycle the vanes up and down to evenly heat the space. 7. Grille shall include a factory -installed "i-see" sensor, or equal, to work in conjunction with indoor unit control sequence to prevent unnecessary cooling or heating in unoccupied areas of the zone without decreasing comfort levels. Sensor must detect occupancy (not simply motion) and location of occupants by measuring size & temperature of objects within a 39' detecting diameter (based on 8.8ft mounting height) with 1,856 or more measuring points. Filter: 1. Return air shall be filtered by means of a long -life washable filter Coil: 1. The indoor coil shall be of nonferrous construction with smooth plate fins on copper tubing. The tubing shall have inner grooves for high efficiency heat exchange. All tube joints shall be brazed with phos-copper or silver alloy. 2. The coils shall be pressure tested at the factory. 3. The unit shall be provided with an integral condensate lift mechanism that will be able to raise drain water 33 inches above the condensate pan. Electrical: 1. The unit electrical power shall be 208/230 volts, 1-phase, 60 hertz. 2. The system shall be capable of satisfactory operation within voltage limits of 187-228 volts (208V/60Hz) or 207-253 volts (230V/60Hz). Controls: 1. Indoor unit shall compensate for the higher temperature sensed by the return air sensor compared to the temperature at level of the occupant when in HEAT mode. Disabling of compensation shall be possible for individual units to accommodate instances when compensation is not required. 2. Control board shall include contacts for control of external heat source. External heat may be energized as second stage with 1.8°F — 9.0°F adjustable deadband from set point. 3. Indoor unit shall include no less than four (4) digital inputs capable of being used for customizable control strategies. 4. Indoor unit shall include no less than three (3) digital outputs capable of being used for customizable control strategies. 5. A factory -installed drain pan sensor shall provide protection against drain pan overflow by sensing a high condensate level in the drain pan. Should this occur the control shuts down the indoor unit before an overflow can occur. A thermistor error code will be produced should the sensor activate indicating a fault which must be resolved before the unit re -starts. 4.03 4-WAY CEILING -RECESSED CASSETTE WITH GRILLE FOR 2X2 GRID INDOOR UNIT General: 1. The indoor unit shall be a four-way cassette style indoor unit that recesses into the ceiling with a ceiling grille. The indoor unit shall be factory assembled, wired and run tested. Contained within the unit shall be all factory wiring, piping, electronic modulating linear expansion device, control circuit board and fan motor. The unit shall have a self -diagnostic function, 3-minute time delay mechanism, an auto restart function, an emergency operation function and a test run switch. Indoor unit and refrigerant pipes shall be charged with dehydrated air before shipment from the factory. The unit shall be suitable for use in plenums in accordance with UL1995 ed 4. Unit Cabinet: 1. The cabinet shall be a compact 22-7/16" wide x 22-7/16" deep so it will fit within a standard 24" square suspended ceiling grid. 2. The cabinet panel shall have provisions for a field installed filtered outside air intake. 3. Four-way grille shall be fixed to bottom of cabinet allowing two, three or four-way blow. Fan: 1. The indoor fan shall be an assembly with a turbo fan direct driven by a single motor. 2. The indoor fan shall be statically and dynamically balanced to run on a motor with permanently lubricated bearings. 3. The indoor unit shall include an AUTO fan setting capable of maximizing energy efficiency by adjusting the fan speed based on the difference between controller set -point and space temperature. The indoor fan shall be capable of five (4) speed settings, Low, Mid, High and Auto. 4. The indoor unit shall have an adjustable air outlet system offering 4-way airflow, 3-way airflow, or 2-way airflow. 5. The indoor unit vanes shall have 5 fixed positions and a swing feature that shall be capable of automatically swinging the vanes up and down for uniform air distribution. 6. Grille shall include a factory -installed "i-see" sensor, or equal, to work in conjunction with indoor unit control sequence to prevent unnecessary cooling or heating in unoccupied areas of the zone without decreasing comfort levels. Sensor must detect occupancy (not simply motion) and location of occupants by measuring size & temperature of objects within a 39' detecting diameter (based on 8.8ft mounting height) with 1,856 or more measuring points. Filter: 1. Return air shall be filtered by means of a long -life washable filter. 10011 1. The indoor coil shall be of nonferrous construction with smooth plate fins on copper tubing. The tubing shall have inner grooves for high efficiency heat exchange. All tube joints shall be brazed with phos-copper or silver alloy. 2. The coils shall be pressure tested at the factory. 3. The unit shall be provided with an integral condensate lift mechanism that will be able to raise drain water 19-3/4" inches above the condensate pan. Electrical: 1. The unit electrical power shall be 208/230 volts, 1-phase, 60 hertz. 2. The system shall be capable of satisfactory operation within voltage limits of 187-228 volts (208V/60Hz) or 207-253 volts (230V/6OHz). Controls: 1. Indoor unit shall compensate for the higher temperature sensed by the return air sensor compared to the temperature at level of the occupant when in HEAT mode. Disabling of compensation shall be possible for individual units to accommodate instances when compensation is not required. 2. Control board shall include contacts for control of external heat source. External heat may be energized as second stage with 1.8°F — 9.0°F adjustable deadband from set point. 3. Indoor unit shall include no less than four (4) digital inputs capable of being used for customizable control strategies. 4. Indoor unit shall include no less than three (3) digital outputs capable of being used for customizable control strategies. 5. A factory -installed drain pan sensor shall provide protection against drain pan overflow by sensing a high condensate level in the drain pan. Should this occur, the control shuts down the indoor unit before an overflow can occur. A thermistor error code will be produced should the sensor activate indicating a fault which must be resolved before the unit re -starts. 4.04 1-WAY CEILING -RECESSED CASSETTE WITH GRILLE INDOOR UNIT General: 1. The one-way cassette indoor unit shall be factory assembled, wired and run tested. Contained within the unit shall be all factory wiring, piping, electronic modulating linear expansion device, control circuit board and fan motor. The unit shall have a self -diagnostic function, 3-minute time delay mechanism, an auto restart function, an emergency operation function and a test run switch. Indoor unit and refrigerant pipes shall be charged with dehydrated air before shipment from the factory. The unit shall be suitable for use in plenums in accordance with UL1995 ed 4. Unit Cabinet: 1. The cabinet panel shall have provisions for a field installed filtered outside air intake. 2. Branch ducting shall be allowed from cabinet. 3. The one-way grille shall be fixed to bottom of cabinet allowing for one-way airflow. Fan: 1. The indoor fan shall be an assembly with one line -flow fan direct driven by a single motor with permanently lubricated bearings. 2. The indoor fan shall consist of four (4) speeds, Low, Mid1, Mid2, and High. Filter: 1. Return air shall be filtered by means of a long -life washable permanent filter. Coil: 1. The indoor coil shall be of nonferrous construction with smooth plate fins on copper tubing. The tubing shall have inner grooves for high efficiency heat exchange. All tube joints shall be brazed with phos-copper or silver alloy. 2. The coils shall be pressure tested at the factory. 3. The unit shall be provided with an integral condensate lift mechanism able to raise drain water 23 inches above the condensate pan. Electrical: 1. The unit electrical power shall be 208/230 volts, 1-phase, 60 hertz. 2. The system shall be capable of satisfactory operation within voltage limits of 187-228 volts (208V/60Hz) or 207-253 volts (230V/60Hz). Controls: 1. Indoor unit shall compensate for the higher temperature sensed by the return air sensor compared to the temperature at level of the occupant when in HEAT mode. Disabling of compensation shall be possible for individual units to accommodate instances when compensation is not required. 2. Control board shall include contacts for control of external heat source. External heat may be energized as second stage with 1.8°F — 9.0°F adjustable deadband from set point. 3. Indoor unit shall include no less than four (4) digital inputs capable of being used for customizable control strategies. 4. Indoor unit shall include no less than three (3) digital outputs capable of being used for customizable control strategies. 5. A factory -installed drain pan sensor shall provide protection against drain pan overflow by sensing a high condensate level in the drain pan. Should this occur the control shuts down the indoor unit before an overflow can occur. A thermistor error code will be produced should the sensor activate indicating a fault which must be resolved before the unit re -starts. 4.05 MEDIUM STATIC CEILING -CONCEALED DUCTED INDOOR UNIT General: 1. The ceiling -concealed ducted indoor unit shall be factory assembled, wired and run tested. Contained within the unit shall be all factory wiring, piping, electronic modulating linear expansion device, control circuit board and fan motor. The unit shall have a self -diagnostic function, 3-minute time delay mechanism, and an auto restart function. Indoor unit and refrigerant pipes shall be charged with dehydrated air before shipment from the factory. The unit shall be suitable for use in plenums in accordance with UL1995 ed 4. Unit Cabinet: 1. The unit shall be ceiling -concealed, ducted —with a 2-position, field adjustable return and a fixed horizontal discharge supply. 2. The cabinet panel shall have provisions for a field installed filtered outside air intake. Fan: 1. Indoor unit shall feature multiple external static pressure settings ranging from 0.14 to 0.60 in. WG. 2. The indoor unit fan shall be an assembly with statically and dynamically balanced Sirocco fan(s) direct driven by a single motor with permanently lubricated bearings. 3. The indoor fan shall consist of three (3) speeds, High, Mid, and Low plus the Auto -Fan function Filter: 1. Return air shall be filtered by means of a standard factory installed return air filter. 2. Optional return filter box (rear or bottom placement) with high -efficiency filter as noted on equipment schedule. Optional Filter Frame and Filter: 1. Filter frame shall be constructed of 20 gauge G-60 galvanized steel. Knurled thumb screws on access door allow filter replacement. Foam gasket provides air -tight connection to indoor unit and access door. Filter frame shall be configurable for rear or bottom return. 2. Filter shall be rated MERV 13 when tested in accordance with ANSI/ASHRAE 52.2 Standard Rated Class 2 under U.L. Standard 900. Coil: 1. The indoor coil shall be of nonferrous construction with smooth plate fins on copper tubing. The tubing shall have inner grooves for high efficiency heat exchange. All tube joints shall be brazed with phos-copper or silver alloy. 2. The coils shall be pressure tested at the factory. 3. Coil shall be provided with a sloped drain pan. Units without sloped drain pans which must be installed cockeyed to ensure proper drainage are not allowed. 4. The unit shall be provided with an integral condensate lift mechanism able to raise drain water 27 inches above the condensate pan. Electrical: 1. The unit electrical power shall be 208/230 volts, 1-phase, 60 hertz. 2. The system shall be capable of satisfactory operation within voltage limits of 187-228 volts (208V/60Hz) or 207-253 volts (230V/60Hz). Controls: 1. Indoor unit shall compensate for the higher temperature sensed by the return air sensor compared to the temperature at level of the occupant when in HEAT mode. Disabling of compensation shall be possible for individual units to accommodate instances when compensation is not required. 2. Control board shall include contacts for control of external heat source. External heat may be energized as second stage with 1.8°F — 9.0°F adjustable deadband from set point. 3. Indoor unit shall include no less than four (4) digital inputs capable of being used for customizable control strategies. 4. Indoor unit shall include no less than three (3) digital outputs capable of being used for customizable control strategies. 4.06 LOW PROFILE CEILING -CONCEALED DUCTED INDOOR UNIT General: 1. The indoor unit shall be factory assembled, wired and run tested. Contained within the unit shall be all factory wiring, piping, electronic modulating linear expansion device, control circuit board and fan motor. The unit shall have a self -diagnostic function, 3-minute time delay mechanism, and an auto restart function. Indoor unit and refrigerant pipes shall be charged with dehydrated air before shipment from the factory. The unit shall be suitable for use in plenums in accordance with UL1995 ed 4. Unit Cabinet: 1. The cabinet shall be space saving, low profile height of 7-7/8" or less, ceiling -concealed ducted —with a rear return and a fixed horizontal discharge supply. 2. The cabinet panel shall have provisions for a field installed filtered outside air intake. Fan: 1. Indoor units shall feature adjustable external static pressure settings up to 0.20 in. WG. 2. The indoor unit fan shall be an assembly with one statically and dynamically balanced Sirocco fan direct driven by a single motor with permanently lubricated bearings. 3. The indoor fan shall consist of three (3) speeds, High, Mid, and Low. Filter: 1. Return air shall be filtered by means of a standard factory installed return air filter. Optional Filter Frame and Filter 1. Filter frame shall be constructed of 20 gauge G-60 galvanized steel. Knurled thumb screws on access door allow filter replacement. Foam gasket provides air -tight connection to indoor unit and access door. Filter frame shall be configurable for rear or bottom return. 2. Filter shall be rated MERV 8 when tested in accordance with ANSI/ASHRAE 52.2 Standard Rated Class 2 under U.L.. Standard 900. Coil: 1. The indoor coil shall be of nonferrous construction with smooth plate fins on copper tubing. The tubing shall have inner grooves for high efficiency heat exchange. All tube joints shall be brazed with phos-copper or silver alloy. 2. The coils shall be pressure tested at the factory. 3. Coil shall be provided with a sloped drain pan. Units without sloped drain pans which must be installed cockeyed to ensure proper drainage are not allowed. 4. The unit shall be provided with an integral condensate lift mechanism able to raise drain water 21 inches above the condensate pan. Electrical: 1. The unit electrical power shall be 208/230 volts, 1 phase, 60 hertz. 2. The system shall be capable of satisfactory operation within voltage limits of 187-228 volts (208V/60Hz) or 207-253 volts (230V/60Hz). Controls: 1. Indoor unit shall compensate for the higher temperature sensed by the return air sensor compared to the temperature at level of the occupant when in HEAT mode. Disabling of compensation shall be possible for individual units to accommodate instances when compensation is not required. 2. Control board shall include contacts for control of external heat source. External heat may be energized as second stage with 1.8°F — 9.0°F adjustable deadband from set point. 3. Indoor unit shall include no less than four (4) digital inputs capable of being used for customizable control strategies. 4. Indoor unit shall include no less than three (3) digital outputs capable of being used for customizable control strategies. 4.07 HIGH STATIC, CEILING -CONCEALED DUCTED INDOOR UNIT General: 1. The indoor unit shall be factory assembled, wired and run tested. Contained within the unit shall be all factory wiring, piping, electronic modulating linear expansion device, control circuit board and fan motor. The unit shall have a self -diagnostic function, 3-minute time delay mechanism, and an auto restart function. Indoor unit and refrigerant pipes shall be charged with dehydrated air before shipment from the factory. The unit shall be suitable for use in plenums in accordance with UL1995 ed 4. Unit Cabinet: 1. The cabinet shall be ceiling -concealed, ducted with a fixed rear return and a horizontal discharge supply. 2. The cabinet panel shall have provisions for a field installed filtered outside air intake. Fan: 1. Indoor unit shall feature adjustable external static pressure settings up to 1.00 in. WG. 2. The indoor unit fan shall be an assembly with one or two statically and dynamically balanced Sirocco fan(s) direct driven by a single motor with permanently lubricated bearings. Filter: 1. Return air shall be filtered by a field -supplied filter. Optional Filter Frame and Filter 1. Filter frame shall be constructed of 20 gauge G-60 galvanized steel. Knurled thumb screws on access door allow filter replacement. Foam gasket provides air -tight connection to indoor unit and access door. Filter frame shall be configurable for rear or bottom return. 2. Filter shall be rated MERV 13 when tested in accordance with ANSI/ASHRAE 52.2 Standard Rated Class 2 under U.L. Standard 900. Coil: 1. The indoor coil shall be of nonferrous construction with smooth plate fins on copper tubing. The tubing shall have inner grooves for high efficiency heat exchange. All tube joints shall be brazed with phos-copper or silver alloy. 2. The coils shall be pressure tested at the factory. 3. Coil shall be provided with a sloped drain pan. Units without sloped drain pans which must be installed cockeyed to ensure proper drainage are not allowed. Electrical: 1. The unit electrical power shall be 208/230 volts, 1-phase, 60 hertz. 2. The system shall be capable of satisfactory operation within voltage limits of 187-228 volts (208V/60Hz) or 207-253 volts (230V/60Hz). Controls: 1. Indoor unit shall compensate for the higher temperature sensed by the return air sensor compared to the temperature at level of the occupant when in HEAT mode. Disabling of compensation shall be possible for individual units to accommodate instances when compensation is not required. 2. Control board shall include contacts for control of external heat source. External heat may be energized as second stage with 1.8°F — 9.0°F adjustable deadband from set point. 3. Indoor unit shall include no less than four (4) digital inputs capable of being used for customizable control strategies. Indoor unit shall include no less than three (3) digital outputs capable of being used for customizable control strategies. 4. Part 5 - Controls 5.01 OVERVIEW The control system shall consist of a low voltage communication network and a web -based interface. The controls system shall gather data and generate web pages accessible through a conventional web browser on each PC connected to the network. Operators shall be able to perform all normal operator functions through the web browser interface. Furnish energy conservation features such as optimal start, request -based logic, and demand level adjustment of overall system capacity as specified in the sequence. System shall be capable of email generation for remote alarm annunciation. 5.02 ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS General: 1. Controller power and communications shall be via a common non -polar communications bus and shall operate at 30VDC. Wiring: 1. Control wiring shall be installed in a daisy chain configuration from indoor unit to indoor unit, to the BC controller (main and subs, if applicable) and to the outdoor unit. Control wiring to remote controllers shall be run from the indoor unit terminal block to the controller associated with that unit. 2. Control wiring for centralized controllers shall be installed in a daisy chain configuration from outdoor unit to outdoor unit, to the system controllers (centralized controllers and/or integrated web based interface), to the power supply. Wiring type: 1. Wiring shall be 2-conductor (16 AWG), twisted, stranded, shielded wire as defined by the Diamond System Builder output. 2. Network wiring shall be CAT-5 with RJ-45 connection. 5.03 CITY MULTI CONTROLS NETWORK 1. The CITY MULTI Controls Network (CMCN) consists of remote controllers, centralized controllers, and/or integrated web based interface communicating over a high-speed communication bus. The CITY MULTI Controls Network shall support operation monitoring, scheduling, occupancy, error email distribution, personal web browsers, tenant billing, online maintenance support, and integration with Building Management Systems (BMS) using either LonWorks® or BACnet® interfaces. The below figure illustrates a sample CMCN System Configuration. HUB Master Ouldoor Unit im Expansion E-•.pans 'un CMCN System Configuration Indoor Unit ' Remote ontrorer A01 I++ 5.04 GRAPHICAL USER INTERFACE The Graphical User Interface (Integrated Centralized Control Web) shall require a field supplied PC or Tablet. ICCW 1. The Integrated Centralized Control Web System (ICCW) interface shall enable the user to control multiple networked central controllers and shall provide additional functions such as energy apportionment from a single network PC configured with the Charge Calculation Tool. The ICCW shall be capable of controlling up to forty networked Centralized Controllers with a maximum of 2,000 indoor units across multiple CITY MULTI outdoor units. The ICCW shall be required if the user wants to simultaneously control more than 1 Centralized Controllers from a single PC or tablet using a single web browser session. Licensing per function, per Centralized Controller shall be required for the ICCW. Optional software features shall be available through the ICCW including energy apportionment and personalized web. These optional software features shall require the ICCW, advance purchase from the customer, and licensing from ICCW. ICCW (Integrated System Software) Item Details ON/OFF The units can turn ON and OFF for all floors or in a block, floor, or group of units. Operation The operation mode can be switched between COOL, DRY, FAN, Modes AUTO, and HEAT for all floors or in a block, floor, or group of units Sets the temperature for a single group. Range of Temperature setting from 57°F — 87°F depending on operation mode and indoor unit Temperature model. Setting Separate COOL and HEAT mode set points available depending on remote controller and connected mechanical equipment. Fan Speed The fan speed can be set to four stages for all floors or in a block, floor, or group of units The air direction can be set in four vertical directions or to swing for all Air Direction floors or in block, floor, or group of units. (The selectable air direction differs according to the model.) Interlocked If there is an interlocked unit (LOSSNAY), then the unit can be turned Unit ON/OFF ON (strong/weak) or OFF for all floors or in a block, floor, or group of LOSSNAY units. (Note that the ventilation mode cannot be selected for interlocked units.) Local The items for which operation with the local remote controller are to be Operation prohibited can be selected for all floors or in a block, floor, or group of Prohibit units. (The items that can be prohibited are ON/OFF, operation mode, set temperature and filter sign reset.) Annual / The annual/weekly schedule function can be used by registering the Weekly license. Two settings, such as seasonal settings for summer and Schedule winter, can be saved. A watt-hour meter (WHM) with kWH pulse output is connected to calculate the air conditioning charges based on the amount each Power Rate tenant's air -conditioner has operated. Five charging rates can be Apportionment applied per day. Charging `OPTIONAL ENERGY APPORTIONMENT SOFTWARE (LIC- CHARGE) and PI Controller (PAC-Y60MCA) REQUIRED Up to 3,000 items for the error history and up to 10,000 items for operation history can be saved. Each history file can be output as a History daily report or monthly report in CSV format. (The operation history consists only of the operations carried out with the ICCW and is limited to some limited operation items.) Operation The cumulative operation time of each indoor unit can be viewed or Time Monitor output as a CSV format file. (This function is valid only when the charging function license is registered.) Filter Sign The filter sign display at the remote controllers can be disabled. Display Mask Set Temperature The set temperature lower limit can be set for cooling and the upper Limit limit for heating. (ME remote controller required) 5.05 CMCN: SYSTEM INTEGRATION The CMCN shall be capable of supporting integration with Building Management Systems (BMS) via industry standard communication protocols including BACnet and LonWorks°. 5.06 ENERGY APPOINTMENT METHOD FOR CITY MULTI CENTRALIZED CONTROLLERS c sv *I" 4PPW1~+rr,wr j -Ifnw r m.r.rq, "MC5V awe „ue csrr a.z. w+. (Cr aPPa#e+yA rM�/b 4 {fr�.M4q G#KlLlk}II +MIIiMF LA4 � �fl11� tom-�w.c�en � r (CNbVV 96ftU~ Mftft PFMftAI C�W PC 4� (`il[wmwn T9al LAN i:A,', 06nbGiFK - --- fixWOW 31 PC qv" son twl �r Nreeer M xt .�12 kS CuWW 6 V-dco WAR tr JN �" 6d e 9+ W: 6} CMCN System Configuration System Overview For centralized systems serving multiple tenants for which one-to-one electricity metering is not possible, an apportioned electricity billing function that attributes just the electrical energy consumed by each individual tenant's air conditioner is required. The Energy Apportionment function takes the information on the electrical energy usage gathered from Watt Hour Meters (WHM) connected to dedicated breaker panels serving the system's outdoor units and synthesizes it with the information on the operating status of the indoor units that is collected by the CITY MULTI centralized controller(s). Watt Hour Meters 1. Requirements: The Watt Hour Meters (WHMs) to be used to read the electrical energy consumption of the outdoor units must be capable of a pulse output, which would be configured based on the current rating of the units. The associated current transformers/ transducers (CTs) must also be sized based on the current rating of either the individual outdoor units or the dedicated air conditioning electrical panels they are to be reading. The proper quantity of meters for a particular sized system must be selected in order to ensure sufficient resolution and hysteresis in the unit pulse output of the meters so as to ascribe an acceptable level of accuracy to the apportionment of energy usage for each tenant's system. The system is designed to work with any WHM capable of a pulse output that meets ANSI C12.20 class 0.2% or 0.5% accuracy standards. 2. Connection: The WHMs are to be physically connected to the integrated pulse input module or an external Mitsubishi Electric PI Controller if such an input is not available or if there is a wiring length limitation or installation hardship. The cable type of the interconnecting wiring shall be according to the wiring specifications of the WHM manufacturer. CITY MULTI Centralized Controller Requirements 1. Licensing: Each centralized controller to which units are assigned that require the energy apportionment function must have the "LIC-Charge" software license purchased and properly unlocked in order to enable the operating status of the indoor units to be passed to the energy apportionment tool. The procedure for licensing the centralized controllers with this function and the necessary forms can be found on Mitsubishi Electric's technical documentation repository, mylinkdrive.com. Purchase Order information for the licenses will be required at the time of submission of the licensing request forms. 2. Dedicated master centralized controller for apportionment (no MNET connection) A dedicated master centralized controller, for which the LIC-Charge license is purchased and the energy apportionment function enabled, must be provided in order to serve as the portal for exporting metering device and energy management data to a USB drive or to a PC via LAN connection. This means that by virtue of selecting this master centralized controller to serve this function, the MNET capability of this particular centralized controller will be disabled. All indoor units must be physically wired via MNET to other expansion centralized controllers, which must be physically wired via LAN with Static IP addresses and a network hub or switch to the master apportionment controller. PC for collecting charge calculation results • A networked PC, which does not necessarily have to be dedicated to the task of collecting energy apportionment data, can be provided and loaded with the Charge Calculation Tool software for exporting data necessary to generate billing documentation to be performed by a third party. The system requirements of the PC are as follows: Item Requirements CPU 1 GHz or better (at least 2 GHz recommended) Memory 2GB or more Screen Resolution 1024 x 768 or better OS Windows 7, Windows 8.1 (32bit/64bit) System requirements The system should meet the minimum requirement for Windows 7 or Windows 8.1 • Net Framework 4.5 or later Internal LAN port or LAN card 100 BASE -TX or better Porting device Mouse, etc. 5.07 CMCN: REMOTE CONTROLLERS Smart ME Remote Controller: 1. The Smart ME Remote Controller shall be capable of controlling up to 16 indoor units (defined as 1 group). 2. The ME Remote Controller shall only be used in same group with other ME Remote Controllers with a maximum of two ME Remote Controllers per group. Smart ME Remote Controller Item Description Operation Display ON/OFF Run and stop operation for a single group Each EachGroup Group Backlight Turns on when screen is touched. Timeout duration is Each Each adjustable. Group Group Operation Switches between Cool/Dry/Auto/Fan/Heat/Setback. Operation Each Each Mode modes vary depending on the air conditioner unit. Auto and Group Group Setback mode are available for the R2/WR2-Series only. Sets the temperature from 40°F — 95°F depending on operation Temperature mode and indoor unit. Each Each Setting Separate COOL and HEAT mode set points available depending Group Group on central controller and connected mechanical equipment. Fan Speed Available fan speed settings depending on indoor unit. Each Each Setting Group Group Air Flow Direction Air flow direction settings vary depending on the indoor unit Each Each Setting model. Group Group Room Temp Displays the room temperature and humidity on the Home Each and Humidity screen. Temperature and Humidity sensed can be calibrated °F N/A Group Display using the sensor offset in 1 or 1 % RH increments. Detects occupancy using an infrared motion sensor. Occupancy Occupancy status is indicated on the remote controller and through the web N/A Each Sensor interface depending on connected equipment. Sensitivity is Group adjustable. Brightness Detects brightness in the space and indicates brightness on the Each Sensor remote controller and through the web browser interface N/A Group de endin on connected equipment. Sensitivityis adjustable. Status Displays the status of general equipment control points N/A Each Monitor connected to the Advanced HVAC Controller (DC-A210) Group Humidity Sets the relative humidity set point in 1 % increments for any Each Each Setting humidifier connected to the Advanced HVAC Controller (DC- Group Group A21 O Can be set to indicate the operation status by lighting and flashing with different colors and brightness or by turning off to signal operation mode, stopped unit, error, occupancy, or home LED screen button pushes. Each Each Indicator Color can be set to indicate the current mode selected or room Group Group temp range being sensed. *Available colors include blue, light blue, yellow, white, green, red, and lime. Schedule Set up to 8 operations per day, 7 days per week. Operations Each Each include time on/off, mode and room temperature set point. Group Group Permit / Individually prohibit operation of each local remote control Prohibit function (Start/Stop, Change operation mode, Set temperature, Each Local Fan Speed, Air Direction, Reset filter). N/A Group *1: Operation icon lights up on the remote controller for *1 Operation prohibited functions. When vacancy is detected by the occupancy sensor 5 control options are available for selection: Energy -Save control Stop/Setback Mode/Set Temperature Offset/Low Fan Each Each during Speed/Thermo-off Group Group vacancy Brightness sensor can be used in conjunction with the occupancy sensor to increase accuracy. Error When an error is currently occurring on an air conditioner unit, N/A Each the afflicted unit and the error code are displayed Unit Test Run Operates air conditioner units in test run mode. Each EachGroup Group Up to 16 indoor units can be connected to an interlocked system Ventilation that has one LOSSNAY unit. LOSSNAY items that can be set Each Each Equipment are "Hi", "Low", and "Stop". Ventilation mode switching is not Group Group available. Set Set temperature range limit for auto, cool (drying) and heat Each Each Temperature modes. Group Group Range Limit Operation Lock Out Locking of ON/OFF, Mode, Set Temp, Hold button and Air Each Each Direction. Group Group Function Password User and Service password protections are available Each N/A Group Hold Prohibits the scheduled operation from being executed Hold a. ON/OFF timer Each Each b. Auto -OFF timer Group Group c. Weekly timer d. Automatic return to the preset temperature * While an operation is prohibited by Hold function, the operation icon lights up. Simple MA Remote Controller: 1. The Backlit Simple MA Remote Controller shall be capable of controlling up to 16 indoor units (defined as 1 group). 2. The Backlit Simple MA Remote Controller shall only be used in same group with Wireless MA Remote Controllers or with other Backlit Simple MA Remote Controllers, with up to two remote controllers per group. Simple MA Remote Controller Item Description Operation Display ON/OFF Run and stop operation for a single group Each EachGroup Group Switches between Cool/Drying/Auto/Fan/Heat/Setback. Operation Operation modes vary depending on the air conditioner Each Each Mode unit. Auto and Setback mode are available for the R2/WR2- Group Group Series only. Sets the temperature from 40°F — 95°F depending on operation mode and indoor unit. Temperature Each Each Setting Separate COOL and HEAT mode set points available Group Group depending on central controller and connected mechanical equipment. Fan Speed Available fan speed settings depending on indoor unit. Each Each Setting Group Group Air Flow Direction Air flow direction settings vary depending on the indoor Each Each Setting unit model. Group Group Permit / Individually prohibit operation of each local remote control Prohibit function (Start/Stop, Change operation mode, Set Each Local temperature, Reset filter). *1: N/A Group 1 Centrally Controlled is displayed on the remote Operation controller for prohibited functions. Display Indoor Unit Measures and displays the intake temperature of the N/A Each Intake Temp indoor unit when the indoor unit is operating. Group Pressing the button lights up a backlight. The light Display automatically turns off after a certain period of time. (The N/A Each Unit Backlight brightness settings can be selected from Bright, Dark, and Light off. When an error is currently occurring on an air conditioner Error N/A Each Unit unit, the afflicted unit and the error code are displayed Operates air conditioner units in test run mode. Test Run *2 The display for test run mode will be the same as Each Each for normal start/stop (does not display "test run"). Group Group *2 Ventilation Up to 16 indoor units can be connected to an interlocked Each N/A Equipment system that has one LOSSNAY unit. Group Set Set temperature range limit for cooling, heating, or auto Each Each Temperature mode. Group Group Range Limit Wireless MA Remote Controller 1. The Wireless MA Remote Controller used in conjunction with the Wireless MA Remote Controller Receiver shall be capable of controlling up to 16 indoor units (defined as 1 group). 2. The Wireless MA Remote Controller and Receiver shall only be used in the same group with other Wireless MA or Simple MA Remote Controllers, with up to two remote controllers per group. Wireless MA Remote Controller Item Description Operation Display ON/OFF Each Each Run and stop operation for a single group Group Group Operation Switches between Cool/Dry/Auto/Fan/Heat. Each Each Mode Operation modes vary depending on the air conditioner unit. Group Group Auto mode is in the R2/WR2-Series only. Temperature Sets the temperature from 57o F — 87'F depending on Each Each Setting operation mode and indoor unit. Group Group Fan Speed Available fan speed settings depending on indoor unit. Each Each Setting Group Group Air flow direction angles (4 or 5 angle Swing) Auto Air Flow Each Each Direction Louver ON/OFF Group Group Setting Air flow direction settings vary depending on the indoor unit model. Timer Each Each Operation One ON/OFF setting can be set for one day. Group Group Individually prohibit operation of each local remote control Permit / function (ON/OFF, Change operation mode, Set Prohibit temperature, Reset filter). Each Local *1. If operation is performed when the local remote N/A Group * 1 Operation controller inactivation command is received from the main system controller, a buzzer will ring and an LED will flash. Display Indoor Unit Measures the intake temperature of the indoor unit when the N/A N/A Intake Temp indoor unit is operating. Error When an error is currently occurring on an air conditioner N/A Each unit, the operation lamp on the signal receiving unit will flash. Group Each Each Test Run Operates air conditioner units in test run mode. Group Group Ventilation Up to 16 indoor units can be connected to an interlocked N/A N/A Equipment system that has one LOSSNAY unit. Wired MA Remote Controller: 1. The Backlit Wired MA Remote Controller shall be capable of controlling up to 16 indoor units (defined as 1 group). 2. The Backlit Wired MA Remote Controller shall only be used in same group with Wireless MA Remote Controllers or with other Backlit Wired MA Remote Controllers, with up to two remote controllers per group. Wired MA Remote Controller Item Description Operation Display ON/OFF Run and stop operation for a single group Each Group Each Group Switches between Cool/Drying/Auto/Fan/Heat. Operation Operation modes vary depending on the air conditioner Each Each Mode unit. Group Group Auto mode is available for the R2/WR2-Series only. Temperature Sets the temperature from 67°F — 87°F depending on Each Each Setting operation mode and indoor unit. Group Group Separate COOL and HEAT mode set points available depending on central controller and connected mechanical equipment. Fan Speed Available fan speed settings depending on indoor unit. Each Each Setting Group Group Air Flow Direction Air flow direction settings vary depending on the indoor Each Each Setting unit model. Group Group Permit / Individually prohibit operation of each local remote control Prohibit function (Start/Stop, Change operation mode, Set Each Local temperature, Vane, Reset filter). *1: N/A Group 1 Centrally Controlled is displayed on the remote Operation controller for prohibited functions. Display Indoor Unit Measures and displays the intake temperature of the N/A Each Intake Temp indoor unit when the indoor unit is operating. Group Pressing a button lights up a backlight. The light Display automatically turns off after a certain period of time. (The N/A Each Unit Backlight brightness settings can be selected from Bright, Dark, and Light off. Error When an error is currently occurring on an air conditioner N/A Each Unit unit, the afflicted unit and the error code are displayed Operates air conditioner units in test run mode. Test Run *2 The display for test run mode will be the same as Each Each for normal start/stop (does not display "test run"). Group Group *2 Ventilation Equipment Up to 16 indoor units can be connected to an interlocked system that has one LOSSNAY unit. Each Group N/A Set Set temperature range limit for cooling, heating, or auto Each Each Temperature mode. Group Group Range Limit Set up to 8 operations per day, 7 days per week. Each Each Schedule Operations include time on/off, mode and room Group Group temperature set point. Touch MA Remote Controller: 1. The Backlit Touch MA Remote Controller shall be capable of controlling up to 16 indoor units (defined as 1 group). 2. The Backlit Touch MA Remote Controller shall only be the only controller in the group. Touch MA Remote Controller Item Description Operation Display ON/OFF Run and stop operation for a single group Each EachGroup Group Switches between Cool/Drying/Auto/Fan/Heat/Setback. Operation Operation modes vary depending on the air conditioner Each Each Mode unit. Auto and Setback mode are available for the R2/WR2- Group Group Series only. Sets the temperature from 32°F — 104°F depending on Temperature operation mode and indoor unit. Each Each Setting Separate COOL and HEAT mode set points available Group Group depending on central controller and connected mechanical equipment. Fan Speed Available fan speed settings depending on indoor unit. Each Each Setting Group Group Air Flow Direction Air flow direction settings vary depending on the indoor Each Each Setting unit model. Group Group Permit / Individually prohibit operation of each local remote control Prohibit function (Start/Stop, Change operation mode, Set Each Local temperature, Reset filter). *1: N/A Group*1 Centrally Controlled is displayed on the remote Operation controller for prohibited functions. Display Indoor Unit Measures and displays the intake temperature of the N/A Each Intake Temp indoor unit when the indoor unit is operating. Group Pressing the screen lights up a backlight. The light Display automatically turns off after a certain period of time. (The N/A Each Unit Backlight brightness settings can be selected from Bright, Dark, and Light off. Error When an error is currently occurring on an air conditioner N/A Each Unit unit, the afflicted unit and the error code are displayed Operates air conditioner units in test run mode. Each Each Test Run *2 The display for test run mode will be the same as "test Group Group *2 for normal start/stop (does not display run"). Ventilation Equipment Up to 16 indoor units can be connected to an interlocked system that has one LOSSNAY unit. Each Group N/A Set Set temperature range limit for cooling, heating, or auto Each Each Temperature mode. Group Group Range Limit Display Color Controller can allow for the user to change the color of the Each N/A Change text and/or background. Controller IT Extender: 1. The IT Extender is increases the distance of data traveling by the CN105 connection from 3 feet to 50 feet. 2. The IT Extender can only be used on one indoor unit. IT Extender Item Description Operation Display Operation Mode Transmits data from controller to indoor unit. Each Group Each Group Wireless Temperature & Humidity Sensor for kumo Cloud: 1. The Wireless Sensor transmits Temperature and Humidity information to the indoor unit. Can be used in place of thermostat if requested. 2. Uses Bluetooth Low Energy with a range of 33ft (1 Om). Has a 1 year battery life with push notifications associated with any errors. Wireless Temperature & Humidity Sensor for kumo Cloud Item Description Operation Display Operation Mode Transmits data from controller to indoor unit. Each Group Each Group Discover Allows the Wireless sensor to be connected to the kumo Each Mode cloud app. A series of beeps indicates that the wireless Group Each Group sensor is in discover mode. Push Can send the user information through the kumo cloud Each Notifications app. Includes error messages, filter replacement Group Each Group information, and batterychange notifications. kumo Station: 1. 4-Channel equipment controller with Outside Air Temperature monitoring 2. Manages and stages heat pump and supplemental heat. Able to be integrated through kumo cloud. kumo Station Item Description Operation Display Operation Transmits data from controller to indoor unit. Each Each Group Mode Group Discover Allows the Wireless sensor to be connected to the kumo Each Mode cloud app. A series of beeps indicates that the wireless Group Each Group sensor is in discover mode. Push Can send the user information through the kumo cloud Each Notifications app. Includes error messages, filter replacement Group Each Group information, and batterychange notifications. Honeywell Outdoor Air Temperature Sensor: 1. Sensor able to detect ambient temperature and humidity. 2. Integrates directly with kumo station to control system changeover. Honeywell Outdoor Air Temperature Sensor Item Description Operation Display Operation Mode Transmits data from sensor to kumo Station. Each Group Each Group 5.08 INPUT/OUTPUT (1/0) BOARDS Digital Input Digital Output (DIDO) Board 1. The DIDO board shall be capable of providing On/Off control for non - Mitsubishi Electric equipment. Each DIDO board shall have two digital inputs and two digital outputs. Each digital output shall be capable of supporting an independent schedules. Status indication of the On/Off state of the non -Mitsubishi Electric equipment shall be either via the On/Off status of the digital output or by receipt of a digital input to the DIDO board. 2. The DIDO board shall be capable of receiving a digital input for interlock settings with the CITY MULTI indoor units or digital outputs on the DIDO board. Based on the digital input status the DIDO board shall be capable of setting the following parameter on the indoor unit On/Off, Mode, and Set Temperature to predefined settings. The DIDO board shall also be capable of interlocking the On/Off state of a digital output on the DIDO board based onan onboard channel digital input status or a free contact input status from system indoor units. Analog Input (Al) Board 1. The Al board shall be capable of monitoring temperature or humidity.. Each Al board shall have two analog inputs. Each input shall be capable of receiving a 4/20mA, 0/10 VDC, or 1/5 VDC signal for monitoring temperature or humidity. The Al board shall be capable of monitoring the temperature or humidity input and shall be capable of displaying graphical trending of the temperature or humidity values. Notification of user adjustable high and low level alarms shall be capable of being emailed to distribution list or outputted via a digital output. 2. The Al board shall be capable of setting the following parameters on the indoor unit On/Off, Mode, and Set Temperature to predefined settings based on the input value of the temperature or humidity. The Al board shall also be capable of interlocking the On/Off state of a digital output on the input value of the temperature or humidity. 5.09 CENTRALIZED CONTROLLER (WEB -ENABLED) Master Centralized Controller: The Master Centralized Controller shall be capable of controlling a maximum of two hundred (200) indoor units across multiple CITY MULTI outdoor units with the use of three expansion controllers. The Master Centralized Controller shall be approximately 11-5/32" x 7-55/64" x 2- 17/32" in size and shall be powered with an integrated 100-240 VAC power supply. The Master Centralized Controller shall support system configuration, daily/weekly scheduling, monitoring of operation status, night setback settings, free contact interlock configuration and malfunction monitoring. When being used alone without the expansion controllers, the Master Centralized Controller shall have five basic operation controls which can be applied to an individual indoor unit, a collection of indoor units (up to 50 indoor units), or all indoor units (collective batch operation). This basic set of operation controls for the Master Centralized Controller shall include on/off, operation mode selection (cool, heat, auto (R2/WR2-Series only), dry, setback (R2/WR2- Series only) and fan), temperature setting, fan speed setting, and airflow direction setting. Since the master provides centralized control it shall be able to enable or disable operation of local remote controllers. In terms of scheduling, the Master Centralized Controller shall allow the user to define both daily and weekly schedules (up to 24 scheduled events per day) with operations consisting of ON/OFF, mode selection, temperature setting, air flow (vane) direction, fan speed, and permit/prohibit of remote controllers. Master Centralized Controller Item Description Operation Display Each Each ON/OFF Run and stop operation. Block, Group or Group or Collective Collective Switches between Cool/Dry/Auto/Fan/Heat. (Group of Lossnay unit: automatic ventilation/vent- Each Operation heat/interchange/normal ventilation) Block, Each Mode Operation modes vary depending on the air Group or Group conditioner unit. Collective Auto mode is available for the R2/WR2-Series only. Each Temperature Sets the temperature from 57°F — 87°F depending on Block, Each Setting operation mode and indoor unit. Group or Group Collective Fan Speed Available fan speed settings depending on indoor Each Each Setting unit. Block, Group Group or Collective *1 Each Air Flow Air flow direction settings vary depending on the Block, Direction indoor unit model. Group Each Setting *1. Louver cannot be set. or Group Collective Annual/weekly/today schedule can be set for each group of air conditioning units. Optimized start setting is also available. *2. The system follows either the current day, annual schedule, or weekly, which are in *2 Each the descending order of overriding priority. Block, Schedule Twenty-four events can scheduled per day, Each Operation including ON/OFF, Mode, Temperature Setting, Group Group Air Direction, Fan Speed and Operation or Prohibition. Collective Collective Five types of weekly schedule (seasonal) can be set. Settable items depend on the functions that a given air conditioning unit supports. Unit starts 5 - 60 minutes before the scheduled Each Each Optimized time based on the operation data history in order Block, Block, Start to reach the scheduled temperature at the Group or Group or scheduled time. Collective Collective Night The function helps keep the indoor temperature Setback in the temperature range while the units are Each Each Setting stopped and during the time this function is Group Group effective. Permit / Individually prohibit operation of each local Each Prohibit remote control function (Start/Stop, Change Block, 3 Each Local operation mode, Set temperature, Reset filter). *3. Group Group Centrally Controlled is displayed on the or Operation remote controller for prohibited functions. Collective Room Displays the room temperature of the group. Each Temp Space temperature displayed on the indoor unit N/A Group icon on the touch screen interface. When an error is currently occurring on an air *4 Each conditioner unit, the afflicted unit and the error Unit Error code are displayed N/A *4. When an error occurs, the LED flashes. or Theoperation monitor screen shows the Collective Collective abnormal unit by flashing it. The error monitor screen shows the abnormal unit address, error code and source of detection. The error log monitor screen shows the time and date, the abnormal unit address, error code and source of detection Outdoor Compressor capacity percentage and system Each Each Unit Status pressure (high and low) pressure (excludes S- ODU ODU Series Connected Each Each Unit MNET addresses of all connected systems IDU, ODU and IDU, ODU and Information BC BC This interlocked system settings can be performed by the master system controller. When setting the interlocked system, use the ventilation switch the free plan LOSSNAY Ventilation settings between "Hi", "Low" and "Stop". Each Each Equipment When setting a group of only free plan Group Group LOSSNAY units, you can switch between "Normal ventilation", "Interchange ventilation" and "Automatic ventilation". Other than English, the following language can Multiple be chosen. Spanish, French, Japanese, Dutch, N/A Collective Language Italian, Russian, Chinese, and Portuguese are available. By using accessory cables you can set and monitor the following. Input External Bylevel: "Batch start/stop", "Batch emergency Input /5 stop" "batch "Enable/disable 5 Output By pulse: start/stop", Collective Collective remote controller" Output: "start/stop", "error/Normal" *5. Requires the external 1/0 cables (PAC- YG10HA-E) sold separately. 2. All Master Centralized Controllers shall be equipped with two RJ-45 Ethernet ports to support interconnection with a network PC via a closed/direct Local Area Network (LAN) or to a network switch for IP communication to up to three expansion controllers for display of up to two hundred (200) indoor units on the main master centralized controller interface. 3_ The Master Centralized Controller shall be capable of performing initial settings via the high -resolution, backlit, color touch panel on the controller or via a PC browser using the initial settings. 4. Standard software functions shall be available so that the building manager can securely log into each master centralized controller via the PC's web browser to support operation monitoring, scheduling, error email, interlocking and online maintenance diagnostics. Additional optional software functions of personal browser for PCs and MACs and Energy shall be available but are not included. The Energy Apportionment function shall require a LIC-Charge software license Expansion Controller: 1. The Expansion Controller shall serve as a standalone centralized controller or as an expansion module to the Master Centralized Controller for the purpose of adding up to 50 indoor units to either the main touch screen interface of the master centralized controller. Up to three (3) expansion controllers can be connected to the master via a local IP network (and their IP addresses assigned on the master) to the master to allow for up to two hundred (200) indoor units to be monitored and controlled from the master interface. 2. The expansion controllers have all of the same capabilities to monitor and control their associated indoor units as the features specified above. Even when connected to the master and configured to display their units on the main controller, the individual indoor units connected to the expansion can still be monitored and controlled from the interface of the expansion. The last command entered will take precedence, whether at the wall controller, the expansion or the master Centralized Controller. Non Touch Screen, Networked Centralized Controller: 1. The Non Touch Screen, Networked Centralized Controller shall be capable of controlling a maximum of 50 indoor units across multiple CITY MULTI outdoor units. The controller shall be approximately 8-1/2"x10" in size and shall be powered by its internal power supply. The controller shall support system configuration, daily/weekly scheduling, monitoring of operation status, free contact interlock configuration and malfunction monitoring. The controller shall have five basic operation controls which can be applied to an individual indoor unit, a group of indoor units (up to 50 indoor units), or all indoor units (collective batch operation). This basic set of operation controls for the controller shall include on/off, operation mode selection (cool, heat, auto (R2/WR2-Series only), dry, temperature setting, fan speed setting, and airflow direction setting. Since the controller provides centralized control it shall be able to enable or disable operation of local remote controllers. In terms of scheduling, the controller shall allow the user to define both daily and weekly schedules with operations consisting of ON/OFF, mode selection, temperature setting, air flow (vane) direction, fan speed, and permit/prohibit of remote controllers. Non Touch Screen, Networked Centralized Controller Item Description Operation Display Each Each ON/OFF Run and stop operation. Block, Group or Group or Collective Collective Indoor unit modes: COO L/DRY/FAN/AUTO/H EAT. Lossnay unit modes: HEAT RECOVERY/BYPASS/AUTO Each Operation Air to water (PWFY) modes: Block, Each Mode HEATING/HEATING ECO/HOT WATER/ANTI- Group or Group FREEZE/COOLING *Operation modes vary depending on the unit Collective model connected. ** Auto mode is available for the R2/WR2-Series only. Sets the temperature from 40°F — 95°F depending on operation mode and indoor unit model. Each Temperature Block, Each Setting Separate COOL and HEAT mode set points Group or Group available depending on remote controller and Collective connected mechanical equipment. Set The range of room temperature setting can be Each Each Temperature limited by the initial setting depending on the Group Group Range Limit indoor unit connected. Each Fan Speed Available fan speed settings depend on indoor Block, Each Setting unit model. Group or Group Collective *1 Each Air Flow *Air flow direction settings vary depending on the Block, Direction indoor unit model. Group Each Setting *1. Louver cannot be set. or Group Collective Annual/weekly/today schedule can be set for each group of air conditioning units. Optimized start setting is also available. *2. The system follows either the current day, annual schedule, or weekly, which are in the *2 Each descending order of overriding priority. Block, Schedule Twenty-four events can scheduled per day, Group Each Operation Group Air Direction, Fan Speed and Operation Collective Prohibition. Five types of weekly schedule (seasonal) can be set. Settable items depend on the functions that a given air c nditioning unit supports. Disables scheduled functions for indoor unit Each Hold groups and their associated remote controller Block, Each timers. Group or Group *not available for general equipment Collective Unit starts 5 - 60 minutes before the scheduled Each Each Optimized time based on the operation data history in order Block, Block, Start to reach the scheduled temperature at the Group or Group or scheduled time. Collective Collective Individually prohibit operation of each local remote Each Permit / control function (Start/Stop, Change operation Block, Prohibit Local mode, Set temperature, Fan Speed, Air Direction Group 3 Each Operation and Reset filter). or Group 3. Centrally Controlled is displayed on the remote controller for prohibited functions. Collective Room Temp Displays the room temperature of the group. N/A Each Group Room Displays the percent relative humidity in the space N/A Each Humidity as sensed by the Smart ME Remote Controller Group Occupancy Displays the occupancy icon on the group icon in Each Sensor the condition list page when the room is occupied N/A Group blue or vacant (gray). *The Smart ME Remote Controller Occupancy sensor is required. Displays the brightness icon on the group icon in Brightness the condition list when the space is determined to Each Sensor be bright (yellow) or dark (gray). *The N/A Group Smart ME Remote Controller Brightness sensor is required. When an error is currently occurring on an air conditioner unit, the afflicted unit and the error code are displayed *4. When an error occurs, the LED flashes. The operation monitor screen shows the *4 Each Error abnormal unit by flashing it. The error N/A Unit monitor screen shows the abnormal unit or address, error code and source of Collective detection. The error log monitor screen shows the time and date, the abnormal unit address, error code and source of detection This interlocked system settings can be performed by the master system controller. When setting the interlocked system, use the Ventilation ventilation switch the free plan LOSSNAY settings Each Each Equipment between "Hi", "Low" and "Stop". Group Group When setting a group of only free plan LOSSNAY units, you can switch between "Normal ventilation", "Interchange ventilation" and "Automatic ventilation". Other than English, the following language can be Multiple chosen. Spanish, French, Japanese, German, N/A N/A Language Italian, Russian, Chinese, and Portuguese are available. By using accessory cables you can set and monitor the following. Input: By level: "Batch start/stop", "Batch External Input emergency stop"; By pulse: "batch start/stop", *5 *5 / Output "Enable/disable remote controller" Collective Collective Output: "start/stop", "error/Normal' *5. Requires the external 1/0 cables (PAC- YG10HA-E) sold separately. The "M-NET" LED lights, when AC power supply Each M-Net is turned ON. N/A Group The LED blinks while M-NET is communicating. (LED) Collective All the units can be operated / stopped with a DIP Collective N/A ON/OFF O switch. Displays the Temperature and Humidity inputs of Measurement the Al Board. Supports graph display and data N/A Each Unit export. Displays the status of the of the inputs and AHC Status outputs of each Advanced HVAC Controller (DC- N/A Each Unit A210) Free Contact Displays the input/output status of the Free N/A Each Unit Status Contacts on the indoor units Each Free Contact Operation of indoor groups, general equipment or Group, Interlock free contact outputs based on group(s) conditions N/A Output or Control or free contact(s) input states. Collective Data Back-up Initial setting data can be exported to a PC. Collective N/A (PC) 2. All Non Touch Screen, Networked Centralized Controller shall be equipped with two RJ-45 Ethernet port to support interconnection with a network PC and BACnet/IP communication via a closed/direct Local Area Network (LAN). The controller shall be capable of performing initial settings online via a PC using the controller's initial setting browser or online/offline with the Initial Setting Tool. 3_ Standard software functions shall be available so that the building manager can securely log into each controller via the PC's web browser to support operation monitoring, scheduling, error email, interlocking and online maintenance diagnostics. Standard software functions shall not expire. Additional optional software functions of personal browser for PCs and MACs and Energy Allocation shall be available. The Energy Allocation function shall require Master Centralized Controller Energy Allocation Integrated System in conjunction with Non Touch Screen, Networked Centralized Controller. 5.10 CENTRAL CONTROLLER (NON -WEB) Non -Networked Touch Controller: 1. The Non -Networked Touch Controller features a 5 inch wide color LCD touch panel. The settings for air conditioning units can be changed by touching the corresponding icons on the display. There are 3 buttons on the panel of the controller; ON/OFF, SET BACK and HOLD enabling simple and quick batch operation. One controller can control up to 24 groups/units of air conditioners. Operation status is displayed on easy -to - read LCD. The group currently operating can be seen at a glance with the operation status display. The controller can perform functions such as ON/OFF, Operation mode changeover, temperature setting and prohibit operation by local remote controller. Up to 12 patterns of weekly schedule can be set. "ON/OFF", "Operation mode", "Set Temperature", "Fan speed", "Air flow direction" and "Permit / Prohibit local operation" can be scheduled with up to 16 settings in one pattern. Up to 5 patterns of today's schedule can be set. Independent LOSSNAY operation is possible. Automatic ventilation, Normal ventilation and Ventilation with heat exchanger can be switched from the system controller. The controller is equipped with a system changeover function which an operation mode can be switched to an optimal mode depending on indoor temperature setting and target temperature of each group or a representative indoor unit. Non -Networked Touch Controller: Item Description Operation Display ON and OFF operation for the air conditioner units. ON/OFF Even when only a single indoor unit connected to the group Group Group or remote controller will operate and collective ON/OFF lamp will Collective Collective light up. Operation Switches between Cool / Dry / Auto / Fan / Heat / Setback. Mode Group or Group or Operation modes vary depending on the air conditioner unit. Collective Collective Switching Auto mode is for CITY MULTI R2 and WR2 series only. Set temperature from 57' F - 87' F depending on operation Temperature mode and indoor unit. Group or Group or Setting Separate COOL and HEAT mode set points available Collective Collective depending on remote controller and connected mechanical equipment. Fan Speed Group or Group or Setting Available fan speed settings depending on indoor unit. Collective Collective Air flow direction angles 4-angle or 5-angle, Swing, Auto Air Flow Direction Louver ON/OFF Group or Group or Setting Collective Collective * Air flow direction settings vary depending on the indoor unit model. Hold Prohibits the scheduled operation from being executed. a. ON/OFF timer b. Auto -OFF timer Group or Group or Hold c. Weekly timer d. Automatic return to the preset temperature Collective Collective * While an operation is prohibited by Hold function, the operation icon lights up. When set as the master, the ON/OFF, operation mode, Permit / setting temperature and filter sign reset operations using the Group or Group or Prohibit local remote controllers can be prohibited. Collective Collective Only ON/OFF and filter reset can be prohibited for the LOSSNAY group. Operation (ON/OFF, operation mode, setting temperature, fan speed, Air Group or Group or Lock flow direction) Collective Collective Room Temp N/A Each Display The room temperature can be displayed. Group When an error is currently occurring on an air conditioner unit, the afflicted unit and the error code are displayed. * When an error occurs, the "ON/OFF" LED flashes. The Each Unit, Error operation monitor screen show abnormal icon over the unit. N/A Group, or The error monitor screen shows the abnormal unit address, Collective error code and source of detection. The error log monitor screen shows the time and date, the abnormal unit address, error code and source of detection. Weekly schedule setting up to 12 patterns is available. In one pattern, up to 16 setting of "ON/OFF", "Operation Schedule mode", "Set Temperature", "Fan speed", "Air flow direction" Each Each Operation and "Permit / Prohibit local operation" can be scheduled. Group Group Today's schedule setting up to 5 pattern in available. *Time setting unit: 5 minute /unit Ventilation Group operation of only the free plan LOSSNAY is possible. Operation Group or Group or The operation mode of these groups is automatic ventilation, Collective Collective (Independent) ventilation with heat exchanger and normal ventilation. The LOSSNAY will run in interlock with the operation of indoor Ventilation unit. Group or Group or Operation (Interlocked) The mode cannot be changed. The LED will turn ON during Collective Collective operation after interlocking. Set The range of room temperature setting can be limited by the Group or Group or Temperature initial setting. The lowest limit temperature can be made Range Limit higher than the usual 67°F in cool/dry mode, while the upper g ( ) � rY pp Collective Collective limit temperature lower than the usual (83°F) in heat mode. By using accessory cables you can set and monitor the following. Input External Input By level: "Batch start/stop", "Batch emergency stop" *5 *5 / Output By pulse: "batch start/stop", "Enable/disable remote Collective Collective controller" Output: "start/stop", "error/Normal" *5: Requires the external 1/0 cables (PAC-YG10HA-E) sold separately. 5.11 5.12 CMCN REMOTE CONTROLLERS: SYSTEM INTEGRATION 1. The CMCN shall be capable of supporting integration with Building Management Systems (BMS). BACnet° Integration: 1. The Mitsubishi Electric Cooling & Heating BACnet° hardware, which is built into all networked central controllers, shall be compliant with BACnet° Protocol (ANSI/ASHRAE 135-2010) and be Certified by the (BTL) BACnet' Testing Laboratories. The BACnet' interface shall support BACnet Broadcast Management (BBMD). The BACnet' interface shall support a maximum of 50 indoor units. Operation and monitoring points include, but are not limited to, on/off, operation mode, fan speed, prohibit remote controller, filter sign reset, alarm state, error code, and error address. 2. Licenses: o LIC-BACnet Master: Master Controller license for Master Centralized Controller and Non Touch Screen, Networked Centralized Controller o LIC-BACnet Expansion: Expansion Controller license for Expansion Controller and Non Touch Screen, Networked Centralized Controller 3. LIC-BACnet Specifications: o Control up to 50 groups 0 1 to 16 indoor units can be collectively controlled in a group o Supports dual set point functionality (connected model dependant) o BTL Compliant o BACnet communication specifications are based on ANSI/ASHRAE Standards 135-2010 4. PC Requirements: o CPU: 1 GHz or higher o Memory: 1 GB or more o HDD Space: 100 MB or more o Screen Resolution: 1024 x 768 or higher o OS: Microsoft Windows 7 32-bit/64-bit, Microsoft 8.1 32-bit/64-bit. Not compatible with Windows Vista o Execution Environment: Microsoft .NET Framework 4.5 or later o Others: Pointing device such as a mouse, internet connection (required when installing a .NET Framework) 5. LIC-BACnet — System Example Ell Builclhq m8a&pfhdrtl sysU n HUB Hug I 6ACn t" E k I .. LAN2 I r M.NET — M-HET �• L r ouada u9il &kCnel � selGrq Ted i rndo unh LOWNAY ME r9nK49 ooMrollar WNET outdr_r uiil ME rmiohbtbnlydleq 6. BACnet Point List Object List On Off Setup On Off State, Number of ON/OFF, Cumulative operation time Alarm Signal (4-digit error code) Error Code Operational Mode Setup Operational Mode State Fan Speed Setup Fan Speed State Room Temp [Water Temp] Set Temp [Set Water Temp] Set Temp Cool Set Temp Heat Set Temp Auto Filter Sign [Circulating Water Exchange Sign] Filter Sign Reset [Circulating Water Exchange Sign Reset] Prohibition On Off Prohibition Mode Prohibition Filter Sign Reset [Prohibition Circulating Water Exchange Sign Reset] Prohibition Set Temperature M-NET Communication State System Forced Off Air Direction Setup Air Direction State Set High Limit Setback Temp Set Low Limit Setback Temp Ventilation Mode Setup Ventilation Mode State Air To Water Mode Setup System Alarm Signal (4-digit error code) PI Controller Alarm Signal (4-digit error code) Group Apportioned Electric Energy Interlocked Units Apportioned Electric Energy PI controller Electric Energy 1-4 Pulse Input Electric Energy 1-4 Group Apportionment Parameter Interlocked Units Apportionment Parameter Night Purge State Thermo On Off State Trend Log Room Temp Trend Log Group Apportioned Electric Energy Trend Log Interlocked Units Apportioned Electric Energy Trend Log PI controller Electric Energy 1-4 Trend Log Pulse Input Electric Energy 1-4 Trend Log Group Apportionment Parameter Trend Log Interlocked Units Apportionment Parameter Building Connect+ 1. The Building Connect+ cloud based control application shall be connected to one networked centralized controller and be able to control up to 50 CITY MULTI indoor units. Additionally, the unit will include BACnet MSTP and BACnet IP control integration for up to 5 units of 3rd party equipment via installer configurable networks. Each BACnet connected device can integrate up to 10 installer selected points. The system also provides for hardwired digital 1/0 points including an Alarm, Status and Start/Stop for 8 additional devices such as fans or motors. A panel router is included to allow for Internet connectivity as well as 4G cellular access through the building WAN or secure VPN. The Building Connect+ cloud based user interface will be two factor authentication enabled using Google authentication. The system will provide for mobile device remote access through the cloud connection. Remote users will be able to access equipment on any and all Building Connect+ instances that are assigned to that user, regardless of geophysical location. An unlimited number of users can connect to the Building Connect+ cloud without the need for additional user licenses needed to connect remote users. 2. The platform will provide for a configuration wizard that will enable the installer to auto -discover all the connected VRF and BACnet devices. A user management function will allow the installer to set up 4 user groups consisting of Admin, Manager, Operator and user. The Admin user type will be able to configure the permissions of each user type as well as assign the equipment and points for that user type. The Admin user type will be able to add new users and manage existing users. The Admin user will configure the system access levels to be View Only, View and Control, and Hidden. 3. The CITY MULTI control points include On/off, mode, set point, air direction and fan speed. The CITY MULTI monitor only points include the full suite of available Maintenance Tool Data as well as zone temperature and error codes. User configurable functions for Alarm Management, Equipment Scheduling, Trend Building and Data management are provided with the cloud server. A Maintenance Tool data viewr is provided to allow the user to remotely access the data and use as a diagnostic tool in real time. Pre-programmed applications such as Auto Changeover are provided to manage automatice heat pump switching without additional equipment or programming. LonWorks° Interface: 1. The Mitsubishi Electric Cooling & Heating LonWorks° interface shall support up to fifty indoor units with a variety of network variables on a per indoor unit basis. Input variables include, but are not limited to, on/off, operation mode, fan speed, prohibit remote controller, and filter sign reset. Output variables include, but are not limited to, model size, alarm state, error code, and error address. Part 6 - Diamond Controls 6.01 GENERAL General Mechanical Provisions 1. This contractor shall conform to the General and Supplementary Conditions Provisions under Division 1 of the Specifications. 2. This contractor shall conform to the Specifications Section: General Mechanical Provisions. Related Work Specified Elsewhere 1. Products Supplied But Not Installed Under This Section: • Control valves • Flow switches • Wells, sockets and other inline hardware for water sensors (temperature, pressure, flow) • Automatic control dampers, where not supplied with equipment. Airflow measuring stations • Terminal unit controllers and actuators, when installed by terminal unit manufacturer • Variable Frequency Drives (This does not include VFDs integral to machinery such as chillers or boilers) 2. Products Installed But Not Supplied Under This Section: • None 3_ Products Not Furnished or Installed But Integrated with the Work of This Section: • Chiller Control Systems • Boiler Control Systems • Pump Control Packages • In -line Meters (gas, water, power) • Refrigerant Monitors • Chemical Water Treatment • Smoke Detectors (through alarm relay contacts) 4. Work Required Under Division 16 Related to This Section: • Power wiring to line side of motor starters, disconnects or variable frequency drives. • Provision and wiring of smoke detectors and other devices relating to fire alarm system. • Campus LAN (Ethernet) connection adjacent to JACE network management controller 6.02 SUMMARY The Facility Management and Control System (FMCS) shall be comprised of System Network Controller or Controllers (SNC) within each facility. The SNC shall connect to the owner's local or wide area network, depending on configuration. Access to the system, either locally in each building, or remotely from a central site or sites, shall be accomplished through standard Web browsers, via the Internet and/or local area network. Each SNC shall communicate to Mitsubishi Electric Central Controllers, LonMark/LonTalk (IDC) and/or BACnet (IBC) controllers, and other open and legacy protocol systems/devices provided under Division 23. The Facility Management and Control System (FMCS) as provided in this Division shall be based on the Niagara Framework (or "Niagara"), a Java - based framework developed by Tridium. Niagara provides an open automation infrastructure that integrates diverse systems and devices (regardless of manufacturer, communication standard or software) into a unified platform that can be easily managed in real time over the Internet using a standard Web browser. Systems not developed on the Niagara Framework platform are unacceptable. Scope: Furnish all labor, materials and equipment necessary for a complete and operating Building Management System (BMS), utilizing Direct Digital Controls as shown on the drawings and as described herein. Drawings are diagrammatic only. All controllers furnished in this section shall communicate with the Mitsubishi Electric Diamond Controller. 1. System architecture shall fully support a multi -vendor environment and be able to integrate third party systems via existing vendor protocols including, as a minimum, LonTalk, BACnet, and Modbus. 2. System architecture shall provide secure Web access using MS Internet Explorer from any computer on the owner's LAN. 3. Any control vendor that must provide additional BMS server software shall be unacceptable. Only systems that utilize the Niagara AXTm Framework shall satisfy the requirements of this section. 4. The BMS server shall host all graphic files for the control system. Approved Manufacturers: Mitsubishi Electric Heating and Cooling Approved Installation Contractors: 6.03 DC-8000 Controller General information 1. Compact embedded IoT controller and server platform for connecting multiple and diverse devices and sub -systems. With internet connectivity and Web -serving capability, the DC-8000 controller provides integrated control, supervision, data logging, alarming, scheduling, and network management. It streams data and rich graphical displays to a standard Web browser via an Ethernet or wireless LAN, or remotely over the internet. Application 1. Ideal for smaller facilities, remote sites, and for distributing control and monitoring throughout large facilities. Optional 1/0 modules can be plugged in for applications where local control is required. Supports a wide range of field busses for connection to remote 1/0 and stand-alone controllers. In small facility applications and all you need for a complete system. Manage global control functions, support data passing over multiple networks, connect to enterprise level software applications, and host multiple, simultaneous client workstations connected over the local network, the Internet, or dial -up modem. In larger facilities, multi -building applications and large-scale control systems integrations, Niagara 4 Supervisors can be used with JACE 8000 controllers to aggregate information, including real-time data, history, and alarms, to create a single, unified application. Specifications 1. Base Unit: • Two Isolated RS 485 Ports • Two 10/100MB Ethernet Ports • USB Backup & Restore • Wireless Connectivity • Compatible with DC-600E modules • Runs Niagara 4.1 and later 2. Batteryless operation • Expandable with up to four option modules • Real time Clock 3_ Platform • Texas Instruments® AM3352 1000Mhz ARM® CortexTM-A8 • 1 GB DDR3 SDRAM • USB backup and restore 4. Communications • 2 Ethernet Ports: 10/100MB • 2 Isolated RS-485 Port • Supports IEEE 802.11a/b/g/n networks • Configurable radio (Off, WAP, or Client) • Mobile phone and Tablet Accessible • Optional LON FTT10 & RS232 expansion • Optional Antenna with SMA Connector • Support WPA-PSK, WPA2-PSK security protocols • Secure boot 5. Memory upgrade Option 6. Operating System • Niagara 4.1 and later 7. Chassis • Construction: Plastic, din rail or screw mount chassis, plastic cover ■ Compatible with DIN 43880 enclosures • Cooling: Internal air convection 8_ Temperature Ratings • Operational Temperature: -4 to 140°F (-20 to 60°C) • Storage Temperature Range: -40 to 185°F (40 to 85°C) 9_ Humidity Rating: 5% to 95% RH. Non -condensing 10. Rating Approvals: • ROHS • UL 916 • CE EN 61326-1 • FCC Part 15 Subpart B, Class B • FCC Part 15 Subpart C • C-UL Listed to Canadian Standards Association (CSA), C22.2 No. 205- M1983 "Signal Equipment" • 1999/5/EC RUTE Directive • CCC • SRRC • RSS 11. Dimensions: 7.05 W x 4.33 H x 2.41 D in. • Dimensions of Expansion/10 Modules: 2.13 W x 4.33 H x 2.41 D in. 6.04 DC -PRO SOFTWARE Diamond Controller Server Features 1. The Diamond Controller Server is a flexible network server for all connected DC-8000 controllers. The Diamond Controller Server is designed to harness the power of the Internet and provide efficient integration of standard open protocols, such as BACnetTM, oBIX, Modbus, and LONWORKS®. The Diamond Controller Server creates a powerful network environment with comprehensive database management, alarm management and messaging services. The Diamond Controller Server provides an engineering environment and graphical user interface to support the design, configuration, installation and maintenance of interoperable networks. oBIX is included in the Diamond Controllers Server package as a means of integrating Niagara -based Release 2 (R2) controllers. With release 2.3.522 or greater, the oBIX driver can be added to expose all data points, schedules, trends and alarms to a Niagara AX or Niagara 4 system. This oBIX driver is both a client and server. Features 1. Powerful HTML5 and Java enabled graphical user interface (UI) as well as a non -Java UI for browsers. JavaScript data interface library included (Bajascript). 2. Supports an unlimited number of users over the Internet / intranet with a standard Web browser depending on the host PC resources. 3. Enhanced certification management includes tools to manage 3rd party & self -signed certificates. 4. Optional enterprise level data archival using an SQL, Oracle or DB2 database and HTTP/ HTML/XML text formats. 5. Audit trail: • Database changes • Database storage and backup • Global time functions • Calendar • Central scheduling • Control • Energy management routines • User actions • Security related events 6. Sophisticated alarm processing and routing which includes email and paging. 7. Niagara 4's use of HTML5 provides a user interface that makes it easier for system integrators to create and maintain customized views for end users. 8. Provides access to alarms, logs, graphics, schedules and configuration data with a standard Web browser. 9. Follows industry best practices for cyber security, with support for features such as strong hashed passwords. TLSv1 for secure communications and certificate management tools for authentication. 10. Graphics library is updated with 3-D and photo realistic images for generic graphics & HVAC equipment. 11. Drag and drop customizable charting for fast information visualization. 12. Uses Role -Based Access Control (RBAC), making user permissions easy to configure and less error prone. 13. Backwards compatible with Niagara AX-requires Niagara AX v3.6u4, v3.7u1, v3.8R 14. Niagara AX to Niagara 4 station migration tool. 15.Compatibility Summary: • Fox network compatibility between Niagara AX and Niagara 4 • Station conversion tool to convert Niagara AX stations to Niagara 4 stations (.bog files) • Public APIs • Niagara Driver Framework still supported • Niagara 4 will run on any JACE with HotSpot VM (J3, J6, J6E, J7) and on any JACE 8000 controller Platform Requirements 1. Processor: Intel® Xeon® CPU E5-2640 x64 (or better), compatible with dual- and quad -core processors 2. Operating System: • Windows 10, 64-bit Windows 8.1 Enterprise, 2012 R2 Standard, RHEL-7 • Windows server 2012 Enterprise SP2 64 bit • Supports standard internet browser viewing 3. HTML based help system that includes comprehensive online system documentation. 4. GB Network Card 5. Supports multiple Niagara -based stations connected to a local Ethernet network, or the Internet. 6. Provides online/off line use of the Niagara Framework® Workbench AX graphical application configuration tool and a comprehensive Java Object Library. 7. Microsoft SQL2014 8. Optional direct Ethernet based driver support for most Open IP field bus protocols 0 See supported drivers document 6.05 SUBMITTALS: Submit documentation of contractor qualifications, including those indicated in paragraph 1.9 "Quality Assurance" if requested by the A-E. Eight copies of shop drawings of the entire control system shall be submitted and shall consist of a complete list of equipment and materials, including manufacturers' catalog data sheets and installation instructions. Samples of written Controller Checkout Sheets and Performance Verification Procedures for applications similar in scope shall be included for approval. Shop drawings shall also contain complete wiring and schematic diagrams, sequences of operation, control system bus layout and any other details required to demonstrate that the system has been coordinated and will properly function as a system. Terminal identification for all control wiring shall be shown on the shop drawings. Upon completion of the work, provide eight complete sets of `as -built' drawings and other project -specific documentation in 3-ring hard -backed binders and on compact disc. Any deviations from these specifications or the work indicated on the drawings shall be clearly identified in the Submittals. 6.06 AGENCY AND CODE APPROVALS All products of the BMS shall be provided with the following agency approvals. Verification that the approvals exist for all submitted products shall be provided on request, with the submittal package. Systems or products not currently offering the following approvals are not acceptable. 1. Federal Communications Commission (FCC), Rules and Regulations, Volume II -July 1986 Part 15 Class A Radio Frequency Devices 2. FCC, Part 15, Subpart J, Class A Computing Devices 3. UL 504 - Industrial Control Equipment 4. UL 506 - Specialty Transformers 5. UL 910 - Test Method for Fire and Smoke Characteristics of Electrical and Optical -Fiber Cables Used in Air -Handling Spaces 6. UL 916 - Energy Management Systems All 7. UL 1449 — Transient Voltage Suppression 8. Standard Test for Flame Propagation Height of Electrical and Optical - Fiber Cables Installed Vertically in Shafts 9. EIA/ANSI 232-E - Interface Between Data Technical Equipment and Data Circuit Terminal Equipment Employing Serial Binary Data Interchange 10. EIA 455 - Standard Test Procedures for Fiber Optic Fibers, Cables, Transducers, Connecting and Terminating Devices 11.IEEE C62.41- Surge Voltages in Low -Voltage AC Power Circuits 12.IEEE 142 - Recommended Practice for Grounding of Industrial and Commercial Power Systems 13. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment 14. NEMA ICS 1 - Industrial Controls and Systems 15. NEMA ST 1 -Specialty Transformers 16. NCSBC Compliance, Energy: Performance of control system shall meet or surpass the requirements of ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-1999. 6.07 SOFTWARE OWNERSHIP The Owner shall have full ownership and full access rights for all network management, operating system server, engineering and programming software required for the ongoing maintenance and operation of the BMS. 6.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING Maintain integrity of shipping cartons for each piece of equipment and control device through shipping, storage, and handling as required to prevent equipment damage. Store equipment and materials inside and protected from weather. 6.09 JOB CONDITIONS Cooperation with Other Trades: Coordinate the Work of this section with that of other sections to insure that the Work will be carried out in an orderly fashion. It shall be this Contractor's responsibility to check the Contract Documents for possible conflicts between his Work and that of other crafts in equipment location, pipe, duct and conduit runs, electrical outlets and fixtures, air diffusers, and structural and architectural features. 6.10 QUALITY ASSURANCE The manufacturer of the BMS digital controllers shall, if requested, provide documentation supporting compliance with ISO-9001 (Model for Quality Assurance in Design/Development, Production, Installation and Servicing). Equipment and Materials: Equipment and materials shall be cataloged products of manufacturers regularly engaged in the production and installation of HVAC control systems. Products shall be manufacturer's latest standard design and have been tested and proven in actual use. 6.11 SPECIFICATION NOMENCLATURE 1. Acronyms used in this specification are as follows: Actuator Control device that opens or closes valve or damper in response to control signal. Al Analog Input AO Analog Output Analog Continuously variable state over stated range of values BMS Building Management System DDC Direct Digital Control Discrete Binary or digital state DI Discrete Input DO Discrete Output FC Fail Closed position of control device or actuator. Device moves to closed position on loss of control signal or energy FO Fail open (position of control device or actuator). Device moves to open position on loss of control signal or energy GUI Graphical User Interface HVAC Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning IDC Interoperable Digital Controller ILC Interoperable Lon Controller LAN Local Area Network Modulating Movement of a control device through an entire range of values, proportional to an infinitely variable input value. Motorized Control device with actuator NAC Network Area Controller NC Normally closed position of switch after control signal is removed or normally closed position of manually operated valves or dampers. NO Normally open position of switch after control signal is removed; or the open position of a controlled valve or damper after the control signal is removed; or the usual position of a manually operated valve. OSS Operating System Server, host for system graphics, alarms, trends, etc. Operator Same as actuator PC Personal Computer Peer -to -Peer Mode of communication between controllers in which each device connected to network has equal status and each shares its database values with all other devices connected P Proportional control; control mode with continuous linear relationship between observed input signal and final controlled output element. PI Proportional -Integral control, control mode with continuous proportional output plus additional change in output based on both amount and duration of change in controller variable (reset control). PICS BACnet Product Interoperability Compliance Statement PID Proportional -Integral -Derivative control, control mode with continuous correction of final controller output element versus input signal based on proportional error, its time history (reset) and rate at which it's changing (derivative). Point Analog or discrete instrument with addressable database value SNC System Network Controller WAN Wide Area Network 6.12 MATERIALS General The Building Management System (BMS) shall be comprised of a network of interoperable, stand-alone digital controllers, a network area controller, graphics and programming, and other control devices for a complete system as specified herein. 2. The installed system shall provide secure password access to all features, functions and data contained in the overall BMS. Open, Interoperable, Integrated Architecture 3. The intent of this specification is to provide a peer -to -peer networked, stand-alone, distributed control system utilizing various communication protocols in one open, interoperable system. 4. The supplied computer software shall employ object -oriented technology (OOT) for representation of all data and control devices within the system. 5. The supplied system must incorporate the ability to access all data using Java enabled browsers without requiring proprietary operator interface and configuration programs. An Open Database Connectivity (ODBC) or Structured Query Language (SQL) compliant server database is required for all system database parameter storage. This data shall reside on the existing Operating System Server currently located in the Facilities Office on the LAN. Systems requiring proprietary database and user interface programs shall not be acceptable. 6. A hierarchical topology is required to assure reasonable system response times and to manage the flow and sharing of data without unduly burdening the customer's internal Intranet network. Systems employing a "flat" single tiered architecture shall not be acceptable. 7. Maximum acceptable response time from any alarm occurrence (at the point of origin) to the point of annunciation shall not exceed 5 seconds for network connected user interfaces. 8. Maximum acceptable response time from any alarm occurrence (at the point of origin) to the point of annunciation shall not exceed 60 seconds for remote or dial -up connected user interfaces. BAS Server Hardware 1. Minimum Computer Configuration (Hardware Independent) • Central Server. Owner shall provide a dedicated BAS server with configuration that includes the following components as a minimum: • Intel Xeon CPU E5-2640 x64 (or better) • Compatible with dual- and quad -core processors • 80 gigabyte hard disk, SVGA Card with 1024 x 768, 24-bit True Color, Back- up system 24X CD Rom Drive, 19" Flat Screen Color Monitor, Keyboard and mouse • Operating system for the server shall be Microsoft Windows 10, 64-bit Windows 8.1 Enterprise, 2012 R2 Standard, RHEL-7 • 10/100Base-T Ethernet Port 2. Standard Client: The thin -client Web Browser BAS GUI shall be Microsoft Internet Explorer (8.0 or later) running on Microsoft 98, 2000, NT, XP, or 7. No special software shall be required to be installed on the PCs used to access the BAS via a web browser. System Network Controller (SNC) 1. These controllers are designed to manage communications between the programmable equipment controllers (PEC), application specific controllers (ASC), and advanced unitary controllers (AUC), and central controllers (CC) which are connected to its communications trunks, manage communications between itself and other system network controllers (SNC) and with any operator workstations (OWS) that are part of the BAS, and perform control and operating strategies for the system based on information from any controller connected to the BAS. 2. The controllers must be fully programmable to meet the unique requirements of the facility it must control. 3. The controllers must be capable of peer -to -peer communications with other SNC's and with any OWS connected to the BAS, whether the OWS is directly connected, connected via modem or connected via the Internet. 4. The communication protocols utilized for peer -to -peer communications between SNC's will be Niagara AX, BACnet TCP/IP and SNMP. Use of a proprietary communication protocol for peer -to -peer communications between SNC's is not allowed. 5. The SNC shall be capable of executing application control programs to provide: • Calendar functions • Scheduling • Trending • Alarm monitoring and routing • Time synchronization • Integration of LonWorks, BACnet, and ModBus controller data • Network management functions for all SNC, PEC and ASC based devices 6. The SNC must provide the following hardware features as a minimum: • One Ethernet Port-10/100 Mbps • One RS-232/485 port • Battery Backup • Flash memory for long term data backup (If battery backup or flash memory is not supplied, the controller must contain a hard disk with at least 1 gigabyte storage capacity) • Direct network communication to VRF equipment using VRF manufacturer's native network communication structure. Translation to an additional protocol or language is not acceptable. 7. The SNC shall support standard Web browser access via the Intranet/Internet. It shall support a minimum of 16 simultaneous users. 8_ The SNC shall provide alarm recognition, storage, routing, management and analysis to supplement distributed capabilities of equipment or application specific controllers. 9_ The SNC shall be able to route any alarm condition to any defined user location whether connected to a local network or remote via dial -up, telephone connection, or wide -area network. 10.Alarm generation shall be selectable for annunciation type and acknowledgement requirements including but not limited to: • Alarm • Return to normal • To default 11.Alarms shall be annunciated in any of the following manners as defined by the user: • Screen message text, • Email of complete alarm message to multiple recipients • Pagers via paging services that initiate a page on receipt of email message. • Graphics with flashing alarm object(s). 12.The following shall be recorded by the SNC for each alarm (at a minimum): • Time and date • Equipment (air handler #, auditorium, etc.) • Acknowledge time, date, and user who issued acknowledgement. 13. Programming software and all controller "Setup Wizards" shall be embedded into the SNC. Central Controller (CC) 1. The control system shall consist of a low voltage communication network of unitary built-in controllers with on -board communications and a web - based operator interface. A web controller with a network interface card shall gather data from this system and generate web pages accessible through a conventional web browser on each PC connected to the network. Operators shall be able to perform all normal operator functions through the web browser interface. 2. System controls and control components shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's written installation instructions. 3. Furnish energy conservation features such as optimal start, night setback, request -based logic, and demand level adjustment of overall system capacity as specified in the sequence. 4. System shall provide direct and reverse -acting on and off algorithms based on an input condition or group conditions to cycle a binary output or multiple binary outputs. 5. Provide capability for future system expansion to include monitoring and use of occupant card access, lighting control and general equipment control. 6. System shall be capable of email generation for remote alarm annunciation. 7. Control system start-up shall be a required service to be completed by the manufacturer or a duly authorized, competent representative that has been factory trained in Mitsubishi Electric controls system configuration and operation. The representative shall provide proof of certification for Mitsubishi Electric CMCN Essentials Training and/or CMCN Hands -On Training indicating successful completion of no more than two (2) years prior to system installation. This certification shall be included as part of the equipment and/or controls submittals. This service shall be equipment and system count dependent and shall be a minimum of one (1) eight (8) hour period to be completed during normal working hours. 6.13 BAS SERVER & WEB BROWSER GUI System Overview 1. The BAS Contractor shall provide system software based on server/thin- client architecture, designed around the open standards of web technology. The BAS server shall communicate using Ethernet and TCP\IP. Server shall be accessed using a web browser over Owner intranet and remotely over the Internet. 2. The intent of the thin -client architecture is to provide the operator(s) complete access to the BAS system via a web browser. The thin -client web browser Graphical User Interface (GUI) shall be browser and operating system agnostic, meaning it will support Microsoft and Netscape Navigator browsers (6.0 or later versions), and Windows as well as non -Window operating systems. No special software, other than free public domain programs such as "JAVA VIRTUAL MACHINE" shall be required to be installed on PC's used to access the BAS via a web browser. 3_ The BAS server software must support at least the following server platforms (Windows, and/or Linux). The BAS server software shall be developed and tested by the manufacturer of the system stand-alone controllers and network controllers/routers. 4. The web browser GUI shall provide a completely interactive user interface and must offer and be configured with the following features as a minimum: • Trending • Scheduling • Electrical demand limiting • Duty Cycling • Downloading Memory to field devices • Real time 'live' Graphic Programs • Tree Navigation • Parameter change of properties • Setpoint Adjustments • Alarm / Event information • Configuration of operators • Execution of global commands • Add, delete, and modify graphics and displayed data 5_ Software Components: All software shall be the most current version. All software components of the BAS system software shall be provided and installed as part of this project .BAS software components shall include: • Server Software, Database and Web Browser Graphical User Interface • System Configuration Utilities for future modifications to the system, and controllers. • Graphical Programming Tools • Direct Digital Control software • Application Software • Any required third party software • If licensing credits are required provide a minimum of 10% additional to as built control system requires. 6. BAS Server Database: The BAS server software shall utilize a Java DataBase Connectivity (JDBC) compatible database such as: MS SQL 8.0, Oracle 8i or IBM DB2. BAS systems written to Non -Standard and/or Proprietary databases are NOT acceptable. 7. Database Open Connectivity: The BAS server database shall allow real time access of data via the following standard mechanisms: • Open protocol standard like SOAP • OLE/OPC (for Microsoft Client's/Server platform only) • Import/Export of the database from or to XML (eXtensible Mark-up Language) 8_ Communication Protocol(s): The native protocol for the BAS server software shall be TCPIP over Ethernet. 9_ Thin Client — Web Browser Based: The GUI shall be thin client or browser based and shall meet the following criteria: 10. Web Browser's for PC's: Only a 5.5 or later browser (Explorer/Navigator) will be required as the GUI, and a valid connection to the server network. No installation of any custom software shall be required on the operator's GUI workstation/client. Connection shall be over an intranet or the Internet. 11.Secure Socket Layers: Communication between the Web Browser GUI and BAS server shall offer encryption using 128-bit encryption technology within Secure Socket Layers (SSL). Communication protocol shall be Hyper -Text Transfer Protocol (HTTP) Web Browser Graphical User Interface 1. Web Browser Navigation: The Thin Client web browser GUI shall provide a comprehensive user interface. Using a collection of web pages, it shall be constructed to "feel" like a single application, and provide a complete and intuitive mouse/menu driven operator interface. It shall be possible to navigate through the system using a web browser to accomplish requirements of this specification. The Web Browser GUI shall (as a minimum) provide for navigation, and for display of animated graphics, schedules, alarms/events, live graphic programs, active graphic setpoint controls, configuration menus for operator access, reports, and reporting actions for events. 2. Login: On launching the web browser and selecting the appropriate domain name or IP address, the operator shall be presented with a login page that will require a login name and password. Navigation in the system shall be dependent on the operator's role privileges, and geographic area of responsibility. 3. Navigation: Navigation through the GUI shall be accomplished by clicking on or by selecting dynamic links to other system graphics. Both the navigation and action pane shall be displayed simultaneously, enabling the operator to select a specific system or equipment, and view the corresponding graphic. The navigation shall as a minimum provide the following views: Geographic, Principal Systems, Users, Trends and Alarms. • Geographic View shall display a logical geographic hierarchy of the system including: cities, sites, buildings, building systems, floors, equipment and objects. 4. Action Pane: The Action Pane shall provide several functional views for each HVAC or mechanical/electrical subsystem specified. A functional view shall be accessed by clicking on the corresponding button: • Graphics: Using graphical format suitable for display in a web browser, graphics shall include aerial building/campus views, color 3D building floor - plans, equipment drawings, active graphic setpoint controls, web content, and other valid HTML elements. The data on each graphic page shall automatically refresh. • Properties: Shall include graphic controls and text for the following: Locking or overriding objects, demand strategies, Setback, Alarm Settings, Set Temperature Range Limits, Schedule options, Equipment error codes, Wall Controller lock outs, and any other valid data required for setup. • Schedules: Shall be used to create, modify/edit and view schedules based on the systems geographical hierarchy or site specific schedules. • Alarms: Shall be used to view alarm information, acknowledge alarms, sort alarms by category, actions and verify reporting actions. • Trends: Shall be used to display associated trend and historical data, modify colors, date range, axis and scaling 5_ Color Graphics: The Web Browser GUI shall make extensive use of color in the graphic pane to communicate information related to setpoints and comfort. Animated .gifs or .jpg, vector scalable, active setpoint graphic controls shall be used to enhance usability. Graphics tools used to create Web Browser graphics shall be non-proprietary and conform to the following basic criteria: • Display Size: The GUI workstation software shall graphically display in 1900 by 1200 pixels 24 bit True Color. • General Graphic: General area maps shall show locations of controlled buildings in relation to local landmarks. • Color Floor Plans: Floor plan graphics shall show heating and cooling zones throughout the buildings in a range of colors, as selected by Owner. Provide a visual display of temperature relative to their respective setpoints. The colors shall be updated dynamically as a zone's actual comfort condition changes. • Mechanical Components: Mechanical system graphics shall show the type of mechanical system components serving any zone through the use of a pictorial representation of components. Selected 1/0 points being controlled or monitored for each piece of equipment shall be displayed with the appropriate engineering units. Animation shall be used for rotation or moving mechanical components to enhance usability. • Minimum System Color Graphics: Color graphics shall be selected and displayed via a web browser for the following: • Each piece of equipment monitored or controlled including each terminal unit • Each building • Each floor and zone controlled 6. Hierarchical Schedules: Utilizing the Navigation page displayed in the web browser GUI, an operator (with password access) shall be able to define a Normal, Holiday or Override schedule for an individual piece of equipment or room, or choose to apply a hierarchical schedule to the entire system, site or floor area. For example, Independence Day `Holiday' for every level in the system would be created by clicking at the top of the geographic hierarchy defined in the Navigation page. No further operator intervention would be required and every control module in the system with would be automatically downloaded with the `Independence Day' Holiday. All schedules that affect the system/area/equipment highlighted in the Navigation page shall be shown in a summary schedule table and graph. 7. Schedules: Schedules shall comply with the following features: • Types of schedule shall be Normal, Holiday or Override • A specific date, • A range of dates, • Any combination of Month of Year (1-12, any), Week of Month (1-5, last, any), Day of Week (M-Sun, Any) • Wildcard (example, allow combinations like second Tuesday of every month). • Schedule Categories: The system shall allow operators to define and edit scheduling categories (different types of "things" to be scheduled; for example, lighting, HVAC occupancy, etc.). The categories shall include: name, description, icon (to display in the hierarchy tree when icon option is selected) and type of value to be scheduled. • Schedule Groups: In addition to hierarchical scheduling, operators shall be able to define functional Schedule Groups, comprised of an arbitrary group of areas/rooms/equipment scattered throughout the facility and site. For example, the operator shall be able to define an `individual tenant' group — who may occupy different areas within a building or buildings. Schedules applied to the `tenant group' shall automatically be downloaded to control modules affecting spaces occupied by the `tenant group' • Partial Day Exceptions: Schedule events shall be able to accommodate a time range specified by the operator (ex: board meeting from 6 pm to 9 pm overrides Normal schedule for conference room). 8. Alarms: Alarms associated with a specific system, area, or equipment selected in the Navigation Tree, shall be displayed in the Action Pane by selecting an `Alarms' view. Alarms, and reporting actions shall have the following capabilities: • Alarms View: Each Alarm shall display an Alarms Category (using a different icon for each alarm category), date/time of occurrence, current status, alarm report, and a bold URL link to the associated graphic for the selected system, area or equipment. The URL link shall indicate the system location, address and other pertinent information. An operator shall easily be able to sort events, edit event templates and categories, acknowledge or force a return to normal in the Events View as specified in this section. • Alarm Time/Date Stamp: All events shall be generated at the DDC control module level and comprise the Time/Date Stamp using the standalone control • Alarm Configuration: Operators shall be able to define the type of Alarm generated per object. A `network' view of the Navigation shall expose all objects and their respective Alarm Configuration. Configuration shall include assignment of Alarm, type of Acknowledgement and notification for return to normal or fault status. • Alarm Summary Counter: The view of Alarm in the Graphic Pane shall provide a numeric counter, indicating how many Alarms are active (in alarm), require acknowledgement, and total number of Alarms in the BAS Server database. • Alarm Auto -Deletion: Alarms that are acknowledged and closed shall be auto -deleted from the database and archived to a text file after an operator defined period. • Alarm Reporting Actions: Alarm Reporting Actions specified shall be automatically launched (under certain conditions) after an Alarm is received by the BAS server software. Operators shall be able to easily define these Reporting Actions using the Navigation Tree and Graphic Pane through the web browser GUI. Reporting Actions shall be as follows: • Print: Alarm information shall be printed to the BAS server's PC or a networked printer. • Email: Email shall be sent via any POP3-compatible e-mail server (most Internet Service Providers use POP3). Email messages may be copied to several email accounts. Note: Email reporting action shall also be used to support alphanumeric paging services, where email servers support pagers. • File Write: The ASCII File write reporting action shall enable the operator to append operator defined alarm information to any alarm through a text file. The alarm information that is written to the file shall be completely definable by the operator. The operator may enter text or attach other data point information (such as AHU discharge temperature and fan condition upon a high room temperature alarm). • Write Property: The write property reporting action updates a property value in a hardware module. • SNMP: The Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) reporting action sends an SNMP trap to a network in response to receiving an alarm. • Run External Program: The Run External Program reporting action launches specified program in response to an event. 9_ Trends: Trends shall both be displayed and user configurable through the Web Browser GUI. Trends shall comprise analog, digital or calculated points simultaneously. A trend log's properties shall be editable using the Navigation Tree and Graphic Pane. • Viewing Trends: The operator shall have the ability to view trends by using the Navigation Tree and selecting a Trends button in the Graphic Pane. The system shall allow y- and x-axis maximum ranges to be specified and shall be able to simultaneously graphically display multiple trends per graph. • Local Trends: Trend data shall be collected locally by Multi-Equipment/Single Equipment general-purpose controllers, and periodically uploaded to the BAS server if historical trending is enabled for the object. Trend data, including run time hours and start time date shall be retained in non-volatile module memory. Systems that rely on a gateway/router to run trends are NOT acceptable. • Resolution. Sample intervals shall be as small as one second. Each trended point will have the ability to be trended at a different trend interval. When multiple points are selected for displays that have different trend intervals, the system will automatically scale the axis. • Dynamic Update. Trends shall be able to dynamically update at operator - defined intervals. • Zoom/Pan. It shall be possible to zoom -in on a particular section of a trend for more detailed examination and `pan through' historical data by simply scrolling the mouse. • Numeric Value Display. It shall be possible to pick any sample on a trend and have the numerical value displayed. • Copy/Paste. The operator must have the ability to pan through a historical trend and copy the data viewed to the clipboard using standard keystrokes (i.e. CTRL+C, CTRL+V). 10.Security Access: Systems that Security access from the web browser GUI to BAS server shall require a Login Name and Password. Access to different areas of the BAS system shall be defined in terms of Roles, Privileges and geographic area of responsibility as specified: Roles: Roles shall reflect the actual roles of different types of operators. Each role shall comprise a set of `easily understood English language' privileges. Roles shall be defined in terms of View, Edit and Function Privileges. View Privileges shall comprise: Navigation, Network, and Configuration Trees, Operators, Roles and Privileges, Alarm/Event Template and Reporting Action. Edit Privileges shall comprise: Setpoint, Tuning and Logic, Manual Override, and Point Assignment Parameters. Function Privileges shall comprise: Alarm/Event Acknowledgement, Control Module Memory Download, Upload, Schedules, Schedule Groups, Manual Commands, Print, and Alarm/Event Maintenance. Geographic Assignment of Roles: Roles shall be geographically assigned using a similar expandable/collapsible navigation tree. For example, it shall be possible to assign two HVAC Technicians with similar competencies (and the same operator defined HVAC Role) to different areas of the system. Graphical Programming 1. The system software shall include a Graphic Programming Language (GPL) for all DDC control algorithms resident in all control modules. Any system that does not use a drag and drop method of graphical icon programming shall not be accepted. All systems shall use a GPL is a method used to create a sequence of operations by assembling graphic microblocks that represent each of the commands or functions necessary to complete a control sequence. Microblocks represent common logical control devices used in conventional control systems, such as relays, switches, high signal selectors, etc., in addition to the more complex DDC and energy management strategies such as PID loops and optimum start. Each microblock shall be interactive and contain the programming necessary to execute the function of the device it represents. 2. Graphic programming shall be performed while on screen and using a mouse; each microblock shall be selected from a microblock library and assembled with other microblocks necessary to complete the specified sequence. Microblocks are then interconnected on screen using graphic "wires," each forming a logical connection. Once assembled, each logical grouping of microblocks and their interconnecting wires then forms a graphic function block which may be used to control any piece of equipment with a similar point configuration and sequence of operation. 3. Graphic Sequence: The clarity of the graphic sequence must be such that the operator has the ability to verify that system programming meets the specifications, without having to learn or interpret a manufacturer's unique programming language. The graphic programming must be self - documenting and provide the operator with an understandable and exact representation of each sequence of operation. 4. GPL Capabilities: The following is a minimum definition of the capabilities of the Graphic Programming software: • Function Block (FB): Shall be a collection of points, microblocks and wires which have been connected together for the specific purpose of controlling a piece of HVAC equipment or a single mechanical system. • Logical 1/0: Input/Output points shall interface with the control modules in order to read various signals and/or values or to transmit signal or values to controlled devices. • Microblocks: Shall be software devices that are represented graphically and may be connected together to perform a specified sequence. A library of microblocks shall be submitted with the control contractors bid. • Wires: Shall be Graphical elements used to form logical connections between microblocks and between logical 1/0. • Reference Labels: Labels shall be similar to wires in that they are used to form logical connections between two points. Labels shall form a connection by reference instead of a visual connection, i.e. two points labeled 'A' on a drawing are logically connected even though there is no wire between them. • Parameter: A parameter shall be a value that may be tied to the input of a microblock. • Properties: Dialog boxes shall appear after a microblock has been inserted which has editable parameters associated with it. Default parameter dialog boxes shall contain various editable and non-editable fields, and shall contain 'push buttons' for the purpose of selecting default parameter settings. • Icon: An icon shall be graphic representation of a software program. Each graphic microblock has an icon associated with it that graphically describes its function. • Menu -bar Icon: Shall be an icon that is displayed on the menu bar on the GPL screen, which represents its associated graphic microblock. • Live Graphical Programs: The Graphic Programming software must support a 'live' mode, where all input/output data, calculated data, and setpoints shall be displayed in a 'live' real-time mode. 6.14 LIC-CHARGE General: Mitsubishi Electric Cooling & Heating offers SW -Charge for all of its VRF equipment. The total electric energy used by a VRF system can be divided into the electric energy that is consumed by the outdoor and indoor units. The electric energy used by outdoor and indoor units can be further divided into the operating and standby electric energy. With LIC-Charge, the respective amounts of the total electric energy can be apportioned based on the operating status and capacity of each tenant's indoor units. Licenses 1. LIC-Charge Master: Master Controller license 2. LIC-Charge Expansion: Expansion Controller license Features 1. Connect up to 40 centralized controllers • Allows up to 2000 indoor units 2. Allocate energy costs for the following: • Watt -Hour meter [/kWh] • Water meter [/MJ] • Calorimeter [/m3] • Miscellaneous [/1 measurement unit] 3. Automatically acquire energy data daily or monthly from Master Central Controller System Requirements 1. LIC-Charge License is required for each centralized controller. 2. An master centralized controller is required to use billing function with either Expansion Controllers. 3. Electric energy measurement using a PI controller is recommended. 4. All centralized controllers must have the same firmware version installed. 5. Each master centralized controller requires its own electric energy pulse input(s). System configuration when using an Apportioned Electricity Billing Function SW -Charge ----------_NET---------x HUB f iii las e! - M-NEr - -Charge Expansion M-NET -Charge Expansion EVti!-�0 M-N Er -------------- M-N Er -------------- 6.15 LIC-PERSONAL WEB General 1. Unlocks Tenant Manager and General user in the integrated Centralized Control Web (ICCW) Licenses 1. LIC-PWeb Master: Master Controller license 2. LIC-PWeb Expansion: Expansion Controller license Integrated Centralized Control Web 1. By using the integrated Centralized Control Web, up to 2000 air conditioning units connected up to 40 centralized controllers can be monitored and operated. User Management Function 1. In addition to a building manager that can manage all air conditioning units, you can set tenant managers that can manage specific air conditioning units and general users that can perform only monitoring an operation. Since the functions that can be used differ for each user, this facilitates user management that meets requirements. 2. Up to 50 users can access the Integrated Centralized Control Web at the same time. While 50 users are accessing the Integrated Centralized Control Web, no more users can access the Integrated Centralized Control Web. User Number of users Building Manager 1 Tenant Manager 200 General User 2000 Operating Environment Item Requirement PC CPU 1 GHz or faster (2GHz or faster recommended) Memory 2 GB or more Screen 1024 x 768 or higher OS • Microsoft Windows8.1 or Windows? • MacOS X10.9 Browser Microsoft Internet Explorer11 • Google Chrome Ver. 45 • Safari 7 OS Browser Model Smartphone • iPhone5 • iPhone5s iOS7-9 Safari 7-9 • iPhone6 (Plus) • iPhone6s Plus • Galaxy S5 Android 4.2-6.0 Google Chrome Ver. 45 Nexus5 • • X eriaZ5 Tablet iOS 7 Safari 7 • PAID Air Android 4.2-4.4 Google Chrome Ver.45 • Nexus10 • XperiaZ2 System Licensing AE-20e City Multi system Outdoor unit Indoor unit ------------------� rro � Remote controller EW-5 City Muni system M-NET Indoor unit - - - - - - ! - - - T - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - I i #�� I � 1 1 Outdoor unit I U I Ioao bIl Remote controller -- --- --- M-NET - --- -- - --x AE-200 'f if HUB AE-50 M-NET ------------- M-NET EVE!-5 D M-NET _------------ W�Web Fension M-N ET -------------- FSW-PWeb Eansion 6.16 INSTALLATION General 1. Install system and materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, and as detailed on the project drawing set. 2. Line and low voltage electrical connections to control equipment shown specified or shown on the control diagrams shall be furnished and installed by the Control System Contractor in accordance with these specifications. 3_ Equipment furnished by the Mechanical Contractor that is normally wired before installation shall be furnished completely wired. Control wiring normally performed in the field will be furnished and installed by the Control System Contractor. 4. All control devices mounted on the face of control panels shall be clearly identified as to function and system served with permanently engraved phenolic labels. Wiring 1. All electrical control wiring to the control panels shall be the responsibility of the Installing Contractor. 2. All wiring shall be in accordance with the Project Electrical Specifications (Division 16), the National Electrical Code and any applicable local codes. All control wiring shall be installed in raceways. 6.17 PROJECT CLOSEOUT Acceptance Testing 1. Upon completion of the installation, the Control System Contractor shall load all system software and start-up the system. The Control System Contractor shall perform all necessary calibration, testing and de -bugging and perform all required operational checks to insure that the system is functioning in full accordance with these specifications. 2. The Control System Contractor shall perform tests to verify proper performance of components, routines, and points. Repeat tests until proper performance results. This testing shall include a point -by -point log to validate 100% of the input and output points of the DDC system operation. 3. System Acceptance: Satisfactory completion is when the Control System Contractor has performed successfully all the required testing to show performance compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents to the satisfaction of the Owner's Representative. System acceptance shall be contingent upon completion and review of all corrected deficiencies. Operator Training 1. During system commissioning and at such time acceptable performance of the Control System hardware and software has been established, the Control System Contractor shall provide on -site operator instruction to the owner's operating personnel. Operator instruction shall be done during normal working hours and shall be performed by a competent representative familiar with the system hardware, software and accessories. 2. The Control System Contractor shall provide comprehensive training for system orientation, product maintenance and troubleshooting, programming and engineering, if not provided under a previous contract at the site using the same brand and type of controllers within the previous 3 years. 3. The Control System Contractor shall provide instruction to the owner's designated personnel on the operation of the BMS and describe its intended use with respect to the programmed functions specified. Operator orientation of the BMS shall include, but not be limited to; the overall operation program, equipment functions (both individually and as part of the total integrated system), commands, systems generation, advisories, and appropriate operator intervention required in responding to the System's operation Warranty Period Services 1. Equipment, materials and workmanship incorporated into the work shall be warranted for a period of one year from the time of system acceptance. 2. Within this period, upon notice by the Owner, any defects in the BMS due to faulty materials, methods of installation or workmanship shall be promptly repaired or replaced by the Installing Contractor at no expense to the Owner 3. Maintenance of Computer Software Programs: The Installing Contractor shall maintain all software during the warranty period. In addition, all factory or sub -vendor upgrades to software shall be added to the systems, when they become available, at no additional cost. New products are not considered upgrades in this context. 4. Maintenance of Control Hardware: The Installing Contractor shall inspect, repair, replace, adjust, and calibrate, as required, the controllers, control devices and associated peripheral units during the warranty period. The Installing Contractor shall then furnish a report describing the status of the equipment, problem areas (if any) noticed during service work, and description of the corrective actions taken. The report shall clearly certify that all software is functioning correctly. 5. Service Period: Calls for service by the Owner shall be honored within 24 hours and are not to be considered as part of routine maintenance. 6. Service Documentation: A copy of the service report associated with each owner -initiated service call shall be provided to the owner. Warranty Access 1. The Owner shall grant Mitsubishi Electric Professional Solutions staff remote access to the BMS. Remote access to the BMS will be provided for the purpose of diagnostics and troubleshooting, via the Internet, during the warranty period. Operation & Maintenance Manuals 1. See Division 1 for requirements. O&M manuals shall include the following elements, as a minimum: • As -built control drawings for all equipment. • As -built Network Communications Diagram. • General description and specifications for all components • Completed Performance Verification sheets 1. Completed Controller Checkout/Calibration Sheets Part 7 - HVAC Equipment Alternate (General Information) The alternate equipment supplier shall provide to the bidding mechanical contractor a complete equipment data package. This package shall include, but is not limited to, equipment capacities at the design condition, power requirements, indoor units CFM/static pressures, fan curves, installation requirements, and physical dimensions. Nominal performance data is not acceptable. The mechanical contractor shall request and receive the equipment data package 15 days prior to bid date and submit this package with the alternate bid. The mechanical contractor shall list the equipment supplier and submit the required data package with the bid detailing a complete comparison of the proposed alternate equipment to the specified equipment and the associated cost reduction of the alternate equipment. The contractor bids an alternate manufacturer with full knowledge that that manufactures product may not be acceptable or approved. The alternate equipment supplier shall furnish a complete drawing package to the mechanical contractor 15 days prior to bid day for bidding and installation. The drawing format shall be Axf or equivalent, on 30"x42" sheets. The HVAC and electrical series design documents will be made available in electronic format for use by the equipment supplier in preparing their drawings. The alternate equipment supplier shall prepare the following drawings: • XXX HVAC Floor Plan • XXX HVAC Refrigerant Piping Plan • XXX HVAC Refrigerant Piping/Controls Details • XXX HVAC Details • XXX HVAC Schedules The alternate equipment supplier shall draft all piping circuits, components, overall building control schematic, detailed control wiring diagrams, system details and schedules for their system. The drawings shall convey all requirements to successfully install the alternate equipment suppliers system. Provide (2) drawing package sets plotted on 20 lb. vellum. Provide (1) drawing package in electronic format (.dxf files) on CD. The submitted documents shall be complete system designs and show no less information than the HVAC equipment/controls contract bid documents. Provide the following scorecard(s) with the bid proposal for review by the bid selection committee for their respective system(s). 7.01 R2-SERIES, HIGH EFFICIENCY, N-GENERATION Item Item Description Manufacturer Response Response # Date 1 # compressors overall # non -inverter compressors 2 Statistical probability of warranty period compressor failure based on # compressors above and 1 % warranty failure rate for each compressor for all manufacturers. 3 # VRF systems as proposed 4 # Branch devices included 5 Can additional units be added or existing indoor units be replaced with units of a different size without piping changes between the branch device and outdoor unit? 6 How is condensate formation in the branch device managed? (provide photos of branch device interior showing serviceable components) 7 List heating/cooling performance derate factors applied to systems performance for: Ambient Temperature Indoor Temperature Piping Length & Vertical Separation Defrost 8 Heating amount & percentage delivered during defrost 9 Total refrigerant charge of systems provided 10 Is commonly available polyolester (POE) used in the system? 11 # manufacturer (or respective US division) employees based within 200 miles of job site 12 # local distributors stocking parts within 200 mile radius 13 # years local supplier has been selling VRF brand Air -Conditioners For Building Application OUTDOOR UNIT TURYP-AN40AN/AB TURYE-AN40AN/AB AtMITSUBISHI ELECTRIC For use with R410A INSTALLATION MANUAL For safe and correct use, please read this installation manual thoroughly before installing the air -conditioner unit. MANUAL DE INSTALACION Para un use seguro y correcto, lea detalladamente este manual de instalacion antes de montar la unidad de aire acondicionado. CONTENTS 1. Safety precautions........................................................................................................2 1-1. General precautions...............................................................................................................2 1-2. Precautions for transporting the unit......................................................................................3 1-3. Precautions for unit installation..............................................................................................3 1-4. Precautions for piping work....................................................................................................4 1-5. Precautions for electrical wiring.............................................................................................4 1-6. Precautions for relocating or repairing the unit......................................................................5 1-7. Additional precautions............................................................................................................5 2. About the product.........................................................................................................7 3. Combination of outdoor units........................................................................................7 4. Specifications..............................................................................................................8 5. Package contents....................................................................................................... 11 6. Transporting the unit...................................................................................................12 7. Installation location....................................................................................................13 7-1. Single unit installation..........................................................................................................13 7-2. Multiple unit installation........................................................................................................14 8. Foundation work........................................................................................................15 9. Refrigerant piping work...............................................................................................16 9-1. Restrictions..........................................................................................................................16 9-2. Pipe selection.......................................................................................................................18 9-3. Twinning kit selection...........................................................................................................18 9-4. Pipe connection example.....................................................................................................19 9-5. Piping connections and valve operations............................................................................22 9-6. Air -tightness test..................................................................................................................24 9-7. Thermal insulation for pipes.................................................................................................25 9-8. Evacuation of the system.....................................................................................................26 9-9. Additional refrigerant charge................................................................................................27 10. Electrical work..........................................................................................................33 10-1. Before electrical work.........................................................................................................33 10-2. Power cables and device capacity.....................................................................................33 10-3. Control cable specifications............................................................................................... 36 10-4. System configuration.........................................................................................................37 10-5. Wiring connections in the control box................................................................................39 10-6. Address setting..................................................................................................................44 11. Test run....................................................................................................................45 11-1. Before a test run.................................................................................................................45 11-2. Function setting..................................................................................................................46 11-3. Operation characteristics in relation to the refrigerant charge...........................................46 11-4. Operation check.................................................................................................................47 12. Inspection and maintenance.......................................................................................47 13. Rating plate information............................................................................................48 WT09115X03 GB-1 1. Safety precautions ► Read and observe the safety precautions below and the instructions provided on the labels affixed to the unit. ► Retain this manual for future reference. Make sure that this manual is passed on to the end users. ► All refrigerant piping work, electrical work, air -tightness test, and brazing work must be performed by qualified personnel. ► Incorrect use may result in serious injury. indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury. indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury. addresses practices not related to personal injury, such as product and/or property damage. 1-1. General precautions Do not use any refrigerant other than the type indicated in the manuals for the unit and on the nameplate. - Doing so will cause the unit or pipes to burst, or result in an explosion or fire during use, during repairs, or at the time of disposal of the unit. - It may also be in violation of applicable laws. - MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION cannot be held responsible for malfunctions or accidents resulting from the use of the wrong type of refrigerant. Do not use the unit in an unusual environment. - If the unit is used in areas exposed to large amounts of oil, steam, organic solvents, or corrosive gases (such as ammonia, sulfuric compounds, or acids), or areas where acidic/alkaline solutions or special chemical sprays are used frequently, it may significantly reduce the performance and corrode the internal parts, resulting in refrigerant leakage, water leakage, injury, electric shock, malfunction, smoke, or fire. Do not change the settings of the safety or protection devices. - Forcing the unit to operate by disabling the safety devices, such as the pressure switch or the thermal switch, may result in bursting, fire, or explosion. - Operating the unit with a safety device whose settings have been changed may result in bursting, fire, or explosion. - Using safety devices other than those specified by Mitsubishi Electric may result in bursting, fire, or explosion. Do not alter or modify the unit. - Doing so will result in refrigerant leakage, water leakage, serious injury, electric shock, or fire. Do not wet the electrical parts. - Doing so may result in current leakage, electric shock, malfunction, or fire. Do not touch the electrical parts, switches, or buttons with wet fingers. - Doing so may result in electric shock, malfunction, or fire. Do not touch the refrigerant pipes and refrigerant line components with bare hands during and immediately after operation. - The refrigerant in the pipes will be very hot or very cold, resulting in frostbite or burns. Do not touch the electrical parts with bare hands during and immediately after operation. - Doing so may result in burns. Ventilate the room while servicing the unit. - If the refrigerant leaks, oxygen deficiency may result. If the leaked refrigerant comes in contact with a heat source, toxic gas will be generated. WT09115X03 GB-2 If you notice any abnormality (e.g., a burning smell), stop the operation, turn off the power switch, and consult your dealer. - Continuing the operation may result in electric shock, malfunction, or fire. Properly install all required covers and panels on the terminal box and the control box. - If dust or water enters the unit, this may result in electric shock or fire. Periodically check the unit base for damage. - If the damage is left uncorrected, the unit will fall and cause serious injury. Consult your dealer for the proper disposal of the unit. - The refrigerant oil and the refrigerant in the unit will pose a risk of environmental pollution, fire, or explosion. Do not make any modifications or alterations to the unit. Consult your dealer for repair. - Improper repair may result in water leakage, electric shock, smoke, or fire. FV • Children should be supervised to ensure that they do not play with the appliance. Do not operate the unit with the panels and guards removed. - Rotating, hot, or high -voltage parts may cause injury, electric shock, or fire. Do not touch fans, heat exchanger fins, or the sharp edges of components with bare hands. - Doing so may result in injury. Wear protective gloves when working on the unit. - Failure to do so may result in injury. - High-pressure pipes poses a risk of burns if touched with bare hands while the unit is in operation. 1-2. Precautions for transporting the unit FTIR a Mkk , When lifting the unit, pass the slings through the four designated sling holes. - Improper lifting will cause the unit to topple or fall, resulting in serious injury. FV • Do not lift the unit with the PP bands that are used on some products. - Doing so may result in injury. Observe the restrictions on the maximum weight that a person can lift, which is specified in local regulations. - Failure to do so may result in injury. 1-3. Precautions for unit installation FT, "m Mm, Do not install the unit where combustible gas may leak. - If combustible gas accumulates around the unit, fire or explosion may result. Do not allow children to play with the packing materials. - Suffocation or serious injury may result. Cut up the packing materials before disposal. All installation work must be performed by qualified personnel in accordance with this manual. - Improper installation may result in refrigerant leakage, water leakage, serious injury, electric shock, or fire. WT09115X03 GB-3 If the air conditioner is installed in a small room, take measures to prevent the refrigerant concentration from exceeding the safety limit in the event of refrigerant leakage. - Consult your dealer regarding the appropriate measures to prevent the allowable concentration from being exceeded. If the refrigerant leaks and the allowable concentration is exceeded, hazards due to a lack of oxygen in the room will result. Install the unit in accordance with the instructions to minimize the risk of damage from earthquakes and strong winds. - Improper installation will cause the unit to topple, resulting in serious injury. The unit must be securely installed on a structure that can sustain its weight. - Failure to do so will cause the unit to fall, resulting in serious injury. Seal all openings around pipes and wires to keep out small animals, rainwater, or snow. - Failure to do so may result in current leakage, electric shock, or damage to the unit. 1-4. Precautions for piping work Before heating the brazed sections, remove the gas and oil that are trapped in the pipes. - Failure to do so may generate fire, resulting in serious injury. Do not purge the air using refrigerant. Use a vacuum pump to evacuate the system. - Residual gas in the refrigerant lines will cause bursting of the pipes or an explosion. Do not use oxygen, flammable gas, or a refrigerant containing chlorine for air -tightness testing. - Doing so may result in an explosion. Chlorine will deteriorate the refrigerant oil. When installing or relocating the unit, do not allow air or any substance other than the specified refrigerant to enter the refrigerant lines. - Any substance other than the specified refrigerant may cause abnormally high pressure in the refrigerant lines, resulting in bursting of the pipes or an explosion. After the installation has been completed, check for refrigerant leaks. - If the refrigerant leaks, oxygen starvation may result. If the leaked refrigerant comes in contact with a heat source, toxic gas will be generated. 1-5. Precautions for electrical wiring rMiff - Mkk Include some slack in the power cables. - Failure to do so may break or overheat the cables, resulting in smoke or fire. Connections must be made securely and without tension on the terminals. - Improperly connected cables may break, overheat, or cause smoke or fire. Tighten all terminal screws to the specified torque. - Loose screws and contact failure may result in smoke or fire. Electrical work must be performed by qualified personnel in accordance with local regulations and the instructions provided in this manual. Only use the specified cables and dedicated circuits. - Inadequate power source capacity or improper electrical work will result in electric shock, malfunction, or fire. Install an inverter circuit breaker on the power supply of each unit. - Failure to do so may result in electric shock or fire. Only use properly rated breakers (an earth leakage breaker, local switch <a switch + fuse that meets local electrical codes>, or overcurrent breaker). - Failure to do so may result in electric shock, malfunction, smoke, or fire. WT09115X03 GB-4 Only use standard power cables of sufficient capacity. - Failure to do so may result in current leakage, overheating, smoke, or fire. Proper grounding must be provided by qualified personnel. - Improper grounding may result in electric shock, fire, explosion, or malfunction due to electrical noise. Do not connect the ground wire to gas or water pipes, lightning rods, or telephone ground wires. After the wiring work has been completed, measure the insulation resistance, and make sure that it reads at least 1 MQ. - Failure to do so may result in electric leakage, malfunction, or fire. 1-6. Precautions for relocating or repairing the unit Only qualified personnel must relocate or repair the unit. Do not attempt to disassemble or alter the unit. - Failure to do so will result in refrigerant leakage, water leakage, serious injury, electric shock, or fire. Do not service the unit in the rain. - Doing so may result in electric leakage, electric shock, wire shorting, malfunction, smoke, or fire. 1-7. Additional precautions Do not turn off the power immediately after stopping operation. - Wait for at least five minutes after the unit has stopped before turning off the power. Failure to do so may result in drain water leakage or the mechanical failure of sensitive parts. The unit must be periodically inspected by a dealer or qualified personnel. - If dust or dirt accumulates inside the unit, the drain pipes may become clogged, and water leakage from the pipes may wet the surroundings and generate odours. Turn on the power at least 12 hours before starting operation. Keep the power turned on throughout the operating season. - Insufficient energizing will result in malfunction. Do not use the air conditioner for special purposes (e.g. keeping food, animals, plants, precision devices, or art objects in a room). - Such items could be damaged or deteriorated. Collect the refrigerant and properly dispose of it in accordance with local regulations. Do not install the unit on or over items that are subject to water damage. - When the room humidity exceeds 80% or if the drain pipe is clogged, condensation may collect and drip from the indoor unit onto the ceiling or floor. Drain piping must be installed by a dealer or qualified personnel to ensure proper drainage. - Improper drain piping may cause water leakage, resulting in damage to furniture and other surroundings. Take appropriate measures against electrical noise interference when installing the unit in hospitals or radio communication facilities. - Inverter, high -frequency medical, or wireless communication equipment as well as power generators may cause the air conditioning system to malfunction. The air conditioning system may also adversely affect the operation of these types of equipment by creating electrical noise. Insulate pipes to prevent condensation. - Condensation may collect and drip from the unit onto the ceiling or floor. Keep the service valves closed until refrigerant charging is completed. - Failure to do so will damage the unit. WT09115X03 GB-5 Place a wet towel on the service valves before brazing the pipes to keep the temperature of the valves from rising above 120°C (2480F). - Failure to do so may result in equipment damage. Keep the flame out of contact with the cables and metal sheet when brazing the pipes. - Failure to do so may result in burnout or malfunction. Use the following tools specifically designed for use with the specified refrigerant: Gauge manifold, charge hose, gas leak detector, check valve, refrigerant charge base, vacuum gauge, and refrigerant recovery equipment. - Gas leak detectors for conventional refrigerants will not react to a refrigerant that does not contain chlorine. - If the specified refrigerant is mixed with water, refrigerant oil, or another refrigerant, the refrigerant oil will deteriorate and the compressor will malfunction. Use a vacuum pump with a check valve. - If the vacuum pump oil flows back into the refrigerant lines, the refrigerant oil may deteriorate and the compressor may malfunction. Keep tools clean. - If dust, dirt, or water accumulates on the charging hose or the flare processing tool, the refrigerant will deteriorate and the compressor will malfunction. Use refrigerant piping made of phosphorus deoxidized copper (copper and copper alloy seamless pipes) that meets local requirements. Pipe joints should also meet local requirements. Keep the inner and outer surfaces of the pipes clean and free of sulphur, oxides, dust/dirt, shaving particles, oils, moisture, or any other contaminants. - Contaminants on the inside of the refrigerant piping will cause the refrigerant oil to deteriorate and cause the compressor to malfunction. Store pipes indoors, and keep both ends of the pipes sealed until just before making a flare connection or brazing. (Store elbows and other joints in plastic bags.) - If dust, dirt, or water enters the refrigerant lines, the refrigerant oil will deteriorate and the compressor will malfunction. Braze the pipes with a nitrogen purge to avoid oxidation. - Oxidized flux inside the refrigerant pipes will cause the refrigerant oil to deteriorate and cause the compressor to malfunction. Do not use existing refrigerant piping. - The old refrigerant and refrigerant oil in the existing piping contain a large amount of chlorine, which will cause the refrigerant oil in the new unit to deteriorate and cause the compressor to malfunction. Charge refrigerant in a liquid state. - Charging refrigerant in the gaseous state will change the composition of the refrigerant and lead to a performance drop. Do not use a charging cylinder when charging refrigerant. - The use of a charging cylinder may change the composition of the refrigerant and lead to a performance drop. If a large electric current flows due to a malfunction or faulty wiring, earth -leakage breakers on the unit side and on the upstream side of the power supply system could both operate. Depending on the importance of the system, separate the power supply system or take protective coordination of breakers. This appliance is intended to be used by expert or trained users in shops, in light industry and on farms, or for commercial use by lay persons. This appliance is not intended for use by persons (including children) with reduced physical, sensory or mental capabilities, or lack of experience and knowledge, unless they have been given supervision or instruction concerning use of the appliance by a person responsible for their safety. Only qualified personnel may touch the USB port in the control box. WT09115X03 GB-6 2. About the product • The outdoor unit described in this manual is air-conditioning equipment that is designed only for human comfort. • The numeric values in the unit model name (e.g., TURYP-AN40AN/AB, TURYE-AN40AN/AB) indicate the capacity index of the unit. • This unit uses R410A refrigerant. 3. Combination of outdoor units (1) 208-230 V Outdoor unit model Combination of outdoor units TURYP0723AN40AN/AB - - TURYP0963AN40AN/AB - - TURYP1203AN40AN/AB - - TURYP1443AN40AN/AB TURYP1683AN40AN/AB TURYP1923BN40AN/AB TURYP0963AN40AN/AB TURYP0963AN40AN/AB TURYP2163BN40AN/AB TURYP1203AN40AN/AB TURYP0963AN40AN/AB TURYP2403BN40AN/AB TURYP1203AN40AN/AB TURYP1203AN40AN/AB TURYP2643BN40AN/AB TURYP1443AN40AN/AB TURYP1203AN40AN/AB TURYP2883BN40AN/AB TURYP1443AN40AN/AB TURYP1443AN40AN/AB TURYP3123BN40AN/AB TURYP1683AN40AN/AB TURYP1443AN40AN/AB TURYP3363BN40AN/AB TURYP1683AN40AN/AB TURYP1683AN40AN/AB Outdoor unit model Combination of outdoor units TURYE0723AN40AN/AB - - TURYE0963AN40AN/AB - - TURYE1203AN40AN/AB - - TURYE1443AN40AN/AB TURYE1683AN40AN/AB TURYE1923AN40AN/AB TURYE1923BN40AN/AB TURYE0963AN40AN/AB TURYE0963AN40AN/AB TURYE2163AN40AN/AB TURYE2163BN40AN/AB TURYE1203AN40AN/AB TURYE0963AN40AN/AB TURYE2403AN40AN/AB - - TURYE2403BN40AN/AB TURYE1203AN40AN/AB TURYE1203AN40AN/AB TURYE2643BN40AN/AB TURYE1443AN40AN/AB TURYE1203AN40AN/AB TURYE2883BN40AN/AB TURYE1443AN40AN/AB TURYE1443AN40AN/AB TURYE3123BN40AN/AB TURYE1683AN40AN/AB TURYE1443AN40AN/AB TURYE3363BN40AN/AB TURYE1683AN40AN/AB TURYE1683AN40AN/AB TURYE3843BN40AN/AB TURYE1923AN40AN/AB TURYE1923AN40AN/AB TURYE4323BN40AN/AB TURYE2163AN40AN/AB TURYE2163AN40AN/AB * "Twinning Kit' is required to connect combination units on site. (2) 460 V Outdoor unit model Combination of outdoor units TURYP0724AN40AN/AB - - TURYP0964AN40AN/AB - - TURYP1204AN40AN/AB - - TURYP1444AN40AN/AB TURYP1684AN40AN/AB TURYP1924BN40AN/AB TURYP0964AN40AN/AB TURYP0964AN40AN/AB TURYP2164BN40AN/AB TURYP1204AN40AN/AB TURYP0964AN40AN/AB TURYP2404BN40AN/AB TURYP1204AN40AN/AB TURYP1204AN40AN/AB TURYP2644BN40AN/AB TURYP1444AN40AN/AB TURYP1204AN40AN/AB TURYP2884BN40AN/AB TURYP1444AN40AN/AB TURYP1444AN40AN/AB TURYP3124BN40AN/AB TURYP1684AN40AN/AB TURYP1444AN40AN/AB TURYP3364BN40AN/AB TURYP1684AN40AN/AB TURYP1684AN40AN/AB Outdoor unit model Combination of outdoor units TURYE0724AN40AN/AB - - TURYE0964AN40AN/AB - - TURYE1204AN40AN/AB - - TURYE1444AN40AN/AB - - TURYE1684AN40AN/AB TURYE1924AN40AN/AB TURYE1924BN40AN/AB TURYE0964AN40AN/AB TURYE0964AN40AN/AB TURYE2164AN40AN/AB TURYE2164BN40AN/AB TURYE1204AN40AN/AB TURYE0964AN40AN/AB TURYE2404AN40AN/AB - - TURYE2404BN40AN/AB TURYE1204AN40AN/AB TURYE1204AN40AN/AB TURYE2644BN40AN/AB TURYE1444AN40AN/AB TURYE1204AN40AN/AB TURYE2884BN40AN/AB TURYE1444AN40AN/AB TURYE1444AN40AN/AB TURYE3124BN40AN/AB TURYE1684AN40AN/AB TURYE1444AN40AN/AB TURYE3364BN40AN/AB TURYE1684AN40AN/AB TURYE1684AN40AN/AB TURYE3844BN40AN/AB TURYE1924AN40AN/AB TURYE1924AN40AN/AB TURYE4324BN40AN/AB TURYE2164AN40AN/AB TURYE2164AN40AN/AB * "Twinning Kit' is required to connect combination units on site. WT09115X03 GB-7 4. Specifications (1) 208-230 V Model TURYP0723AN40AN TURYP0963AN40AN Sound level*4 *5 56.5 dB <A> 1 58.5 dB <A> External static pressure 0 Pa*2 Indoor unit Total capacity 50 % to 150 % *1 Model 05 to 96 Quantity R2 system 1 to 18 11 to 24 Temperature range (Cooling) Indoor W.B. +15.0°C to +24.0°C (+59.0*F to +75.0°F) Outdoor D.B. -5.0°C to +52.0°C (+23.0°F to +125.6°F) Temperature range (Heating) Indoor D.B. +15.0°C to +27.0°C (+59.0°F to +81.0°F) Outdoor W.B. -25.0°C to +15.5°C (-13.0*F to +60.0°F)*3 Model TURYP1203AN40AN TURYP1443AN40AN TURYP1683AN40AN TURYP1923BN40AN TURYP2163BN40AN Sound level*4 *5 60.0 dB <A> 65.0 dB <A> 62.5 dB <A> 58.5 dB <A> 60.0 dB <A> External static pressure 0 Pa*2 Total capacity 50 % to 150 % *' Indoor unit Model 05 to 96 Quantity 1 to 30 1 to 36 1 to 42 1 to 48 2 to 50 Temperature range Indoor W.B. +15.0*C to +24.0*C (+59.0*F to +75.0*F) (Cooling) Outdoor D.B. -5.0°C to +52.0°C (+23.0*F to +125.6*F) Temperature range Indoor D.B. +15.0*C to +27.0°C (+59.0°F to +81.0*F) (Heating) Outdoor W.B. -25.0°C to +15.5°C (-13.0°F to +60.0°F)*3 Model TURYP2403BN40AN TURYP2643BN40AN TURYP2883BN40AN TURYP3123BN40AN TURYP3363BN40AN Sound level*4 *5 60.0 dB <A> 65.0 dB <A> 65.0 dB <A> 62.5 dB <A> 62.5 dB <A> External static pressure 0 Pa*2 Total capacity 50 % to 150 % *' Indoor unit Model 05 to 96 Quantity 2 to 50 2 to 50 2 to 50 2 to 50 2 to 50 Temperature range Indoor W.B. +15.0*C to +24.0*C (+59.0*F to +75.0*F) (Cooling) Outdoor D.B. -5.0°C to +52.0°C (+23.0°F to +125.6*F) Temperature range Indoor D.B. +15.0°C to +27.0*C (+59.0*F to +81.0°F) (Heating) Outdoor W.B. -25.0*C to +15.5*C (-13.0*F to +60.0°F)*3 Model TURYE0723AN40AN TURYE0963AN40AN Sound level*4 *5 56.5 dB <A> 1 58.5 dB <A> External static pressure 0 Pa*2 Indoor unit Total capacity 50 % to 150 % *1 Model 05 to 96 Quantity R2 system 1 to 18 1 to 24 Temperature range (Cooling) Indoor W.B. +15.0°C to +24.0°C (+59.0*F to +75.0°F) Outdoor D.B. -5.0*C to +52.0*C (+23.0*F to +125.6*F) Temperature range (Heating) Indoor D.B. +15.0°C to +27.0°C (+59.0°F to +81.0°F) Outdoor W.B. -25.0°C to +15.5°C (-13.0*F to +60.0°F) Model TURYE1203AN40AN TURYE1443AN40AN TURYE1683AN40AN TURYE1923AN40AN TURYE1923BN40AN Sound level*4 *5 60.0 dB <A> 65.0 dB <A> 62.5 dB <A> 64.5 dB <A> 58.5 dB <A> External static pressure 0 Pa*2 Total capacity 50 % to 150 % *' Indoor unit Model 05 to 96 Quantity 1 to 30 1 to 36 1 to 42 1 to 48 1 to 48 Temperature range Indoor W.B. +15.0*C to +24.0°C (+59.0°F to +75.0*F) (Cooling) Outdoor D.B. -5.0*C to +52.0°C (+23.0*F to +125.6*F) Temperature range Indoor D.B. +15.0°C to +27.0°C (+59.0*F to +81.0°F) (Heating) Outdoor W.B. -25.0*C to +15.5*C (-13.0°F to +60.0°F) Model TURYE2163AN40AN TURYE2163BN40AN TURYE2403AN40AN TURYE2403BN40AN TURYE2643BN40AN Sound level*4 *5 66.5 dB <A> 60.0 dB <A> 67.5 dB <A> 60.0 dB <A> 65.0 dB <A> External static pressure 0 Pa*2 Total capacity 50 % to 150 % *' Indoor unit Model 05 to 96 Quantity 2 to 50 2 to 50 2 to 50 2 to 50 2 to 50 Temperature range Indoor W.B. +15.0*C to +24.0*C (+59.0*F to +75.0°F) (Cooling) Outdoor D.B. -5.0*C to +52.0°C (+23.0*F to +125.6*F) Temperature range Indoor D.B. +15.0*C to +27.0*C (+59.0°F to +81.0*F) (Heating) Outdoor W.B. -25.0°C to +15.5*C (-13.0°F to +60.0°F) WT09115X03 GB-8 Model TURYE2883BN40AN TURYE3123BN40AN TURYE3363BN40AN TURYE3843BN40AN TURYE4323BN40AN Sound level*4 *5 65.0 dB <A> 62.5 dB <A> 62.5 dB <A> 67.5 dB <A> 69.5 dB <A> External static pressure 0 Pa*2 Total capacity 50 % to 150 % *' Indoor unit Model 05 to 96 Quantity 2 to 50 2 to 50 2 to 50 2 to 50 2 to 50 Temperature range Indoor W.B. +15.0°C to +24.0°C (+59.0°F to +75.0°F) (Cooling) Outdoor D.B. -5.0°C to +52.0°C (+23.0°F to +125.6°F) Temperature range Indoor D.B. +15.0°C to +27.0°C (+59.0°F to +81.0°F) (Heating) Outdoor W.B. -25.0°C to +15.5°C (-13.0°F to +60.0°F) *1 The maximum total capacity of indoor units operating simultaneously is 150%. *2 To enable the high static pressure setting, set the dipswitch on the main board as follows. SW6-5:ON SW6-5:OFF SW6-4: ON 80 Pa 60 Pa SW6-4: OFF 30 Pa 0 Pa *3 When applying product below-20.0°C (-4.0°F), consult your design engineer for cold climate application best practices, including the use of a backup source for heating. *4 Cooling mode M *5 The sound pressure level shown above indicates A -weighted sound pressure level. Although the sound pressure level in AS has been changed to the sound power level (PWL), the value shown above indicates the sound pressure level measured by the conventional method for reference purpose. (2) 460 V Model TURYP0724AN40AN TURYP0964AN40AN Sound level*4 *5 56.5 dB <A> 58.5 dB <A> External static pressure 0 Pa*2 Indoor unit Total capacity 50 % to 150 % *1 Model 05 to 96 Quantity R2 system 1 to 18 1 to 24 Temperature range (Cooling) Indoor W.B. +15.0°C to +24.0°C (+59.0°F to +75.0°F) Outdoor D.B. -5.0°C to +52.0°C (+23.0°F to +125.6°F) Temperature range (Heating) Indoor D.B. +15.0°C to +27.0°C (+59.0°F to +81.0°F) Outdoor W.B. -25.0°C to +15.5°C (-13.0°F to +60.0°F)*3 Model TURYP1204AN40AN TURYP1444AN40AN TURYP1684AN40AN TURYP1924BN40AN TURYP2164BN40AN Sound level*4 *5 60.0 dB <A> 65.0 dB <A> 62.5 dB <A> 58.5 dB <A> 60.0 dB <A> External static pressure 0 Pa*2 Total capacity 50 % to 150 % *' Indoor unit Model 05 to 96 Quantity 1 to 30 1 to 36 1 to 42 1 to 48 2 to 50 Temperature range Indoor W.B. +15.0°C to +24.0°C (+59.0°F to +75.0°F) (Cooling) Outdoor D.B. -5.0°C to +52.0°C (+23.0°F to +125.6°F) Temperature range Indoor D.B. +15.0°C to +27.0°C (+59.0°F to +81.0°F) (Heating) Outdoor W.B. -25.0°C to +15.5°C (-13.0°F to +60.0°F)*3 Model TURYP2404BN40AN TURYP2644BN40AN TURYP2884BN40AN TURYP312413N40AN TURYP3364BN40AN Sound level*4 *5 60.0 dB <A> 65.0 dB <A> 65.0 dB <A> 62.5 dB <A> 62.5 dB <A> External static pressure 0 Pa*2 Total capacity 50 % to 150 % *' Indoor unit Model 05 to 96 Quantity 2 to 50 2 to 50 2 to 50 2 to 50 2 to 50 Temperature range Indoor W.B. +15.0°C to +24.0°C (+59.0°F to +75.0°F) (Cooling) Outdoor D.B. -5.0°C to +52.0°C (+23.0°F to +125.6°F) Temperature range Indoor D.B. +15.0°C to +27.0°C (+59.0°F to +81.0°F) (Heating) Outdoor W.B. -25.0°C to +15.5°C (-13.0°F to +60.0°F)*3 Model TURYE0724AN40AN TURYE0964AN40AN Sound level*4 *5 56.5 dB <A> 58.5 dB <A> External static pressure 0 Pa.2 Indoor unit Total capacity 50 % to 150 % *1 Model 05 to 96 Quantity R2 system 1 to 18 1 to 24 Temperature range (Cooling) Indoor W.B. +15.0°C to +24.0°C (+59.0°F to +75.0°F) Outdoor D.B. -5.0°C to +52.0°C (+23.0°F to +125.6°F) Temperature range (Heating) Indoor D.B. +15.0°C to +27.0°C (+59.0°F to +81.0°F) Outdoor W.B. -25.0°C to +15.5°C (-13.0°F to +60.0°F) Model TURYE1204AN40AN TURYE1444AN40AN TURYE1684AN40AN TURYE1924AN40AN TURYE1924BN40AN Sound level*4 *5 60.0 dB <A> 65.0 dB <A> 62.5 dB <A> 64.5 dB <A> 58.5 dB <A> External static pressure 0 Pa*2 Total capacity 50 % to 150 % *' Indoor unit Model 05 to 96 Quantity 1 to 30 1 to 36 1 to 42 1 to 48 1 to 48 Temperature range Indoor W.B. +15.0°C to +24.0°C (+59.0°F to +75.0°F) (Cooling) Outdoor D.B. -5.0°C to +52.0°C (+23.0°F to +125.6°F) Temperature range Indoor D.B. +15.0°C to +27.0°C (+59.0°F to +81.0°F) (Heating) Outdoor W.B. -25.0°C to +15.5°C (-13.0°F to +60.0°F) WT09115X03 GB-9 Model TURYE2164AN40AN TURYE2164BN40AN TURYE2404AN40AN TURYE2404BN40AN TURYE2644BN40AN Sound level*4 *5 66.5 dB <A> 60.0 dB <A> 67.5 dB <A> 60.0 dB <A> 65.0 dB <A> External static pressure 0 Pa*2 Total capacity 50 % to 150 % *' Indoor unit Model 05 to 96 Quantity 2 to 50 2 to 50 2 to 50 2 to 50 2 to 50 Temperature range Indoor W.B. +15.0*C to +24.0*C (+59.0*F to +75.0°F) (Cooling) Outdoor D.B. -5.0°C to +52.0°C (+23.0*F to +125.6°F) Temperature range Indoor D.B. +15.0*C to +27.0*C (+59.0°F to +81.0°F) (Heating) Outdoor W.B. -25.0°C to +15.5°C (-13.0°F to +60.0°F) Model TURYE2884BN40AN TURYE3124BN40AN TURYE3364BN40AN TURYE3844BN40AN TURYE4324BN40AN Sound level*4 *5 65.0 dB <A> 62.5 dB <A> 62.5 dB <A> 67.5 dB <A> 69.5 dB <A> External static pressure 0 Pa*2 Total capacity 50 % to 150 % *' Indoor unit Model 05 to 96 Quantity 2 to 50 2 to 50 2 to 50 2 to 50 2 to 50 Temperature range Indoor W.B. +15.0*C to +24.0*C (+59.0*F to +75.0*F) (Cooling) Outdoor D.B. -5.0°C to +52.0°C (+23.0°F to +125.6*F) Temperature range Indoor D.B. +15.0°C to +27.0*C (+59.0*F to +81.0°F) (Heating) Outdoor W.B. -25.0°C to +15.5°C (-13.0°F to +60.0°F) *1 The maximum total capacity of indoor units operating simultaneously is 150%. *2 To enable the high static pressure setting, set the dipswitch on the main board as follows. SW6-5:ON SW6-5:OFF SW6-4: ON 80 Pa 60 Pa SW6-4: OFF 30 Pa 0 Pa *3 When applying product below-20.0*C (-4.0*F), consult your design engineer for cold climate application best practices, including the use of a backup source for heating. *4 Cooling mode *5 The sound pressure level shown above indicates A -weighted sound pressure level. Although the sound pressure level in AS has been changed to the sound power level (PWL), the value shown above indicates the sound pressure level measured by the conventional method for reference purpose. WT09115X03 G B_ 10 5. Package contents The table below lists all the parts and their quantities included in the package. (1) P models Tie band P072 2 P096 2 P120 2 P144 2 P168 2 (2) E models Tie band E072 2 E096 2 E120 2 E144 2 E168 2 E192 2 E216 2 E240 2 WT09115X03 G B-11 6. Transporting the unit When lifting the unit, pass the slings through the four designated sling holes. - Improper lifting will cause the unit to topple or fall, resulting in serious injury. • Always use two slings to lift up the unit. Each sling must be at least 8 m (26 ft) long and must be able to support the weight of the unit. • Put protective pads between slings and the unit where the slings touch the unit at the base to protect the unit from being scratched. • Put 50 mm (2 in) or thicker protective pads between slings and the unit where the slings touch the unit at the top of the unit to protect the unit from being scratched and to avoid contact with the slings and the fan guard. • Make sure that the angles between slings at the top are less than 40 degrees. P072, E072 P168, E168, E192, E216, E240 P096, P120, P144, E096, E120, E144 O Slings (Min. 8 m (26 ft) x 2) © Protective pads (Minimum thickness: 50 mm (2 in)) (two each in the front and back) © Protective pads (two each in the front and back) Sling holes (two each in the front and back) O Fan guard WT09115X03 G B_ 1 2 7. Installation location Do not install the unit where combustible gas may leak. - If combustible gas accumulates around the unit, fire or explosion may result. • Provide sufficient space around the unit for effective operation, efficient air movement, and ease of access for maintenance. • Note that refrigerant gas is heavier than air and will therefore tend to collect in low spots such as basements. • When an indoor unit that draws in outside air exits near the outdoor unit, be careful not to affect the normal operation of the indoor unit. • When the amount of drain water is excessive, drain water comes out of the outdoor unit along the panel during heating operation. Provide sufficient space around the unit according to the instructions below. 7-1. Single unit installation (1) When all walls are within their height limits*. [mm (in)] Height limit Front/Right/Left/Rear I Same height or lower than the overall height of the unit Required minimum distance [mm (in)] L1 (Front) L2 (Rear) L3 (Right/Left) When the distance behind the unit (1-2) needs to be small 450 (17-3/4) 100 (3-15/16) 50 (2) When the distance to the right or left (1-3) needs to be small 450 (17-3/4) 300 (11-13/16) 15 (5/8) (2) When one or more walls exceed their height limits*. When the wall(s) at the front and/or the When the wall at the rear exceeds its right/left exceed(s) their height limits height limit L1 When all walls exceed their height limits Add the dimension that exceeds the height limit (shown as "h1" through "h3" in the figures) to L1, L2, and L3 as shown in the table below. Required minimum distance [mm (in)] L1 (Front) L2 (Rear) L3 (Right/Left) When the distance behind the unit (L2) needs to be small 450 (17-3/4) + h1 100 (3-15/16) + h2 50 (2) + h3 When the distance to the right or left (1-3) needs to be small 450 (17-3/4) + h1 300 (11-13/16) + h2 15 (5/8) + h3 (3) When there are overhead obstacles *2: 40 (9-1/2) - - 1 a 1000 (39-3/8) Air outlet guide (not supplied) 0 (2) WT09115X03 G B-13 7-2. Multiple unit installation • When installing multiple units, make sure to take into consideration factors such as providing enough space for people to pass through, ample space between blocks of units, and sufficient space for airflow. (The areas marked with (0) in the figures below must be left open.) • In the same way as with the single unit installation, add the dimension that exceeds the height limit (shown as "h1" through "hY in the figures) to L1, L2, and L3 as shown in the tables below. • If there are walls in the front and rear of the block of units, up to six units (P168, E168, E192, E216, and E240) can be installed consecutively side by side, and a space of 1000 mm (39-3/8 in) or more must be left between each block of six units. • When the amount of drain water is excessive, drain water comes out of the outdoor unit along the panel during heating operation. (1) Side -by -side installation When the distances between the units (1-4) need to be small h2 Unit height Required minimum distance [mm (in)] L1 (Front) L2 (Rear) L4 (Between) 450 (17-3/4) + h1 300 (11-13/16) + h2 30 (1-3/16) (2) Face-to-face installation When there are walls in the front and rear of the block of units fit height Required minimum distance [mm (in)] L1 (Front) L2 (Rear) L4 (Between) 450 (17-3/4) + h1 100 (3-15/16) + h2 450 (17-3/4) (3) Combination of face-to-face and side -by -side installations When there are walls in the front and rear of the block of units h2 When the distance behind the block of units (1-2) needs to be small 2 nit height Required minimum distance [mm (in)] L1 (Front) L2 (Rear) L4 (Between) 450 (17-3/4) + h1 100 (3-15/16) + h2 100 (3-15/16) When there is a wall on either the right or left side of the block of units Unit heic Required minimum distance [mm (in)] L3 (Right/Left) L4 (Between) 15 (5/8) + h3 450 (17-3/4) When there are two walls in an L-shape h3 Unit height Unit height Required minimum distance [mm (in)] L2 (Rear) L2' (Rear) L4 (Between) 300 (11-13/16) + h2 300 (11-13/16) + h2' 900 (35-7/16) Required minimum distance [mm (in)] L2 (Rear) L3 (Right/Left) L4 (Between) 300 (11-13/16) + h2 1000 (39-3/8) + h3 900 (35-7/16) h2 Unit height 0 Leave open in two directions. WT09115X03 G B-14 8. Foundation work Install the unit in accordance with the instructions to minimize the risk of damage from earthquakes and strong winds. - Improper installation will cause the unit to topple, resulting in serious injury. The unit must be securely installed on a structure that can sustain its weight. - Failure to do so will cause the unit to fall, resulting in serious injury. • When performing the foundation work, make sure that the floor surface has sufficient strength and carefully route pipes and wires in consideration of the water drainage that will be required when the unit is operated. • If considering routing the pipes and wires across the bottom of the unit, make sure that the base is at least 100 mm (3-15/16 in) high so that the through -holes will not be blocked. • Provide a strong base of concrete or angle iron. If a stainless steel base is used, insulate the area between the base and the outdoor unit by putting a rubber cushion or by applying an electrically insulated coating to prevent the base from rusting. • Install the unit on a level surface. • With some types of installation, unit vibration and sound will be transmitted to the floors and walls. In such locations, take measures to prevent vibration (such as using anti -vibration rubber pads). [mm (in)] OO M10 anchor bolt (not supplied) © (Incorrect installation) The corner section is not securely received. © Fixing bracket for post -installed anchor bolts (not supplied) (To be fixed with three screws) OD Anti -vibration rubber pad (The pad needs to be large enough to cover the entire width of each unit leg.) • Make sure that the corner section is securely received. If not, the unit legs could bend. • The length of the projecting part of the anchor bolt should be 30 mm (1-3/16 in) or less. • This unit is not designed to be anchored with post -installed anchor bolts unless fixing brackets are installed at the bottom four locations (six locations for units P168, E168, E192, E216, and E240). • In abnormally harsh environments such as cold and/or windy areas, sufficient countermeasures to guard against excessive wind and snow should be taken to ensure the unit's correct operation. When the unit is expected to operate in cooling mode in conditions under 10°C (50°F), in snowy areas, in environments subject to strong winds or rain, install snow hoods of the following specifications (not supplied) as shown in the figure below. Material: Galvanized steel plate 1.2T Painting: Overall painting with polyester powder Color: Munsell 5Y8/1 (same as the unit color) Size: Refer to the Data Book. OA Outlet © Inlet © Snow hood Raised base D • Install the unit so that the wind will not blow directly against the inlet and outlet. • If necessary, install the unit on a raised base of the following specifications (not supplied) to prevent damage from snow. Material: Angle iron (Build a structure that snow and wind can pass through.) Height: Expected maximum snowfall plus 200 mm (7-7/8 in) Width: Within the unit width (If the raised base is too wide, snow will accumulate on the raised base.) • When the unit is used in a cold region and the heating operation is continuously performed for a long time when the outside air temperature is below freezing, install a heater on the raised base or take other appropriate measures to prevent water from freezing on the raised base. • When installing a panel heater, provide sufficient space for maintenance accordingly. For details, refer to the Data Book or installation manual for the panel heater. WT09115X03 G B-15 9. Refrigerant piping work Do not use any refrigerant other than the type indicated in the manuals for the unit and on the nameplate. - Doing so will cause the unit or pipes to burst, or result in an explosion or fire during use, during repairs, or at the time of disposal of the unit. - It may also be in violation of applicable laws. - MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION cannot be held responsible for malfunctions or accidents resulting from the use of the wrong type of refrigerant. After the installation has been completed, check for refrigerant leaks. - If the refrigerant leaks, oxygen starvation may result. If the leaked refrigerant comes in contact with a heat source, toxic gas will be generated. Wear protective gloves when working on the unit. - Failure to do so may result in injury. - High-pressure pipes poses a risk of burns if touched with bare hands while the unit is in operation. Use the following tools specifically designed for use with the specified refrigerant: Gauge manifold, charge hose, gas leak detector, check valve, refrigerant charge base, vacuum gauge, and refrigerant recovery equipment. - Gas leak detectors for conventional refrigerants will not react to a refrigerant that does not contain chlorine. - If the specified refrigerant is mixed with water, refrigerant oil, or another refrigerant, the refrigerant oil will deteriorate and the compressor will malfunction. Do not use existing refrigerant piping. - The old refrigerant and refrigerant oil in the existing piping contain a large amount of chlorine, which will cause the refrigerant oil in the new unit to deteriorate and cause the compressor to malfunction. 9-1. Restrictions • Existing refrigerant piping must not be used because the design pressure for systems using R410A is higher than that for systems using other types of refrigerants. • Do not install outdoor unit piping when it is raining. • Do not use special detergents for washing piping. • Always observe the restrictions on refrigerant piping (such as pipe size, pipe length, and vertical separation distance) to prevent equipment failure or a decline in heating/cooling performance. • Do not install solenoid valves to prevent oil backflow and compressor start-up failure. • Do not install a sight glass because it may show improper refrigerant flow. If a sight glass is installed, inexperienced technicians that use the glass may overcharge the refrigerant. • The pipe from multiple outdoor units must be installed so that oil will not accumulate in the pipe under certain conditions. Refer to the figures below for details. * Small dots in the figures indicate branching points. O To a BC controller (1) The pipe from the outdoor units must be inclined downward to the indoor unit side. In the figure on the right, because the pipe is inclined upward, the oil in the pipe accumulates when Unit 1 is in operation and Unit 2 is stopped. Unit 1 Unit 2 Unit 1 Unit 2 WT09115X03 GB-16 (2) The distance between the unit bottom and the pipe (H) must be 0.2 m (7-7/8 in) or below. In the figure on the right, because the distance is more than 0.2 m (7-7/8 in), the oil accumulates in Unit 1 when Unit 2 is in operation and Unit 1 is stopped. Unit 1 Unit 2 0 Unit 1 Unit 2 Unit 1 Unit 2 AH H 5 0.2 m (7-7/8 in) H > 0.2 m (7-7/8 in) (3) The vertical separation between units (H) must be 0.1 m (3-15/16 in) or below. In the figure on the right, because the distance is more than 0.1 m (3-15/16 in), the oil accumulates in Unit 1 when Unit 2 is in operation and Unit 1 is stopped. Unit 2 Unit 1 A H H 5 0.1 m (3-15/16 in) Unit 2 A 1 H H > 0.1 m (3-15/16 in) (4) The vertical separation between units (H) must be 0.1 m (3-15/16 in) or below. In the figure on the right, because the distance is more than 0.1 m (3-15/16 in), the oil accumulates in Unit 2 when Unit 1 is in operation and Unit 2 is stopped. Unit 1 Unit 2 O H H 5 0.1 m (3-15/16 in) Unit 1 U nit 2 H H > 0.1 m (3-15/16 in) • Make sure that the inclination tolerance of the Twinning Kit is ±15° to the ground to avoid unit damage. A OO Twinning Kit +I • Restriction on installing the 2-Branch Joint Pipe CMY-R201/202/203/204/205S-G on the high-pressure piping, low-pressure piping, and liquid piping. To sub BC controller C AA B To main BC controller I I III (gym To sub BC controller I - Regarding the 2-Branch Joint Pipe on the high-pressure/low-pressure/liquid piping, A and B must be installed horizontally, and C must be installed upward higher than the horizontal plane of A and B. • If the length of the pipe between the branching point and the outdoor unit exceeds 2 m (6 ft), provide a trap within 2 m (6 ft) from the branching point. The trap must be at least 200 mm (7-7/8 in) in height. (high-pressure pipe only) If there is no trap, oil can accumulate inside the pipe, causing a shortage of oil and may damage the compressor. * Small dots in the figures indicate branching points. I "'(�) I O 52m(6ft) To a BC controller Trap (high-pressure pipe only) High-pressure pipe WT09115X03 GB-1 7 9-2. Pipe selection Use refrigerant piping made of phosphorus deoxidized copper (copper and copper alloy seamless pipes) that meets local requirements. Pipe joints should also meet local requirements. Keep the inner and outer surfaces of the pipes clean and free of sulphur, oxides, dust/dirt, shaving particles, oils, moisture, or any other contaminants. - Contaminants on the inside of the refrigerant piping will cause the refrigerant oil to deteriorate and cause the compressor to malfunction. Use refrigerant pipes for use with R41 DA refrigerant system. Piping for systems for use with other types of refrigerants may not be able to be used. Use refrigerant pipes with the thicknesses specified in the table below. Size [mm (in)] Minimum wall thickness [mm (in)] o6.35 (o1A) 0.67 (0.0265) o9.52 (o3/8) 0.72 (0.0285) o12.7 (o1/2) 0.72 (0.0285) o15.88 (o5/8) 0.8 (0.0315) o19.05 (o3/4) 0.98 (0.0385) o22.2 (o7/8) 1.04 (0.0410) o25.4 (o1) 1.17 (0.0460) o28.58 (o1-1/8) 1.17 (0.0460) o31.75 (o1-1/4) 1.28 (0.0505) o34.93 (o1-3/8) 1.28 (0.0505) o41.28 (o1-5/8) 1.41 (0.0555) 9-3. Twinning kit selection Select appropriate twinning kits (sold separately), referring to the sections below. * Use an adapter, if necessary, to connect a refrigerant pipe to a twinning pipe of a different diameter. 9-3-1. 2-Branch Joint Pipe A 2-Branch Joint Pipe is used to connect multiple indoor units to a port. (1) R2 system Total capacity of downstream indoor units Kit model 72 or below CMY-Y102SS-G2 73 to 96 CMY-Y102LS-G2 9-3-2. Joint Pipe Kit A Joint Pipe Kit is used to connect an indoor unit of P72 model or above. Indoor unit model Kit model P72 to P96 CMY-R160-J1 * When connecting P72 through P96 models of indoor units to two ports, set the dipswitch SW4-6 on the BC controller to ON. 9-3-3. Outdoor unit twinning kit Outdoor unit twinning kit is used to combine multiple outdoor units. Total capacity of outdoor units Kit model P192 to 240, E192 to 240 CMY-R200NCBK P264 to 336, E264 to 432 CMY-R300NCBK WT09115X03 GB-18 9-4. Pipe connection example 9-4-1. Example of pipe connection between outdoor units OO On -site piping © Twinning Kit © The pipe section before the twinning pipe must have at least 500 mm (19-11/16 in) of straight section. M WT09115X03 G B-19 9-4-2. Example of pipe connection between an outdoor unit and BC controller, and between a BC controller and indoor unit (R2 system) P072 to P168 E072 to E240 Unit 1 O A A P192 to P336 E192 to E432 Unit 1 Unit 2 C All ,s I A2 lim OA Outdoor unit © BC controller (Main) © BC controller (Sub) OO Indoor unit (Total capacity of downstream indoor units: 05 to 30) OE Indoor unit (Total capacity of downstream indoor units: 72 to 96) 0 Joint Pipe Kit OO 2-Branch Joint Pipe OH Outdoor unit twinning kit (D High-pressure pipe (A, Al, A2) 0 Low-pressure pipe (A, Al, A2) OK High-pressure pipe (C, D, E, F, G, H, 1) © Low-pressure pipe (C, D, E, F, G, H, 1) 0 Liquid pipe (C, D, E, F, G, H, 1) O Liquid pipe (a, b, c, d, e, f, g, h) OO Gas pipe (a, b, c, d, e, f, g, h) e e © OO °oo OO OO CE G I K C E G I M c E G I FFF HH H © © C, B _ B c c d d f I g g h h O O D O 1 i k i * Contact your dealer for pipe connection examples when connecting TCMBG****SJ11 N4, TCMBM****JA11N4, TCMBM****KA11 N4, or TCMBS****KB11 N4. WT09115X03 G B-20 Pipes A, Al, A2 [mm (in)l Combination unit PipeA PipeA,*1 PipeA2*1 Unit model Unit 1 Unit 2 High-pressure Low-pressure High-pressure Low-pressure High-pressure Low-pressure P072 o15.88 (5/8) o19.05 (3/4) P096 - - ol9.05 (3/4) o22.2 (7/8) - - - - P120 o19.05 (3/4) o28.58 (1-1/8) P144 - - o22.2 (7/8) o28.58 (1-1/8) - - - - P168 - - o22.2 (7/8) o28.58 (1-1/8) - - - - P192 P096 P096 o22.2 (7/8) o28.58 (1-1/8) o19.05 (3/4) o22.2 (7/8) o19.05 (3/4) o22.2 (7/8) P216 P120 P096 o22.2 (7/8)*2 o28.58 (1-1/8) a19.05 (3/4) o28.58 (1-1/8) o19.05 (314) o22.2 (7/8) P240 P120 P120 o22.2 (7/8)*2 o34.93 (1-3/8) o19.05 (3/4) o28.58 (1-1/8) o19.05 (3/4) o28.58 (1-1/8) P264 P144 P120 o28.58 (1-1/8) o34.93 (1-3/8) o22.2 (7/8) o28.58 (1-1/8) o19.05 (3/4) o28.58 (1-1/8) P288 P144 P144 028.58 (1-1/8) o34.93 (1-3/8) o22.2 (7/8) o28.58 (1-1/8) o22.2 (7/8) o28.58 (1-1/8) P312 P168 P144 o28.58 (1-1/8) o41.28 (1-5/8) o22.2 (7/8) o28.58 (1-1/8) o22.2 (7/8) o28.58 (1-1/8) P336 P168 P168 o28.58 (1-1/8) o41.28 (1-5/8) o22.2 (7/8) o28.58 (1-1/8) o22.2 (7/8) o28.58 (1-1/8) Pipes A, Al, A2 [mm (in)l Combination unit PipeA PipeA1*1 Pipe A2*1 Unit model Unit 1 Unit 2 High-pressure Low-pressure High-pressure Low-pressure High-pressure Low-pressure E072 o15.88 (5/8) a19.05 (3/4) E096 o19.05 (3/4) o22.2 (7/8) E120 o19.05 (3/4) o28.58 (1-1/8) E144 o22.2 (7/8) o28.58 (1-1/8) E168 - - o22.2 (7/8) o28.58 (1-1/8) - - - - E192 - - o22.2 (7/8) o28.58 (1-1/8) - - - - E192 E096 E096 o22.2 (7/8) o28.58 (1-1/8) o19.05 (3/4) o22.2 (7/8) o19.05 (3/4) o22.2 (7/8) E216 o22.2 (7/8)*2 o28.58 (1-1/8) - - E216 E120 E096 o22.2 (7/8)*2 o28.58 (1-1/8) o19.05 (3/4) o28.58 (1-1/8) o19.05 (3/4) o22.2 (7/8) E240 - - o22.2 (7/8)*2 o34.93 (1-3/8) - - - - E240 E120 E120 o22.2 (7/8)*2 o34.93 (1-3/8) o19.05 (3/4) o28.58 (1-1/8) o19.05 (3/4) o28.58 (1-1/8) E264 E144 E120 o28.58 (1-1/8) o34.93 (1-3/8) o22.2 (7/8) o28.58 (1-1/8) o19.05 (314) o28.58 (1-1/8) E288 E144 E144 o28.58 (1-1/8) o34.93 (1-3/8) o22.2 (7/8) o28.58 (1-1/8) o22.2 (7/8) o28.58 (1-1/8) E312 E168 E144 o28.58 (1-1/8) o41.28 (1-5/8) o22.2 (7/8) o28.58 (1-1/8) o22.2 (7/8) o28.58 (1-1/8) E336 E168 E168 o28.58 (1-1/8) o41.28 (1-5/8) o22.2 (7/8) o28.58 (1-1/8) o22.2 (7/8) o28.58 (1-1/8) E384 E192 E192 o28.58 (1-1/8) o41.28 (1-5/8) o22.2 (7/8) o28.58 (1-1/8) o22.2 (7/8) o28.58 (1-1/8) E432 E216 E216 o28.58 (1-1/8) o41.28 (1-5/8) o22.2 (7/8) I o28.58 (1-1/8) o22.2 (7/8) o28.58 (1-1/8) If the combination units 1 and 2 are in a different order as listed in the table, make sure to use the pipes of appropriate size for the situation. If the length of "High-pressure pipe A" exceeds 65 m (213 ft), use the o28.58 (ol-1/8) pipes for all pipes after 65 m (213 ft). Pipe B rmm (in)l Total capacity of indoor units Pipe Liquid Gas 30 or below o9.52 (o3/8) o15.88 (o5/8) Pipes C, D, E, F, G, H, I (*) [mm (in)] Total model number of downstream indoor units Pipe High-pressure Low-pressure Liquid 72 or below ol5.88 (o5/8) o19.05 (o3/4) o9.52 (03/8) 73 to 108 ol9.05 (03/4) o22.2 (o7/8) o9.52 (03/8) 109 to 126 o19.05 (03/4) o28.58 (ol-1/8) o12.7 (ol/2) 127 to 144 o22.2 (o7/8) o28.58 (ol-1/8) o12.7 (ol/2) 145 to 216 o22.2 (o7/8) o28.58 (ol-1/8) o15.88 (o5/8) 217 to 234 o28.58 (ol-1/8) o28.58 (ol-1/8) o15.88 (o5/8) 235 to 288 o28.58 (ol-1/8) o34.93 (o1-3/8) o19.05 (03/4) 289 to 360 o28.58 (o1-1/8) o41.28 (o1-5/8) o19.05 (03/4) 361 or above o34.93 (o1-3/8) o41.28 (o1-5/8) o19.05 (o3/4) Pipes a, b, c, d, e, f, g, In (*) [mm (in)] Capacity index of indoor unit Pipe Liquid Gas 05, 06, 08, 12, 15, 18 o6.35 (ol/4) o12.7 (o1/2) 24, 27, 30, 36, 48, 54 o9.52 (o3/8) o15.88 (o5/8) 72 o9.52 (o3/8) o19.05 (o3/4) 96 o9.52 (o3/8) o22.2 (o7/8) Pipes i, j, k, I (*) [mm (in)] Capacity index of indoor unit Liquid pipe Gas pipe i j k I 36 o9.52 (o3/8) o9.52 (o3/8) o15.88 (o5/8) o15.88 (o5/8) 48 o9.52 (o3/8) o9.52 (03/8) ol5.88 (o5/8) o15.88 (o5/8) 54 o9.52 (o3/8) o9.52 (o3/8) ol5.88 (o5/8) o15.88 (o5/8) 72 o9.52 (o3/8) o9.52 (o3/8) ol9.05 (03/4) o15.88 (o5/8) 96 o9.52 (o3/8) I o9.52 (03/8) 1 o22.2 (07/8) o15.88 (o5/8) * If the length of high-pressure pipe or liquid pipe exceeds the restriction, use the one size larger pipe. Refer to the BC controller Installation Manual for details. WT09115X03 G B_2 9-5. Piping connections and valve operations Before heating the brazed sections, remove the gas and oil that are trapped in the pipes. - Failure to do so may generate fire, resulting in serious injury. Ventilate the room while servicing the unit. - If the refrigerant leaks, oxygen deficiency may result. If the leaked refrigerant comes in contact with a heat source, toxic gas will be generated. Store pipes indoors, and keep both ends of the pipes sealed until just before making a flare connection or brazing. (Store elbows and other joints in plastic bags.) - If dust, dirt, or water enters the refrigerant lines, the refrigerant oil will deteriorate and the compressor will malfunction. Keep the service valves closed until refrigerant charging is completed. - Failure to do so will damage the unit. Place a wet towel on the service valves before brazing the pipes to keep the temperature of the valves from rising above 120°C (248T). - Failure to do so may result in equipment damage. Keep the flame out of contact with the cables and metal sheet when brazing the pipes. - Failure to do so may result in burnout or malfunction. Braze the pipes with a nitrogen purge to avoid oxidation. - Oxidized flux inside the refrigerant pipes will cause the refrigerant oil to deteriorate and cause the compressor to malfunction. 9-5-1. Removing the pinched connecting pipes The unit is shipped with the pinched connecting pipes attached to the high- and low-pressure side service valves to prevent gas leakage. Take the following steps ,O through 03 to remove the pinched connecting pipes before connecting refrigerant pipes to the outdoor unit. J) Check that the service valves are fully closed (turned clockwise all the way). OO Remove the gas in the pinched connecting pipes, and drain out all the refrigerant oil. (See OO below.) ® Remove the pinched connecting pipes. (See OO below.) <A> <B> <A> Refrigerant service valve (high-pressure/brazed) <B> Refrigerant service valve (low-pressure/brazed) O Valve shaft The unit is shipped with the valve closed. Keep the valve closed while connecting pipes or evacuating the system. Open the valve upon completion of this work. Turn the shaft counterclockwise as far as it will go (90°) to open the valve, and clockwise to close it. © Stopper pin Prevents the shaft from turning 90' or more. © Service port Through the service ports, you can charge refrigerant, remove the gas in the pinched connecting pipes, or evacuate the system. OO Cap Remove the cap before turning the shaft. Put the cap back on upon completion of all work. OO Severed section of the pinched connecting pipe OO Brazed section of the pinched connecting pipe 9-5-2. Connecting pipes • The refrigerant pipe from the outdoor unit is branched at the pipe end, and each branch is then connected to an indoor unit. Connecting method Indoor unit Brazed or flared Outdoor unit High-pressure pipe Brazed Low-pressure pipe Brazed Branched section Brazed • When connecting pipes, make sure the service valves are completely closed. • Commercially available pipes often contain dust or debris. Always blow them clean with a dry inert gas. • Take care to prevent dust, water or other contaminants from entering the pipes during installation. • Reduce the number of bending portions as much as possible, and make the bending radius as big as possible. • Do not use any commercially available anti -oxidizing agents since they may cause pipe corrosion and degrading of the refrigerant oil. Please contact Mitsubishi Electric for more details. • Make sure that the pipes are not in contact with each other, unit panels, or base plates. • Refer to the twinning kit Installation Manual for how to install the twinning kit. WT09115X03 G B-22 <Refrigerant piping connection examples> • Obtain joints and elbows on site as necessary according to the pipe diameter, and connect the pipes as shown in the figures below. (1) When routing the pipes through the front of the unit M (2) When routing the pipes through the bottom of the unit <A> High-pressure side <B> Low-pressure side OO Refrigerant service valve piping © Reducer etc. © Elbow OO On -site piping <Reference> Size of refrigerant pipes On -site piping [mm (in)] Service valve piping [mm (in)] High-pressure side Low-pressure side High-pressure side Low-pressure side P072 015.88 (05/8) o19.05 (o3/4) o22.2 (o7/8) o28.58 (o1-1/8) P096 019.05 (03/4) o22.2 (o7/8) o28.58 (o1-1/8) P120 o28.58 (o1-1/8) P144 022.2 (07/8) P168 On -site piping [mm (in)] Service valve piping [mm (in)] High-pressure side Low-pressure side High-pressure side Low-pressure side E072 o15.88 (o5/8) o19.05 (o3/4) o22.2 (o7/8) 028.58 (o1-1/8) E096 o19.05 (03/4) o22.2 (o7/8) 028.58 (01-1/8) E120 028.58 (01-1/8) E144 o22.2 (o7/8) E o34.93 (o1-3/8) • When expanding the on -site piping, satisfy the minimum insertion depth requirement as follows. Pipe size [mm (in)] Minimum insertion depth [mm (in)] o5 (o1/4) or more, less than o8 (o3/8) 6 (1/4) o8 (o3/8) or more, less than o12 (01/2) 7 (5/16) o12 (o1/2) or more, less than o16 (o11/16) 8 (3/8) o16 (o11 /16) or more, less than o25 (o1) 10 (7/16) o25 (o1) or more, less than o35 (o1-7/16) 12 (1/2) o35 (o1-7/16) or more, less than o45 (o1-13/16) 14 (9/16) WT09115X03 G B-23 9-5-3. Sealing the openings around the pipes Seal all openings around pipes and wires to keep out small animals, rainwater, or snow. - Failure to do so may result in current leakage, electric shock, or damage to the unit. O Example of closure materials (not supplied) © Fill the openings 0 9-6. Air -tightness test W Do not use oxygen, flammable gas, or a refrigerant containing chlorine for air -tightness testing. - Doing so may result in an explosion. Chlorine will deteriorate the refrigerant oil. After refrigerant pipe installation is completed, check the system for leaks by conducting an air -tightness test. If there is a leak, the composition of the refrigerant will change and the performance will drop. <Air -tightness test procedures> O Make sure the service valves are closed. OO Add pressure to the refrigerant pipes through the service ports of the high- and low-pressure pipes. ' Pressurize to the design pressure (4.15 MPa) using nitrogen gas. OO If the pressure holds for one day and does not decrease, the pipes have passed the test and there are no leaks. If the pressure decreases, there is a leak. Look for the source of the leak by spraying a bubbling agent (e.g., Gupoflex) on the flared or brazed sections. ® Wipe off the bubbling agent. OA Nitrogen gas © To indoor unit © Gauge manifold Low pressure knob High pressure knob OO Service valve Low-pressure pipe O High-pressure pipe CO Outdoor unit O Service port WT09115X03 G B-24 9-7. Thermal insulation for pipes IIJTIC Insulate pipes to prevent condensation. - Condensation may collect and drip from the unit onto the ceiling or floor. Insulate the high- and low-pressure pipes, and liquid and gas pipes separately with polyethylene foam insulation materials. Inadequate insulation may cause condensation to drip. Pipes in the ceiling are especially vulnerable to condensation and require adequate insulation. 9-7-1. Insulation material • Check that the insulation materials meet the standards in the table below. Between an outdoor unit and BC controller High-pressure pipe Low-pressure pipe Thickness[ m (in)] Min. 10 (7/16) Min. 20 (13/16) Heat resistance Min. 120°C (248°F) Between a BC controller and indoor unit (R2 system) Pipe size [mm (in)] o6.35 (01/4)-025.4 (rat) o28.58 (o1-1/8)-038.1 (o1-1/2) Thickness [mm (in)] Min. 10 (7/16) Min. 15 (5/8) Heat resistance Min. 120°C (248°F) The insulation thickness may need to be increased in high-temperature/humidity conditions. * Even when specifications are defined by your client, the standards in the table should be met. OA Steel wire © Pipe © Oily mastic asphalt or asphalt O Insulation material A OE Outer covering B Insulation material Glass fiber + Steel wire A Adhesive + Heat -resistant polyethylene foam +Adhesive tape Indoor Vinyl tape Outer covering B Under the floor and exposed Waterproof hemp cloth + Bronze asphalt Outdoor Waterproof hemp cloth + Zinc plate + Oily paint If a polyethylene cover is used as an outer covering, asphalt roofing is not necessary. • Do not insulate the electric wires. B e e High-pressure pipe or liquid pipe A © Low-pressure pipe or gas pipe B A © Electric wire O Finishing tape D OO Insulation material D E • Make sure that the pipe connections all the way from the indoor unit are properly insulated. WT09115X03 G B-25 9-7-2. Insulation for the section of the pipe that goes through a wall (1) Inner wall (concealed) (2) Outer wall (3) Outer wall (exposed) (4) Floor (waterproof) D © A B E B --IH H (5) Rooftop pipe shaft (6) Protecting the penetrating parts in a fire limit zone or through a parting wall rriFtilJ = - - - - - - 1000 1000 (39-3/8) (39-3/8) O Sleeve © Insulation material © Lagging O Caulking material O Band O Waterproof layer O Sleeve with a flange O Caulk with a nonflammable material such as mortar. 0 Nonflammable insulation material • When caulking the gaps with mortar, cover the section of the pipe that goes through the wall with a metal sheet to prevent the insulation material from sagging. For this section, use nonflammable insulation and covering materials. (Vinyl tape should not be used.) 9-8. Evacuation of the system Do not purge the air using refrigerant. Use a vacuum pump to evacuate the system. - Residual gas in the refrigerant lines will cause bursting of the pipes or an explosion. Use a vacuum pump with a check valve. - If the vacuum pump oil flows back into the refrigerant lines, the refrigerant oil may deteriorate and the compressor may malfunction. <Evacuation procedures> O Evacuate the system from both service ports, using a vacuum pump with the service valves closed. O After the vacuum reaches 650 Pa (0.0943 psi/5 Torr), continue evacuation for at least one hour. Stop the vacuum pump and leave it for an hour. ® Verify that the vacuum has not increased by more than 130 Pa (0.01886 psi/1 Torr). O If the vacuum has increased by more than 130 Pa, water infiltration is suspected. Pressurize the system with dry nitrogen gas up to 0.05 MPa (7.25 psi/375 Torr). Repeat O though O until the vacuum is increased by 130 Pa or below. If the results persist, then perform the "Triple Evacuation" below. <Triple Evacuation> O Evacuate the system to 533 Pa (0.07729 psi/4 Torr) from both service ports, using a vacuum pump. O Pressurize the system with dry nitrogen gas up to 0 Pa (0 psi/0 Torr) from the discharge service port. ® Evacuate the system to 200 Pa (0.029 psi/1.5 Torr) from the suction service port, using a vacuum pump. ® Pressurize the system with dry nitrogen gas up to 0 Pa (0 psi/0 Torr) from the discharge service port. O Evacuate the system from both service ports, using a vacuum pump. © After the vacuum reaches 66.7 Pa (0.09672 psi/5 Torr), stop the vacuum pump and leave it for an hour. A vacuum of 66.7 Pa must be maintained for at least one hour. O Verify that the vacuum has not increased for at least 30 minutes. WT09115X03 G B-26 OO Gauge manifold © Low pressure knob © High pressure knob OO Service valve OE Low-pressure pipe T) High-pressure pipe OO Service port O Three-way joint CO Valve (vacuum pump) _ O Valve (for charging refrigerant) Ok Refrigerant tank OO Scale OM Vacuum pump OO To indoor unit O Outdoor unit • Use a scale that can measure down to 0.1 kg (0.1 oz). • Recommended vacuum gauge: ROBINAIR 14830A Thermistor Vacuum Gauge or Micron Gauge • Do not use a gauge manifold to measure the vacuum pressure. • Use a vacuum pump capable of attaining a vacuum of 65 Pa (abs) within five minutes of operation. 9-9. Additional refrigerant charge CAUTION Charge refrigerant in a liquid state. - Charging refrigerant in the gaseous state will change the composition of the refrigerant and lead to a performance drop. Do not use a charging cylinder when charging refrigerant. - The use of a charging cylinder may change the composition of the refrigerant and lead to a performance drop. The amount of refrigerant that is shown in the table below is factory -charged in the outdoor units. The amount necessary for extended piping is not included and needs to be added on site. Unit model Factory -charged amount [kg (oz)] P072 5.2(184) P096 8.0(283) P120 8.0(283) P144 10.8 (381) P168 10.8 (381) Unit model Factory -charged amount [kg (oz)] E072 5.2(184) E096 8.0(283) E120 8.0(283) E144 10.8 (381) E168 10.8 (381) E192 11.8 (416) E216 11.8 (416) E240 11.8 (416) The amount of refrigerant that is shown in the table below is the maximum amount to be added on site. Unit model Maximum amount to be added [kg (oz)] P072 28.3 (999) P096 33.5 (1182) P120 39.5 (1394) P144 38.5 (1359) P168 39.5(1394) P192 58(2046) P216 74 (2611) P240 74 (2611) P264 71.2 (2512) P288 68.4 (2413) P312 68.4 (2413) P336 68.4 (2413) Unit model Maximum amount to be added [kg (oz)] E072 28.3 (999) E096 33.5 (1182) E120 39.5 (1394) E144 38.5 (1359) E168 39.5 (1394) E192 38.5 (1359) E192 58(2046) E216 38.5 (1359) E216 74 (2611) E240 38.5 (1359) E240 74(2611) E264 71.2 (2512) E288 68.4 (2413) E312 68.4 (2413) E336 68.4 (2413) E384 66.4 (2343) E432 66.4 (2343) WT09115X03 G B-27 The amount of refrigerant that is shown in the table below is the maximum total amount in the system. Unit model Maixmum total amount in the system [kg (oz)] P072 33.5 (1182) P096 41.5 (1464) P120 47.5 (1676) P144 49.3 (1739) P168 50.3 (1775) P192 74 (2611) P216 90(3175) P240 90(3175) P264 90(3175) P288 90(3175) P312 90(3175) P336 90(3175) Unit model Maixmum total amount in the system [kg (oz)] E072 33.5 (1182) E096 41.5 (1464) E120 47.5 (1676) E144 49.3 (1739) E168 50.3 (1775) E192 50.3 (1775) E192 74 (2611) E216 50.3 (1775) E216 90(3175) E240 50.3 (1775) E240 90(3175) E264 90(3175) E288 90(3175) E312 90(3175) E336 90(3175) E384 90(3175) E432 90(3175) Both refrigerant overcharge and undercharge will cause problems. Charge the system with the proper amount of refrigerant. Record the added refrigerant amount on the label attached to the control box panel for future servicing. 9-9-1. Calculation of the amount of additional refrigerant • The amount of refrigerant to be added depends on the size and the total length of the high-pressure piping and liquid piping. • Calculate the amount of refrigerant to be charged according to the formula below. • Round up the calculation result to the nearest 0.1 kg (0.1 oz). (1) Units "m" and "kg" (In an R2 system) <Formula> • When the piping length from the outdoor unit to the farthest indoor unit is 30.5 m (100 ft) or shorter Amount of High-pressure pipe o28.58 High-pressure pipe o22.2 High-pressure pipe o19.05 High-pressure pipe o15.88 additional charge = total length + total length + total length + total length (kg) x 0.36 (kg/m) x 0.23 (kg/m) x 0.16 (kg/m) x 0.11 (kg/m) Liquid pipe o15.88 total Liquid pipe o12.7 total Liquid pipe o9.52 total Liquid pipe o6.35 total + length + length + length + length x 0.2 (kg/m) x 0.12 (kg/m) x 0.06 (kg/m) x 0.024 (kg/m) Main or sub BC controller Amount (kg/unit) J-type 1.5 JA-type 3.0 KA-type 4.7 KB -type 0.4 Total capacity of outdoor units Amount (kg) (to be added for outdoor unit) Single 72 0 96 0 120 0 144 0 168 0 192 4.4 216 4.4 240 4.4 Combination 192 0 216 0 240 0 264 0 288 0 312 0 336 0 384 8.8 432 8.8 Total capacity of connected indoor units Amount (kg) (to be added for indoor unit) 27 or below 2.0 28 to 54 2.5 55 to 126 3.0 127 to 144 3.5 145 to 180 4.5 181 to 234 5.0 235 to 273 6.0 274 to 307 8.0 308 to 342 9.0 343 to 411 10.0 412 to 450 12.0 451 or above 14.0 O r - 7 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 L - - - - - - - - - - - - - J Total capacity of outdoor units Amount (kg) Single 72 1.5 96 1.5 120 3.0 144 2.5 168 4.0 192 3.5 216 4.0 240 4.5 Combination 192 4.0 216 4.5 240 5.0 264 2.5 288 1.5 312 2.0 336 2.0 384 0 432 0 WT09115X03 G B-28 * In the case all connected indoor unit models are Case 1 or Case 2, do NOT add the refrigerant listed in table (A). Instead, add the following amount of refrigerant. Case 1: TPLFYP006/0181036EM14** Add 0.67 kg per TPLFYP006/018/036EM14**. Case 2: TPEFYP006/024/036MA14** Add 0.55 kg per TPEFYP006/024/036MAl4**. • When the piping length from the outdoor unit to the farthest indoor unit is longer than 30.5 m (100 ft) Amount of High-pressure pipe o28.58 High-pressure pipe o22.2 High-pressure pipe o99.05 High-pressure pipe o15.88 additional charge = total length + total length + total length + total length (kg) x 0.33 (kg/m) x 0.21 (kg/m) x 0.14 (kg/m) x 0.1 (kg/m) Liquid pipe o15.88 total Liquid pipe o12.7 total Liquid pipe o9.52 total Liquid pipe o6.35 total + length + length + length + length x 0.18 (kg/m) x 0.11 (kg/m) x 0.054 (kg/m) x 0.021 (kg/m) Main or sub BC controller Amount (kg/unit) J-type 1.5 JA-type 3.0 KA-type 4.7 KB -type 0.4 Total capacity of outdoor units Amount (kg) (to be added for outdoor unit) Single 72 0 96 0 120 0 144 0 168 0 192 4.4 216 4.4 240 4.4 Combination 192 0 216 0 240 0 264 0 288 0 312 0 336 0 384 8.8 432 8.8 Total capacity of connected indoor units Amount (kg) (to be added for indoor unit) 27 or below 2.0 28 to 54 2.5 55 to 126 3.0 127 to 144 3.5 145 to 180 4.5 181 to 234 5.0 235 to 273 6.0 274 to 307 8.0 308 to 342 9.0 343 to 411 10.0 412 to 450 12.0 451 or above 14.0 * When connecting TPLFYP006EM14**, TPLFYP018EM14**, or TPLFYP036EM14**, add 0.67 kg of refrigerant per indoor unit. * When connecting TPEFYP006MA14**, TPEFYP024MA14**, or TPEFYP036MA14**, add 0.55 kg of refrigerant per indoor unit. <Example> Outdoor unit 1 model: P120 Outdoor unit 2 model: P120 BC controller (Main) model: TCMBM0108JAl l N4 BC controller (Sub) model: TCMBS0104KBl l N4 x 4 units Total capacity of connected indoor units: 206 Refer to the pipe connection examples in section 94 for the pipes marked with the letters below. A: o28.58; 40 m B: o9.52; 10 m C: o9.52; 5 m D: o9.52; 5 m E: o9.52; 5 m F: o9.52; 5 m G: o9.52; 5 m H: o9.52; 5 m I: o9.52; 5 m Al: o19.05; 3 m A2: o19.05; 1 m a: o9.52; 10 m b: o9.52; 5 m c: o6.35; 5 m d: o6.35; 10 m e: o6.35; 5 m f: o9.52; 5 m WT09115X03 G B_2 g g: o9.52; 5 m h: o9.52; 5 m The total length of the high-pressure piping and liquid piping in each case is as follows: o28.58 total length: 40 (A) o19.05 total length: 3 (Al) + 1 (A2) = 4 o9.52 total length: 10 (B) + 5 (C) + 5 (D) + 5 (E) + 5 (F) + 5 (G) + 5 (H) + 5 (1) + 10 (a) + 5 (b) + 5 (f) + 5 (g) +5(h)=75 o6.35 total length: 5 (c) + 10 (d) + 5 (e) = 20 Therefore, when the piping length from the outdoor unit to the farthest indoor unit is longer than 30.5 m (100 ft), Amount of additional charge = (40 x 0.33) + (4 x 0.14) + (75 x 0.054) + (20 x 0.021) + 3.0 + (0.4 x 4) + 5 = 27.9 kg (Fractions are rounded up.) (2) Units "ft" and "oz" (In an R2 system) <Formula> • When the piping length from the outdoor unit to the farthest indoor unit is 30.5 m (100 ft) or shorter Amount of High-pressure pipe o1-1/8 High-pressure pipe o7/8 High-pressure pipe o3/4 High-pressure pipe o5/8 additional charge = total length + total length + total length + total length (oz) x 3.88 (oz/ft) x 2.48 (oz/ft) x 1.73 (oz/ft) x 1.19 (oz/ft) Liquid pipe o5/8 total Liquid pipe o1/2 total Liquid pipe o3/8 total Liquid pipe o1/4 total + length + length + length + length x 2.16 (oz/ft) x 1.30 (oz/ft) x 0.65 (oz/ft) x 0.26 (oz/ft) Main or sub BC controller Amount (oz/unit) J-type 53 JA-type 106 KA-type 166 KB -type 15 Total capacity of outdoor units Amount (oz) (to be added for outdoor unit) Single 72 0 96 0 120 0 144 0 168 0 192 156 216 156 240 156 Combination 192 0 216 0 240 0 264 0 288 0 312 0 336 0 384 311 432 311 Total capacity of connected indoor units Amount (oz) (to be added for indoor unit) 27 or below 71 28 to 54 89 55to126 106 127to144 124 145 to 180 159 181 to 234 177 235to 273 212 274 to 307 283 308to 342 318 343 to 411 353 412 to 450 424 451 or above 494 1 1 I I 1 1 I I + 1 I I I 1 1 1 1 1 Total capacity of outdoor units Amount (oz) Single 72 53 96 53 120 106 144 89 168 142 192 124 216 142 240 159 Combination 192 142 216 159 240 177 264 89 288 53 312 71 336 71 384 0 432 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 * In the case all connected indoor unit models are Case 1 or Case 2, do NOT add the refrigerant listed in table ©. Instead, add the following amount of refrigerant. Case 1: TPLFYP006/018/036EM14** Add 24 oz per TPLFYPO06/018/036EM14**. Case 2: TPEFYP006/024/036MA14** Add 20 oz per TPEFYPO06/024/036MAl4**. WT09115X03 G B-30 • When the piping length from the outdoor unit to the farthest indoor unit is longer than 30.5 m (100 ft) Amount of High-pressure pipe o1-1/8 High-pressure pipe o7/8 High-pressure pipe o3/4 High-pressure pipe o5/8 additional charge = total length + total length + total length + total length (oz) x 3.54 (oz/ft) x 2.26 (oz/ft) x 1.51 (oz/ft) x 1.08 (oz/ft) Liquid pipe o5/8 total Liquid pipe o1/2 total Liquid pipe o3/8 total Liquid pipe o1/4 total + length + length + length + length x 1.94 (oz/ft) x 1.19 (oz/ft) x 0.59 (oz/ft) x 0.23 (oz/ft) Main or sub BC controller Amount (oz/unit) J-type 53 JA-type 106 KA-type 166 KB -type 15 Total capacity of outdoor units Amount (oz) (to be added for outdoor unit) Single 72 0 96 0 120 0 144 0 168 0 192 156 216 156 240 156 Combination 192 0 216 0 240 0 264 0 288 0 312 0 336 0 384 311 432 311 Total capacity of connected indoor units Amount (oz) (to be added for indoor unit) 27 or below 71 28 to 54 89 55 to 126 106 127 to 144 124 145 to 180 159 181 to 234 177 235 to 273 212 274 to 307 283 308 to 342 318 343 to 411 353 412 to 450 424 451 or above 494 *When connecting TPLFYP006EM14**, TPLFYP018EM14**, or TPLFYP036EM14**, add 24 oz of refrigerant per indoor unit. * When connecting TPEFYP006MA14**, TPEFYP024MA14**, or TPEFYP036MA14**, add 20 oz of refrigerant per indoor unit. <Example> Outdoor unit 1 model: P120 Outdoor unit 2 model: P120 BC controller (Main) model: TCMBM0108JA11 N4 BC controller (Sub) model: TCMBS0104KB11 N4 x 4 units Total capacity of connected indoor units: 206 Refer to the pipe connection examples in section 94 for the pipes marked with the letters below. A: 01-1/8; 131 ft B: o3/8; 32 ft C: o3/8; 16 ft D: o3/8; 16 ft E: o3/8; 16 ft F: o3/8; 16 ft G: o3/8; 16 ft H: o3/8; 16 ft I: o3/8; 16 ft Al: o3/4; 9 ft A2: o3/4; 3 ft a: o3/8; 32 ft b: o3/8; 16 ft c: o1/4; 16 ft d: o1/4; 32 ft e: o1/4; 16 ft f: o3/8; 16 ft g: o3/8; 16 ft h: o3/8; 16 ft WT09115X03 G B-31 The total length of the high-pressure piping and liquid piping in each case is as follows: o1-1/8 total length: 131 (A) o3/4 total length: 9 (Al) + 3 (A2) = 12 o3/8 total length: 32 (B) + 16 (C) + 16 (D) + 16 (E) + 16 (F) + 16 (G) + 16 (H) + 16 (1) + 32 (a) + 16 (b) + 16 (f) + 16 (g) + 16 (h) = 240 o1/4 total length: 16 (c) + 32 (d) + 16 (e) = 64 Therefore, when the piping length from the outdoor unit to the farthest indoor unit is longer than 30.5 m (100 ft), Amount of additional charge = (131 x 3.54) + (12 x 1.51) + (240 x 0.59) + (64 x 0.23) + 106 + (15 x 4) + 177 = 981.2 oz (Fractions are rounded up.) 9-9-2. Charging additional refrigerant Charge the calculated amount of refrigerant in the liquid state to the unit through the service port after the completion of piping work. Upon completion of all work, securely tighten all service port caps and shaft caps to prevent refrigerant leakage. • Do not vent the refrigerant into the atmosphere. • Refer to the table below for the appropriate tightening torque. Pipe size [mm (in)] Shaft cap (N-m) Service port cap (N-m) o9.52 (o3/8) 25 14 o12.7 (o1/2) 30 015.88 (o5/8) 35 019.05 (03/4) 25 o25.4 (o1) 25 o28.58 (o1-1/8) 24.5 18 • If the refrigerant tank does not have a siphon pipe, charge the liquid refrigerant with the tank upside-down as shown in the figure below. (A) Siphon pipe • After evacuation and refrigerant charging, ensure that the service valves are fully open. Do not operate the unit with the service valves closed. WT09115X03 GB-32 10. Electrical work Electrical work must be performed by qualified personnel in accordance with local regulations and the instructions provided in this manual. Only use the specified cables and dedicated circuits. - Inadequate power source capacity or improper electrical work will result in electric shock, malfunction, or fire. Proper grounding must be provided by qualified personnel. - Improper grounding may result in electric shock, fire, explosion, or malfunction due to electrical noise. Do not connect the ground wire to gas or water pipes, lightning rods, or telephone ground wires. 10-1. Before electrical work • When performing electrical work, refer to the indoor unit or controller installation manuals as well. • Bear in mind ambient conditions (ambient temperature, direct sunlight, rain water, etc.) when proceeding with the wiring and connections. • When opening or closing the front panel of the control box, do not let it come into contact with any of the internal components. • Specific wiring requirements should adhere to the wiring regulations of the region. • Include some slack in the wiring for the control box on the indoor and outdoor units, because these boxes are sometimes removed at the time of service work. 10-2. Power cables and device capacity Include some slack in the power cables. - Failure to do so may break or overheat the cables, resulting in smoke or fire. Install an inverter circuit breaker on the power supply of each unit. Failure to do so may result in electric shock or fire. Only use properly rated breakers (an earth leakage breaker, local switch <a switch + fuse that meets local electrical codes>, or overcurrent breaker). - Failure to do so may result in electric shock, malfunction, smoke, or fire. Only use standard power cables of sufficient capacity. - Failure to do so may result in current leakage, overheating, smoke, or fire. Tighten all terminal screws to the specified torque. - Loose screws and contact failure may result in smoke or fire. If a large electric current flows due to a malfunction or faulty wiring, earth -leakage breakers on the unit side and on the upstream side of the power supply system could both operate. Depending on the importance of the system, separate the power supply system or take protective coordination of breakers. • Wiring example OA Earth leakage breaker O T(S)NU: 3-208-230 V e © Outdoor unit Y(S)NU: 3-460 V © Pull box L1, L2, L3 OD Indoor unit E = c 0 Ground 0 Standard or main BC controller A -208-230 V OO Sub BC controller L1, L2 O O O 4 O _ I _ • Be sure to use the appropriate type of overcurrent breaker. Note that generated overcurrent may include some amount of direct current. • Select the type of breaker for an inverter circuit as an earth leakage breaker. (Mitsubishi Electric NV-C series or its equivalent) • The earth leakage breaker should be used in combination with a local switch. • Ensure the correct phase sequence. (1-1, L2, and L3) • If the power cable is damaged, it must be replaced by the manufacturer, its service agent or similarly qualified persons in order to avoid a hazard. • Use dedicated power cables for the outdoor unit and indoor unit. Ensure OC and OS are wired individually. • Power cable size, device capacity, and system impedance (If local regulations do not specify the minimum power cable size or device capacity, follow the values in the table below.) WT09115X03 G B-33 • Power cable size and device capacity MOP is used to select the fuse, switch, or breaker for current leakage. (1) 208V Outdoor unit model Unit combination Minimum size [mmz (AWG)] Earth leakage breaker MCA (A) MOP (A) Power cable Ground TURYP0723AN40AN/AB - 5.3(10) 5.3(10) 30 A 30 mA or 100 mA 0.1 sec. or less 24 40 TURYP0963AN40AN/AB - 8.4(8) 8.4(8) 40 A 100 mA 0.1 sec. or less 33 50 TURYP1203AN40AN/AB - 13.3(6) 13.3(6) 50 A 100 mA 0.1 sec. or less 43 70 TURYP1443AN40AN/AB - 21.2(4) 21.2(4) 60 A 100 mA 0.1 sec. or less 52 80 TURYP1683AN40AN/AB - 21.2(4) 21.2(4) 70 A 100 mA 0.1 sec. or less 61 100 TURYP0963AN40AN/AB 8.4(8) 8.4(8) 40 A 100 mA 0.1 sec. or less 33 50 TURYP1923BN40AN/AB TURYP0963AN40AN/AB 8.4(8) 8.4(8) 40 A 100 mA 0.1 sec. or less 33 50 TURYP1203AN40AN/AB 13.3(6) 13.3(6) 50 A 100 mA 0.1 sec. or less 43 70 TURYP2163BN40AN/AB TURYP0963AN40AN/AB 8.4(8) 8.4(8) 40 A 100 mA 0.1 sec. or less 33 50 TURYP1203AN40AN/AB 13.3(6) 13.3(6) 50 A 100 mA 0.1 sec. or less 43 70 TURYP24036N40AN/AB TURYP1203AN40AN/AB 13.3(6) 13.3(6) 50 A 100 mA 0.1 sec. or less 43 70 TURYP1443AN40AN/AB 21.2(4) 21.2(4) 60 A 100 mA 0.1 sec. or less 52 80 TURYP26436N40AN/AB TURYP1203AN40AN/AB 13.3(6) 13.3(6) 50 A 100 mA 0.1 sec. or less 43 70 TURYP1443AN40AN/AB 21.2(4) 21.2(4) 60 A 100 mA 0.1 sec. or less 52 80 TURYP28836N40AN/AB TURYP1443AN40AN/AB 21.2(4) 21.2(4) 60 A 100 mA 0.1 sec. or less 52 80 TURYP1683AN40AN/AB 21.2(4) 21.2(4) 70 A 100 mA 0.1 sec. or less 61 100 TURYP31236N40AN/AB TURYP1443AN40AN/AB 21.2(4) 21.2(4) 60 A 100 mA 0.1 sec. or less 52 80 TURYP1683AN40AN/AB 21.2(4) 21.2(4) 70 A 100 mA 0.1 sec. or less 61 100 TURYP33636N40AN/AB TURYP1683AN40AN/AB 21.2(4) 21.2(4) 70 A 100 mA 0.1 sec. or less 61 100 TURYE0723AN40AN/AB - 8.4(8) 8.4(8) 35 A 30 mA or 100 mA 0.1 sec. or less 23 35 TURYE0963AN40AN/AB - 13.3(6) 13.3(6) 45 A 100 mA 0.1 sec. or less 31 45 TURYE1203AN40AN/AB - 21.2(4) 21.4(4) 60 A 100 mA 0.1 sec. or less 41 60 TURYE1443AN40AN/AB - 21.2(4) 21.2(4) 60 A 100 mA 0.1 sec. or less 49 80 TURYE1683AN40AN/AB - 21.2(4) 21.2(4) 70 A 100 mA 0.1 sec. or less 57 90 TURYE1923AN40AN/AB - 33.6(2) 33.6(2) 80 A 100 mA 0.1 sec. or less 66 110 TURYE0963AN40AN/AB 13.3(6) 13.3(6) 45 A 100 mA 0.1 sec. or less 31 45 TURYE19236N40AN/AB TURYE0963AN40AN/AB 13.3(6) 13.3(6) 45 A 100 mA 0.1 sec. or less 31 45 TURYE2163AN40AN/AB - 33.6(2) 33.6(2) 100 A 100 mA 0.1 sec. or less 73 125 TURYE1203AN40AN/AB 21.2(4) 21.4(4) 60 A 100 mA 0.1 sec. or less 41 60 TURYE21636N40AN/AB TURYE0963AN40AN/AB 13.3(6) 13.3(6) 45 A 100 mA 0.1 sec. or less 31 45 TURYE2403AN40AN/AB - 33.6(2) 33.6(2) 100 A 100 mA 0.1 sec. or less 82 125 TURYE1203AN40AN/AB 21.2(4) 21.2(4) 60 A 100 mA 0.1 sec. or less 41 60 TURYE24036N40AN/AB TURYE1203AN40AN/AB 21.2(4) 21.2(4) 60 A 100 mA 0.1 sec. or less 41 60 TURYE1443AN40AN/AB 21.2(4) 21.2(4) 60 A 100 mA 0.1 sec. or less 49 80 TURYE2643BN40AN/AB TURYE1203AN40AN/AB 21.2(4) 21.2(4) 60 A 100 mA 0.1 sec. or less 41 60 TURYE1443AN40AN/AB 21.2(4) 21.2(4) 60 A 100 mA 0.1 sec. or less 49 80 TURYE2883BN40AN/AB TURYE1443AN40AN/AB 21.2(4) 21.2(4) 60 A 100 mA 0.1 sec. or less 49 80 TURYE1683AN40AN/AB 21.2(4) 21.2(4) 70 A 100 mA 0.1 sec. or less 57 90 TURYE3123BN40AN/AB TURYE1443AN40AN/AB 21.2(4) 21.2(4) 60 A 100 mA 0.1 sec. or less 49 80 TURYE1683AN40AN/AB 21.2(4) 21.2(4) 70 A 100 mA 0.1 sec. or less 57 90 TURYE33636N40AN/AB TURYE1683AN40AN/AB 21.2(4) 21.2(4) 70 A 100 mA 0.1 sec. or less 57 90 TURYE1923AN40AN/AB 33.6(2) 33.6(2) 80 A 100 mA 0.1 sec. or less 66 110 TURYE3843BN40AN/AB TURYE1923AN40AN/AB 33.6(2) 33.6(2) 80 A 100 mA 0.1 sec. or less 66 110 rTURYE4323BN40AN...-TURYE2163AN40AN/AB 33.6(2) 33.6(2) 100A100 mA0.1 sec. orless 73 125 TURYE2163AN40AN/AB 33.6(2) 33.6(2) 100 A 100 mA 0.1 sec. or less 73 125 WT09115X03 G B-34 (2) 230 V Outdoor unit model Unit combination Minimum size [mm2 (AWG)] Earth leakage breaker MCA (A) MOP (A) Power cable Ground TURYP0723AN40AN/AB - 5.3(10) 5.3(10) 30 A 30 mA or 100 mA 0.1 sec. or less 22 35 TURYP0963AN40AN/AB - 8.4(8) 8.4(8) 40 A 100 mA 0.1 sec. or less 30 45 TURYP1203AN40AN/AB - 13.3(6) 13.3(6) 50 A 100 mA 0.1 sec. or less 40 60 TURYP1443AN40AN/AB - 21.2(4) 21.2(4) 60 A 100 mA 0.1 sec. or less 48 70 TURYP1683AN40AN/AB - 21.2(4) 21.2(4) 70 A 100 mA 0.1 sec. or less 57 90 TURYP0963AN40AN/AB 8.4(8) 8.4(8) 40 A 100 mA 0.1 sec. or less 30 45 TURYP1923BN40AN/AB TURYP0963AN40AN/AB 8.4(8) 8.4(8) 40 A 100 mA 0.1 sec. or less 30 45 TURYP1203AN40AN/AB 13.3(6) 13.3(6) 50 A 100 mA 0.1 sec. or less 40 60 TURYP21636N40AN/AB TURYP0963AN40AN/AB 8.4(8) 8.4(8) 40 A 100 mA 0.1 sec. or less 30 45 TURYP1203AN40AN/AB 13.3(6) 13.3(6) 50 A 100 mA 0.1 sec. or less 40 60 TURYP24036N40AN/AB TURYP1203AN40AN/AB 13.3(6) 13.3(6) 50 A 100 mA 0.1 sec. or less 40 60 TURYP1443AN40AN/AB 21.2(4) 21.2(4) 60 A 100 mA 0.1 sec. or less 48 70 TURYP26436N40AN/AB TURYP1203AN40AN/AB 13.3(6) 13.3(6) 50 A 100 mA 0.1 sec. or less 40 60 TURYP1443AN40AN/AB 21.2(4) 21.2(4) 60 A 100 mA 0.1 sec. or less 48 70 TURYP28836N40AN/AB TURYP1443AN40AN/AB 21.2(4) 21.2(4) 60 A 100 mA 0.1 sec. or less 48 70 TURYP1683AN40AN/AB 21.2(4) 21.2(4) 70 A 100 mA 0.1 sec. or less 57 90 TURYP31236N40AN/AB TURYP1443AN40AN/AB 21.2(4) 21.2(4) 60 A 100 mA 0.1 sec. or less 48 70 TURYP1683AN40AN/AB 21.2(4) 21.2(4) 70 A 100 mA 0.1 sec. or less 57 90 TURYP3363BN40AN/AB TURYP1683AN40AN/AB 21.2(4) 21.2(4) 70 A 100 mA 0.1 sec. or less 57 90 TURYE0723AN40AN/AB - 5.3(10) 5.3(10) 30 A 30 mA or 100 mA 0.1 sec. or less 21 30 TURYE0963AN40AN/AB - 13.3(6) 13.3(6) 45 A 100 mA 0.1 sec. or less 29 45 TURYE1203AN40AN/AB - 21.2(4) 21.2(4) 60 A 100 mA 0.1 sec. or less 38 60 TURYE1443AN40AN/AB - 21.2(4) 21.2(4) 60 A 100 mA 0.1 sec. or less 45 70 TURYE1683AN40AN/AB - 21.2(4) 21.2(4) 70 A 100 mA 0.1 sec. or less 53 80 TURYE1923AN40AN/AB - 33.6(2) 33.6(2) 80 A 100 mA 0.1 sec. or less 60 100 TURYE0963AN40AN/AB 13.3(6) 13.3(6) 45 A 100 mA 0.1 sec. or less 29 45 TURYE19238N40AN/AB TURYE0963AN40AN/AB 13.3(6) 13.3(6) 45 A 100 mA 0.1 sec. or less 29 45 TURYE2163AN40AN/AB - 33.6(2) 33.6(2) 90 A 100 mA 0.1 sec. or less 67 110 TURYE1203AN40AN/AB 21.2(4) 21.2(4) 60 A 100 mA 0.1 sec. or less 38 60 TURYE2163BN40AN/AB TURYE0963AN40AN/AB 13.3(6) 13.3(6) 45 A 100 mA 0.1 sec. or less 29 45 TURYE2403AN40AN/AB - 33.6(2) 33.6(2) 90 A 100 mA 0.1 sec. or less 75 125 TURYE1203AN40AN/AB 21.2(4) 21.2(4) 60 A 100 mA 0.1 sec. or less 38 60 TURYE2403BN40AN/AB TURYE1203AN40AN/AB 21.2(4) 21.2(4) 60 A 100 mA 0.1 sec. or less 38 60 TURYE1443AN40AN/AB 21.2(4) 21.2(4) 60 A 100 mA 0.1 sec. or less 45 70 TURYE2643BN40AN/AB TURYE1203AN40AN/AB 21.2(4) 21.2(4) 60 A 100 mA 0.1 sec. or less 38 60 TURYE1443AN40AN/AB 21.2(4) 21.2(4) 60 A 100 mA 0.1 sec. or less 45 70 TURYE2883BN40AN/AB TURYE1443AN40AN/AB 21.2(4) 21.2(4) 60 A 100 mA 0.1 sec. or less 45 70 TURYE1683AN40AN/AB 21.2(4) 21.2(4) 70 A 100 mA 0.1 sec. or less 53 80 TURYE31236N40AN/AB TURYE1443AN40AN/AB 21.2(4) 21.2(4) 60 A 100 mA 0.1 sec. or less 45 70 TURYE1683AN40AN/AB 21.2(4) 21.2(4) 70 A 100 mA 0.1 sec. or less 53 80 TURYE3363BN40AN/AB TURYE1683AN40AN/AB 21.2(4) 21.2(4) 70 A 100 mA 0.1 sec. or less 53 80 TURYE1923AN40AN/AB 33.6(2) 33.6(2) 80 A 100 mA 0.1 sec. or less 60 100 TURYE3843BN40AN/AB TURYE1923AN40AN/AB 33.6(2) 33.6(2) 80 A 100 mA 0.1 sec. or less 60 100 TURYE2163AN40AN/AB 33.6(2) 33.6(2) 90 A 100 mA 0.1 sec. or less 67 110 TURYE43236N40AN/AB TURYE2163AN40AN/AB 33.6(2) 33.6(2) 90 A 100 mA 0.1 sec. or less 67 110 WT09115X03 G B-35 (3) 460 V Outdoor unit model Unit combination Minimum size [mm2 (AWG)] Earth leakage breaker MCA (A) (460 V) MOP (A) (460 V) Power cable Ground TURYP0724AN40AN/AB - 2.1 (14) 2.1 (14) 15 A 30 mA or 100 mA 0.1 sec. or less 11 15 TURYP0964AN40AN/AB - 3.3(12) 3.3(12) 20 A 30 mA or 100 mA 0.1 sec. or less 15 20 TURYP1204AN40AN/AB - 5.3(10) 5.3(10) 25 A 30 mA or 100 mA 0.1 sec. or less 18 25 TURYP1444AN40AN/AB - 5.3(10) 5.3(10) 30 A 30 mA or 100 mA 0.1 sec. or less 20 30 TURYP1684AN40AN/AB - 8.4(8) 8.4(8) 40 A 100 mA 0.1 sec. or less 28 40 TURYP0964AN40AN/AB 3.3(12) 3.3(12) 20 A 30 mA or 100 mA 0.1 sec. or less 15 20 TURYP1924BN40AN/AB TURYP0964AN40AN/AB 3.3(12) 3.3(12) 20 A 30 mA or 100 mA 0.1 sec. or less 15 20 TURYP1204AN40AN/AB 5.3(10) 5.3(10) 25 A 30 mA or 100 mA 0.1 sec. or less 18 25 TURYP2164BN40AN/AB TURYP0964AN40AN/AB 3.3(12) 3.3(12) 20 A 30 mA or 100 mA 0.1 sec. or less 15 20 TURYP1204AN40AN/AB 5.3(10) 5.3(10) 25 A 30 mA or 100 mA 0.1 sec. or less 18 25 TURYP2404BN40AN/AB TURYP1204AN40AN/AB 5.3(10) 5.3(10) 25 A 30 mA or 100 mA 0.1 sec. or less 18 25 TURYP1444AN40AN/AB 5.3(10) 5.3(10) 30 A 30 mA or 100 mA 0.1 sec. or less 20 30 TURYP26446N40AN/AB TURYP1204AN40AN/AB 5.3(10) 5.3(10) 25 A 30 mA or 100 mA 0.1 sec. or less 18 25 TURYP1444AN40AN/AB 5.3(10) 5.3(10) 30 A 30 mA or 100 mA 0.1 sec. or less 20 30 TURYP2884BN40AN/AB TURYP1444AN40AN/AB 5.3(10) 5.3(10) 30 A 30 mA or 100 mA 0.1 sec. or less 20 30 TURYP1684AN40AN/AB 8.4(8) 8.4(8) 40 A 100 mA 0.1 sec. or less 28 40 TURYP3124BN40AN/AB TURYP1444AN40AN/AB 5.3(10) 5.3(10) 30 A 30 mA or 100 mA 0.1 sec. or less 20 30 TURYP1684AN40AN/AB 8.4(8) 8.4(8) 40 A 100 mA 0.1 sec. or less 28 40 TURYP33646N40AN/AB TURYP1684AN40AN/AB 8.4(8) 8.4(8) 40 A 100 mA 0.1 sec. or less 28 40 TURYE0724AN40AN/AB - 2.1 (14) 2.1 (14) 15 A 30 mA or 100 mA 0.1 sec. or less 10 15 TURYE0964AN40AN/AB - 3.3(12) 3.3(12) 20 A 30 mA or 100 mA 0.1 sec. or less 14 20 TURYE1204AN40AN/AB - 5.3(10) 5.3(10) 30A30 mA or 100 mA0.1 sec. or less 19 30 TURYE1444AN40AN/AB - 8.4(8) 8.4(8) 35 A 30 mA or 100 mA 0.1 sec. or less 22 35 TURYE1684AN40AN/AB - 8.4(8) 8.4(8) 40 A 100 mA 0.1 sec. or less 26 40 TURYE1924AN40AN/AB - 8.4(8) 8.4(8) 40 A 100 mA 0.1 sec. or less 30 50 TURYE0964AN40AN/AB 3.3(12) 3.3(12) 20 A 30 mA or 100 mA 0.1 sec. or less 14 20 TURYE1924BN40AN/AB TURYE0964AN40AN/AB 3.3(12) 3.3(12) 20 A 30 mA or 100 mA 0.1 sec. or less 14 20 TURYE2164AN40AN/AB - 13.3(6) 13.3(6) 50 A 100 mA 0.1 sec. or less 33 50 TURYE1204AN40AN/AB 5.3(10) 5.3(10) 30 A 30 mA or 100 mA 0.1 sec. or less 19 30 TURYE2164BN40AN/AB TURYE0964AN40AN/AB 3.3(12) 3.3(12) 20 A 30 mA or 100 mA 0.1 sec. or less 14 20 TURYE2404AN40AN/AB - 13.3(6) 13.3(6) 50 A 100 mA 0.1 sec. or less 37 60 TURYE1204AN40AN/AB 5.3(10) 5.3(10) 30 A 30 mA or 100 mA 0.1 sec. or less 19 30 TURYE24046N40AN/AB TURYE1204AN40AN/AB 5.3(10) 5.3(10) 30 A 30 mA or 100 mA 0.1 sec. or less 19 30 TURYE1444AN40AN/AB 8.4(8) 8.4(8) 35 A 30 mA or 100 mA 0.1 sec. or less 22 35 TURYE2644BN40AN/AB TURYE1204AN40AN/AB 5.3(10) 5.3(10) 30 A 30 mA or 100 mA 0.1 sec. or less 19 30 TURYE1444AN40AN/AB 8.4(8) 8.4(8) 35 A 30 mA or 100 mA 0.1 sec. or less 22 35 TURYE2884BN40AN/AB TURYE1444AN40AN/AB 8.4(8) 8.4(8) 35 A 30 mA or 100 mA 0.1 sec. or less 22 35 TURYE1684AN40AN/AB 8.4(8) 8.4(8) 40 A 100 mA 0.1 sec. or less 26 40 TURYE31246N40AN/AB TURYE1444AN40AN/AB 8.4(8) 8.4(8) 35 A 30 mA or 100 mA 0.1 sec. or less 22 35 TURYE1684AN40AN/AB 8.4(8) 8.4(8) 40 A 100 mA 0.1 sec. or less 26 40 TURYE3364BN40AN/AB TURYE1684AN40AN/AB 8.4(8) 8.4(8) 40 A 100 mA 0.1 sec. or less 26 40 TURYE1924AN40AN/AB 8.4(8) 8.4(8) 40 A 100 mA 0.1 sec. or less 30 50 TURYE38446N40AN/AB TURYE1924AN40AN/AB 8.4(8) 8.4(8) 40 A 100 mA 0.1 sec. or less 30 50 TURYE2164AN40AN/AB 13.3(6) 13.3(6) 50 A 100 mA 0.1 sec. or less 1 33 50 TURYE4324BN40AN/AB TURYE2164AN40AN/AB 13.3 (6) 13.3(6) 50 A 100 mA 0.1 sec. or less 1 33 50 • The wire size is the minimum value for metal conduit wiring. If the voltage drops, use a wire that is one size thicker in diameter. Make sure the power -supply voltage does not drop more than 10%. Make sure that the voltage imbalance between the phases is 2% or less. • Power supply cords of parts of appliances for outdoor use shall not be lighter than polychloroprene sheathed flexible cord (design 245 IEC57). For example, use wiring such as YZW. 10-3. Control cable specifications • Transmission cable Type 2-core shielded cable CVVS, CPEVS, or MVVS Size 1.25 mm2 (AWG 16) Length Max. 200 m (656 ft) Remarks The maximum allowable length of transmission cables via outdoor units (both centralized control transmission cables and indoor -outdoor transmission cables) is 500 m (1640 ft)". The maximum allowable length of transmission cables from the power supply unit to each outdoor unit or to the system controller is 200 m (656 ft). Do not use a single multiple -core cable to connect indoor units that belong to different refrigerant systems. The use of a multiple -core cable may result in signal transmission errors and malfunctions. Ensure shield continuity when extending the transmission cable. *1 When extending the length of the transmission cables to 1000 m (3280 ft), consult your dealer. • Remote controller cable ME remote controller cable I MA remote controller cable Type 2-core sheathed cable (unshielded) CVV Size 0.3-1.25 mm2 (AWG 22-16) (0.75-1.25 mm2 (AWG 18-16) if a simple remote controller is connected) Length Max. 10 m (32 ft) If the length exceeds 10 m (32 ft), use a 1.25 mm2 (AWG 16) shielded cable. Max. 200 m (656 ft) WT09115X03 G B-36 10-4. System configuration • Unit code and the maximum number of connectable units Unit type Code Number of connectable units Outdoor unit Main unit OC — Sub unit OS — Indoor unit IC 1 to 50 units per OC (depends on the unit model) BC controller Main BC 1 unit per OC Sub BS 0 to 11 units per OC Remote controller RC 0 to 2 units per group Transmission booster unit RP 0 to 2 units per OC Atransmission booster may be required depending on the number of connected indoor units. The outdoor unit does not support PAC-SF46EPA but PAC-SF46EPA-G only. * The outdoor units in the same refrigerant circuit are automatically designated as OC and OS. The outdoor units are designated as OC and OS in the order of capacity from large to small (if two or more units have the same capacity, in the order of address from small to large). • System configuration example * The numbers in the parentheses in the figures below indicate address numbers. (1) When ME remote controllers are connected I Move the power jumper from CN41 to CN40. *1 0 * SW5-1: ON *2 CN41 51) (CN4 J Leave the power jumper connected to CN41. * SW5-1: ON *2 CN41 Group 1 Group 3 BC *3 (55 z) 11M2S o o IC Ic (01) (04) TB5 TB5 M1102S o1020 L3 II I AB 001) ME IC BC *3 (54) TB2 I1M2o II C 2) (03) TB5 M1M2S0no non F,..,,T II� AB I (103) I L ME Group 5 IC IC 1 BS *3 (55 TB )2(05) (0(3) 41M2S TB5 TB5 o o M1M2S A1M2S 000 000 I 83 I O AB (105) (155) L4 ME © ME Ic (07) M IM2S 000 I i OO Shielded cable © Sub remote controller © System controller *1 When a power supply unit is not connected to the centralized control transmission cable, move the power jumper from CN41 to CN40 on only one of the outdoor units (except 208-230 V model). When the System controller is connected to TB7 side and 208-230 V outdoor unit model is used, connect a power supply unit to TB7 side. If a power supply unit cannot be used, connect the System controller to TB3 side. Up to three System controllers can be connected to TB3 side. *2 If a system controller is used, set SW5-1 on all of the outdoor units to ON. *3 BC, BS Maximum allowable length of control cables Transmission cables via outdoor units L1 + L2 + L3 + L4, L1 + L2 + L3 + Ls, L1 + L2 + L6 5 500 m (1640 ft) Transmission cables L1, L3 + L4, L3 + Ls, Ls, 1-2 + Ls 5 200 I, (656 ft) b, f2, 6, fa 5 10 m (32 ft) Remote controller cables * If the length exceeds 10 m (32 ft), the length that exceeds 10 m (32 ft) needs to be included in the maximum allowable length of transmission cables above. *4 When extending the length of the transmission cables to 1000 m (3280 ft), consult your dealer. WT09115X03 G B-37 (2) When MA remote controllers are connected Move the power jumper from CN41 to CN40. *1 SW5-1: ON *2 Leave the power jumper connected to CN41. * SW5-1: ON *2 o m CN41 CN40 (51) L1 Group 1 Group 3 r IC j Ic 1 BC *3 (01) (04) BS (55) �15) OTBS MiM2S 1 2 TB15B25 MiM25 1 2 M1M25 I A i A B MA i L3 OC CN41 C IC (53) BC *3 (02) (03) O O O Tgg3 M7M2] Fn) B02 1M2S TB5 MiM2S TB15 1 2 TBS TF MiM2S coo .Co)D o 0 00 0 I of AQ 0E10"R 1� Group 5 r Ic I Ic (05) m2 (06) TBS TB15 TBS TB M1M2S 1 2 00 0 0 1 2 2 M4 00 A B O A B I E MA MA I O IC (07) TB5 TB15 M1M2S 1 000 2 -------------I O Shielded cable © Sub remote controller © System controller *1 When a power supply unit is not connected to the centralized control transmission cable, move the power jumper from CN41 to CN40 on only one of the outdoor units (except 208-230 V model). When the System controller is connected to TB7 side and 208-230 V outdoor unit model is used, connect a power supply unit to TB7 side. If a power supply unit cannot be used, connect the System controller to T133 side. Up to three System controllers can be connected to TB3 side. *2 If a system controller is used, set SW5-1 on all of the outdoor units to ON. *3 When a PAR-31 MAA is connected to a group, no other MA remote controllers can be connected to the same group. *4 BC, BS Maximum allowable length of control cables Transmission cables via outdoor units L1 + L2 + L3 + L4, L1 + L2 + LB <- 500 m (1640 ft) Transmission cables L1, L3 + L4, La, L2 + 1_6 5 200 m (656 ft) Remote controller cables mi + m2, m1 + m2 + m3 + m4 5 200 m (656 ft) *5 When extending the length of the transmission cables to 1000 m (3280 ft), consult your dealer. (3) When a transmission booster unit is connected L1 L2 L3 L4 Ls L7 ME ME O Shielded cable *1 Daisy -chain terminals (TB3) on outdoor units together in the same refrigerant system. *2 Leave the power jumper connected to CN41. When connecting a system controller to the transmission line (TB7) for centralized control, refer to (1), (2), or DATA BOOK. *3 BC Maximum allowable length of control cables L1 + L2 + L3 + L4 + Ls+ L7, L1 + L2 + L3 + L4 + Ls+ La, L1 + L2 + L3 + L5, Transmission cables L7 + L6 + L4 + L5, L5 + L4 + L6 + La 5 200 m (656 ft) t1, f2 5 10 m (32 ft) Remote controller cables * If the length exceeds 10 m (32 ft), the length that exceeds 10 m (32 ft) needs to be included in the maximum allowable length of transmission cables above. WT09115X03 G B-38 10-5. Wiring connections in the control box Connections must be made securely and without tension on the terminals. - Improperly connected cables may break, overheat, or cause smoke or fire. 10-5-1. Threading power cable through the knockout hole • Open the front panel when performing wiring work. • Punch out the knockout holes at the bottom of the front panel or base with a hammer. Use the appropriate knockout hole according to the size of the power cable, referring to the table below. (1) When routing the wiring through the front of the unit (2) When routing the wiring through the bottom of the unit M Power cable size (mmz) Knockout hole to be used 2, 3.5, 5.5 Knockout hole 2 8,14 Knockout hole 4 21, 26, 33 Knockout hole 3 53, 67, 84 Knockout hole 5 (0) Cable strap © Power cable © Transmission cable The length of the section after the cable access hole must be at least 1100 mm (43 in). OO Clamp OO Ground wire that connects Main Box and Inverter Box <Notice> • Do not remove the ground wire that connects Main Box and Inverter Box. • Install the transmission cable as shown in the figure above so that the cable is long enough for the Main Box to be moved for servicing. • If there are any gaps around the power cable and transmission cable, please be sure to fill these in with a suitable material to prevent snow from entering, which may cause damage to the electrical parts, and to protect your hands from direct contact with cables. • When putting the power cable through the knockout hole without using a conduit tube, deburr the hole and protect the power cable with protective tape. • Use a conduit tube to narrow down the opening if there is a possibility of small animals entering the unit. • When taking the conduit tube out from the bottom part of the unit, caulk around the tube opening to prevent water infiltration. WT09115X03 G B-39 cables10-5-2. Fixing the "Oute the cables as shown in the figures below. -0 .0 Mal-� y■ Power supply terminal block - _, r -•ate I _ r Cable strap '' -=�CI111111 Transmission terminal block 0 bushing Rubber(for FAN cable) � Rubber bushinge band main wiring rr V) and unit wiring (solenoid coil wiring)) Rubber bushing 1 Tie band a Rubber bushing 2 Unit wiring (sensor wiring) r Main inverter connection wiring �Iength (not supplied) (low voltage) ction after the cable e at least 1100 mm (43 in). Fill the gap. • P072, E072 (208-230 V) ICI r Transmission terminal block r Rubber bushing �T (for Fan cable and unit wiring (solenoid coil wiring)) • I - I I Tie band Rubber bushing 2 -- fir.■ _...,�' ��Il,� Unit wiring (sensor wirnq) i 0 Main inverter � connection wiring Transmission cable (low voltage) I T I (not supplied) Fill the gap. Inverter Box Power suooly terminal block Cable strap Rubber bushing (for FAN cable) Tie band (Supplied) Rubber bushing 1 IdPower cable (not supplied) WT09115X03 G B_40 • P096 to 168 (460 V), E096 to 240 (460 V) Fill the gap. • P096 to 168 (208-230 V), E096 to 240 (208-230 V) Fill the gap. WT09115X03 G B-41 Take the procedure below. O Thread the power cable through the rubber bushing 1. (See *1 and *2 below.) 0 Thread the unit wiring (sensor wiring) and the transmission cable through the rubber bushing 2. (See *1 and *2 below.) ® Hold the power cable and the transmission cable in place respectively with the cable straps. a0 Secure each rubber bushing with the supplied tie band. (See *3 below.) *1 Make sure the cables are not coming out of the rubber bushing cut. Top view Wiring t� Rubber bushinc Wiring Cut Cables are coming out of the rubber bushing. Rubber bushing ,--(oval part) Rubberbushing� Wiring (oval part) Top view Cross -sectional view *2 When threading the wiring through the rubber bushing, make sure the rubber bushing will not come off the sheet metal on the control box. Sheet metal on the control box Rubber bushing Sheet metal on the control box •\ Rubber bushing *3 When tying the supplied tie band around the rubber bushing, make sure to leave no gap between the ends. Tie band Approx. 20 mm (13/16 in) «Important» When putting the tie band on the rubber bushing, make sure the Overlapped i There is a gap in ends of the rubber bushing overlap each other as shown in the figure rubber bushing Cut on the rubber at left. rubber bushingthe bushing. Cut on the If there is a a water from snow or rain may enter, resulting in gap, Y 9 rubber equipment damage. bushing <Back of the rubberbushing> WT09115X03 G B-42 10-5-3. Connecting the cables P072.E072 O t )-2 © O B O o L1 L2 L3 OOO lOIOIOIIOIOIOI P096 to 168, E096 to 240 CA © O O o L1 L2 L3 0nn lOIOIOI I sn- I sn- Im I Control box © Power supply terminal block (TB1) © Terminal block for indoor -outdoor transmission cable (TB3) OO Terminal block for centralized control transmission cable (TB7) A, © Terminal block with loose screws © Properly installed terminal block © Spring washers must be parallel to the terminal block. CA) O� OO Power cables, transmission cables (B) © Daisy -chain (transmission cables only) © Terminal blocks (TB1, TB3, TB7) SOO Make an alignment mark. AIEJ (f) Install the ring terminals back to back. C <Notice> • Connect the cables respectively to the power supply terminal block and the transmission terminal block. Erroneous connection does not allow the system to operate. • Never connect the power cable to the transmission terminal block. If connected, electrical parts will be damaged. • Transmission cables should be (5 cm (2 in) or more) apart from the power cable so that it is not influenced by electric noise from the power cable. (Do not put the transmission cables and the power cable in the same conduit.) • Follow the tightening torque for each screw type as shown below. Be careful not to use excessive torque as this could damage the screw. Terminal block (TB1, 208-230 V (M8 screw): 10-13.5 [N•m], 460 V (M6 screw)): 2.5-2.9 [N•m] Terminal block (TB3, TB7 (M3.5 screw)): 0.82-1.0 [N•m] • When tightening the screws, do not push the driver strongly to avoid damaging the screw. • Make an alignment mark with a permanent marker across the screw head, washer, and terminal after tightening the screws. Take the procedure below to connect the cables. 11) Connect the indoor -outdoor transmission cable to TB3. If multiple outdoor units are connected to the same refrigerant system, daisy -chain TB3 (M1, M2, ground) on the outdoor units. The indoor - outdoor transmission cable to the indoor unit should be connected to TB3 (M1, M2, ground) of only one of the outdoor units. Connect the shield to the ground terminal. (4) Connect the centralized control transmission cables (between the centralized control system and the outdoor units of different refrigerant systems) to TB7. If multiple outdoor units are connected to the same refrigerant system, daisy -chain TB7 (M1, M2, S) on all outdoor units.'' Connect the shield to the S terminal. '1 If TB7 on the outdoor units in the same refrigerant system are not daisy -chained, connect the centralized control transmission cable to TB7 on the OC. If the OC is out of order, or if centralized control is being conducted during a power supply shut-off, daisy -chain TB7 on the OC and OS. (In the case that the outdoor unit whose power jumper CN41 on the control board has been replaced with CN40 is out of order or the power is shut-off, centralized control will not be conducted even when TB7 is daisy -chained.) ® When a power supply unit is not connected to the centralized control transmission cable, move the powerjumper from CN41 to CN40 on only one of the outdoor units (except 208-230 V model). When the System controller is connected to TB7 side and 208-230 V outdoor unit model is used, connect a power supply unit to TB7 side. If a power supply unit cannot be used, connect the System controller to T133 side. Up to three System controllers can be connected to TB3 side. ® On the outdoor unit whose power jumper was moved from CN41 to CN40, short circuit the S terminal and the ground terminal. 0 Connect terminals M1 and M2 of the transmission terminal block on the indoor unit that has the lowest address in the group to the terminal block on the remote controller. © When a system controller is connected, set SW5-1 on all outdoor units to ON. 07 Fix the cables securely in place with the cable strap below the terminal block. WT09115X03 G B-43 10-6. Address setting • Set the address setting switch as follows. Address setting method Address Assign the lowest address to the main indoor unit in the group, and assign sequential addresses to the rest of the indoor units in the same group. * In an R2 system with a sub BC controller, make the settings for the indoor units in the following order. (Set the addresses Indoor unit (Main, Sub) so that the addresses of T are smaller than those of (0), and the addresses of OO are smaller than those of OO .) 01 to 50 ,O Indoor units that are connected to the main BC controller or main HBC controller OO Indoor units that are connected to sub BC controller 1 Indoor units that are connected to sub BC controller 2 Outdoor unit (OC, OS) Assign sequential addresses to the outdoor units in the same refrigerant system. 51 to 100 * To set the address to 100, the address setting switch must be set to 50. Assign an address that equals the address of the outdoor unit plus 1. If the address that is assigned to the main BC Main controller overlaps any of the addresses that are assigned to the outdoor units or to the sub BC controller, use a 51 to 100 different, unused address within the setting range. BC controller * To set the address to 100, the address setting switch must be set to 50. Assign an address that equals the lowest address of the indoor units that are connected to the sub BC controller plus Sub 50. 51 to 100 To set the address to 100, the address setting switch must be set to 50. Main Assign an address that equals the address of the main indoor unit in the group plus 100. 101 to 150 ME remote controller Sub Assign an address that equals the address of the main indoor unit in the group plus 150. 151 to 200 MA remote controller Address setting is not required. (The Main/Sub setting is required.) — * The outdoor units in the same refrigerant circuit are automatically designated as OC and OS. The outdoor units are designated as OC and OS in the order of capacity from large to small (if two or more units have the same capacity, in the order of address from small to large). Make indoor unit group settings from remote controllers after turning on the power to all units. O PLALV O �E eaeaT' eaFa al Address setting switch (Outdoor units) WT09115X03 G B-44 11. Test run 11-1. Before a test run After the wiring work has been completed, measure the insulation resistance, and make sure that it reads at least 1 MCI. - Failure to do so may result in electric leakage, malfunction, or fire. Turn on the power at least 12 hours before starting operation. Keep the power turned on throughout the operating season. - Insufficient energizing will result in malfunction. • Before performing a test run, turn off the power to the outdoor unit, and disconnect the power cable from the power supply terminal block to measure the insulation resistance. • Measure the insulation resistance between the power supply terminal block and the earth with a 500 V ohmmeter, and make sure it is at least 1 Mo. • If the insulation resistance is 1 MO or above, connect the power cable to the power supply terminal, and turn on the power at least 12 hours before starting operation. If the insulation resistance is below 1 MQ, do not operate the unit, and check the compressor for a earth fault. • While the unit is turned on, the compressor will remain energized even when it is stopped. • The insulation resistance between the power supply terminal block and the earth may drop to near 1 MO immediately after installation or when the main power to the unit has been turned off for a long time because of the stagnation of refrigerant in the compressor. • By turning on the main power and energizing the unit for 12 hours or longer, the refrigerant in the compressor will evaporate and the insulation resistance will rise. • Do not apply an ohmmeter voltage to the terminal block for transmission cables. Doing so will damage the control board. • Do not measure the insulation resistance of the transmission terminal block of the unit remote controller. • Check for refrigerant leakage and for loose power cables and transmission cables. • Check that the high-pressure side and low-pressure side service valves are fully open. Tighten the valve caps. • Check the phase order of the power supply and the interphase voltage. If the voltage is out of the ±10% range, or if the voltage imbalance is more than 2%, discuss the countermeasure with the customer. • When a transmission booster unit is connected, turn on the transmission booster unit before turning on the outdoor unit. If the outdoor unit is turned on first, the refrigerant circuit connection information will not be properly verified. If the outdoor unit is turned on first, turn on the transmission booster unit and then power reset the outdoor unit. • When a power supply unit is connected to the centralized control transmission cable, or when power is supplied from a system controller with a power -supply function, perform a test run with the power supply unit being energized. Leave the power jumper connected to CN41. • When power is turned on or after power recovery, performance may degrade for approximately 30 minutes. WT09115X03 G B-45 11-2. Function setting Make function settings by setting the dipswitches SW4, SW6, and SWP3 on the main board. Write down the switch settings on the electrical wiring diagram label on the control box front panel for future reference when the control box needs to be replaced. • Take the following steps to make temperature unit (°C or OF) settings. O Set the 10th bit of SW6 to ON. 02 Set SW4 as shown in the table below to select the setting item No.921. (The setting item No. will be displayed on LED1.) OO Press SWP3 for two seconds or longer to change the settings. (The settings can be checked on LED3.) Setting item No. SW4 0: OFF, 1: ON *' Setting (LED3 display) *2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Unlit Lit Temperature unit 921 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 °c OF setting *1 Make the SW4 setting after the unit is energized. *2 This will blink while the system is starting up. • Make various function settings by setting SW5 and SW6, referring to the table below. Setting content Setting Switch setting timing OFF ON SW5-1 Centralized control switch Without connection to the centralized controller With connection to the centralized controller Before being energized SW5-2 Deletion of connection information Normal control Deletion Before being energized SW5-3 — Preset before shipment — SW5-4 — — SW5-5 — — SW5-6 — — SW5-7 — — SW5-8 — — Setting content Setting Switch setting timing OFF ON SW6-1 — — — — SW6-2 — — — — SW6-3 — — — — SW6-4 High static pressure setting Refer to *1. Refer to *1. Before being energized SW6-5 SW6-6 — — — — SW6-7 Low -noise mode selection Performance priority Low -noise priority Any time after being energized SW6-8 Selection of Low -noise or Demand Low -noise (Night) Demand Before being energized SW6-9 Selection of Diagnostic display or Function detail setting Refer to *2. Refer to *2. Any time after being energized SW6-10 * Do not change the factory settings of SW5-3 through SW5-8. Unless otherwise specified, leave the switch to OFF where indicated by' ," which may be set to OFF for a reason. *1 *2 SW6-5:ON SW6-5:OFF SW6-4: ON 80 Pa 60 Pa SW6-4: OFF 30 Pa 0 Pa SW6-10: ON SW6-10: OFF SW6-9: ON LED (round type) No. 0 to 1023 LED (7seg) No. 1024 to 2047 SW6-9: OFF Function setting No. 0 to 1023 LED (7seg) No. 0 to 1023 11-3. Operation characteristics in relation to the refrigerant charge It is important to have a clear understanding of the characteristics of refrigerant and the operation characteristics of air conditioners before attempting to adjust the refrigerant charge in a given system. • During cooling operation, the amount of refrigerant in the accumulator is the smallest when all indoor units are in operation. • During heating operation, the amount of refrigerant in the accumulator is the largest when all indoor units are in operation. • Refrigerant undercharge creates a tendency for the discharge temperature to rise. • Changing the amount of refrigerant in the system while there is refrigerant in the accumulator has little effect on the discharge temperature. • The higher the high pressure level, the more likely it is for the discharge temperature to rise. • The lower the low pressure level, the more likely it is for the discharge temperature to rise. • When the amount of refrigerant in the system is adequate, the compressor shell temperature is 10 to 600C (50 to 140°F) higher than the low- pressure saturation temperature. If the temperature difference between the compressor shell temperature and low-pressure saturation temperature is 50C (41°F) or less, refrigerant overcharge is suspected. WT09115X03 G B-46 11-4. Operation check The following symptoms are normal and do not indicate a problem. Events Display on remote Cause controller The auto vane automatically switches air flow direction. Normal display The auto vane may switch over to horizontal air flow operation from vertical air flow operation in cooling mode if the vertical air flow operation has been running for one hour. At defrost in heating mode or immediately after heating start-up/shutdown, the auto vane automatically switches to horizontal air flow for a short time. The fan speed automatically changes during heating Normal display The fan operates at Very Low speed when the thermostat is turned off, and automatically changes over to the operation. preset speed according to the timer setting or refrigerant temperature when the thermostat is turned on. The fan stops during heating operation. "Defrost' The fan remains stopped during the defrost cycle. The fan keeps running after the unit has stopped. No display After the unit has stopped during heating operation, the fan operates for one minute to exhaust heat. At the beginning of heating operation, the fan cannot be "Stand By" The fan operates at Very Low speed for five minutes after heating operation starts or until the refrigerant manually set. temperature reaches 350C (950F), then the fan operates at Low speed for two minutes, and finally the fan operates at the preset speed. When the main power is turned on, the display as shown "HO" or "PLEASE The system is starting up. Wait until "HO" or "PLEASE WAIT' stops blinking and goes off then try again. right appears on the remote controller for about five WAIT' blinks. minutes. The drain pump keeps running after the unit has No display The drain pump remains in operation for three minutes after the unit in cooling mode has stopped. stopped. The drain pump goes into operation when drain water is detected, even when the unit is stopped. The indoor unit emits noise when switching from heating Normal display This is a normal sound of the refrigerant circuit operating properly. to cooling and vice versa. Immediately after startup, the indoor unit emits the Normal display Unstable flow of the heating medium produces a sound. This is temporary and does not imply a problem. sound of liquid flowing. In a short while after the outdoor unit stops, the unit No display After the unit stops and before the unit performs pressure equalization, the pressure difference temporarily makes a clicking sound. becomes small and the check valve may vibrate and make a sound. This is temporary and does not imply a problem. Drain water comes out of the outdoor unit from the No display This ensures proper drainage of drain water in case the drain water freezes and remains in the outdoor unit bottom part of the heat exchanger. during the heating operation at low ambient temperature. 12. Inspection and maintenance Only qualified personnel must relocate or repair the unit. Do not attempt to disassemble or alter the unit. - Failure to do so will result in refrigerant leakage, water leakage, serious injury, electric shock, or fire. • While the unit is turned on, the compressor will remain energized even when it is stopped. Before inspecting the inside of the control box, turn off the power, keep the unit off for at least 10 minutes, and confirm that the capacitor voltage (inverter main circuit) has dropped to 20 VDC or less. (It takes about 10 minutes to discharge electricity after the power supply is turned off.) • Control boxes house high -voltage and high -temperature electrical parts. They may still remain energized or hot after the power is turned off. • Perform the service after disconnecting the connector (RYFAN1 and RYFAN2). (To plug or unplug connectors, check that the outdoor unit fan is not rotating and that the voltage of capacitor in the main circuit is 20 VDC or below. The capacitor may collect a charge and cause an electric shock when the outdoor unit fan rotates in windy conditions. Refer to the wiring nameplate for details.) Reconnect the connector (RYFAN1 and RYFAN2) after servicing. • Unit components may be damaged after long use of the unit, resulting in a performance drop or the unit becoming a safety hazard. To use the unit safely and maximize its life, it is recommended that a maintenance contract with a dealer or qualified personnel be signed. If the contract is signed, service technicians will periodically inspect the unit to identify any damage at an early stage, and take appropriate measures. • Please contact local MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC sales office for maintenance frequency and tasking recommendations. • When the outdoor unit is installed on the waterproof sheet, the sheet may become dirty due to the copper component seeped out from the unit. In this case, installing a drain pan for centralized drainage is recommended. WT09115X03 G B_47 13. Rating plate information (1) 208-230 V Model TURYP0723AN40AN/AB TURYP0963AN40AN/AB TURYP1203AN40AN/AB TURYP1443AN40AN/AB TURYP1683AN40AN/AB Unit combination - - - - - Refrigerant (R410A) 5.2 kg [11 Ibs 7 oz] 8.0 kg [17 Ibs 10 oz] 8.0 kg [17 Ibs 10 oz] 10.8 kg [23 Ibs 12 oz] 10.8 kg [23 Ibs 12 oz] Allowable pressure (Ps) HP: 4.15 MPa [601 psi], LP: 2.21 MPa [320 psi] Net weight 219 kg [483 Ibs] 261 kg [576 Ibs] 1 271 kg [598 Ibs] 1 293 kg [646 Ibs] 335 kg [739 Ibs] Model TURYP1923BN40AN/AB TURYP2163BN40AN/AB Unit combination TURYP0963AN40AN/AB TURYP0963AN40AN/AB TURYP1203AN40AN/AB TURYP0963AN40AN/AB Refrigerant (R410A) 8.0 kg [17 Ibs 10 oz] 8.0 kg [17 Ibs 10 oz] 8.0 kg [17 Ibs 10 oz] 8.0 kg [17 Ibs 10 oz] Allowable pressure (Ps) HP: 4.15 MPa [601 psi], LP: 2.21 MPa [320 psi] Net weight 261 kg [576 Ibs] 261 kg [576 Ibs] 1 271 kg [598 Ibs] 261 kg [576 Ibs] Model TURYP2403BN40AN/AB TURYP2643BN40AN/AB Unit combination TURYP1203AN40AN/AB TURYP1203AN40AN/AB TURYP1443AN40AN/AB TURYP1203AN40AN/AB Refrigerant (R410A) 8.0 kg [17 Ibs 10 oz] 8.0 kg [17 Ibs 10 oz] 10.8 kg [23 Ibs 12 oz] 8.0 kg [17 Ibs 10 oz] Allowable pressure (Ps) HP: 4.15 MPa [601 psi], LP: 2.21 MPa [320 psi] Net weight 271 kg [598 Ibs] 271 kg [598 Ibs] 1 293 kg [646 Ibs] 271 kg [598 Ibs] Model TURYP2883BN40AN/AB TURYP3123BN40AN/AB Unit combination TURYP1443AN40AN/AB TURYP1443AN40AN/AB TURYP1683AN40AN/AB TURYP1443AN40AN/AB Refrigerant (R410A) 10.8 kg [23 Ibs 12 oz] 10.8 kg [23 Ibs 12 oz] 10.8 kg [23 Ibs 12 oz] 10.8 kg [23 Ibs 12 oz] Allowable pressure (Ps) HP: 4.15 MPa [601 psi], LP: 2.21 MPa [320 psi] Net weight 293 kg [646 Ibs] 293 kg [646 Ibs] 1 335 kg [739 Ibs] 293 kg [646 Ibs] Model TURYP3363BN40AN/AB Unit combination TURYP1683AN40AN/AB TURYP1683AN40AN/AB Refrigerant (R410A) 10.8 kg [23 Ibs 12 oz] 10.8 kg [23 Ibs 12 oz] Allowable pressure (Ps) HP: 4.15 MPa [601 psi], LP: 2.21 MPa [320 psi] Net weight 335 kg [739 Ibs] 1 335 kg [739 Ibs] Model TURYE0723AN40AN/AB TURYE0963AN40AN/AB TURYE1203AN40AN/AB TURYE1443AN40AN/AB TURYE1683AN40AN/AB Unit combination - - - - - Refrigerant (R410A) 5.2 kg (11 Ibs 7 oz] 8.0 kg [17 Ibs 10 oz] 8.0 kg [17 Ibs 10 oz] 10.8 kg [23 Ibs 12 oz] 10.8 kg [23 Ibs 12 oz] Allowable pressure (Ps) HP: 4.15 MPa [601 psi], LP: 2.21 MPa [320 psi] Net weight 235 kg [519 Ibs] 278 kg [613 Ibs] 1 282 kg [622 Ibs] 1 308 kg [680 Ibs] 352 kg [777 Ibs] Model TURYE1923AN40AN/AB TURYE1923BN40AN/AB TURYE2163AN40AN/AB Unit combination - TURYE0963AN40AN/AB TURYE0963AN40AN/AB - Refrigerant (R410A) 11.8 kg [26 Ibs 1 oz] 8.0 kg [17 Ibs 10 oz] 8.0 kg [17 Ibs 10 oz] 11.8 kg [26 Ibs 1 oz] Allowable pressure (Ps) HP: 4.15 MPa [601 psi], LP: 2.21 MPa [320 psi] Net weight 402 kg [887 Ibs] 278 kg [613 Ibs] 278 kg [613 Ibs] 402 kg [887 Ibs] Model TURYE2163BN40AN/AB TURYE2403AN40AN/AB TURYE2403BN40AN/AB Unit combination TURYE1203AN40AN/AB TURYE0963AN40AN/AB - TURYE1203AN40AN/AB TURYE1203AN40AN/AB Refrigerant (R410A) 8.0 kg [17 Ibs 10 oz] 8.0 kg [17 Ibs 10 oz] 11.8 kg [26 Ibs 1 oz] 8.0 kg [17 Ibs 10 oz] 8.0 kg [17 Ibs 10 oz] Allowable pressure (Ps) HP: 4.15 MPa [601 psi], LP: 2.21 MPa [320 psi] Net weight 282 kg [622 Ibs] 278 kg [613 Ibs] 1 402 kg [887 Ibs] 1 282 kg [622 Ibs] 282 kg [622 Ibs] Model TURYE2643BN40AN/AB TURYE2883BN40AN/AB Unit combination TURYE1443AN40AN/AB TURYE1203AN40AN/AB TURYE1443AN40AN/AB TURYE1443AN40AN/AB Refrigerant (R410A) 10.8 kg [23 Ibs 12 oz] 8.0 kg [17 Ibs 10 oz] 10.8 kg [23 Ibs 12 oz] 10.8 kg [23 Ibs 12 oz] Allowable pressure (Ps) HP: 4.15 MPa [601 psi], LP: 2.21 MPa [320 psi] Net weight 308 kg [680 Ibs] 282 kg [622 Ibs] 1 308 kg [680 Ibs] 308 kg [680 Ibs] Model TURYE3123BN40AN/AB TURYE3363BN40AN/AB Unit combination TURYE1683AN40AN/AB TURYE1443AN40AN/AB TURYE1683AN40AN/AB TURYE1683AN40AN/AB Refrigerant (R410A) 10.8 kg [23 Ibs 12 oz] 10.8 kg [23 Ibs 12 oz] 10.8 kg [23 Ibs 12 oz] 10.8 kg [23 Ibs 12 oz] Allowable pressure (Ps) HP: 4.15 MPa [601 psi], LP: 2.21 MPa [320 psi] Net weight 352 kg [777 Ibs] 308 kg [680 Ibs] 1 352 kg [777 Ibs] 352 kg [777 Ibs] Model TURYE3843BN40AN/AB TURYE4323BN40AN/AB Unit combination TURYE1923AN40AN/AB TURYE1923AN40AN/AB TURYE2163AN40AN/AB TURYE2163AN40AN/AB Refrigerant (R410A) 11.8 kg [26 Ibs 1 oz] 11.8 kg [26 Ibs 1 oz] 11.8 kg [26 Ibs 1 oz] 11.8 kg [26 Ibs 1 oz] Allowable pressure (Ps) HP: 4.15 MPa [601 psi], LP: 2.21 MPa [320 psi] Net weight 402 kg [887 Ibs] 402 kg [887 Ibs] 1 402 kg [887 Ibs] 402 kg [887 Ibs] WT09115X03 G B_48 (2) 460 V Model TURYP0724AN40AN/AB TURYP0964AN40AN/AB TURYP1204AN40AN/AB TURYP1444AN40AN/AB TURYP1684AN40AN/AB Unit combination - - - - - Refrigerant (R410A) 5.2 kg [11 Ibs 7 oz] 8.0 kg [17 Ibs 10 oz] 8.0 kg [17 Ibs 10 oz] 10.8 kg [23 Ibs 12 oz] 10.8 kg [23 Ibs 12 oz] Allowable pressure (Ps) HP: 4.15 MPa [601 psi], LP: 2.21 MPa [320 psi] Net weight 234 kg [516 Ibs] 277 kg [611 Ibs] 287 kg [633 Ibs] 1 309 kg [682 Ibs] 351 kg [774 Ibs] Model TURYP1924BN40AN/AB TURYP2164BN40AN/AB Unit combination TURYP0964AN40AN/AB TURYP0964AN40AN/AB TURYP1204AN40AN/AB TURYP0964AN40AN/AB Refrigerant (R410A) 8.0 kg [17 Ibs 10 oz] 8.0 kg [17 Ibs 10 oz] 8.0 kg [17 Ibs 10 oz] 8.0 kg [17 Ibs 10 oz] Allowable pressure (Ps) HP: 4.15 MPa [601 psi], LP: 2.21 MPa [320 psi] Net weight 277 kg [611 Ibs] 277 kg [611 Ibs] 287 kg [633 Ibs] 277 kg [611 Ibs] Model TURYP2404BN40AN/AB TURYP2644BN40AN/AB Unit combination TURYP1204AN40AN/AB TURYP1204AN40AN/AB TURYP1444AN40AN/AB TURYP1204AN40AN/AB Refrigerant (R410A) 8.0 kg [17 Ibs 10 oz] 8.0 kg [17 Ibs 10 oz] 10.8 kg [23 Ibs 12 oz] 8.0 kg [17 Ibs 10 oz] Allowable pressure (Ps) HP: 4.15 MPa [601 psi], LP: 2.21 MPa [320 psi] Net weight 287 kg [633 Ibs] 287 kg [633 Ibs] 1 309 kg [682 Ibs] 287 kg [633 Ibs] Model TURYP2884BN40AN/AB TURYP3124BN40AN/AB Unit combination TURYP1444AN40AN/AB TURYP1444AN40AN/AB TURYP1684AN40AN/AB TURYP1444AN40AN/AB Refrigerant (R410A) 10.8 kg [23 Ibs 12 oz] 10.8 kg [23 Ibs 12 oz] 10.8 kg [23 Ibs 12 oz] 10.8 kg [23 Ibs 12 oz] Allowable pressure (Ps) HP: 4.15 MPa [601 psi], LP: 2.21 MPa [320 psi] Net weight 309 kg [682 Ibs] 309 kg [682 Ibs] 351 kg [774 Ibs] 309 kg [682 Ibs] Model TURYP3364BN40AN/AB Unit combination TURYP1684AN40AN/AB TURYP1684AN40AN/AB Refrigerant (R410A) 10.8 kg [23 Ibs 12 oz] 10.8 kg [23 Ibs 12 oz] Allowable pressure (Ps) HP: 4.15 MPa [601 psi], LP: 2.21 MPa [320 psi] Net weight 351 kg [774 Ibs] 1 351 kg [774 Ibs] Model TURYE0724AN40AN/AB TURYE0964AN40AN/AB TURYE1204AN40AN/AB TURYE1444AN40AN/AB TURYE1684AN40AN/AB Unit combination - - - - - Refrigerant (R410A) 5.2 kg (11 Ibs 7 oz] 8.0 kg [17 Ibs 10 oz] 8.0 kg [17 Ibs 10 oz] 10.8 kg [23 Ibs 12 oz] 10.8 kg [23 Ibs 12 oz] Allowable pressure (Ps) HP: 4.15 MPa [601 psi], LP: 2.21 MPa [320 psi] Net weight 250 kg [552 Ibs] 294 kg [649 Ibs] 1 298 kg [657 Ibs] 1 324 kg [715 Ibs] 366 kg [807 Ibs] Model TURYE1924AN40AN/AB TURYE1924BN40AN/AB TURYE2164AN40AN/AB Unit combination - TURYE0964AN40AN/AB TURYE0964AN40AN/AB - Refrigerant (R410A) 11.8 kg [26 Ibs 1 oz] 8.0 kg [17 Ibs 10 oz] 8.0 kg [17 Ibs 10 oz] 11.8 kg [26 Ibs 1 oz] Allowable pressure (Ps) HP: 4.15 MPa [601 psi], LP: 2.21 MPa [320 psi] Net weight 416 kg [918 Ibs] 294 kg [649 Ibs] 1 294 kg [649 Ibs] 416 kg [918 Ibs] Model TURYE2164BN40AN/AB TURYE2404AN40AN/AB TURYE2404BN40AN/AB Unit combination TURYE1204AN40AN/AB TURYE0964AN40AN/AB - TURYE1204AN40AN/AB TURYE1204AN40AN/AB Refrigerant (R410A) 8.0 kg [17 Ibs 10 oz] 8.0 kg [17 Ibs 10 oz] 11.8 kg [26 Ibs 1 oz] 8.0 kg [17 Ibs 10 oz] 8.0 kg [17 Ibs 10 oz] Allowable pressure (Ps) HP: 4.15 MPa [601 psi], LP: 2.21 MPa [320 psi] Net weight 298 kg [657 Ibs] 294 kg [649 Ibs] 1 416 kg [918 Ibs] 1 298 kg [657 Ibs] 298 kg [657 Ibs] Model TURYE2644BN40AN/AB I TURYE2884BN40AN/AB Unit combination TURYE1444AN40AN/AB TURYE1204AN40AN/AB TURYE1444AN40AN/AB TURYE1444AN40AN/AB Refrigerant (R410A) 10.8 kg [23 Ibs 12 oz] 8.0 kg [17 Ibs 10 oz] 10.8 kg [23 Ibs 12 oz] 10.8 kg [23 Ibs 12 oz] Allowable pressure (Ps) HP: 4.15 MPa [601 psi], LP: 2.21 MPa [320 psi] Net weight 324 kg [715 Ibs] 298 kg [657 Ibs] 1 324 kg [715 Ibs] 324 kg [715 Ibs] Model TURYE3124BN40AN/AB TURYE3364BN40AN/AB Unit combination TURYE1684AN40AN/AB TURYE1444AN40AN/AB TURYE1684AN40AN/AB TURYE1684AN40AN/AB Refrigerant (R410A) 10.8 kg [23 Ibs 12 oz] 10.8 kg [23 Ibs 12 oz] 10.8 kg [23 Ibs 12 oz] 10.8 kg [23 Ibs 12 oz] Allowable pressure (Ps) HP: 4.15 MPa [601 psi], LP: 2.21 MPa [320 psi] Net weight 366 kg [807 Ibs] 324 kg [715 Ibs] 1 366 kg (807 Ibs] 366 kg [807 Ibs] Model TURYE3844BN40AN/AB TURYE4324BN40AN/AB Unit combination TURYE1924AN40AN/AB TURYE1924AN40AN/AB TURYE2164AN40AN/AB TURYE2164AN40AN/AB Refrigerant (R410A) 11.8 kg [26 Ibs 1 oz] 11.8 kg [26 Ibs 1 oz] 11.8 kg [26 Ibs 1 oz] 11.8 kg [26 Ibs 1 oz] Allowable pressure (Ps) HP: 4.15 MPa [601 psi], LP: 2.21 MPa [320 psi] Net weight 416 kg [918 Ibs] 416 kg [918 Ibs] 1 416 kg [918 Ibs] 416 kg [918 Ibs] WT09115X03 G B-49 WT09115X03 G B-50 Contenido 1. Precauciones de seguridad............................................................................................2 1-1. Precauciones generales........................................................................................................2 1-2. Precauciones para el transporte de la unidad.......................................................................3 1-3. Precauciones para la instalacion de la unidad......................................................................3 1-4. Precauciones para los trabajos de instalacion de los tubos..................................................4 1-5. Precauciones para el cableado electrico...............................................................................4 1-6. Precauciones para reubicar o reparar la unidad....................................................................5 1-7. Precauciones adicionales...................................................................................................... 5 2. Acerca del producto......................................................................................................8 3. Combinacion de unidades exteriores........................................................................••••••8 4. Especificaciones..........................................................................................................9 5. Contenido del embalaje...............................................................................................12 6. Transporte de la unidad...............................................................................................13 7. Lugar de instalacion...................................................................................................14 7-1. Instalacion de una unidad aislada.......................................................................................14 7-2. Instalacion de varias unidades.............................................................................................15 8. Trabajo de cimentacion...............................................................................................17 9. Trabajos sobre los tubos de refrigerante..................................................................••••• 19 9-1. Restricciones.......................................................................................................................19 9-2. Seleccion del tubo................................................................................................................21 9-3. Seleccion del kit de emparejamiento...................................................................................21 9-4. Ejemplo de conexion de tubos.............................................................................................22 9-5. Conexiones de los tubos y funcionamiento de las valvulas.................................................25 9-6. Prueba de estanqueidad......................................................................................................27 9-7. Aislamiento termico para tubos............................................................................................28 9-8. Evacuacion del sistema....................................................................................................... 29 9-9. Carga adicional de refrigerante............................................................................................30 10. Trabajos electricos....................................................................................................36 10-1. Antes de comenzar los trabajos electricos.........................................................................36 10-2. Cables de alimentacion y capacidad del dispositivo..........................................................36 10-3. Especificaciones del cable de control................................................................................39 10-4. Configuracion del sistema..................................................................................................40 10-5. Conexiones de cables de la caja de control......................................................................42 10-6. Ajuste de la direccion.........................................................................................................47 11. Funcionamiento de prueba.........................................................................................48 11-1. Antes de realizar una prueba de funcionamiento...............................................................48 11-2. Ajuste de funcion................................................................................................................49 11-3. Caracteristicas de funcionamiento relacionadas con la carga de refrigerante ..................49 11-4. Comprobacion de funcionamiento.....................................................................................50 12. Inspeccion y mantenimiento....................................................................................... 50 13. Informacion en la placa de datos tecnicos..................................................................• 51 WT09115X03 E-1 1. Precauciones de seguridad ► Lea y respete las siguientes precauciones de seguridad y las instrucciones proporcionadas en las etiquetas adheridas a la unidad. ► Conserve este manual para referencia futura. Asegurese de entregar este manual a los usuarios finales. ► Los trabajos realizados con tubos de refrigerante, los trabajos de electricidad, las pruebas de estanqueidad y los trabajos de soldadura son actividades que solo debe realizar personal cualificado. ► Una practica incorrecta de los mismos podria provocar lesiones graves. indica una situaci6n peligrosa que, de no evitarse, puede causar la muerte o lesiones graves. indica una situaci6n peligrosa que, de no evitarse, puede causar lesiones leves o moderadas. ' se utiliza para hacer referencia a practicas no relacionadas con lesiones personales, como por ejemplo danos al producto y/o danos materiales. 1-1. Precauciones generales No utilice un refrigerante diferente del indicado en los manuales que se entregan con la unidad y en la placa de identificaci6n. - Si to hace, la unidad o los tubos podrian explotar, o producirse una explosion o incendio durante su uso, reparaci6n o en el momento de la eliminacion de la unidad. - Tambien podria suponer un quebrantamiento de la normativa aplicable. - MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION no es responsable de cualquier anomalia o accidente derivantes del uso del tipo de refrigerante equivocado. No utilice la unidad en entornos con condiciones inusuales. - El uso de la unidad en lugares expuestos a grandes cantidades de aceite, vapor, disolventes organicos o gases corrosivos (como amoniaco, compuestos sulfuricos o acidos), o en lugares donde se utilicen frecuentemente soluciones acidicas/alcalinas o pulverizadores quimicos especiales, puede reducir significativamente su rendimiento y provocar corrosion en los componentes internos, con el consecuente riesgo de fugas de refrigerante, fugas de agua, lesiones, descarga electrica, averia, humo o incendio. No cambie los ajustes de los dispositivos de seguridad o protecci6n. - La puesta en marcha de la unidad de forma forzada con los dispositivos de seguridad deshabilitados, como por ejemplo el manometro o el interruptor termico, puede dar lugar a roturas, incendios o explosiones. - La puesta en marcha de la unidad con un dispositivo de seguridad cuya configuracion haya sido alterada puede dar lugar a roturas, incendios o explosiones. - El uso de dispositivos de seguridad no especificados por Mitsubishi Electric puede dar lugar a roturas, incendios o explosiones. No altere ni modifique la unidad. - Si to hace podrian producirse fugas de refrigerante, fugas de agua, lesiones graves, descargas electricas o incendios. No moje los componentes electricos. - Si to hace, podrian producirse fugas de corriente, descargas electricas, averias o incendios. No toque los componentes electricos, interruptores o botones con los dedos mojados. - Si to hace, podrian producirse descargas electricas, averias o incendios. No toque los tubos de refrigerante y los componentes de la linea de refrigerante con las manos sin protecci6n durante a inmediatamente despues del funcionamiento. - El refrigerante de los tubos alcanzara temperaturas muy altas o muy bajas, con el consecuente riesgo de congelacion o quemaduras. WT09115X03 E-2 No toque los componentes electricos con las manos sin proteccion durante a inmediatamente despues del funcionamiento. - Si to hace, podria quemarse. Ventile la habituacion durante las tareas de mantenimiento de la unidad. - Las fugas de refrigerante pueden producir una deficiencia de oxigeno. Si el refrigerante entra en contacto con una fuente de calor, generara gases toxicos. Si detecta alguna anomalia (por ejemplo, olor a quemado), detenga la unidad, apague el suministro electrico y consulte con su distribuidor. - La continuacion del funcionamiento podria provocar descargas electricas, averias o incendios. Instale correctamente todas las cubiertas y paneles necesarios en el bloque de terminales y en la caja de control. - La entrada de polvo o agua al interior de la unidad podria provocar una descarga electrica o un incendio. Compruebe periodicamente que la base de la unidad no presente danos. - Si no repara los danos, la unidad podria caerse y provocar lesiones graves. Consulte con su distribuidor para conocer el procedimiento adecuado de desecho de la unidad. - El aceite refrigerante y el refrigerante de la unidad plantean un riesgo de contaminacion ambiental, incendio o explosion. No realice ninguna modificacion ni alteracion en la unidad. Para la reparacion, consulte a su distribuidor. - Una reparacion inadecuada puede derivar en fugas de agua, descargas electricas, humo o fuego. Es necesario vigilar a los nifios para impedir que jueguen con la unidad. No ponga en funcionamiento la unidad sin los paneles y protecciones. - Las piezas giratorias, calientes o de alto voltaje pueden provocar lesiones, descargas electricas o incendios. No toque los ventiladores, las aletas del intercambiador de calor o los bordes afilados de componentes con las manos sin proteccion. - Si to hace, podria sufrir lesiones. Utilice guantes de proteccion cuando trabaje en la unidad. - Si no to hace, podria sufrir lesiones. - Los tubos de alta presion suponen un riesgo de quemaduras si se tocan con las manos desnudas mientras la unidad esta en funcionamiento. 1-2. Precauciones para el transporte de la unidad Cuando levante la unidad, pase las eslingas por los cuatro orificios especificados. - Si no levanta correctamente la unidad, esta podria caerse y provocar lesiones graves. No levante la unidad con las bandas de polipropileno utilizadas en algunos productos. - Si to hace, podria sufrir lesiones. Respete las restricciones de peso maximo que una persona puede levantar especificadas en las normativas locales. - Si no to hace, podria sufrir lesiones. 1-3. Precauciones para la instalacion de la unidad No instale la unidad donde pueda producirse fuga de gas combustible. - La acumulacion de gas combustible alrededor de la unidad puede provocar incendios o explosiones. WT09115X03 E-3 No permita que los nihos jueguen con los materiales de embalaje. - Estos materiales pueden provocar asfixia o lesiones graves. Corte en pedazos los materiales de embalaje antes de desecharlos. Todos los trabajos de instalacion deben ser realizados por personal cualificado de acuerdo con este manual. - Una instalacion inadecuada podria provocar fugas de refrigerante, fugas de agua, lesiones graves, descargas electricas o incendios. Para la instalacion del acondicionador de aire en una habitacion pequena, tome medidas a fin de evitar que la concentracion de refrigerante supere el limite de seguridad en caso de fuga de refrigerante. - Consulte a su distribuidor acerca de las medidas adecuadas para no Ilegar a superar la concentracion permitida. La presencia de fugas de refrigerante y una concentracion excesiva platean peligros debido a la falta de oxigeno en la habitacion. Instale la unidad de acuerdo con las instrucciones para minimizar el riesgo de danos producidos por terremotos y fuertes vientos. - Si no instala correctamente la unidad, esta podria caerse y provocar lesiones graves. La unidad debe fijarse con seguridad a una estructura que pueda soportar su peso. - Si no to hace, la unidad podria caerse y provocar lesiones graves. Selle todas las aperturas alrededor de tubos y cables para evitar la entrada de pequenos animales, Iluvia o nieve. - No hacerlo puede derivar en fugas de corriente, descargas electricas o danos a la unidad. 1-4. Precauciones para los trabajos de instalacion de los tubos Antes de calentar las secciones soldadas, purgue el gas y el aceite atrapado en los tubos. - No hacerlo podria dar lugar a un incendio, con la consecuente posibilidad de lesiones graves. No purgue el aire utilizando refrigerante. Utilice una bomba de vacio para evacuar el sistema. - El gas residual de los tubos de refrigerante hara estallar los tubos o provocara una explosion. No utilice oxigeno, gas inflamable o refrigerantes que contenga cloro para las pruebas de estanqueidad. - De to contrario, podria producirse una explosion. El cloro deteriorara el aceite refrigerante. Cuando instale o reubique la unidad, evite la entrada de aire o de cualquier otra sustancia distinta al refrigerante especificado a los tubos de refrigerante. - La entrada de cualquier sustancia distinta al refrigerante especificado podria provocar presiones anormalmente altas en los tubos de refrigerante, con el consecuente riesgo de estallido o explosion. Una vez completada la instalacion, compruebe la presencia de fugas de refrigerante. - Las fugas de refrigerante pueden producir una deficiencia de oxigeno. Si el refrigerante entra en contacto con una fuente de calor, generara gases toxicos. 1-5. Precauciones para el cableado electrico Permita que los cables de alimentacion tengan cierta holgura. - De to contrario, podrian romperse o sobrecalentarse y provocar la aparicion de humo o incendios. Realice las conexiones de forma segura y sin tension en los terminales. - Los cables mal conectados pueden romperse, sobrecalentarse o provocar humo o incendios. Apriete los tornillos de todos los terminales al valor dinamometrico especificado. - Los tornillos flojos y los fallos de contacto pueden provocar humo o incendios. WT09115X03 E-4 Los trabajos electricos deben ser realizados por personal cualificado de acuerdo con las normativas locales y las instrucciones detalladas en este manual. Utilice exclusivamente los cables especificados y circuitos dedicados. - La capacidad inadecuada de la fuente de alimentacion o el trabajo electrico inapropiado provocaran descargas electricas, averias o incendios. Instale un disyuntor para circuito inversor en la fuente de alimentacion de cada unidad. - Si no to hace, podrian producirse descargas electricas o incendios. Utilice unicamente disyuntores con los valores nominales apropiados (disyuntor de fuga a tierra, interruptor local <interruptor + fusible que cumpla los codigos electricos locales> o disyuntor de sobrecorriente). - Si no to hace, podrian producirse descargas electricas, averias, humo o incendios. Utilice unicamente cables de alimentacion estandar de la capacidad suficiente. - Si no to hace, podrian producirse fugas de corriente, sobrecalentamiento, humo o incendios. El personal cualificado debe proporcionar una conexion a tierra adecuada. - Una mala conexion a tierra puede provocar descargas electricas, incendios, explosiones o averias como consecuencia del ruido electrico. No conecte el cable de tierra a tubos de gas o agua, pararrayos o cables por tierra de lineas telefonicas. Una vez completado el trabajo de cableado, mida la resistencia de aislamiento y asegurese de que la lectura muestre 1 Mi2 como minimo. - Si no to hace, podrian producirse descargas electricas, averias o incendios. 1-6. Precauciones para reubicar o reparar la unidad Solo personal cualificado debe reubicar o reparar la unidad. No intente desmontar ni alterar la unidad. - Si to hace, podrian producirse fugas de refrigerante, fugas de agua, lesiones graves, descargas electricas o incendios. No realice tareas de mantenimiento en la unidad bajo la Iluvia. - Si to hace, podrian producirse fugas de corriente, descargas electricas, cortocircuitos, averias, humo o incendios. 1-7. Precauciones adicionales • No desactive la alimentacion electrica inmediatamente despues de que se interrumpa el funcionamiento. - Eupere al menos cinco minutos despues de que la unidad se haya detenido antes de apagar el suministro electrico. De to contrario, puede producirse una perdida de agua o un fallo mecanico de los componentes sensibles. Un distribuidor o profesional cualificado debe inspeccionar periodicamente la unidad. - La acumulacion de polvo o suciedad en el interior de la unidad podria obstruir los tubos de drenaje y provocar fugas de agua que podrian mojar las partes circundantes y generar olores. Active la alimentacion electrica al menos 12 horas antes de iniciar la puesta en funcionamiento. Mantenga la unidad encendida durante toda la temporada de trabajo. - Una alimentacion insuficiente provocara averias. No utilice el acondicionador de aire con fines especiales (por ejemplo, conservar comida, animales, plantas, dispositivos de precision u obras de arte en una habitacion). - Estos articulos podrian sufrir danos o deteriorarse. Recupere el refrigerante y desechelo oportunamente de acuerdo con las normativas locales. No instale la unidad en lugares o sobre elementos susceptibles de sufrir danos por accion del agua. - En caso de que la humedad ambiente supere el 80% o de obstruccion del tubo de drenaje, puede generarse condensacion que provoque goteo desde la unidad al techo o al suelo. WT09115X03 E-5 Los tubos de drenaje deben ser instalados por un distribuidor o personal cualificado para garantizar un drenaje adecuado. - La instalacion incorrecta del tubo de drenaje puede provocar fugas de agua que danen los muebles y los objetos circundantes. Tome medidas apropiadas contra la interferencia de ruido electrico cuando instale la unidad en hospitales o instalaciones con servicios de comunicacion de radio. - El inversor, equipos medicos de alta frecuencia o equipos de comunicacion inalambrica, ademas de generadores de potencia, podrian provocar anomalias en el sistema de aire acondicionado. El sistema de aire acondicionado tambien podria afectar negativamente al funcionamiento de estos tipos de equipos al generar ruido electrico. Aisle los tubos para evitar la formacion de condensacion. - La condensacion puede provocar la caida de gotas desde la unidad al techo o al suelo. Mantenga las valvulas de servicio cerradas hasta que se complete la carga de refrigerante. - De to contrario, la unidad resultara danada. Coloque una toalla mojada sobre las valvulas de servicio antes de soldar tubos para mantener la temperatura de las valvulas por debajo de 120 °C (248 IF). - Si no to hace, podria danar el equipo. Evite que las llamas alcancen los cables y la lamina metalica cuando suelde los tubos. - De to contrario, podrian producirse roturas o averias. Use las siguientes herramientas especialmente disenadas para utilizar con el refrigerante especificado: distribuidor, manguera de carga, detector de fugas de gas, valvula de retencion, base de carga de refrigerante, vacuometro y equipo de recuperacion del refrigerante. - Los detectores de fugas de gas para refrigerantes convencionales no reaccionaran a un refrigerante que no contenga cloro. - Si mezcla el refrigerante especificado con agua, aceite refrigerante u otro refrigerante, el aceite refrigerante se deteriorara y causara un mal funcionamiento del compresor. Utilice una bomba de vacio con valvula de retencion. - Si el aceite de la bomba de vacio retorna a los tubos de refrigerante, el aceite refrigerante podria deteriorarse y causar un mal funcionamiento del compresor. Mantenga las herramientas limpias. - Si polvo, suciedad o agua se acumulan en la manguera de carga o en la herramienta de procesamiento abocinada, el refrigerante se deteriorara y causara un mal funcionamiento del compresor. Utilice tubos de refrigerante fabricados con cobre fosforoso desoxidado (tubos sin costuras de cobre y aleacion de cobre) que cumplan con los requisitos locales. Las juntas de tubos tambien deben cumplir con los requisitos locales. Mantenga las superficies internas y externas de los tubos limpias y libres de azufre, oxido, polvo/suciedad, virutas metalicas, aceites, humedad o cualquier otro contaminante. - Los contaminantes del interior de los tubos de refrigerante deterioraran el aceite refrigerante y causaran un mal funcionamiento del compresor. Guarde los tubos bajo techo y mantenga ambos extremos sellados hasta justo antes de realizar una conexion abocinada o una soldadura. (Guarde los codos y otras juntas en bolsas de plastico). - Si entra polvo, suciedad o agua en los tubos de refrigerante, el aceite refrigerante se deteriorara y causara un mal funcionamiento del compresor. Suelde los tubos con una purga de nitrogeno para evitar la oxidacion. - El flujo oxidado del interior de los tubos de refrigerante deteriorara el aceite refrigerante y causara un mal funcionamiento del compresor. No utilice los tubos de refrigerante existentes. - El refrigerante antiguo y el aceite refrigerante existentes en los tubos contienen una gran cantidad de cloro, que deteriorara el aceite refrigerante de la unidad nueva y causara un mal funcionamiento del compresor. Cargue el refrigerante en estado liquido. - Cargar refrigerante en estado gaseoso cambiara la composicion del refrigerante y reducira su rendimiento. WT09115X03 E-6 No utilice cilindros de carga para cargar el refrigerante. - El use de un cilindro de carga cambiara la composicion del refrigerante y reducira su rendimiento. En caso de gran flujo de corriente electrica debido a anomalia o cableado defectuoso, pueden funcionar los disyuntores de fugas a tierra en el lado de la unidad y en el lado ascendente del sistema de alimentacion. Segun la importancia del sistema, separe el sistema de alimentacion o adopte medidas para asegurar la coordinacion de los disyuntores. Este equipo esta disenado para expertos o usuarios formados de tiendas, de la industria de la iluminacion y de granjas, o a personal lego para use comercial. No esta previsto el use de este equipo por personas (incluidos los ninos) con capacidad fisica, sensorial o mental disminuida, o carentes de conocimientos y experiencia, a menos que to hagan siguiendo las instrucciones de use bajo la supervision de una persona responsable de su seguridad. Solo el personal cualificado puede tocar el puerto USB en la caja de control. WT09115X03 E-7 2. Acerca del producto • La unidad exterior descrita en este manual es un equipo de aire acondicionado disenado Onicamente por motivos de comodidad. • Los valores numericos del nombre del modelo de la unidad (por ejemplo, TURYP-AN40AN/AB, TURYE-AN40AN/AB) indican el indice de capacidad de la unidad. • Esta unidad utiliza refrigerante R410A. 3. Combinacion de unidades exteriores (1) 208-230 V Modelo de unidad exterior Combinaci6n de unidades exteriores TURYP0723AN40AN/AB TURYP0963AN40AN/AB TURYP1203AN40AN/AB TURYP1443AN40AN/AB TURYP1683AN40AN/AB TURYP1923BN40AN/AB TURYP0963AN40AN/AB TURYP0963AN40AN/AB TURYP2163BN40AN/AB TURYP1203AN40AN/AB TURYP0963AN40AN/AB TURYP2403BN40AN/AB TURYP1203AN40AN/AB TURYP1203AN40AN/AB TURYP2643BN40AN/AB TURYP1443AN40AN/AB TURYP1203AN40AN/AB TURYP2883BN40AN/AB TURYP1443AN40AN/AB TURYP1443AN40AN/AB TURYP3123BN40AN/AB TURYP1683AN40AN/AB TURYP1443AN40AN/AB TURYP3363BN40AN/AB TURYP1683AN40AN/AB TURYP1683AN40AN/AB Modelo de unidad exterior Combinaci6n de unidades exteriores TURYE0723AN40AN/AB - - TURYE0963AN40AN/AB - - TURYE1203AN40AN/AB TURYE1443AN40AN/AB TURYE1683AN40AN/AB TURYE1923AN40AN/AB TURYE1923BN40AN/AB TURYE0963AN40AN/AB TURYE0963AN40AN/AB TURYE2163AN40AN/AB TURYE2163BN40AN/AB TURYE1203AN40AN/AB TURYE0963AN40AN/AB TURYE2403AN40AN/AB - - TURYE2403BN40AN/AB TURYE1203AN40AN/AB TURYE1203AN40AN/AB TURYE2643BN40AN/AB TURYE1443AN40AN/AB TURYE1203AN40AN/AB TURYE2883BN40AN/AB TURYE1443AN40AN/AB TURYE1443AN40AN/AB TURYE3123BN40AN/AB TURYE1683AN40AN/AB TURYE1443AN40AN/AB TURYE3363BN40AN/AB TURYE1683AN40AN/AB TU RYE 1683AN40AN/AB TURYE3843BN40AN/AB TURYE1923AN40AN/AB TU RYE 1923AN40AN/AB TURYE4323BN40AN/AB TURYE2163AN40AN/AB TURYE2163AN40AN/AB * El "kit de emparejamiento" es necesario pare conectar combinaciones de unidades in situ. (2) 460 V Modelo de unidad exterior Combinaci6n de unidades exteriores TURYP0724AN40AN/AB - - TURYP0964AN40AN/AB - - TURYP1204AN40AN/AB - - TURYP1444AN40AN/AB - - TURYP1684AN40AN/AB - - TURYP1924BN40AN/AB TURYP0964AN40AN/AB TURYP0964AN40AN/AB TURYP2164BN40AN/AB TURYP1204AN40AN/AB TURYP0964AN40AN/AB TURYP2404BN40AN/AB TURYP1204AN40AN/AB TURYP1204AN40AN/AB TURYP2644BN40AN/AB TURYP1444AN40AN/AB TURYP1204AN40AN/AB TURYP2884BN40AN/AB TURYP1444AN40AN/AB TURYP1444AN40AN/AB TURYP3124BN40AN/AB TURYP1684AN40AN/AB TURYP1444AN40AN/AB TURYP3364BN40AN/AB TURYP1684AN40AN/AB TURYP1684AN40AN/AB Modelo de unidad exterior Combinaci6n de unidades exteriores TURYE0724AN40AN/AB TURYE0964AN40AN/AB TURYE1204AN40AN/AB TURYE1444AN40AN/AB TURYE1684AN40AN/AB - - TURYE1924AN40AN/AB - - TURYE1924BN40AN/AB TURYE0964AN40AN/AB TURYE0964AN40AN/AB TURYE2164AN40AN/AB - - TURYE2164BN40AN/AB TURYE1204AN40AN/AB TURYE0964AN40AN/AB TURYE2404AN40AN/AB TURYE2404BN40AN/AB TURYE1204AN40AN/AB TURYE1204AN40AN/AB TURYE2644BN40AN/AB TURYE1444AN40AN/AB TURYE1204AN40AN/AB TURYE2884BN40AN/AB TURYE1444AN40AN/AB TURYE1444AN40AN/AB TURYE3124BN40AN/AB TURYE1684AN40AN/AB TURYE1444AN40AN/AB TURYE3364BN40AN/AB TURYE1684AN40AN/AB TURYE1684AN40AN/AB TURYE3844BN40AN/AB TURYE1924AN40AN/AB TU RYE 1924AN40AN/AB TURYE4324BN40AN/AB TURYE2164AN40AN/AB TURYE2164AN40AN/AB * El "kit de emparejamiento" es necesario para conectar combinaciones de unidades in situ. WT09115X03 E-8 4. Especificaciones (1) 208-230 V Modelo TURYP0723AN40AN TURYP0963AN40AN Nivel de ruido*4*5 56,5 dB <A> 1 58,5 dB <A> Presi6n estatica externa 0 Pa*z Unidad interior Capacidad total 50 % a 150 % *' Modelo 05 a 96 Cantidad Sistema R2 1 a 18 1 a 24 Rango de temperature (refrigeraci6n) Interior B.H. +15,0°C a +24,0°C (+59,0*F a +75,0*F) Exterior B.S. -5,0°C a +52,0°C (+23,0*F a +125,6°F) Rango de temperatura (calefacci6n) Interior B.S. +15,0°C a +27,0°C (+59,0°F a +81,0°F) Exterior B.H. -25,0°C a +15,5°C (-13,0*F a +60,0°F)*3 Modelo TURYP1203AN40AN TURYP1443AN40AN TURYP1683AN40AN TURYP192313N40AN TURYP2163BN40AN Nivel de ruido*4*5 60,0 dB <A> 65,0 dB <A> 62,5 dB <A> 58,5 dB <A> 60,0 dB <A> Presi6n estatica externa 0 Pa*2 Capacidad total 50 % a 150 % *' Unidad interior Modelo 05 a 96 Cantidad 1 a 30 1 a 36 1 a 42 1 a 48 2 a 50 Rango de temperatura Interior B.H. +15,0*C a +24,0*C (+59,0*F a +75,0*F) (refrigeraci6n) Exterior B.S. -5,0°C a +52,0°C (+23,0*F a +125,6*F) Rango de temperature Interior B.S. +15,0°C a +27,0°C (+59,0*F a +81,0*F) (calefacci6n) Exterior B.H. -25,0°C a +15,5°C (-13,0°F a +60,0°F)*3 Modelo TURYP2403BN40AN TURYP2643BN40AN TURYP2883BN40AN TURYP3123BN40AN TURYP3363BN40AN Nivel de ruido*4*5 60,0 dB <A> 65,0 dB <A> 65,0 dB <A> 62,5 dB <A> 62,5 dB <A> Presi6n estatica externa 0 Pa*2 Capacidad total 50 % a 150 % *' Unidad interior Modelo 05 a 96 Cantidad 2a50 2a50 2a50 2a50 2a50 Rango de temperatura Interior B.H. +15,0*C a +24,0*C (+59,0*F a +75,0*F) (refrigeraci6n) Exterior B.S. -5,0°C a +52,0°C (+23,0*F a +125,6°F) Rango de temperatura Interior B.S. +15,0*C a +27,0°C (+59,0°F a +81,0*F) (calefacci6n) Exterior B.H. -25,0*C a +15,5°C (-13,0°F a +60,0°F)*3 Modelo TURYE0723AN40AN TURYE0963AN40AN Nivel de ruido*4*5 56,5 dB <A> 1 58,5 dB <A> Presi6n estatica externa 0 Pa*2 Unidad interior Capacidad total 50 % a 150 % *' Modelo 05 a 96 Cantidad Sistema R2 1 a 18 1 a 24 Rango de temperatura (refrigeraci6n) Interior B.H. +15,0°C a +24,0°C (+59,0°F a +75,0°F) Exterior B.S. -5,0°C a +52,0°C (+23,0*F a +125,6°F) Rango de temperature (calefacci6n) Interior B.S. +15,0°C a +27,0°C (+59,0°F a +81,0°F) Exterior B.H. -25,0°C a +15,5*C (-13,0°F a +60,0*F) Modelo TURYE1203AN40AN TURYE1443AN40AN TURYE1683AN40AN TURYE1923AN40AN TURYE1923BN40AN Nivel de ruido*4*5 60,0 dB <A> 65,0 dB <A> 62,5 dB <A> 64,5 dB <A> 58,5 dB <A> Presi6n estatica externa 0 Pa*2 Capacidad total 50 % a 150 % *' Unidad interior Modelo 05 a 96 Cantidad 1 a 30 1 a 36 1 a 42 1 a 48 1 a 48 Rango de temperature Interior B.H. +15,0°C a +24,0*C (+59,0*F a +75,0°F) (refrigeraci6n) Exterior B.S. -5,0*C a +52,0*C (+23,0°F a +125,6*F) Rango de temperature Interior B.S. +15,0°C a +27,0°C (+59,0*F a +81,0°F) (calefacci6n) Exterior B.H. -25,0°C a +15,5°C (-13,00F a +60,0*F) Modelo TURYE2163AN40AN TURYE2163BN40AN TURYE2403AN40AN TURYE2403BN40AN TURYE2643BN40AN Nivel de ruido*4*5 66,5 dB <A> 60,0 dB <A> 67,5 dB <A> 60,0 dB <A> 65,0 dB <A> Presi6n estatica externa 0 Pa*2 Capacidad total 50 % a 150 % *' Unidad interior Modelo 05 a 96 Cantidad 2a50 2a50 2a50 2a50 2a50 Rango de temperature Interior B.H. +15,0°C a +24,0*C (+59,0°F a +75,0°F) (refrigeraci6n) Exterior B.S. -5,0*C a +52,0*C (+23,0°F a +125,6°F) Rango de temperature Interior B.S. +15,0*C a +27,0*C (+59,0°F a +81,0*F) (calefacci6n) Exterior B.H. -25,0°C a +15,5*C (-13,0*F a +60,0*F) WT09115X03 E_9 Modelo TURYE2883BN40AN TURYE3123BN40AN TURYE3363BN40AN TURYE384313N40AN TURYE4323BN40AN Nivel de ruido*4*5 65,0 dB <A> 62,5 dB <A> 62,5 dB <A> 67,5 dB <A> 69,5 dB <A> Presi6n estatica externa 0 Pa*2 Capacidad total 50 % a 150 % *' Unidad interior Modelo 05 a 96 Cantidad 2a50 2a50 2a50 2a50 2a50 Rango de temperature Interior B.H. +15,0°C a +24,0°C (+59,0°F a +75,0°F) (refrigeraci6n) Exterior B.S. -5,0°C a +52,0°C (+23,0°F a +125,6°F) Rango de temperature Interior B.S. +15,0°C a +27,0°C (+59,0°F a +81,0°F) (calefacci6n) Exterior B.H. -25,0°C a +15,5°C (-13,0°F a +60,0°F) *1 La capacidad maxima total de unidades interiores utilizadas simultaneamente as del 150%. *2 Para permitir una presi6n estatica alta, ajuste el interruptor DIP del panel principal de la siguiente manera. SW6-5:ON SW6-5:OFF SW6-4: ON 80 Pa 60 Pa SW6-4: OFF 30 Pa 0 Pa *3 Si se utiliza la unidad a una temperatura inferior a-20,0°C (4,0°F), oonsulte a su ingeniero de diseno y tome las medidas apropiadas para el use en climas frios, Como la instalaci6n de una fuente de calefacci6n de apoyo. *4 Modo de refrigeraci6n *5 El nivel de presi6n sonora mostrado arriba indica un nivel de presi6n sonora ponderado A. Aunque el nivel de presi6n Sonora en JIS he cambiado al nivel de potencia sonora (PWL), el valor mostrado indica el nivel de presi6n sonora medido por el metodo convencional para fines de referencia. (2) 460 V Modelo TURYP0724AN40AN TURYP0964AN40AN Nivel de ruido*4*5 56,5 dB <A> 1 58,5 dB <A> Presi6n estatica externa 0 Pa*2 Unidad interior Capacidad total 50 % a 150 % *' Modelo 05 a 96 Cantidad Sistema R2 1 a 18 1 a 24 Rango de temperatura (refrigeraci6n) Interior B.H. +15,0°C a +24,0°C (+59,0°F a +75,0°F) Exterior B.S. -5,0°C a +52,0°C (+23,0°F a +125,6°F) Rango de temperatura (calefacci6n) Interior B.S. +15,0°C a +27,0°C (+59,0°F a +81,0°F) Exterior B.H. -25,0°C a +15,5°C (-13,0°F a +60,0°F)*3 Modelo TURYP1204AN40AN TURYP1444AN40AN TURYP1684AN40AN TURYP1924BN40AN TURYP2164BN40AN Nivel de ruido*4*5 60,0 dB <A> 65,0 dB <A> 62,5 dB <A> 58,5 dB <A> 60,0 dB <A> Presi6n estatica externa 0 Pa*2 Capacidad total 50 % a 150 % *' Unidad interior Modelo 05 a 96 Cantidad 1 a 30 1 a 36 1 a 42 1 a 48 2 a 50 Rango de temperatura Interior B.H. +15,0°C a +24,0°C (+59,0°F a +75,0°F) (refrigeraci6n) Exterior B.S. -5,0°C a +52,0°C (+23,0°F a +125,6°F) Rango de temperatura Interior B.S. +15,0°C a +27,0°C (+59,0°F a +81,0°F) (calefacci6n) Exterior B.H. -25,0°C a +15,5°C (-13,0°F a +60,0°F)*3 Modelo TURYP2404BN40AN TURYP2644BN40AN TURYP2884BN40AN TURYP3124BN40AN TURYP3364BN40AN Nivel de ruido*4*5 60,0 dB <A> 65,0 dB <A> 65,0 dB <A> 62,5 dB <A> 62,5 dB <A> Presi6n estatica externa 0 Pa*2 Capacidad total 50 % a 150 % *' Unidad interior Modelo 05 a 96 Cantidad 2 a 50 2 a 50 2 a 50 2 a 50 2 a 50 Rango de temperatura Interior B.H. +15,0°C a +24,0°C (+59,0°F a +75,0°F) (refrigeraci6n) Exterior B.S. -5,0°C a +52,0°C (+23,0°F a +125,6°F) Rango de temperatura Interior B.S. +15,0°C a +27,0°C (+59,0°F a +81,0°F) (calefacci6n) Exterior B.H. -25,0°C a +15,5°C (-13,0°F a +60,0°F)*3 Modelo TURYE0724AN40AN TURYE0964AN40AN Nivel de ruido*4*5 56,5 dB <A> 1 58,5 dB <A> Presi6n estatica externa 0 Pa*2 Unidad interior Capacidad total 50 % a 150 % *' Modelo 05 a 96 Cantidad Sistema R2 1 a 18 1 a 24 Rango de temperatura (refrigeraci6n) Interior B.H. +15,0°C a +24,0°C (+59,0°F a +75,0°F) Exterior B.S. -5,0°C a +52,0°C (+23,0°F a +125,6°F) Rango de temperatura (calefacci6n) Interior B.S. +15,0°C a +27,0°C (+59,0°F a +81,0°F) Exterior B.H. -25,0°C a +15,5°C (-13,0°F a +60,0°F) Modelo TURYE1204AN40AN TURYE1444AN40AN TURYE1684AN40AN TURYE1924AN40AN TURYE1924BN40AN Nivel de ruido*4*5 60,0 dB <A> 65,0 dB <A> 62,5 dB <A> 64,5 dB <A> 58,5 dB <A> Presi6n estatica externa 0 Pa*2 Capacidad total 50 % a 150 % *' Unidad interior Modelo 05 a 96 Cantidad 1 a 30 1 a 36 1 a 42 1 a 48 1 a 48 Rango de temperatura Interior B.H. +15,0°C a +24,0°C (+59,0°F a +75,0°F) (refrigeraci6n) Exterior B.S. -5,0°C a +52,0°C (+23,0°F a +125,6°F) Rango de temperatura Interior B.S. +15,0°C a +27,0°C (+59,0°F a +81,0°F) (calefacci6n) Exterior B.H. -25,0°C a +15,5°C (-13,0°F a +60,0°F) WT09115X03 E-10 Modelo TURYE2164AN40AN TURYE2164BN40AN TURYE2404AN40AN TURYE240413N40AN TURYE2644BN40AN Nivel de ruido*4*5 66,5 dB <A> 60,0 dB <A> 67,5 dB <A> 60,0 dB <A> 65,0 dB <A> Presi6n estatica externa 0 Pa*2 Capacidad total 50 % a 150 % *' Unidad interior Modelo 05 a 96 Cantidad 2a50 2a50 2a50 2a50 2a50 Rango de temperature Interior B.H. +15,0*C a +24,0*C (+59,0*F a +75,0*F) (refrigeraci6n) Exterior B.S. -5,0°C a +52,0°C (+23,0*F a +125,6*F) Rango de temperature Interior B.S. +15,0*C a +27,0°C (+59,0*F a +81,0*F) (calefacci6n) Exterior B.H. -25,0°C a +15,5°C (-13,0°F a +60,0°F) Modelo TURYE2884BN40AN TURYE3124BN40AN TURYE3364BN40AN TURYE3844BN40AN TURYE4324BN40AN Nivel de ruido*4*5 65,0 dB <A> 62,5 dB <A> 62,5 dB <A> 67,5 dB <A> 69,5 dB <A> Presi6n estatica externa 0 Pa*2 Capacidad total 50 % a 150 % *' Unidad interior Modelo 05 a 96 Cantidad 2a50 2a50 2a50 2a50 2a50 Rango de temperature Interior B.H. +15,0*C a +24,0*C (+59,0*F a +75,0*F) (refrigeraci6n) Exterior B.S. -5,0°C a +52,0°C (+23,0°F a +125,6*F) Rango de temperature Interior B.S. +15,0*C a +27,0*C (+59,0°F a +81,0*F) (calefacci6n) Exterior B.H. -25,0°C a +15,5*C (-13,0°F a +60,0*F) *1 La capacidad maxima total de unidades interiores utilizadas simultaneamente as del 150%. *2 Para permitir una presi6n estatica alta, ajuste el interruptor DIP del panel principal de la siguiente manera. SW6-5:ON SW6-5:OFF SW6-4: ON 80 Pa 60 Pa SW6-4: OFF 30 Pa 0 Pa *3 Si se utiliza la unidad a una temperature inferior a-20,0*C (4,0°F), consulte a su ingeniero de diseno y tome las medidas apropiadas para el use en climas frios, Como la instalaci6n de una fuente de calefacci6n de apoyo. *4 Modo de refrigeraci6n *5 El nivel de presi6n sonora mostrado arriba indica un nivel de presi6n sonora ponderado A. Aunque el nivel de presi6n Sonora en JIS ha cambiado al nivel de potencia Sonora (PWL), el valor mostrado indica el nivel de presi6n sonora medido por el metodo convencional para fines de referencia. WT09115X03 E-11 5. Contenido del embalaje La siguiente tabla enumera todas las piezas y el nOmero de ellas incluidas en el embalaje. (1) Modelos P Cinta P072 2 P096 2 P120 2 P144 2 P168 2 (2) Modelos E Cinta E072 2 E096 2 E120 2 E144 2 E168 2 E192 2 E216 2 E240 2 WT09115X03 E-12 6. Transporte de la unidad Cuando levante la unidad, pase las eslingas por los cuatro orificios especificados. - Si no levanta correctamente la unidad, esta podria caerse y provocar lesiones graves. • Utilice siempre dos eslingas para levantar la unidad. Cada eslinga debe tener al menos 8 m (26 pies) de largo y debe poder soportar el peso de la unidad. • Coloque almohadillas de proteccidn entre las eslingas y la unidad en el punto en el que las eslingas tocan la unidad en la base para proteger la unidad de aranazos. • Coloque almohadillas protectoras de 50 mm (2 pulg.) o de mayor espesor entre las eslingas y la unidad en el punto en el que las eslingas tocan la unidad en la parte superior para proteger la unidad de aranazos y evitar el contacto entre las eslingas y la proteccion del ventilador. • Asegurese de que los angulos entre las eslingas de la parte superior tengan menos de 40 grados. P072, E072 P168, E168, E192, E216, E240 P096, P120, P144, E096, E120, E144 (0) Eslingas (min. 8 m (26 pies) x 2) © Almohadillas protectoras (espesor minimo: 50 mm (2 pulg.)) (dos en cada una de las partes frontal y trasera) © Almohadillas protectoras (dos en cada una de las partes frontal y trasera) O Orificios para eslingas (dos en cada una de las partes frontal y trasera) OO Protecci6n del ventilador WT09115X03 E-13 7. Lugar de instalacion No instale la unidad donde pueda producirse fuga de gas combustible. - La acumulaci6n de gas combustible alrededor de la unidad puede provocar incendios o explosiones. • Deje suficiente espacio alrededor de la unidad para permitir un use eficiente de la misma y una circulaci6n adecuada de aire, y facilitar el acceso para las tareas de mantenimiento. • Recuerde que el gas refrigerante es mas pesado que el aire y tenders por tanto a acumularse en lugares bajos como s6tanos. • Cuando instale una unidad interior con aspiraci6n de aire exterior junto a una unidad exterior, compruebe que el funcionamiento normal de la unidad interior no se vea afectado. • Cuando la cantidad de agua de drenaje es excesiva, esta sale de la unidad exterior a Ilo largo del panel durante la operaci6n de calefacci6n. Proporcione espacio suficiente alrededor de la unidad de acuerdo con las instrucciones a continuaci6n. 7-1. Instalacion de una unidad aislada (1) Cuando todas las paredes se encuentren dentro de sus 11mites de altura*. [mm (pulg.)] * Urnite de altura Frontal/derecho/izquierdo/posterior IMisma altura o manor a la altura total de la unidad Distancia minima obligatoria [mm (pulg.)] L1 (frontal) L2 (posterior) L3 (derecho/izquierdo) Cuando necesite que exista poca distancia detras de la unidad (1-2) 450 (17-3/4) 100 (3-15/16) 50 (2) Cuando necesite que exista poca distancia an los lados derecho a izquierdo (L3) 450 (17-3/4) 300 (11-13/16) 15 (5/8) (2) Cuando una o mas paredes superen sus 11mites de altura*. Cuando las paredes de la parte frontal y/o izquierda/derecha superen sus 1[mites de altura L2 Cuando la pared de la parte posterior supere su altura maxima h2 < L3 L1 Cuando todas las paredes superen sus limites de altura Sume la dimensi6n que supera el 1[mite de altura (indicada como "h1" a "hY en las figuras) a L1, L2 y L3 como muestra la siguiente tabla. Distancia minima obligatoria [mm (pulg.)] L1 (frontal) L2 (posterior) L3 (derecho/izquierdo) Cuando necesite que exista poca distancia detras de la unidad (1-2) 450 (17-3/4) + h1 100 (3-15/16) + h2 50 (2) + h3 Cuando necesite que exista poca distancia an los lados derecho a izquierdo (1-3) 450 (17-3/4) + h1 300 (11-13/16) + h2 15 (5/8) + h3 WT09115X03 E-14 (3) Cuando existan obstaculos aereos 2 240 (9-1 /2) ) (2) 1 a 1000 (39-3/8) Guia de salida de aire (no suministrada) 7-2. Instalacion de varias unidades • A la hora de instalar varias unidades, asegurese de tener en cuenta factores como dejar suficiente espacio para que pasen los operarios, un espacio amplio entre los bloques de unidades y suficiente espacio para permitir la circulacion de aire. (Las zonas marcadas con (A) en las siguientes figuras deben dejarse abiertas). • Al igual que al instalar una sofa unidad, sume la dimension que supera el 11mite de altura (indicada como "h1" a "h3" en las figuras) a L1, L2 y L3 como muestran las siguientes tablas. • Si hay paredes en las partes frontal y trasera del bloque de unidades, pueden instalarse hasta seis unidades (P168, E168, E192, E216, y E240) contiguas, y debe dejarse un espacio de 1000 mm (39-3/8 pulg.) o mas entre cada bloque de seis unidades. • Cuando la cantidad de agua de drenaje es excesiva, esta sale de la unidad exterior a Ilo largo del panel durante la operaci6n de calefaccion. (1) Instalacion contigua Cuando necesite que exista poca distancia entre las unidades (1-4) Cuando necesite que exista poca distancia detras del bloque de unidades (1-2) h2 Altura de la unidad Distancia minima obligatoria [mm (pulg.)] L1 (frontal) L2 (posterior) L4 (entre) 450 (17-3/4) + h1 300 (11-13/16) + h2 30 (1-3/16) (2) Instalacion enfrentada Cuando haya paredes en la parte frontal y trasera del bloque de unidades Tura de la idad Distancia minima obligatoria [mm (pulg.)] L1 (frontal) L2 (posterior) L4 (entre) 450 (17-3/4) + h1 100 (3-15116) + h2 450 (17-3/4) 2 Itura de la unidad Distancia minima obligatoria [mm (pulg.)] L1 (frontal) L2 (posterior) L4 (entre) 450 (17-3/4) + h1 100 (3-15/16) + h2 100 (3-15/16) Cuando haya una pared en el lado derecho o izquierdo del bloque de unidades Altura de unid Distancia minima obligatoria [mm (pulg.)] L3 (derecho/izquierdo) L4 (entre) 15 (5/8) + h3 450 (17-3/4) WT09115X03 E-15 (3) Combinacidn de instalaciones enfrentadas y contiguas Cuando haya paredes en la parte frontal y trasera del bloque de Cuando haya dos paredes en forma de L unidades h2 Altura de la unidad Altura de Is unida( Distancia minima obligatoria [mm (pulg.)] L2 (posterior) L2' (posterior) L4 (entre) 300 (11-13/16) + h2 300 (11-13/16) + h2' 900 (35-7/16) (A) Deje abierto en los dos lados. Distancia minima obligatoria [mm (pulg.)] L2 (posterior) L3 (derecho/izquierdo) L4 (entre) 300 (11-13/16) + h2 1 1000 (39-3/6) + h3 900 (35-7/16) h2 Altura de la unidad WT09115X03 E-16 8. Trabajo de cimentacion Instale la unidad de acuerdo con las instrucciones para minimizar el riesgo de danos producidos por terremotos y fuertes vientos. - Si no instala correctamente la unidad, esta podria caerse y provocar lesiones graves. La unidad debe fijarse con seguridad a una estructura que pueda soportar su peso. - Si no to hace, la unidad podria caerse y provocar lesiones graves. • Antes de realizar los trabajos de cimentacion, asegurese de que la superficie del suelo sea suficientemente resistente y coloque cuidadosamente los tubos y los cables teniendo en cuenta el drenaje de agua que necesita la unidad para funcionar. • Si decide pasar los tubos y los cables por la parte inferior de la unidad, asegurese de que la base tenga una altura minima de 100 mm (3-15/16 pulg.) para que los orificios pasantes no queden bloqueados. • Proporcione una base solida de cemento o hierro en angulo. Si utiliza una base de acero inoxidable, aisle la zona entre la base y la unidad exterior instalando un apoyo de goma o aplicando un revestimiento aislado electricamente para evitar que la base se oxide. • Instale la unidad sobre una superficie nivelada. • En algunos tipos de instalacion, la unidad transmitira vibraci6n y ruido al suelo y a las paredes. En funcion del lugar de instalaci6n, tome medidas para evitar la vibracion (utilizando almohadillas de goma antivibracion por ejemplo). Imm (pulg.)j 0 M VI OB —Vt�� — LL 7 L A OO Perno de anclaje M10 (no suministrado) © (Instalacion incorrecta) La seccion de esquina no esta bien sujeta. © Soporte de fijacidn para pernos de anclaje colocados posteriormente (no suministrado) (fijado con tres tornillos) OO Almohadilla de goma antivibracion (la almohadilla tiene que ser Io suficientemente amplia para cubrir todo el ancho de cada uno de los pies de la unidad). • Asegurese de que la seccion de esquina este bien sujeta. De Io contrario, los pies de la unidad podrian doblarse. • La longitud de la parte sobresaliente del perno de anclaje debe tener como maximo 30 mm (1-3/16 pulg.). • Esta unidad no esta disefiada para fijarse con pernos de anclaje colocados posteriormente salvo que se instalen soportes de fijacion en cuatro puntos de la parte inferior (seis puntos para las unidades P168, E168, E192, E216, y E240). • En entornos sumamente rigurosos como zonas frias y/o ventosas, es necesario tomar medidas de protecci6n contra la nieve y el viento excesivo para asegurar el correcto funcionamiento de la unidad. Cuando esta previsto que la unidad funcione en modo refrigeraci6n con temperaturas inferiores a 10 °C (50T), en zonas nevadas, o en entornos sometidos a fuertes vientos o Iluvias, instale cubiertas para la nieve de las siguientes especificaciones (no suministradas) como muestra la siguiente figura. Material: Lamina de acero galvanizado 1,2T Pintura: Pintura de la totalidad con polvo de poliester Color: Munsell 5Y8/1 (el mismo que el color de la unidad) Tamafio: Consulte el Data Book. Salida © Entrada © Cubierta para la nieve O Base elevada d • Instale la unidad de forma tal que el viento no sople directamente contra la entrada y la salida. • Si es necesario, instale la unidad sobre una base elevada de las siguientes especificaciones (no suministrada) para protegerla de la nieve. Material: hierro en angulo (construya una estructura que la nieve y el viento puedan atravesar). Altura: altura maxima de nevada prevista mas 200 mm (7-7/8 pulg.) Ancho: igual o inferior al ancho de la unidad (si la base elevada es demasiado ancha, la nieve se acumulara sobre ella). WT09115X03 E-17 • Si la unidad se usa en una region fria y la operaci6n de calefacci6n se realiza continuamente durante un periodo prolongado cuando la temperatura exterior esta por debajo del punto de congelaci6n, instale un calefactor en la base elevada o tome otras medidas adecuadas para impedir que el agua se congele en la base elevada. • Al instalar un calefactor de panel, deje espacio suficiente para el mantenimiento correspond iente. Para mas detalles, consulte el Data Book o el manual del calefactor de panel. WT09115X03 E-18 9. Trabajos sobre los tubos de refrigerante No utilice un refrigerante diferente del indicado en los manuales que se entregan con la unidad y en la placa de identificaci6n. - Si to hace, la unidad o los tubos podrian explotar, o producirse una explosion o incendio durante su uso, reparaci6n o en el momento de la eliminaci6n de la unidad. - Tambien podria suponer un quebrantamiento de la normativa aplicable. - MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION no es responsable de cualquier anomalia o accidente derivantes del uso del tipo de refrigerante equivocado. Una vez completada la instalaci6n, compruebe la presencia de fugas de refrigerante. - Las fugas de refrigerante pueden producir una deficiencia de oxigeno. Si el refrigerante entra en contacto con una fuente de calor, generara gases t6xicos. Utilice guantes de protecci6n cuando trabaje en la unidad. - Si no to hace, podria sufrir lesiones. - Los tubos de alta presi6n suponen un riesgo de quemaduras si se tocan con las manos desnudas mientras la unidad esta en funcionamiento. Use las siguientes herramientas especialmente disenadas para utilizar con el refrigerante especificado: distribuidor, manguera de carga, detector de fugas de gas, valvula de retenci6n, base de carga de refrigerante, vacu6metro y equipo de recuperaci6n del refrigerante. - Los detectores de fugas de gas para refrigerantes convencionales no reaccionaran a un refrigerante que no contenga cloro. - Si mezcla el refrigerante especificado con agua, aceite refrigerante u otro refrigerante, el aceite refrigerante se deteriorara y causara un mal funcionamiento del compresor. No utilice los tubos de refrigerante existentes. - El refrigerante antiguo y el aceite refrigerante existentes en los tubos contienen una gran cantidad de cloro, que deteriorara el aceite refrigerante de la unidad nueva y causara un mal funcionamiento del compresor. 9-1. Restricciones • No deben usarse los tubos existentes ya que la presi6n de diseno de los sistemas que usan el R410A es mayor que lade los sistemas que utilizan otros tipos de refrigerante. • No conecte tubos en la unidad exterior bajo la Iluvia. • No utilice detergentes especiales para lavar las tuberias. • Respete siempre las restricciones respecto de los tubos de refrigerante (como tamano de los tubos, longitud de los tubos y distancia de separaci6n vertical) para evitar los fallos del equipo o una disminuci6n del rendimiento de la calefacci6n/refrigeraci6n. • No instale valvulas solenoides para evitar el reflujo de aceite y fallos en el arranque del compresor. • No instale una mirilla, ya que puede mostrar un flujo de refrigerante incorrecto. Si instala una mirilla y la utilizan unos tecnicos inexpertos, es posible que carguen demasiado el nivel de refrigerante. • Instale el tubo procedente de las unidades exteriores de forma tal que impida que el aceite se acumule en el tubo en determinadas circunstancias. Para mas informaci6n, consulte las siguientes figuras. * La linea punteada que aparece en las figuras indica los puntos de bifurcaci6n. (�) A un controlador BC (1) Incline el tubo procedente de las unidades exteriores hacia abajo hacia el lado de la unidad interior. En la figura de la derecha, a consecuencia de la inclinaci6n del tubo hacia arriba, el aceite se acumula en el tubo cuando la unidad 1 esta en marcha y la unidad 2 detenida. Unidad 1 Unidad 2 Unidad 1 Unidad 2 A 4- WT09115X03 E-19 (2) La distancia entre la parte inferior de la unidad y el tubo (H) debe ser de 0,2 m (7-7/8 pulg.) como maximo. En la figura de la derecha, debido a que la distancia es superior a 0,2 m (7-7/8 pulg.), el aceite se acumula en la unidad 1 cuando la unidad 2 esta en marcha y la unidad 1 detenida. Unidad 1 Unidad 2 Unidad 1 Unidad 2 Unidad 1 Unidad 2 0 AH H 5 0,2 m (7-7/8 pulg.) H > 0,2 m (7-7/8 pulg.) (3) La separacion vertical entre las unidades (H) debe ser de 0,1 m (3-15/16 pulg.) como maximo. En la figura de la derecha, debido a que la distancia es superior a 0,1 m (3-15/16 pulg.), el aceite se acumula en la unidad 1 cuando la unidad 2 esta en marcha y la unidad 1 detenida. Unidad 2 Unidad 1 A H H s 0,1 m (3-15/16 pulg.) Unidad 2 H H > 0,1 m (3-15/16 pulg.) (4) La separacion vertical entre las unidades (H) debe ser de 0,1 m (3-15/16 pulg.) como maximo. En la figura de la derecha, debido a que la distancia es superior a 0,1 m (3-15/16 pulg.), el aceite se acumula en la unidad 2 cuando la unidad 1 esta en marcha y la unidad 2 detenida. Unidad 1 Unidad 2 O 7" H 5 0,1 m (3-15/16 pulg.) 7--T OA Unidad 2 H H > 0,1 m (3-15/16 pulg.) • Asegurese de que la tolerancia de inclinacion del equipo de emparejamiento este a ±15° del suelo para evitar danos a la unidad. A OO Kit de emparejamiento +I • Restriccion al instalar la union de tuberia de 2 bifurcaciones CMY-R201/202/203/204/205S-G en los tubos de alta presi6n, los tubos de baja presi6n y los tubos de liquidos. Al controlador sub BC C AA B I I Al controlador BC principal III1--=D AI controlador sub BC - Con respecto a la union de tuberia de 2 bifurcaciones enlas tuberias de alta presi6n, baja presi6n y liquidos, A y B deben instalarse en horizontal, y C en vertical, mas arriba que el piano horizontal de A y B. • Si la longitud del tubo entre el punto de bifurcaci6n y la unidad exterior supera los 2 m (6 pies), instale un separador a una distancia de 2 m (6 pies) del punto de bifurcaci6n. El separador debe tener al menos 200 mm (7-7/8 pulg.) de altura. (tubo de alta presi6n unicamente) Si no se instala un separador, el aceite puede acumularse en el interior del tubo, to que puede provocar una falta de aceite que puede dahar el compresor. * La linea punteada que aparece en las figures indica los puntos de bifurcaci6n. 2 m (6 Pies) �I A i t A un controlador BC Separador (tubo de alta presi6n unicamente) Tubo de alta presi6n f� O <_ 2 m (6 pies) WT09115X03 E-20 9-2. Seleccion del tubo Utilice tubos de refrigerante fabricados con cobre fosforoso desoxidado (tubos sin costuras de cobre y aleaci6n de cobre) que cumplan con los requisitos locales. Las juntas de tubos tambien deben cumplir con los requisitos locales. Mantenga las superficies internas y externas de los tubos limpias y libres de azufre, 6xido, polvo/suciedad, virutas metalicas, aceites, humedad o cualquier otro contaminante. - Los contaminantes del interior de los tubos de refrigerante deterioraran el aceite refrigerante y causaran un mal funcionamiento del compresor. Utilice tubos de refrigerante para el sistema refrigerante R410A. Es posible que no se puedan utilizar estos tubos en sistemas que utilicen otros tipos de refrigerantes. Utilice tubos de refrigerante con el espesor especificado en la siguiente tabla. Tamarrio [mm (pulg.)] Grosor minimo de la pared [mm (pulg.)] o6,35 (o1/4) 0,67 (0,0265) o9,52 (03/8) 0,72 (0,0285) o12,7 (o1/2) 0,72 (0,0285) o15,88 (o5/8) 0,8 (0,0315) o19,05 (o3/4) 0,98 (0,0385) o22,2 (o7/8) 1,04 (0,0410) o25,4 (o1) 1,17 (0,0460) o28,58 (o1-1/8) 1,17 (0,0460) o31,75 (o1-1/4) 1,28 (0,0505) o34,93 (o1-3/8) 1,28 (0,0505) o41,28 (o1-5/8) 1,41 (0,0555) 9-3. Seleccion del kit de emparejamiento Consulte las siguientes secciones para seleccionar los kits de emparejamiento adecuados (vendidos por separado). * Utilice un adaptador, si es necesario, para conectar un tubo de refrigerante a un tubo de emparejamiento de un diametro distinto. 9-3-1. Union de tuberia de 2 bifurcaciones La uni6n de tuberia de 2 bifurcaciones se utiliza para conectar varias unidades interiores a un puerto. (1) Sistema R2 Capacidad total de las unidades interiores aguas abajo Modelo de kit 72 o inferior CMY-Y102SS-G2 73 a 96 CMY-Y102LS-G2 9-3-2. Kit de union de tuberia El kit de uni6n de tuberia se utiliza para conectar una unidad interior de modelo P72 o superior. Modelo de unidad interior Modelo de kit P72 a P96 CMY-R160-J1 * Cuando conecte los modelos del P72 al P96 de las unidades interiores a dos puertos, coloque el interruptor DIP SW4-6 en el controlador BC en ENCENDIDO. 9-3-3. Kit de emparejamiento de unidades exteriores El kit de emparejamiento de unidades exteriores se utiliza para combinar varias unidades exteriores. Capacidad total de las unidades exteriores Modelo de kit P192 a 240, E192 a 240 CMY-R200NCBK P264 a 336, E264 a 432 CMY-R300NCBK WT09115X03 E-21 9-4. Ejemplo de conexi6n de tubos 9-4-1. Ejemplo de conexi6n de tubo entre unidades exteriores O Instalaci6n de tubos in situ © Kit de emparejamiento © La secci6n de tubo que precede al tubo de emparejamiento debe tener al menos 500 mm (19-11/16 pulg.) de secci6n recta. WT09115X03 E-22 9-4-2. Ejemplo de conexion de tubos entre una unidad exterior y el controlador BC, y entre un controlador BC y la unidad interior (sistema R2) P072 a P168 E072 a E240 Unidad 1 O A A a a 0 � P192 a P336 E192 a E432 Unidad 1 1 Al Unidad 2 n� 0 b d b d B B C c *1 OO Unidad exterior © Controlador BC (principal) © Controlador BC (subordinado) OD Unidad interior (capacidad total de las unidades interiores aguas abajo: 05 a 30) OO Unidad interior (capacidad total de las unidades interiores aguas abajo: 72 a 96) 0 Kit de union de tuberia OO Union de tuberia de 2 bifurcaciones 0 Kit de emparejamiento de unidades exteriores OI Tubo de alta presion (A, At, A2) 0 Tubo de baja presion (A, Al, A2) O Tubo de alta presion (C, D, E, F, G, H, 1) © Tubo de baja presion (C, D, E, F, G, H, 1) 0 Tubo de liquido (C, D, E, F, G, H, 1) OO Tubo de liquido (a, b, c, d, e, f, g, h) OD Tubo de gas (a, b, c, d, e, f, g, h) e e © O DDD O O C E G I K O C E G I M c E G F FFHH H © © C B O _ g c c d d t f 9 9 h h OD OD 1 k i Pongase en contacto con su distribuidor para obtener ejemplos de conexion de tubos para los modelos TCMBG****SJ11 N4, TCMBM****JA11 N4, TCMBM****KA11 N4, o TCMBS****KB11 N4. WT09115X03 E-23 Tubos A, Al, A2 jmm (pu101 Unidad oombinada Tubo A Tubo A,*' Tubo A2*1 Modelo de unidad Unidad 1 Unidad 2 Alta presi6n Baja presi6n Alta presi6n Baja presi6n Alta presi6n Baja presi6n P072 o15,88 (5/8) o19,05 (3/4) P096 - - ol9,05 (3/4) o22,2 (7/8) - - - - P120 o19,05 (3/4) o28,58 (1-1/8) P144 - - o22,2 (7/8) o28,58 (1-1/8) - - - - P168 - - o22,2 (7/8) o28,58 (1-1/8) - - - - P192 P096 P096 o22,2 (7/8) o28,58 (1-1/8) o19,05 (3/4) o22,2 (7/8) o19,05 (3/4) o22,2 (7/8) P216 P120 P096 o22,2 (7/8)*2 o28,58 (1-1/8) o19,05 (3/4) o28,58 (1-1/8) o19,05 (314) o22,2 (7/8) P240 P120 P120 o22,2 (7/8)*2 o34,93 (1-3/8) o19,05 (3/4) o28,58 (1-1/8) o19,05 (3/4) o28,58 (1-1/8) P264 P144 P120 o28,58 (1-1/8) o34,93 (1-3/8) o22,2 (7/8) o28,58 (1-1/8) o19,05 (3/4) o28,58 (1-1/8) P288 P144 P144 o28,58 (1-1/8) o34,93 (1-3/8) o22,2 (7/8) o28,58 (1-1/8) o22,2 (7/8) o28,58 (1-1/8) P312 P168 P144 o28,58 (1-1/8) o41,28 (1-5/8) o22,2 (7/8) o28,58 (1-1/8) o22,2 (7/8) 028,58 (1-1/8) P336 P168 P168 o28,58 (1-1/8) 041,28 (1-5/8) o22,2 (7/8) o28,58 (1-1/8) o22,2 (7/8) o28,58 (1-1/8) Tubos A, Al, A2 fmm (pulq.)l Unidad combinada Tubo A Tubo A,*1 Tubo A2*' Modelo de unidad Unidad 1 Unidad 2 Alta presi6n Baja presi6n Alta presi6n Baja presi6n Alta presi6n Baja presi6n E072 o15,88 (5/8) o19,05 (3/4) E096 o19,05 (3/4) o22,2 (7/8) E120 o19,05 (3/4) o28,58 (1-1/8) E144 o22,2 (7/8) o28,58 (1-1/8) E168 - - o22,2 (7/8) o28,58 (1-1/8) - - - - E192 - - o22,2 (7/8) o28,58 (1-1/8) - - - - E192 E096 E096 o22,2 (7/8) o28,58 (1-1/8) o19,05 (3/4) o22,2 (7/8) o19,05 (3/4) o22,2 (7/8) E216 o22,2 (7/8)*2 o28,58 (1-1/8) - - E216 E120 E096 o22,2 (7/8)*2 o28,58 (1-1/8) o19,05 (3/4) o28,58 (1-1/8) o19,05 (3/4) o22,2 (7/8) E240 - - o22,2 (7/8)*2 o34,93 (1-3/8) - - - - E240 E120 E120 o22,2 (7/8)*2 o34,93 (1-3/8) o19,05 (3/4) o28,58 (1-1/8) o19,05 (3/4) o28,58 (1-1/8) E264 E144 E120 o28,58 (1-1/8) o34,93 (1-3/8) o22,2 (7/8) o28,58 (1-1/8) o19,05 (3/4) o28,58 (1-1/8) E288 E144 E144 o28,58 (1-1/8) o34,93 (1-3/8) o22,2 (7/8) o28,58 (1-1/8) o22,2 (7/8) o28,58 (1-1/8) E312 E168 E144 o28,58 (1-1/8) o41,28 (1-5/8) o22,2 (7/8) o28,58 (1-1/8) o22,2 (7/8) o28,58 (1-1/8) E336 E168 E168 o28,58 (1-1/8) o41,28 (1-5/8) o22,2 (7/8) o28,58 (1-1/8) o22,2 (7/8) o28,58 (1-1/8) E384 E192 E192 o28,58 (1-1/8) o41,28 (1-5/8) o22,2 (7/8) o28,58 (1-1/8) o22,2 (7/8) o28,58 (1-1/8) E432 E216 E216 o28,58 (1-1/8) o41,28 (1-5/8) o22,2 (7/8) I o28,58 (1-1/8) o22,2 (7/8) o28,58 (1-1/8) *1 Si la combinaci6n de unidades 1 y 2 sigue un orden distinto al indicado an la table, asegurese de utilizar los tubos del tamaho adecuado pare cada situaci6n. *2 Si la longitud del "tubo de alta presi6n X supera los 65 m (213 pies), use los tubos de o28,58 (ol-1/8) para todos los tramos que superen los 65 m (213 pies). Tubo B fmm (pulgJl Capacidad total de las unidades interiores Tubo Liquido I Gas 30 o inferior 09,52 (03/8) 1 o15,88 (o5/8) Tubos C, D, E, F, G, H, I (*) [mm (pulg.)j Numero total de las unidades interiores aguas abajo Tubo Alta presi6n Baja presi6n Liquido 72 o inferior 015,88 (o5/8) o19,05 (o3/4) o9,52 (03/8) 73 a 108 019,05 (03/4) o22,2 (o7/8) o9,52 (03/8) 109 a 126 ol9,05 (03/4) o28,58 (ol-1/8) o12,7 (ol/2) 127 a 144 o22,2 (o7/8) o28,58 (ol-1/8) o12,7 (o1/2) 145 a 216 o22,2 (o7/8) o28,58 (ol-1/8) o15,88 (o5/8) 217 a 234 o28,58 (ol-1/8) o28,58 (ol-1/8) o15,88 (o5/8) 235 a 288 028,58 (01-1/8) o34,93 (o1-3/8) o19,05 (03/4) 289 a 360 028,58 (01-1/8) o41,28 (o1-5/8) o19,05 (03/4) 361 o superior o34,93 (o1-3/8) o41,28 (o1-5/8) o19,05 (03/4) Tubos a, b, c, d, e, f, g, h (*) (mm (pulgJ) jndice de capacidad de unidad interior Tubo Liquido Gas 05, 06, 08, 12, 15, 18 o6,35 (ol/4) o12,7 (o1/2) 24, 27, 30, 36, 48, 54 o9,52 (o3/8) o15,88 (o5/8) 72 o9,52 (o3/8) o19,05 (o3/4) 96 o9,52 (o3/8) o22,2 (o7/8) Tubos i, j, k, I (*) (mm (pulg.)j jndice de capacidad de unidad interior Tubo de liquido Tubo de gas i j k I 36 o9,52 (o3/8) o9,52 (o3/8) o15,88 (o5/8) o15,88 (o5/8) 48 o9,52 (o3/8) o9,52 (03/8) ol5,88 (o5/8) o15,88 (o5/8) 54 o9,52 (o3/8) o9,52 (03/8) 015,88 (05/8) 015,88 (o5/8) 72 o9,52 (o3/8) o9,52 (o3/8) 019,05 (03/4) 015,88 (o5/8) 96 o9,52 (o3/8) I o9,52 (03/8) 1 o22,2 (07/8) o15,88 (o5/8) * Si la longitud del tubo de alta presi6n o el tubo de liquidos supera la restricci6n, use un tubo de mayor tamaho. Consulte el Manual de instalaci6n del controlador BC pare obtener mas detalles. WT09115X03 E-24 9-5. Conexiones de los tubos y funcionamiento de las valvulas Antes de calentar las secciones soldadas, purgue el gas y el aceite atrapado en los tubos. - No hacerlo podria dar lugar a un incendio, con la consecuente posibilidad de lesiones graves. Ventile la habituaci6n durante las tareas de mantenimiento de la unidad. - Las fugas de refrigerante pueden producir una deficiencia de oxigeno. Si el refrigerante entra en contacto con una fuente de calor, generara gases t6xicos. Guarde los tubos bajo techo y mantenga ambos extremos sellados hasta justo antes de realizar una conexi6n abocinada o una soldadura. (Guarde los codos y otras juntas en bolsas de plastico). - Si entra polvo, suciedad o agua en los tubos de refrigerante, el aceite refrigerante se deteriorara y causara un mal funcionamiento del compresor. Mantenga las valvulas de servicio cerradas hasta que se complete la carga de refrigerante. - De to contrario, la unidad resultara danada. Coloque una toalla mojada sobre las valvulas de servicio antes de soldar tubos para mantener la temperatura de las valvulas por debajo de 120 °C (248 OF). - Si no to hace, podria danar el equipo. Evite que las llamas alcancen los cables y la lamina metalica cuando suelde los tubos. - De to contrario, podrian producirse roturas o averias. Suelde los tubos con una purga de nitr6geno para evitar la oxidaci6n. - El flujo oxidado del interior de los tubos de refrigerante deteriorara el aceite refrigerante y causara un mal funcionamiento del compresor. 9-5-1. Desmontaje de los tubos de conexi6n pinzados La unidad se envia con los tubos de conexi6n pinzados instalados en las valvulas de servicio del lado de alta y baja presi6n para evitar fugas de gas. Siga los pasos (D a O para desmontar los tubos de conexi6n pinzados antes de conectar los tubos de refrigerante a la unidad exterior. J) Compruebe que las valvulas de servicio del refrigerante esten completamente cerradas (giradas completamente en sentido horario) (1) Purgue el gas de los tubos de conexi6n pinzadas y drene completamente el aceite refrigerante. (Consulte © a continuaci6n) ® Desmonte los tubos de conexi6n pinzados. (Consulte (0 a continuacion). <A> <B> <A> Valvula de servicio del refrigerante (alta presi6n/soldado) <B> Valvula de servicio del refrigerante (baja presion/soldado) OO Eje de la valvula La unidad se envia con la valvula cerrada. Mantenga la valvula cerrada durante la conexi6n de los tubos o la evacuaci6n del sistema. Abra la valvula cuando haya finalizado estos trabajos. Gire el eje en sentido antihorario (90') para abrir la valvula y en sentido horario para cerrarla. © Pasador de retenci6n Impide que el eje gire 90' o mas. © Puerto de servicio Los puertos de servicio le permiten cargar refrigerante, purgar el gas de los tubos de conexi6n pinzados o evacuar el sistema. OO Tapa Quite la tapa antes de girar el eje. Vuelva a instalar la tapa cuando finalice estos trabajos. OO Secci6n cortada del tubo de conexi6n pinzado O Seccion soldada del tubo de conexi6n pinzado 9-5-2. Tubos de conexi6n • El tubo de refrigerante procedente de la unidad exterior se bifurca en el extremo del tubo y cada bifurcaci6n se conecta entonces a una unidad interior. Metodo de conexi6n Unidad interior Soldada o abocinada Unidad exterior Tubo de alta presi6n Soldada Tubo de baja presi6n Soldada Seccion bifurcada Soldada • Antes de conectar los tubos, asegurese de que las valvulas de servicio esten completamente cerradas. • Los tubos disponibles en el mercado suelen contener polvo o residuos. Limpielos siempre a fondo mediante soplado con gas seco inerte. • Durante la instalaci6n, evite el ingreso de polvo, agua u otros contaminantes en los tubos. • Reduzca el numero de codos al minimo necesario y procure que los radios de curvatura sean del mayor valor posible. WT09115X03 E-25 • No utilice antioxidantes comerciales, ya que pueden provocar corrosi6n en los tubos y degradar el aceite refrigerante. Si desea mas informaci6n, p6ngase en contacto con Mitsubishi Electric. • AsegOrese de que los tubos no entren en contacto con otros tubos, paneles de unidad o placas base. • Consulte el manual de instalaci6n del kit de emparejamiento para instalar el kit de emparejamiento. <Ejemplos de conexi6n de tubos de refrigerante> • Obtenga juntas y codos in situ segOn sea necesario de acuerdo con el diametro del tubo y conecte los tubos como se muestra en las figuras a continuaci6n. (1) Cuando pase los tubos por la parte delantera de la unidad (2) Cuando pase los tubos por la parte inferior de la unidad <A> Lado de alta presi6n <B> Lado de baja presi6n (0) Tubos de la valvula de servicio del refrigerante © Reductor, etc. © Codo OO Tuber[a in situ <Referencia> Tamano de los tubos de refrigerante Tubos in situ [mm (pulg.)] Tubos de la valvula de servicio [mm (pulg.)] Lado de alta presi6n Lado de baja presi6n Lado de alta presi6n Lado de baja presi6n P072 o15,88 (o5/8) o19,05 (o3/4) o22,2 (o7/8) o28,58 (o1-1/8) P096 019,05 (03/4) o22,2 (o7/8) 028,58 (01-1/8) P120 o28,58 (o1-1/8) P144 022,2 (07/8) P168 Tubos in situ [mm (pulg.)] Tubos de la valvula de servicio [mm (pulg.)] Lado de alta presi6n Lado de baja presi6n Lado de alta presi6n Lado de baja presi6n E072 o15,88 (o5/8) o19,05 (03/4) o22,2 (07/8) 028,58 (01-1/8) E096 o19,05 (o3/4) o22,2 (o7/8) o28,58 (o1-1/8) E120 o28,58 (o1-1/8) E144 o22,2 (o7/8) E168 E192 E216 E240 o34,93 (o1-3/8) WT09115X03 E-26 • A la hora de extender los tubos in situ, respete el requisito de profundidad de inserci6n minima indicado a continuaci6n. Tamano de tubo [mm (pulg.)] Profundidad de inserci6n minima [mm (pulg.)] 05 (o1/4) o mas, menos de o8 (03/8) 6 (1/4) o8 (03/8) o mas, menos de 012 (W12) 7 (5/16) o12 (o1/2) o mas, menos de o16 (011/16) 8 (3/8) o16 (o11/16) o mas, menos de o25 (01) 10 (7/16) 025 (01) o mas, menos de 035 (01-7/16) 12 (1/2) o35 (o1-7/16) o mas, menos de 045 (01-13/16) 14 (9/16) 9-5-3. Sellado de las aperturas de los tubos Selle todas las aperturas alrededor de tubos y cables para evitar la entrada de pequehos animales, Iluvia o nieve. - No hacerlo puede derivar en fugas de corriente, descargas electricas o dahos a la unidad. OO Ejemplo de materiales de cierre (no suministrados) © Rellene las aperturas 0 IJ 9-6. Prueba de estanqueidad No utilice oxigeno, gas inflamable o refrigerantes que contenga cloro para las pruebas de estanqueidad. - De to contrario, podria producirse una explosion. El doro deteriorara el aceite refrigerante. Una vez completada la instalaci6n de los tubos, compruebe si el sistema contiene fugas realizando una prueba de estanqueidad. En caso de fuga, el compuesto del refrigerante cambiars y su rendimiento descenders. <Procedimientos de la prueba de estanqueidad> 01 Asegurese de que las vslvulas de servicio esten cerradas. 02 Aumente la presi6n de los tubos de refrigerante a traves de los puertos de servicio de los tubos de alta y baja presi6n. * Presurice a la presi6n de diseno (4,15 MPa) utilizando gas nitr6geno. ® Si la presi6n se mantiene durante un dia y no baja, los tubos han superado la prueba y no contienen fugas. Si la presi6n baja, existe una fuga. Busque el origen de la fuga pulverizando un agente burbujeante (Gupoflex, etc.) en las secciones abocinada y soldada. ® Limpie el agente burbujeante. O O OO Gas nitr6geno © Ala unidad interior © Distribuidor OO Grifo de baja presi6n OO Grifo de alta presi6n O Valvula de servicio O Tubo de baja presi6n O Tubo de alta presi6n O Unidad exterior O Puerto de servicio WT09115X03 E-27 9-7. Aislamiento termico para tubos Aisle los tubos para evitar la formation de condensation. - La condensation puede provocar la caida de gotas desde la unidad al techo o al suelo. A[sle los tubos de alta y baja presion, y los tubos de I[quido y de gas por separado con materiales aislantes de espuma de polietileno. Un aislamiento inadecuado puede producir condensacion con el consecuente goteo. Los tubos del techo son especialmente vulnerables a la condensacion y requieren un aislamiento adecuado. 9-7-1. Material aislante • Compruebe que los materiales de aislamiento cumplan con los estandares de la siguiente tabla. Entre una unidad exterior y el controlador BC Tubo de alta presion Tubo de baja presion Espesor [mm (pulg.)] Min. 10 (7/16) Min. 20 (13/16) Resistencia termica Min. 120°C (248T) Entre un controlador BC y la unidad interior (sistema R2) Tamano de tubo [mm (pulg.)] o6,35 (o1/4)—o25,4 (o1) o28,58 (o1-1/8)—o38,1 (o1-1/2) Espesor [mm (pulg.)] Min. 10 (7/16) Min. 15 (5/8) Resistencia tarmica Min. 120*C (248T) * En condiciones de mucha temperatura/humedad, podr[a necesitar aumentar el espesor del aislamiento. Incluso cuando su cliente establezca sus propias especificaciones, debera cumplir con los estandares de la table. ( Alambre de acero © Tubo © Tela asfaltica oleaginosa o asfalto Material aislante A Cobertura exterior B Fibra de vidrio + alambre de acero Material aislante A Adhesivo + espuma de polietileno termorresistente + cnta adhesiva Interior Cinta de vinilo Cobertura exterior B Debajo del suelo y expuesto Tela de cafiamo estanca + asfalto bronce Exterior Tela de canamo estanca + placa de tint + pintura oleaginosa Si se utiliza polietileno como material de recubrimiento exterior, no se requiere tela asfaltica. • No a[sle los cables electricos. B E E OA Tubo de alta presion o tubo de I[quido n © Tubo de baja presion o tubo de gas B 0 ^ © Cable electrico c OO Cinta aislante D c OO Material aislante D E • AsegOrese de aislar corrects y completamente las conexiones de los tubos procedentes de la unidad interior. WT09115X03 E-28 9-7-2. Aislamiento de la seccion de tubo penetrante en pared (1) Pared interior (cerrada) (2) Pared exterior (3) Pared exterior (expuesta) (4) Suelo (estanco) D © A B E B U (5) Paso de tubo por techo (6) Proteccion de las piezas penetrantes en paredes antiincendios y divisorias O [mm (PuI9.)1 ltilJ - - - - - - "00 0 1000 (39-3/3/8) (39-3/3/8) OO Manguito © Material aislante © Encofrado OO Material de calafateado OO Banda Capa estanca 0 Manguito con brida OO Calafatee con un material no inflamable como el mortero. OO Material aislante no inflamable • Cuando calafatee algun hueco con mortero, cubra la seccion del tubo que penetra en la pared con una lamina metalica para evitar que el material aislante se reblandezca. Para cubrir esta seccion, utilice materiales de aislamiento y recubrimiento no inflamables. (No utilice cinta de vinilo). 9-8. Evacuacion del sistema No purgue el aire utilizando refrigerante. Utilice una bomba de vacio para evacuar el sistema. - El gas residual de los tubos de refrigerante hara estallar los tubos o provocara una explosion. Utilice una bomba de vacio con valvula de retencion. - Si el aceite de la bomba de vacio retorna a los tubos de refrigerante, el aceite refrigerante podria deteriorarse y causar un mal funcionamiento del compresor. <Procedimientos de evacuacion> 10 Evacue el sistema desde ambos puertos de servicio utilizando una bomba de vacio con las valvulas de servicio cerradas. O Una vez el vacio alcance los 650 Pa (0,0943 psi/5 Torr), continue la evacuacion durante al menos una hora. ® Detenga la bomba de vacio y espere una hora. ® Verifique que el vacio no haya aumentado a mas de 130 Pa (0,01886 psi/1 Torr). O Si el vacio ha aumentado a mas de 130 Pa, es posible que se haya producido alguna infiltracion de agua. Presurice el sistema con gas nitrogeno seco hasta alcanzar los 0,05 MPa (7,25 psi/375 Torr). Repita los pasos 10 a ( hasta que el vacio aumente a 130 Pa como maximo. Si los resultados persisten, realice la "Evacuacion triple" descrita a continuacion. <Evacuacion triple> O Evacue el sistema hasta 533 Pa (0,07729 psi/4 Torr) desde ambos puertos de servicio con una bomba de vacio. OO Presurice el sistema con gas nitrogeno seco hasta 0 Pa (0 psi/0 Torr) desde el puerto de servicio de descarga. 03 Evacue el sistema hasta 200 Pa (0,029 psi/1,5 Torr) desde el puerto de servicio de aspiracion con una bomba de vacio. ® Presurice el sistema con gas nitrogeno seco hasta 0 Pa (0 psi/0 Torr) desde el puerto de servicio de descarga. OO Evacue el sistema desde ambos puertos de servicio con una bomba de vacio. © Una vez el vacio alcance los 66,7 Pa (0,09672 psi/5 Torr), detenga la bomba de vacio y espere una hora. Mantenga un vacio de 66,7 Pa durante al menos una hora. OO Verifique que el vacio no haya aumentado durante al menos 30 minutos. WT09115X03 E-29 O Distribuidor © Grifo de baja presi6n © Grifo de alta presion O Valvula de servicio Tubo de baja presion O Tubo de alta presion O Puerto de servicio O Pieza de union de 3 v[as CO Valvula (bomba de vac[o) _ O Valvula (para cargar refrigerante) O Dep6sito del refrigerante © Balanza OM Bomba de vac[o O A la unidad interior O Unidad exterior • Utilice una bascula que pueda medir hasta 0,1 kg (0,1 onzas). • Vacu6metro recomendado: vacu6metro con termistor ROBINAIR 14830A o calibre en micras • No utilice un man6metro distribuidor para medir la presion de vac[o. • Utilice una bombs de vac[o capaz de alcanzar un vac[o de 65 Pa (abs) durante los cinco minutos posteriores a la puesta en marcha. 9-9. Carga adicional de refrigerante Cargue el refrigerante en estado liquido. - Cargar refrigerante en estado gaseoso cambiara la composicion del refrigerante y reducira su rendimiento. No utilice cilindros de carga para cargar el refrigerante. - El use de un cilindro de carga cambiara la composicion del refrigerante y reducira su rendimiento. La cantidad de refrigerante que se muestra en la siguiente tabla es la cantidad cargada de fabrica en las unidades exteriores. Esta carga no incluye la cantidad necesaria para tuber[as aumentadas y que debera anadir in situ. Modelo de unidad Cantidad cargada de fabrica [kg (onzas)] P072 5,2(184) P096 8,0(283) P120 8,0(283) P144 10,8 (381) P168 10,8 (381) Modelo de unidad Cantidad cargada de fabrica [kg (onzas)] E072 6,2(184) E096 8,0(283) E120 8,0(283) E144 10,8 (381) E168 10,8 (381) E192 11,8 (416) E216 11,8 (416) E240 11,8 (416) La cantidad de refrigerante que muestra la siguiente tabla es la cantidad maxima que podra anadir in situ. Modelo de unidad Cantidad maxima anadida [kg (onzas)] P072 28,3 (999) P096 33,5(1182) P120 39,5 (1394) P144 38,5 (1359) P168 39,5 (1394) P192 58(2046) P216 74(2611) P240 74 (2611) P264 71,2 (2512) P288 68,4 (2413) P312 68,4 (2413) P336 68,4 (2413) Modelo de unidad Cantidad maxima anadida [kg (onzas)] E072 28,3 (999) E096 33,5 (1182) E120 39,5 (1394) E144 38,5 (1359) E168 39,5 (1394) E192 38,5 (1359) E192 58(2046) E216 38,5 (1359) E216 74 (2611) E240 38,5 (1359) E240 74 (2611) E264 71,2 (2512) E288 68,4 (2413) E312 68,4 (2413) E336 68,4 (2413) E384 66,4 (2343) E432 66,4 (2343) WT09115X03 E-30 La cantidad de refrigerante que se muestra en la siguiente tabla es la cantidad total maxima en el sistema. Modelo de unidad Cantidad total maxima en el sistema [kg (onzas)] P072 33,5 (1182) P096 41,5 (1464) P120 47,5 (1676) P144 49,3 (1739) P168 50,3 (1775) P192 74 (2611) P216 90(3175) P240 90(3175) P264 90(3175) P288 90(3175) P312 90(3175) P336 90(3175) Modelo de unidad Cantidad total maxima en el sistema [kg (onzas)] E072 33,5 (1182) E096 41,5 (1464) E120 47,5 (1676) E144 49,3 (1739) E168 50,3 (1775) E192 50,3 (1775) E192 74 (2611) E216 50,3 (1775) E216 90(3175) E240 50,3 (1775) E240 90(3175) E264 90(3175) E288 90(3175) E312 90(3175) E336 90(3175) E384 90(3175) E432 90(3175) Tanto el exceso como la falta de refrigerante provocaran problemas. Cargue el sistema con la cantidad apropiada de refrigerante. Registre la cantidad de refrigerante afiadida en la etiqueta adherida al panel de la caja de control para tareas de mantenimiento futuras. 9-9-1. Calculo de la cantidad de refrigerante adicional • La cantidad de refrigerante que debe anadirse depende del tamano y de la longitud total de los tubos de alta presi6n y de los tubos de I[quido. • Calcule la cantidad de refrigerante que debe cargar utilizando la siguiente formula. • Redondee al alza el resultado de[ calculo a 0,1 kg (0,1 onzas). (1) Unidades "m" y `onzas" (en un sistema R2) <Formula> • Cuando la longitud de los tubos desde la unidad exterior a la unidad interior mas lejana sea de 30,5 m (100 pies) o menos Cantidad de carga adicional (kg) Tubo de alta presi6n con - o28,58 de longitud total + • 0,36 (kg/m) Tubo de alta presi6n con o22,2 de longitud total + x 0,23 (kg/m) Tubo de alta presi6n con 019,05 de longitud total + x 0,16 (kg/m) Tubo de alta presi6n con 015,88 de longitud total x 0,11 (kg/m) Tubo de Ifquido con Tubo de Ifquido con Tubo de Ifquido con Tubo de Ifquido con + o15,88 de longitud total + o12,7 de longitud total + o9,52 de longitud total + o6,35 de longitud total x 0,2 (kg/m) x 0,12 (kg/m) x 0,06 (kg/m) x 0,024 (kg/m) Controlador BC principal o subordinado Cantidad (kg/unidad) Tipo J 1,5 Tipo JA 3,0 Tipo KA 4,7 Tipo KB 0,4 Capacidad total de las unidades exteriores Cantidad (kg) (anadir en casounidad exterior)) Sencillo 72 0 96 0 120 0 144 0 168 0 192 4,4 216 4,4 240 4,4 Combinaci6n 192 0 216 0 240 0 264 0 288 0 312 0 336 0 384 8,8 432 8,8 Capacidad total de unidades interiores conectadas Cantidad (kg) (anadir en caso de unidad interior) 27 o inferior 2,0 28 a 54 2,5 55 a 126 3,0 127 a 144 3,5 145 a 180 4,5 181 a 234 5,0 235 a 273 6,0 274 a 307 8,0 308 a 342 9,0 343 a 411 10,0 412 a 450 12,0 451 o superior 14,0 O r 7 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 L - - - - - - - - - - - - - A Capacidad total de las unidades exteriores Cantidad (kg) Sencillo 72 1,5 96 1,5 120 3,0 144 2,5 168 4,0 192 3,5 216 4,0 240 4,5 Combinaci6n 192 4,0 216 4,5 240 5,0 264 2,5 288 1,5 312 2,0 336 2,0 384 0 432 0 WT09115X03 E-31 *En el caso de que todos los modelos de unidades interiores conectados sean del Caso 1 o Caso 2, NO anada el refrigerante que se indica en la tabla (A). En su lugar, anada la siguiente cantidad de refrigerante. Caso 1 : TPLFYP006/018/036EM14** Anada 0,67 kg por TPLFYP006/018/036EM14** Caso 2: TPEFYP006/024/036MA14*** - Anada 0,55 kg por TPEFYP006/024/036MA14**. • Cuando la longitud de los tubos desde la unidad exterior a la unidad interior mas lejana sea superior a 30,5 m (100 pies) Cantidad de carga adicional (kg) Tubo de alta presibn con - 028,58 de longitud total + Tubo de alta presibn con 022,2 de longitud total + Tubo de alta presibn con 019,05 de longitud total + Tubo de alta presibn con 015,88 de longitud total x 0,33 (kg/m) x 0,21 (kg/m) x 0,14 (kg/m) x 0,1 (kg/m) Tubo de liquido con Tubo de liquido con Tubo de liquido con Tubo de liquido con + 015,88 de longitud total + 012,7 de longitud total + 09,52 de longitud total + 06,35 de longitud total x 0,18 (kg/m) x 0,11 (kg/m) x 0,054 (kg/m) x 0,021 (kg/m) Controlador BC principal o subordinado Cantidad (kg/unidad) Tipo J 1,5 Tipo JA 3,0 Tipo KA 4,7 Tipo KB 0,4 Capacidad total de las unidades exteriores Cantidad (kg) (anadir en casounidad exterior)) Sencillo 72 0 96 0 120 0 144 0 168 0 192 4,4 216 4,4 240 4,4 Combinaci6n 192 0 216 0 240 0 264 0 288 0 312 0 336 0 384 8,8 432 8,8 Capacidad total de unidades interiores conectadas Cantidad (kg) (anadir en caso de unidad interior) 27 o inferior 2,0 28 a 54 2,5 55 a 126 3,0 127 a 144 3,5 145 a 180 4,5 181 a 234 5,0 235 a 273 6,0 274 a 307 8,0 308 a 342 9,0 343 a 411 10,0 412 a 450 12,0 451 o superior 14,0 *Al conectar la unidad TPLFYP006EM14**, TPLFYP018EM14** o TPLFYP036EM14** anada 0,67 kg de refrigerante por cads unidad interior. *Al conectar la unidad TPEFYP006MA14**, TPEFYP024MA14** o TPEFYP036MA14** anada 0,55 kg de refrigerante por cada unidad interior. <Ejemplo> Modelo de unidad exterior 1: P120 Modelo de unidad exterior 2: P120 Modelo de controlador BC (principal): TCMBM0108JA11 N4 Modelo de controlador BC (subordinado): TCMBS0104KB11 N4 x 4 unidades Capacidad total de unidades interiores conectadas: 206 Consulte algunos ejemplos de conexion de tubo en la seccidn 94 de los tubos marcados con las siguientes letras. A: o28,58; 40 m B: o9,52; 10 m C: o9,52; 5 m D: o9,52; 5 m E: o9,52; 5 m F: o9,52; 5 m G: o9,52; 5 m H: o9,52; 5 m I: o9,52; 5 m Al: o19,05; 3 m A2: o19,05; 1 m a: o9,52; 10 m b: o9,52; 5 m c: o6,35; 5 m d: o6,35; 10 m e: o6,35; 5 m f: o9,52; 5 m WT09115X03 E-32 g: o9,52; 5 m h: o9,52; 5 m La longitud total de los tubos de alta presion y de los tubos de liquido en cada caso es la siguiente: Longitud total de o28,58: 40 (A) Longitud total de o19,05: 3 (Al) + 1 (A2) = 4 Longitud total de o9,52: 10 (B) + 5 (C) + 5 (D) + 5 (E) + 5 (F) + 5 (G) + 5 (H) + 5 (1) + 10 (a) + 5 (b) + 5 (f) + 5 (g) +5(h)=75 Longitud total de o6,35: 5 (c) + 10 (d) + 5 (e) = 20 Por tanto, cuando la longitud de los tubos desde la unidad exterior a la unidad interior mas lejana sea superior a 30,5 m (100 pies), Cantidad de carga adicional = (40 x 0,33) + (4 x 0,14) + (75 x 0,054) + (20 x 0,021) + 3,0 + (0,4 x 4) + 5 = 27,9 kg (las fracciones se redondean al alza). (2) Unidades "pies" y "onzas" (en un sistema R2) <Formula> • Cuando la longitud de los tubos desde la unidad exterior a la unidad interior mas lejana sea de 30,5 m (100 pies) o menos Cantidad de carga Tubo de alta presion con Tubo de alta presion con Tubo de alta presion con - longitud total de o1-1/8 + longitud total de o7/8 + longitud total de o3/4 + Tubo de alta presion con longitud total de o5/8 adicional (onzas) x 3,88 (onzas/pies) x 2,48 (onzas/pies) x 1,73 (onzas/pies) x 1,19 (onzas/pies) Tubo de liquido con longitud Tubo de liquido con longitud Tubo de liquido con longitud Tubo de liquido con longitud + total de o5/8 + total de o1/2 + total de o3/8 + total de o1/4 x 2,16 (onzas/pies) x 1,30 (onzas/pies) x 0,65 (onzas/pies) x 0,26 (onzas/pies) Controlador BC principal o subordinado Cantidad (onzas/unidad) Tipo J 53 Tipo JA 106 Tipo KA 166 Tipo KB 15 Capacidad total de las unidades exteriores Cantidad (onzas) (anadir en casounidad exterior)) Sencillo 72 0 96 0 120 0 144 0 168 0 192 156 216 156 240 156 Combinaci5n 192 0 216 0 240 0 264 0 288 0 312 0 336 0 384 311 432 311 Capacidad total de unidades interiores conectadas Cantidad (onzas) (anadir en caso de unidad interior) 27 o inferior 71 28 a 54 89 55 a 126 106 127 a 144 124 145 a 180 159 181 a 234 177 235 a 273 212 274 a 307 283 308 a 342 318 343 a 411 353 412 a 450 424 451 o superior 494 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 L — — — — — — — — — — — — — A Capacidad total de las unidades exteriores Cantidad (onzas) Sencillo 72 53 96 53 120 106 144 89 168 142 192 124 216 142 240 159 Combinaci6n 192 142 216 159 240 177 264 89 288 53 312 71 336 71 384 0 432 0 * En el caso de que todos los modelos de unidades interiores conectados sean del Caso 1 o Caso 2, NO anada el refrigerante que se indica en la tabla ©. En su lugar, anada la siguiente cantidad de refrigerante. Caso 1 : TPLFYP006/018/036EM14** — A15ada 24 onzas por TPLFYP006/018/036EM14**. Caso 2 : TPEFYP006/024/036MA14** Anada 20 onzas por TPE FYPO06/024/036MAl 4**. WT09115X03 E-33 • Cuando la longitud de los tubos desde la unidad exterior a la unidad interior mas lejana sea superior a 30,5 m (100 pies) Cantidad de carga adicional (onzas) Tub? de alta presi6n con - longitud total de o1-1/8 + x 3,54 (onzas/pies) Tubo de alta presi6n con longitud total de o7/8 + x 2,26 (onzas/pies) Tubo de alta presi6n con longitud total de o3/4 + x 1,51 (onzas/pies) Tubo de alta presi6n con longitud total de o5/8 x 1,08 (onzas/pies) Tubo de liquido con longitud Tubo de liquido con longitud Tubo de liquido con longitud Tubo de liquido con longitud + total de o5/8 + total de o1/2 + total de o3/8 + total de o1/4 x 1,94 (onzas/pies) x 1,19 (onzas/pies) x 0,59 (onzas/pies) x 0,23 (onzas/pies) Controlador BC principal o subordinado Cantidad (onzas/unidad) Tipo J 53 Tipo JA 106 Tipo KA 166 Tipo KB 15 Capacidad total de las unidades exteriores Cantidad (onzas) (anadir en casounidad exterior)) Sencillo 72 0 96 0 120 0 144 0 168 0 192 156 216 156 240 156 Combinaci6n 192 0 216 0 240 0 264 0 288 0 312 0 336 0 384 311 432 311 Capacidad total de unidades interiores conectadas Cantidad (onzas) (anadir en casounidad interior)) 27 o inferior 71 28 a 54 89 55 a 126 106 127 a 144 124 145 a 180 159 181 a 234 177 235 a 273 212 274 a 307 283 308 a 342 318 343 a 411 353 412 a 450 424 451 o superior 494 *Al conectar la unidad TPLFYP006EM14**, TPLFYP018EM14** o TPLFYP036EM14** anada 24 onzas de refrigerante por cada unidad interior. *Al conectar la unidad TPEFYP006MA14**, TPEFYP024MA14** o TPEFYP036MA14** anada 20 onzas de refrigerante por cada unidad interior. <Ejemplo> Modelo de unidad exterior 1: P120 Modelo de unidad exterior 2: P120 Modelo de controlador BC (principal): TCMBM0108JAl l N4 Modelo de controlador BC (subordinado): TCMBS0104KB11 N4 x 4 unidades Capacidad total de unidades interiores conectadas: 206 Consulte algunos ejemplos de conexi6n de tubo en la secci6n 94 de los tubos marcados con las siguientes letras. A: o1-1/8; 131 pies B: o3/8; 32 pies C: o3/8; 16 pies D: o3/8; 16 pies E: o3/8; 16 pies F: o3/8; 16 pies G: o3/8; 16 pies H: o3/8; 16 pies I: o3/8; 16 pies Al: o3/4; 9 pies A2: o3/4; 3 pies a: o3/8; 32 pies b: o3/8; 16 pies C: o1/4; 16 pies d: o1/4; 32 pies e: o1/4; 16 pies f: o3/8; 16 pies g: o3/8; 16 pies h: o3/8; 16 pies WT09115X03 E-34 La longitud total de los tubos de alta presidn y de los tubos de liquido en cada caso es la siguiente: Longitud total de of-1/8: 131 (A) Longitud total de o3/4: 9 (Al) + 3 (A2) = 12 Longitud total de o3/8: 32 (B) + 16 (C) + 16 (D) + 16 (E) + 16 (F) + 16 (G) + 16 (H) + 16 (1) + 32 (a) + 16 (b) + 16 (f) + 16 (g) + 16 (h) = 240 Longitud total de a1/4: 16 (c) + 32 (d) + 16 (e) = 64 Por tanto, cuando la longitud de los tubos desde la unidad exterior a la unidad interior mas lejana sea superior a 30,5 m (100 pies), Cantidad de carga adicional = (131 x 3,54) + (12 x 1,51) + (240 x 0,59) + (64 x 0,23) + 106 + (15 x 4) + 177 = 981,2 onzas (las fracciones se redondean al alza). 9-9-2. Carga de refrigerante adicional Cargue la cantidad calculada de refrigerante en estado liquido a traves del puerto de servicio despues de completar el trabajo de conexion de los tubos. Una vez completado todo el trabajo, apriete firmemente todas las tapas de puerto de servicio y las tapas del eje para evitar fugas de refrigerante. • No permita que el refrigerante salga a la atm6sfera. • Consulte en la tabla siguiente el par de apriete adecuado. Tamano de tubo [mm (pulg.)j Tapa de eje (N-m) Tapa de puerto de servicio (N-m) o9,52 (o3/8) 25 14 o12,7 (o1/2) 30 015,88 (o5/8) 35 019,05 (03/4) 25 025,4 (o1) 25 028,58 (o1-1/8) 24,5 18 • Si el deposito de refrigerante no esta equipado con un tubo sifon, cargue el refrigerante liquido con el deposito bocabajo como muestra la siguiente figura. ( Tubo sifon • Despues del vaciado y la carga con refrigerante, aseg6rese de que las valvulas de servicio esten totalmente abiertas. No ponga en marcha la unidad con las valvulas de servicio cerradas. WT09115X03 E-35 10. Trabajos electricos Los trabajos electricos deben ser realizados por personal cualificado de acuerdo con las normativas locales y las instrucciones detalladas en este manual. Utilice exclusivamente los cables especificados y circuitos dedicados. - La capacidad inadecuada de la fuente de alimentacion o el trabajo electrico inapropiado provocaran descargas electricas, averias o incendios. El personal cualificado debe proporcionar una conexi6n a tierra adecuada. - Una mala conexidn a tierra puede provocar descargas electricas, incendios, explosiones o averias como consecuencia del ruido electrico. No conecte el cable de tierra a tubos de gas o agua, pararrayos o cables por tierra de Iineas telef6nicas. 10-1. Antes de comenzar los trabajos electricos • Antes de realizar trabajos electricas, consulte los manuales de la unidad interior o del controlador. • Tenga en cuenta las condiciones ambientales (temperatura ambiente, luz solar directa, Iluvia, etc.) cuando realice el tendido de cables y las conexiones. • Al abrir o cerrar el panel frontal de la caja de control, no permita que entre en contacto con ninguno de los componentes internos. • Los requisitos especificos sobre el cableado deben adaptarse a las normativas del pals o region. • D6 un cierto margen al cableado para la caja de control en las unidades interior y exterior, ya que a veces estas cajas se extraen para realizar trabajos de mantenimiento. 10-2. Cables de alimentacion y capacidad del dispositivo Permita que los cables de alimentacion tengan cierta holgura. - De to contrario, podrian romperse o sobrecalentarse y provocar la aparicion de humo o incendios. Instale un disyuntor para circuito inversor en la fuente de alimentacion de cada unidad. - Si no to hace, podrian producirse descargas electricas o incendios. Utilice unicamente disyuntores con los valores nominales apropiados (disyuntor de fuga a tierra, interruptor local <interruptor + fusible que cumpla los codigos electricos locales> o disyuntor de sobrecorriente). - Si no to hace, podrian producirse descargas electricas, averias, humo o incendios. Utilice unicamente cables de alimentacion estandar de la capacidad suficiente. - Si no to hace, podrian producirse fugas de corriente, sobrecalentamiento, humo o incendios. Apriete los tornillos de todos los terminates al valor dinamometrico especificado. - Los tornillos flojos y los fallos de contacto pueden provocar humo o incendios. En caso de gran flujo de corriente electrica debido a anomalia o cableado defectuoso, pueden funcionar los disyuntores de fugas a tierra en el lado de la unidad y en el lado ascendente del sistema de alimentacion. Seg(in la importancia del sistema, separe el sistema de alimentacion o adopte medidas para asegurar la coordinacion de los disyuntores. • Ejemplo de cableado OO Disyuntor de fuga a tierra �A) © Unidad exterior T(S)NU:3-208-230 V B Y(S)NU:3-460 V © Caja de derivacion L1, L2, L3 Unidad Interior O = CC' Tierra OO Controlador BC estandar o principal OO Controlador sub BC -208-230 V L1, L2 O 0 L O • Asegurese de utilizar un disyuntor de sobrecarga adecuado. No olvide que el sobreamperaje generado puede contener pequenas cantidades de corriente directa. • Seleccione el tipo de disyuntor para circuito de inversor como disyuntor de fuga a tierra. (Serie NV-C de Mitsubishi Electric o equivalente) • El disyuntor de fuga a tierra debe utilizarse en combinacion con un interruptor local. • Asegure la correcta secuencia de Eases. (1-1, L2, y 1-3) WT09115X03 E-36 • Si el cable de alimentaci6n esta danado, para evitar riesgos, la sustituci6n del mismo debe confiarse al fabricante, su agente de reparaciones o personas igualmente cualificadas. • Utilice fuentes de alimentaci6n exclusivas para la unidad exterior y la unidad interior. AsegOrese de cablear la OC y la OS de forma individual. • Tamano de[ cable de alimentaci6n, capacidad del dispositivo a impedancia del sistema (Si las normativas locales no especifican el tmano de cable de alimentaci6n y la capacidad del dispositivo minimos, consulte los valores de la siguiente tabla). • Tamano del cable de alimentaci6n, capacidad del dispositivo a impedancia de[ sistema Se utiliza MOP para seleccionar el fusible, el interruptor o el disyuntor para la fuga de corriente. (1) 208V Modelo de unidad exterior Combinaci6n de unidades Tamano minimo [mmz (AWG)] Disyuntor de fuga a tierra MCA (A) MOP (A) Cable de alimentaci6n Cable de Berra TURYP0723AN40AN/AB - 5,3(10) 5,3(10) 30 A 30 mA o 100 mA 0,1 s. o menos 24 40 TURYP0963AN40AN/AB - 8,4(8) 8,4(8) 40 A 100 mA 0,1 s. o menos 33 50 TURYP1203AN40AN/AB - 13,3(6) 13,3(6) 50A 100 mA 0,1 s. o menos 43 70 TURYP1443AN40AN/AB - 21,2(4) 21,2(4) 60A 100 mA 0,1 s. o menos 52 80 TURYP1683AN40AN/AB - 21,2(4) 21,2(4) 70A 100 mA 0,1 s. o menos 61 100 TURYP0963AN40AN/AB 8,4(8) 8,4(8) 40 A 100 mA 0,1 s. o menos 33 50 TURYP1923BN40AN/AB TURYP0963AN40AN/AB 8,4(8) 8,4(8) 40A 100 mA 0,1 s. o menos 33 50 TURYP1203AN40AN/AB 13,3(6) 13,3(6) 50 A 100 mA 0,1 s. o menos 43 70 TURYP21636N40AN/AB TURYP0963AN40AN/AB 8,4(8) 8,4(8) 40 A 100 mA 0,1 s. o menos 33 50 TURYP1203AN40AN/AB 13,3(6) 13,3(6) 50 A 100 mA 0,1 s. o menos 43 70 TURYP24036N40AN/AB TURYP1203AN40AN/AB 13,3(6) 13,3(6) 50 A 100 mA 0,1 s. o menos 43 70 TURYP1443AN40AN/AB 21,2(4) 21,2(4) 60A 100 mA 0,1 s. o menos 52 80 TURYP2643BN40AN/AB TURYP1203AN40AN/AB 13,3(6) 13,3(6) 50 A 100 mA 0,1 s. o menos 43 70 TURYP1443AN40AN/AB 21,2(4) 21,2(4) 60 A 100 mA 0,1 s. o menos 52 80 TURYP28836N40AN/AB TURYP1443AN40AN/AB 21,2(4) 21,2(4) 60 A 100 mA 0,1 s. o menos 52 80 TURYP1683AN40AN/AB 21,2(4) 21,2(4) 70 A 100 mA 0,1 s. o menos 61 100 TURYP3123BN40AN/AB TURYP1443AN40AN/AB 21,2(4) 21,2(4) 60A 100 mA 0,1 s. o menos 52 80 TURYP1683AN40AN/AB 21,2(4) 21,2(4) 70A 100 mA 0,1 s. o menos 61 100 TURYP33636N40AN/AB TURYP1683AN40AN/AB 21,2(4) 21,2(4) 70A 100 mA 0,1 s. o menos 61 100 TURYE0723AN40AN/AB - 8,4(8) 8,4(8) 35 A 30 mA o 100 mA 0,1 s. o menos 23 35 TURYE0963AN40AN/AB - 13,3(6) 13,3(6) 45 A 100 mA 0,1 s. o menos 31 45 TURYE1203AN40AN/AB - 21,2(4) 21,4(4) 60 A 100 mA 0,1 s. o menos 41 60 TURYE1443AN40AN/AB - 21,2(4) 21,2(4) 60A 100 mA 0,1 s. o menos 49 80 TURYE1683AN40AN/AB - 21,2(4) 21,2(4) 70A 100 mA 0,1 s. o menos 57 90 TURYE1923AN40AN/AB - 33,6(2) 33,6(2) 80 A 100 mA 0,1 s. o menos 66 110 TURYE0963AN40AN/AB 13,3(6) 13,3(6) 45 A 100 mA 0,1 s. o menos 31 45 TURYE19236N40AN/AB TURYE0963AN40AN/AB 13,3(6) 13,3(6) 45 A 100 mA 0,1 s. o menos 31 45 TURYE2163AN40AN/AB - 33,6(2) 33,6(2) 100 A 100 mA 0,1 s. o menos 73 125 TURYE1203AN40AN/AB 21,2(4) 21,4(4) 60 A 100 mA 0,1 s. o menos 41 60 TURYE2163BN40AN/AB TURYE0963AN40AN/AB 13,3(6) 13,3(6) 45 A 100 mA 0,1 s. o menos 31 45 TURYE2403AN40AN/AB - 33,6(2) 33,6(2) 100 A 100 mA 0,1 s. o menos 82 125 TURYE1203AN40AN/AB 21,2(4) 21,2(4) 60 A 100 mA 0,1 s. o menos 41 60 TURYE24036N40AN/AB TURYE1203AN40AN/AB 21,2(4) 21,2(4) 60 A 100 mA 0,1 s. o menos 41 60 TURYE1443AN40AN/AB 21,2(4) 21,2(4) 60 A 100 mA 0,1 s. o menos 49 80 TURYE2643BN40AN/AB TURYE1203AN40AN/AB 21,2(4) 21,2(4) 60 A 100 mA 0,1 s. o menos 41 60 TURYE1443AN40AN/AB 21,2(4) 21,2(4) 60 A 100 mA 0,1 s. o menos 49 80 TURYE2883BN40AN/AB TURYE1443AN40AN/AB 21,2(4) 21,2(4) 60 A 100 mA 0,1 s. o menos 49 80 TURYE1683AN40AN/AB 21,2(4) 21,2(4) 70 A 100 mA 0,1 s. o menos 57 90 TURYE31236N40AN/AB TURYE1443AN40AN/AB 21,2(4) 21,2(4) 60 A 100 mA 0,1 s. o menos 49 80 TURYE1683AN40AN/AB 21,2(4) 21,2(4) 70 A 100 mA 0,1 s. o menos 57 90 TURYE3363BN40AN/AB TURYE1683AN40AN/AB 21,2(4) 21,2(4) 70 A 100 mA 0,1 s. o menos 57 90 TURYE1923AN40AN/AB 33,6(2) 33,6(2) 80 A 100 mA 0,1 s. o menos 66 110 TURYE3843BN40AN/AB TURYE1923AN40AN/AB 33,6(2) 33,6(2) 80 A 100 mA 0,1 s. o menos 66 110 TURYE2163AN40AN/AB 33,6(2) 33,6(2) 100 A 100 mA 0,1 s. o menos 73 125 TURYE4323BN40AN/AB TURYE2163AN40AN/AB 33,6(2) 33,6(2) 100 A 100 mA 0,1 s. o menos 73 125 WT09115X03 E-37 (2) 230 V Modelo de unidad exterior Combinaci6n de unidades Tamano minimo [mm2 (AWG)] Disyuntor de fuga a tierra MCA (A) MOP (A) Cable de alimentaci6n Cable de tiers TURYP0723AN40AN/AB - 5,3(10) 5,3(10) 30 A 30 mA o 100 mA 0,1 s. o menos 22 35 TURYP0963AN40AN/AB - 8,4(8) 8,4(8) 40 A 100 mA 0,1 s. o menos 30 45 TURYP1203AN40AN/AB - 13,3(6) 13,3(6) 50A 100 mA 0,1 s. o menos 40 60 TURYP1443AN40AN/AB - 21,2(4) 21,2(4) 60A 100 mA 0,1 s. o menos 48 70 TURYP1683AN40AN/AB - 21,2(4) 21,2(4) 70A 100 mA 0,1 s. o menos 57 90 TURYP0963AN40AN/AB 8,4(8) 8,4(8) 40A 100 mA 0,1 s. o menos 30 45 TURYP1923BN40AN/AB TURYP0963AN40AN/AB 8,4(8) 8,4(8) 40 A 100 mA 0,1 s. o menos 30 45 TURYP1203AN40AN/AB 13,3(6) 13,3(6) 50 A 100 mA 0,1 s. o menos 40 60 TURYP2163BN40AN/AB TURYP0963AN40AN/AB 8,4(8) 8,4(8) 40 A 100 mA 0,1 s. o menos 30 45 TURYP1203AN40AN/AB 13,3(6) 13,3(6) 50 A 100 mA 0,1 s. o menos 40 60 TURYP24036N40AN/AB TURYP1203AN40AN/AB 13,3(6) 13,3(6) 50 A 100 mA 0,1 s. o menos 40 60 TURYP1443AN40AN/AB 21,2(4) 21,2(4) 60A 100 mA 0,1 s. o menos 48 70 TURYP26436N40AN/AB TURYP1203AN40AN/AB 13,3(6) 13,3(6) 50 A 100 mA 0,1 s. o menos 40 60 TURYP1443AN40AN/AB 21,2(4) 21,2(4) 60A 100 mA 0,1 s. o menos 48 70 TURYP2883BN40AN/AB TURYP1443AN40AN/AB 21,2(4) 21,2(4) 60A 100 mA 0,1 s. o menos 48 70 TURYP1683AN40AN/AB 21,2(4) 21,2(4) 70 A 100 mA 0,1 s. o menos 57 90 TURYP31236N40AN/AB TURYP1443AN40AN/AB 21,2(4) 21,2(4) 60A 100 mA 0,1 s. o menos 48 70 TURYP1683AN40AN/AB 21,2(4) 21,2(4) 70 A 100 mA 0,1 s. o menos 57 90 TURYP33636N40AN/AB TURYP1683AN40AN/AB 21,2(4) 21,2(4) 70 A 100 mA 0,1 s. o menos 57 90 TURYE0723AN40AN/AB - 5,3(10) 5,3(10) 30A30 mAo 100 mA0,1 s. o menos 21 30 TURYE0963AN40AN/AB - 13,3(6) 13,3(6) 45 A 100 mA 0,1 s. o menos 29 45 TURYE1203AN40AN/AB - 21,2(4) 21,2(4) 60 A 100 mA 0,1 s. o menos 38 60 TURYE1443AN40AN/AB - 21,2(4) 21,2(4) 60 A 100 mA 0,1 s. o menos 45 70 TURYE1683AN40AN/AB - 21,2(4) 21,2(4) 70 A 100 mA 0,1 s. o menos 53 80 TURYE1923AN40AN/AB - 33,6(2) 33,6(2) 80 A 100 mA 0,1 s. o menos 60 100 TURYE0963AN40AN/AB 13,3(6) 13,3(6) 45 A 100 mA 0,1 s. o menos 29 45 TURYE19236N40AN/AB TURYE0963AN40AN/AB 13,3(6) 13,3(6) 45 A 100 mA 0,1 s. o menos 29 45 TURYE2163AN40AN/AB - 33,6(2) 33,6(2) 90 A 100 mA 0,1 s. o menos 67 110 TURYE1203AN40AN/AB 21,2(4) 21,2(4) 60 A 100 mA 0,1 s. o menos 38 60 TURYE21636N40AN/AB TURYE0963AN40AN/AB 13,3(6) 13,3(6) 45 A 100 mA 0,1 s. o menos 29 45 TURYE2403AN40AN/AB - 33,6(2) 33,6(2) 90 A 100 mA 0,1 s. o menos 75 125 TURYE1203AN40AN/AB 21,2(4) 21,2(4) 60 A 100 mA 0,1 s. o menos 38 60 TURYE2403BN40AN/AB TURYE1203AN40AN/AB 21,2(4) 21,2(4) 60 A 100 mA 0,1 s. o menos 38 60 TURYE1443AN40AN/AB 21,2(4) 21,2(4) 60 A 100 mA 0,1 s. o menos 45 70 TURYE26436N40AN/AB TURYE1203AN40AN/AB 21,2(4) 21,2(4) 60 A 100 mA 0,1 s. o menos 38 60 TURYE1443AN40AN/AB 21,2(4) 21,2(4) 60 A 100 mA 0,1 s. o menos 45 70 TURYE2883BN40AN/AB TURYE1443AN40AN/AB 21,2(4) 21,2(4) 60 A 100 mA 0,1 s. o menos 45 70 TURYE1683AN40AN/AB 21,2(4) 21,2(4) 70 A 100 mA 0,1 s. o menos 53 80 TURYE31236N40AN/AB TURYE1443AN40AN/AB 21,2(4) 21,2(4) 160 A 100 mA 0,1 s. o menos 45 70 TURYE1683AN40AN/AB 21,2(4) 21,2(4) 170 A 100 mA 0,1 s. o menos 53 80 TURYE3363BN40AN/AB TURYE1683AN40AN/AB 21,2(4) 21,2(4) 70 A 100 mA 0,1 s. o menos 53 80 TURYE1923AN40AN/AB 33,6(2) 33,6(2) 80 A 100 mA 0,1 s. o menos 60 100 TURYE3843BN40AN/AB TURYE1923AN40AN/AB 33,6(2) 33,6(2) 80 A 100 mA 0,1 s. o menos 60 100 TURYE2163AN40AN/AB 33,6(2) 33,6(2) 90A 100 mA 0,1 s. o menos 67 110 TURYE43236N40AN/AB TURYE2163AN40AN/AB 33,6(2) 33,6(2) 90 A 100 mA 0,1 s. o menos 67 110 WT09115X03 E-38 (3) 460 V Modelo de unidad exterior Combinaci6n de unidades Tamano minimo [mm2 (AWG)] Disyuntor de fuga a tierra MCA (A) (460 V) MOP (460 V) V) Cable de alimentaci6n Cable de tierra TURYP0724AN40AN/AB - 2,1 (14) 2,1 (14) 15A30 mAo 100 mA0,1 s. o menos 11 15 TURYP0964AN40AN/AB - 3,3(12) 3,3(12) 20 A 30 mA o 100 mA 0,1 s. o menos 15 20 TURYP1204AN40AN/AB - 5,3(10) 5,3(10) 25 A 30 mA o 100 mA 0,1 s. o menos 18 25 TURYP1444AN40AN/AB - 5,3(10) 5,3(10) 30 A 30 mA o 100 mA 0,1 s. o menos 20 30 TURYP1684AN40AN/AB - 8,4(8) 8,4(8) 40A 100 mA0,1 s. o menos 28 40 TURYP0964AN40AN/AB 3,3(12) 3,3(12) 20 A 30 mA o 100 mA 0,1 s. o menos 15 20 TURYP1924BN40AN/AB TURYP0964AN40AN/AB 3,3(12) 3,3(12) 20 A 30 mA o 100 mA 0,1 s. o menos 15 20 TURYP1204AN40AN/AB 5,3(10) 5,3(10) 25A30 mAo 100 mA0,1 s. o menos 18 25 TURYP2164BN40AN/AB TURYP0964AN40AN/AB 3,3(12) 3,3(12) 20A30 mAo 100 mA0,1 s. o menos 15 20 TURYP1204AN40AN/AB 5,3(10) 5,3(10) 25A30 mAo 100 mA0,1 s. o menos 18 25 TURYP2404BN40AN/AB TURYP1204AN40AN/AB 5,3(10) 5,3(10) 25 A 30 mA o 100 mA0,1 s. o menos 18 25 TURYP1444AN40AN/AB 5,3(10) 5,3(10) 30 A 30 mA o 100 mA0,1 s. o menos 20 30 TURYP26446N40AN/AB TURYP1204AN40AN/AB 5,3(10) 5,3(10) 25 A 30 mA o 100 mA0,1 s. o menos 18 25 TURYP1444AN40AN/AB 5,3(10) 5,3(10) 30 A 30 mA o 100 mA0,1 s. o menos 20 30 TURYP28846N40AN/AB TURYP1444AN40AN/AB 5,3(10) 5,3(10) 30 A 30 mA o 100 mA 0,1 s. o menos 20 30 TURYP1684AN40AN/AB 8,4(8) 8,4(8) 40A 100 mA 0,1 s. o menos 28 40 TURYP3124BN40AN/AB TURYP1444AN40AN/AB 5,3(10) 5,3(10) 30A30 mAo 100 mA0,1 s. o menos 20 30 TURYP1684AN40AN/AB 8,4(8) 8,4(8) 40A 100 mA0,1 s. o menos 28 40 TURYP33646N40AN/AB TURYP1684AN40AN/AB 8,4(8) 8,4(8) 40A 100 mA0,1 s. o menos 28 40 TURYE0724AN40AN/AB - 2,1 (14) 2,1(14) 15A30 mAo 100 mA0,1 s. o menos 10 15 TURYE0964AN40AN/AB - 3,3(12) 3,3(12) 20A30 mAo 100 mA0,1 s. o menos 14 20 TURYE1204AN40AN/AB - 5,3(10) 5,3(10) 30 A 30 mAo 100 mA0,1 s. o menos 19 30 TURYE1444AN40AN/AB - 8,4(8) 8,4(8) 35 A 30 mAo 100 mA0,1 s. o menos 22 35 TURYE1684AN40AN/AB - 8,4(8) 8,4(8) 40A 100 mA0,1 s. o menos 26 40 TURYE1924AN40AN/AB - 8,4(8) 8,4(8) 40A 100 mA0,1 s. o menos 30 50 TURYE0964AN40AN/AB 3,3(12) 3,3(12) 20 A 30 mAo 100 mA0,1 s. o menos 14 20 TURYE1924BN40AN/AB TURYE0964AN40AN/AB 3,3(12) 3,3(12) 20 A 30 mAo 100 mA 0,1 s. o menos 14 20 TURYE2164AN40AN/AB - 13,3(6) 13,3(6) 50 A 100 mA0,1 s. o menos 33 50 TURYE1204AN40AN/AB 5,3(10) 5,3(10) 30 A 30 mAo 100 mA0,1 s. o menos 19 30 TURYE21646N40AN/AB TURYE0964AN40AN/AB 3,3(12) 3,3(12) 20 A 30 mAo 100 mA0,1 s. o menos 14 20 TURYE2404AN40AN/AB - 13,3(6) 13,3(6) 50 A 100 mA0,1 s. o menos 37 60 TURYE1204AN40AN/AB 5,3(10) 5,3(10) 30 A 30 mAo 100 mA0,1 s. o menos 19 30 TURYE2404BN40AN/AB TURYE1204AN40AN/AB 5,3(10) 5,3(10) 30 A 30 mAo 100 mA0,1 s. o menos 19 30 TURYE1444AN40AN/AB 8,4(8) 8,4(8) 35 A 30 mAo 100 mA0,1 s. o menos 22 35 TURYE26446N40AN/AB TURYE1204AN40AN/AB 5,3(10) 5,3(10) 30 A 30 mAo 100 mA 0,1 s. o menos 19 30 TURYE1444AN40AN/AB 8,4(8) 8,4(8) .35A30 mAo 100 mA 0,1 s. o menos 22 35 TURYE2884BN40AN/AB TURYE1444AN40AN/AB 8,4(8) 8,4(8) 35 A 30 mAo 100 mA 0,1 s. o menos 22 35 TURYE1684AN40AN/AB 8,4(8) 8,4(8) 40A 100 mA0,1 s. o menos 26 40 TURYE3124BN40AN/AB TURYE1444AN40AN/AB 8,4(8) 8,4(8) 35 A 30 mAo 100 mA 0,1 s. o menos 22 35 TURYE1684AN40AN/AB 8,4(8) 8,4(8) 40A 100 mA0,1 s. o menos 26 40 TURYE3364BN40AN/AB TURYE1684AN40AN/AB 8,4(8) 8,4(8) 40A 100 mA0,1 s. o menos 26 40 TURYE1924AN40AN/AB 8,4(8) 8,4(8) 40A 100 mA0,1 s. o menos 30 50 TURYE3844BN40AN/AB TURYE1924AN40AN/AB 8,4(8) 8,4(8) 40 A 100 mA 0,1 s. o menos 30 50 TURYE2164AN40AN/AB 13,3(6) 1 13,3(6) 150A 100 mA 0,1 s. o menos 33 50 TURYE4324BN40AN/AB TURYE2164AN40AN/AB 13,3(6) 1 13,3(6) 150A 100 mA 0,1 s. o menos 33 50 • El tamano del cable corresponde al valor minimo para cables de tubos metalicos. Si la tension cae, utilice un cable con un diametro de mayor tamano. Aseg6rese que la tension de la alimentaci6n principal no baje mas del 10%. AsegOrese de que el desajuste de voltaje entre las fases sea del 2% o menos. • Los cables de alimentaci6n electrica de los componentes de aparatos destinados al use en la intemperie no deben ser mas ligeros que el cable flexible con revestimiento de policloropreno (diseho 245 IEC57). Por ejemplo, utilice cables del tipo YZW. 10-3. Especificaciones del cable decontrol • Cable de transmisi6n Tipo Cable blindado de dos nucleos CVVS, CPEVS o MWS Tamano 1,25 mm2 (AWG 16) Longitud Max. 200 m (656 pies) La longitud maxima permitida de los cables de transmisi6n a traves de unidades exteriores (tanto cables de transmisi6n de control centralizado como cables de Observaciones transmisi6n interior -exterior) as de 500 m (1640 pies).*' La longitud maxima permitida de los cables de transmisi6n desde la fuente de alimentaci6n a cada unidad exterior o al controlador del sistema es de 200 m (656 pies). * No utilice un cable de varios nucleos para conectar unidades interiores que pertenezcan a diferentes sistemas refrigerante. El use de un cable de varios nucleos puede provocar errores o problemas an la transmisi6n de sepal. Garantice la continuidad del blindaje cuando amplte el cable de transmisi6n. *1 Si prolongara la longitud de los cables de transmisi6n a 1000 m (3280 pies), consults a su distribuidor. • Cable de controlador remoto Cable de controlador remoto ME Cable de controlador remoto MA Tipo Cable de 2 nucleos envainado (no blindado) CVV Tamano 0,3-1,25 mm2 (AWG 22-16) (0,75-1,25 mm2 (AWG 18-16) si se conecta un controlador remoto sencillo) Longitud Max. 10 m (32 pies) Si la longitud es superior a 10 m (32 pies), use un cable blindado de 1,25 mm2 (AWG 16). Max. 200 m (656 pies) WT09115X03 E-39 10-4. Configuracion del sistema • Codigo de unidad y nt rnero maximo de unidades conectables Tipo de unidad Codigo NOmero de unidades conectables Unidad exterior Unidad principal OC — Unidad subordinada OS — Unidad interior IC 1 a 50 unidades por OC (dependiendo del modelo de unidad) Controlador BC Principal BC 1 unidad por OC Subordinada BS 0 a 11 unidades por OC Controlador remoto RC 0 a 2 unidades por grupo Unidad de superalimentaci6n RP 0 a 2 unidades por OC Una unidad de superalimentaci6n puede ser necesaria dependiendo del numero de unidades interiores conectadas. La unidad exterior no es compatible con PAC-SF46EPA, solo con PAC-SF46EPA-G. Las unidades exteriores de un mismo circuito de refrigerante se designan automaticamente como OC y OS. Las unidades exteriores se designan como OC y OS an orden descendents de capacidad (si dos o mas unidades tienen la misma capacidad, en orden ascendente de direcci6n). • Ejemplo de configuraci6n del sistema * Los numeros entre par6ntesis de las siguientes figuras indican los n6meros de direcci6n. (1) Cuando se conectan controladores remotos ME I Desplace el conector de puente de r CN41 a CN40. *1 c�1 C= SW5-1: ON *2 (51) -21 Deje el conector de puente conectado a CN41. * SW5-1: ON *2 OA Cable blindado © Controlador remoto subordinado © Controlador del sistema CN41 Grupo 1 Grupo 3 — — — BC *3 r) Boz 11M2S J o 0 IC IC I (01) 1041 M1MS M5 L3 II I oo AB (101) ME IC l BC *3 (5 nMzs O IC (02) (03) TM TB5 eon I -r oon I II� AB I (103) I ME Grupo 5 BS *3 Ic Ic I (55) (05) (06) 41M2S TB5 TB5 J O O M1M2S M1.2S I Q3 I AB AB (105) (155) ME © ME L4I> Ic (07) TB M 1M25 I I I i ------------- *1 Si no existe una fuente de alimentaci6n conectada al cable de transmisi6n de control centralizado, desplace el conector de puente de CN41 a CN40 en una sole de las unidades exteriores (excepto el modelo 208-230 V). Cuando el controlador del sistema est6 conectado al lado TB7 y se est6 utilizando el modelo de unidad exterior 208-230 V, conecte una fuente de alimentaci6n al lado TB7. Si no se puede utilizer una fuente de alimentaci6n, conecte el controlador del sistema al lado TB3. Se pueden conectar haste tres controladores del sistema al lado TB3. *2 Si se usa un controlador del sistema, establezca el SW5-1 de todas las unidades exteriores en ON. *3 BC, BS Longitud maxima permitida de los cables de control Cables de transmisi6n a traves de unidades exteriores L1 + L2 + L3 + L4, L1 + L2 + L3 + L5, L1 + L2 + Ls 5 500 m (1640 pies) Cables de transmisi6n L1, L3 + L4, L3 + Ls, Ls, L2 + Ls s 200 m (656 pies) ?1, f2, 6, fa s 10 m (32 pies) Cables de controlador remoto Si la longitud supera los 10 m (32 pies), debera incluir el tramo qua supere los 10 m (32 pies) en Is longitud maxima permitida de los cables de transmisi6n anteriores. *4 Si prolongara Is longitud de los cables de transmisi6n a 1000 m (3280 pies), consulte a su distribuidor. WT09115XO3 E-40 (2) Cuando se conectan controladores remotos MA Desplace el conector de puente de CN41 a CN40. *1 * SW5-1: ON *2 Deje el conector de puente conectado a CN41. * SW5-1: ON *2 J J (A) Cable blindado © Controlador remoto subordinado © Controlador del sistema L7 oc Grupo 1 Grupo 3 Grupo 5 C IC' IC' r Ic Ic (51) 1) BC *3 � BS *3 (52) (01) (�) (66) (05) m2 (06) �MTB3 M2] M1M25 TB5 TB15 TB5 TB15 M1M25 TB5 TB15 TB5 TB ' 000 000 M 1M2S 1 2 o0 00 M1M2S 1 2 000 00 000 MiM2S 1 2 M1M25 o00 00 000 2 1 2 00 R14 0B A B O 00 E MA MA MA La L4 O Oc IC IC IC (53) BC *3 (54) (02) (03) (07) MiM2] MIM2S TB5 TB TBS TB 5 TB5 T815 0 0 0 0 0 0 MiM2S 10 o M1M25 1 2 JM2 M2S ,1 © L j I A B L- - MA - - - - - - *1 Si no existe una fuente de alimentacion conectada al cable de transmision de control centralizado, desplace el conector de puente de CN41 a CN40 an una sole de las unidades exteriores (excepto el modelo 208-230 V). Cuando el controlador del sistema esta conectado al lado TB7 y se esta utilizando el modelo de unidad exterior 208-230 V, conecte una fuente de alimentacion al lado TB7. Si no se puede utilizar una fuente de alimentacion, conecte el controlador del sistema al lado TB3. Se pueden conectar haste tres controladores del sistema al lado TB3. *2 Si se use un controlador del sistema, establezca el SW5-1 de todas las unidades exteriores en ON. *3 Cuando se conecta un PAR-31 MAA a un grupo, no puede conectarse ningun otro Controlador remoto MA al mismo grupo. "4 BC, BS Longitud maxima permitida de los cables de control Cables de transmision a traves de unidades exteriores L7 + L2 + L3 + L4, L7 + L2 + Le 5 500 m (1640 pies) Cables de transmision Li, L3 + L4, L6, L2 + L6 5 200 m (656 pies) Cables de Controlador remoto m1 + m2, m1 + m2 + m3 + m4 5 200 m (656 pies) *5 Si prolongara la longitud de los cables de transmision a 1000 m (3280 pies), consulte a su distribuidor. (3) Cuando se conecta una unidad amplificadora de transmision L1 L2 L3 L4 L6 L7 (A) Cable blindado *1 Conecte en estrella los terminates (TB3) de las unidades exteriores todos juntos en el mismo sistema refrigerante. *2 Deje el conector de puente conectado a CN41. Para conectar un Controlador del sistema a la linea de transmision (TB7) pare un control centralizado, consulte la (1), (2) o el Libro de Datos. *3 BC Longitud maxima permitida de los cables de control Cables de transmision L1 + L2 + L3 + L4 + L6+ L7, L1 + L2 + L3 + L4 + L6+ La, L1 + L2 + L3 + Ls, L7 + L6 + L4 + L5, L6 + L4 + LB + La < 200 m (656 pies) &, f2 5 10 m (32 pies) Cables de Controlador remoto * Si la longitud supera los 10 m (32 pies), debera incluir el tramo qua supere los 10 m (32 pies) an la longitud maxima permitida de los cables de transmision anteriores. WT09115X03 E-41 10-5. Conexiones de cables de la caja de control Realice las conexiones de forma segura y sin tension en los terminales. Los cables mal conectados pueden romperse, sobrecalentarse o provocar humo o incendios. 10-5-1. Paso del cable de alimentaci6n a traves del orificio troquelado • Abra el panel frontal cuando realice trabajo de cableado. • AyOdese de un martillo para perforar los orificios troquelados de la parte inferior del panel frontal o la base. Realice el orificio troquelado oportuno para el tamaho del cable de alimentaci6n, consultando la siguiente tabla. (1) Cuando pase el cableado por la parte delantera de la unidad (2) Cuando pase el cableado por la parte inferior de la unidad Tamano de cable de alimentaci6n (mm2) Orificio troquelado qua debe realizar 2, 3,5, 5,5 Orificio troquelado 2 8,14 Orificio troquelado 4 21, 26, 33 Orificio troquelado 3 53, 67, 84 Orificio troquelado 5 OO Cinta de sujeci6n de cables © Cable de alimentaci6n © Cable de transmisi6n La longitud de la secci6n despues del agujero de acceso del cable debe ser de al menos 1100 mm (43 pulg.). 0 Abrazadera OO Cable a tierra que conecta la caja principal y la caja del inversor <Atenci6n> • No quite el cable a tierra que conecta la caja principal y la caja del inversor. • Instale el cable de transmisi6n como se muestra en la figural anterior de manera que el cable sea to suficiente largo para que la caja principal se retire para el mantenimiento. • Si observa huecos alrededor del cable de alimentaci6n y el de transmisi6n, asegOrese de rellenarlos con el material adecuado para prevenir que entre la nieve, to cual puede provocar un daho en las piezas electricas y para proteger sus manos del contacto directo con los cables. • Si pasa el cable de alimentaci6n por el orificio troquelado sin utilizar una tuberia, desbarbe el orificio y proteja el cable de alimentaci6n con cinta protectora. • Use una tuberia para estrechar la abertura si existe la posibilidad de que entren animales pequenos en la unidad. • Cuando saque la tuberia de la parte inferior de la unidad, selle con masilla alrededor de la abertura del tubo para impedir la infiltraci6n de aqua. WT09115X03 E-42 10-5-2. Fijacion de los cables Pase los cables como se muestra en las figuras a continuaci6n. • P072, E072 (460 V) Caja principal e 0 Bloque de terminates de la transmisi6n ° Manguito de goma (para el cableado de la conexi6n del inversor principal (200 V) y cableado de la unidad (cableado del solenoide en espiral)) Cinta (suministrada) Manguito de goma 2 Cableado de la unidad (cableado del sensor) • P072, E072 (208-230 V) Bloque determinates de la transmisi6n Manguito de goma (para el cable del ventilador y el cableado de la unidad (cableado del solenoide an espiral)) Cinta (suministrada) Manguito de goma 2 — Cableado de la unidad (cableado del sensor) 0 Caja del inversor j Bloque de terminales de la fuente de alimentaci6n el6ctrica Cinta de sujecibn de cables Manguito de goma (para el cable del ventilador) Cinta (suministrada) ' Manguito de goma 1 Cable de alimentaci6n Cableado d la conexi6n dell ( inversor Cable de transmisi6n no suministrado) principal (bajo voltaje) La longitud de la secci6n despu6s del agujero Cubra la brecha ° Cableado de la conexi6n del inversor Cable de transmisi6n principal (bajo voltaje) (no suministrado) Cubra la brecha. Caja del inversor Bloque de terminales de la fuente de alimentaci6n electrica Cinta de sujeci6n de cables Manguito de goma (para el cable del ventilador) Cinta (suministrada) Manguito de goma 1 Cable de alimentaci6n WT09115X03 E-43 • P096 a 168 (460 V), E096 a 240 (460 V) Bloque de terminales de la transmision Manguito de goma (pare el cableado de la conexion del inversor principal (200 V) y cableado de la unidad (cableado del solenoide en espiral)) Cinta (suministrada) Manguito de goma 2 cableado de la unidad (cableado del sensor) • P096 a 168 (208-230 V), E096 a 240 (208-230 V) Bloque de terminales de la transmision Manguito de goma (pare el cable del ventilador y el cableado de la unidad (cableado del solenoide an espiral)) Cinta (suministrada) Manguito de goma 2 — Cableado de la unidad (cableado del sensor) ®o a a Cubra la brecha. Bloque de terminales de la Puente de alimentation electrica Cinta de sujecion de cables Cinta (suministrada) Manguito de goma 1 Cable de alimentation (no suministrado) Cable de transmision Bloque de terminales de la fuente de alimentation electrica Cinta de sujecion de cables Cinta (suministrada) Manguito de goma 1 a Cable de alimentation (no suministrado) IY Cable de transmision V(no suministrado) Cubra la brecha. WT09115X03 E-44 Siga el procedimiento a continuacion. 10 Pase el cable de alimentaci6n a traves del manguito de goma 1. (Consulte *1 y *2 a continuacion). O Pase el cableado de la unidad (cableado del sensor) y el cable de transmisi6n a traves del manguito de goma 2. (Consulte *1 y *2 a continuacion). ® Con las cintas de sujeci6n de cables, mantenga en su sitio el cable de la fuente de alimentacion y el cable de transmision, respectivamente. a0 Con la cinta suministrada, asegure cada manguito de goma. (Consulte *3 a continuacion). *1 Asegurese de qua los cables no sobresalgan por Is abertura del manguito de goma. Vista superior Cableado Corte Los cables salon del manguito de goma. Cableado Manguito de goma r (plaza oval) Manguito de goma Cableado (pieza oval) Manguito de goma Vista superior Vista transversal *2 Cuando pase el cableado a travos del manguito de goma, asegurese de que el manguito no se desprenda de Is 13mina metalica de la caja de control. Chapa metalica an to raja de control Manguito de goma Chapa metalica en la raja de control �anguitok�!! de goma *3 Cuando coloque Is cinta suministrada alrededor del manguito de goma, asegurese de no dejar ningun espacio entre los extremos. Onto Aprox. 20 mm (13/16 pulg.) Manguito de Corte an at Existe un espacio goma manguito de goma an el manguito de superpuesto goma. <Parte posterior del manguito de goma> <<Importante>> Cuando coloque to banda sobre el manguito de goma, asegurese de qua los extremos del manguito se superpongan como se muestran an la figure de to izquierda. Corte an el Si quads un espacio, puede entrar ague de la nieve o Is Iluvia y manguito de provocar dafios an el equipo. goma WT09115X03 E-45 10-5-3. Conexi6n de los cables P072, E072 O � ��4� its:I3-T->• I�I�I�II�I�I�I P096 a 168, E096 a 240 W. - O m®® ir?1FTZ�v 1�1�jrog 10101•l ran ( Caja de control © Bloque de terminales de la fuente de alimentaci6n electrica (T131) © Bloque de terminales para la linea de transmisi6n interior -exterior (TB3) (P Bloque de terminales del cable de transmisi6n de control centralizado (TB7) © O Bloque de terminales con tornillos flojos © Bloque de terminales correctamente instalado © Instale arandelas de presi6n en paralelo al bloque de terminales. A O� O Cables de alimentaci6n, cables de transmisi6n Conexi6n en estrella (solo cables de transmisi6n) WB© © Bloques de terminales (TB1, TB3, TB7)O Realice una marca de alineaci6n. . A 0 Instate los terminates de anillo uno tras otro. C <Atenci6n> • Conecte los cables al bloque de terminales de la fuente de alimentaci6n y al bloque de terminales de la transmisi6n, respectivamente. Una Conexi6n err6nea no permite que el sistema funcione. • No conecte nunca el cable de alimentaci6n al bloque de terminales de la transmisi6n. Si se conecta, los componentes el6ctricos resultar6n danados. • Los cables de transmisi6n deben separarse (5 cm [2 pulg.] o m6s) del cable de alimentaci6n para que no se vean afectados por el ruido el6ctrico del cable de alimentaci6n. (No coloque los cables de transmisi6n y el cable de alimentaci6n en la misma tuberia). • Aplique el par de apriete correspondiente a cada tipo de tornillo mostrado a continuaci6n. Procure no aplicar un par de apriete excesivo para no danar el tornillo. Bloque de terminales (TB1, 208-230 V [tornillo M8]: 10-13,5 [N•m], 460 V [tornillo M6]): 2,5-2,9 [N•m] Bloque de terminales (TB3, TB7 [tornillo M3,5]): 0,82-1,0 [N-m] • Cuando apriete los tornillos, no presione el destornillador con fuerza para evitar danar el tornillo. • Una vez apretados los tornillos, realice una marca de alineaci6n con un marcador permanente atravesando la cabeza del tornillo, la arandela y el terminal. Siga el procedimiento a continuaci6n para conectar los cables. 10 Conecte el cable de transmisi6n interior -exterior al TB3. Si se conectan varias unidades exteriores al mismo sistema refrigerante, conecte en estrella el TB3 (M1, M2, terminal de tierra) de las unidades exteriores. Conecte el cable de transmisi6n interior -exterior de la unidad interior al TB3 (M1, M2, terminal de tierra) de una sola de las unidades exteriores. Conecte el terminal blindado al terminal de tierra. OO Conecte los cables de la transmisi6n de control centralizado (entre el sistema de control centralizado y las unidades exteriores de diferentes sistemas refrigerante) al TB7. Si existen varias unidades exteriores conectadas al mismo sistema refrigerante, conecte en estrella el TB7 (M1, M2, S) en todas las unidades exteriores del mismo sistema refrigerante.' Conecte el terminal blindado al terminal S. *1 Si el TB7 de las unidades exteriores an el mismo sistema refrigerante no esta conectado an estrella, conecte el cable de transmisi6n de control centralizado al T137 de la OC. Si la OC est6 fuera de funcionamiento, o si el control centralizado se realize durante la desconexi6n de la alimentaci6n el6ctrica, conecte an estrella el TB7 en la OC y OS. (En caso de que la unidad exterior cuyo conector de puente CN41 en el tablero de control se sustituy6 por CN40 est6 fuera de funcionamiento o en caso de que la alimentaci6n est6 desconectada, el control centralizado no se efectuara aunque TB7 est6 conectado an estrella.) 03 Si no existe una fuente de alimentaci6n conectada al cable de transmisi6n de control centralizado, desplace el conector de puente de CN41 a CN40 en una sola de las unidades exteriores (excepto el modelo 208-230 V). Cuando el controlador del sistema est6 conectado al lado TB7 y se est6 utilizando el modelo de unidad exterior 208-230 V, conecte una fuente de alimentaci6n al lado TB7. Si no se puede utilizar una fuente de alimentaci6n, conecte el controlador del sistema al lado TB3. Se pueden conectar hasta tres controladores del sistema al lado TB3. ® En la unidad exterior cuyo conector de puente desplaz6 de CN41 a CN40, cortocircuite el terminal S y el terminal de tierra. OS Conecte los terminales M1 y M2 del bloque de terminales de la transmisi6n de la unidad interior que tengan las direcciones mas bajas del grupo al bloque de terminales del controlador remoto. WT09115X03 E-46 © Si se conecta un controlador del sistema, establezca el SW5-1 de todas las unidades exteriores en ON. O Fije los cables firmemente con la cinta de sujeci6n de cables por debajo del bloque de terminales. 10-6. Ajuste de la direcci6n • Active el interruptor de ajuste de la direcci6n tal como se muestra mas abajo. Matodo de ajuste de la direcci6n Direcci6n Asigne la direcci6n mas baja a la unidad interior principal del grupo y asigne direcciones consecutivas al resto de unidades interiores del mismo grupo. En un sistema R2 con un controlador sub BC, realice los ajustes de las unidades interiores an el siguiente orden. Unidad interior (Ajuste las direcciones de forma qua las direcciones de O seen inferiores a las de z2), y las direcciones de O sean (principal, subordinada) inferiores a las de O). 01 a 50 O Unidades interiores conectadas al controlador BC principal o al controlador HBC principal O Unidades interiores conectadas al controlador sub BC 1 O Unidades interiores conectadas al controlador sub BC 2 Unidad exterior (OC, OS) Asigne direcciones consecutivas a las unidades exteriores del mismo sistema refrigerants. 51 a 100 * Para establecer la direcci6n an 100, se debera establecer el interruptor de configuraci6n de direcci6n an 50. Asigne una direcci6n igual a la direcci6n de la unidad exterior mas 1. Si la direcci6n asignada al controlador BC Principal principal coincide con cualquiera de las direcciones asignadas a las unidades exteriores o al controlador sub BC, 51 a 100 utilice una direcci6n diferente no utilizada dentro del rango de ajuste. Controlador BC * Para establecer la direcci6n an 100, se debera establecer el interruptor de configuraci6n de direcci6n an 50. Asigne una direcci6n qua sea igual a la direcci6n mas baja de las unidades interiores conectadas al controlador sub Subordinada BC mas 50. 51 a 100 * Para establecer la direcci6n an 100, se debera establecer el interrupter de configuraci6n de direcci6n an 50. Principal Asigne una direcci6n igual a la direcci6n de la unidad interior principal del grupo mas 100. 101 a 150 Controlador remote ME Subordinada Asigne una direcci6n igual a la direcci6n de la unidad interior principal del grupo mas 150. 151 a 200 Controlador remoto MA No requiere ajuste de la direcci6n. (Requiere el ajuste de la unidad principal/subordinada). — Las unidades exteriores de un mismo circuito de refrigerante se designan automaticamente como OC y OS. Las unidades exteriores se designan como OC y OS an orden descendents de capacidad (si dos o mas unidades tienen la misma capacidad, an orden ascendente de direcci6n). Realice el ajuste del grupo de unidades interiores desde los controladore��s!!rremotos dd!e�spues de encender todas las unidades. O M..4r-j4^ S: O 1 -::n -,z� a ®Wta :saga^ aa�: "71, Interruptor de ajuste de la direcci6n (unidades exteriores) s T09115X03 E-47 11. Funcionamiento de prueba 11-1. Antes de realizar una prueba de funcionamiento Una vez completado el trabajo de cableado, mida la resistencia de aislamiento y asegurese de que la lectura muestre 1 MO como minimo. - Si no to hace, podrfan producirse descargas electricas, averias o incendios. Active la alimentaci6n electrica al menos 12 horas antes de iniciar la puesta en funcionamiento. Mantenga la unidad encendida durante toda la temporada de trabajo. - Una alimentaci6n insuficiente provocara averias. • Antes de realizar una prueba de funcionamiento, apague la unidad exterior y desconecte el cable de alimentaci6n del bloque de terminales de la fuente de alimentaci6n para medir la resistencia de aislamiento. • Mida la resistencia de aislamiento entre el bloque de terminales de la fuente de alimentaci6n y la conexi6n a tierra con un ohmi6metro de 500 V; asegurese de que sea como minimo 1 MD. • Si la resistencia de aislamiento es de 1 MD o superior, conecte el cable de alimentaci6n del terminal de la fuente de alimentaci6n y encienda la unidad durante al menos 12 horas antes de ponerla en marcha. Si la resistencia de aislamiento esta inferior a 1 MO, no ponga en marcha la unidad y compruebe si el compresor presenta alguna falta a tierra. • Mientras la unidad este encendida, el compresor seguira energizado incluso cuando este detenido. • La resistencia de aislamiento entre el bloque de terminales de la fuente de alimentaci6n y el terminal de tierra puede caer a aproximadamente 1 Mfg inmediatamente despues de la instalaci6n o si se ha mantenido apagada la unidad durante un periodo prolongado de tiempo, debido al estancamiento del refrigerante en el compresor. • Encienda la unidad y mantengala encendida durante 12 horas o mas para que el refrigerante del compresor se evapore y aumente la resistencia de aislamiento. • No aplique la tensi6n de un ohmi6metro al bloque de terminales de los cables de transmisi6n. Si hace esto, se danara el tablero de control. • No mida la resistencia de aislamiento del bloque de terminales de la transmision del controlador remoto de la unidad. • Compruebe si existen fugas de refrigerante y si existen cables de alimentaci6n y de transmision sueltos. • Compruebe que las valvulas de servicio del lado de alta y baja presi6n esten completamente abiertas. Apriete las tapas de las valvulas. • Compruebe el orden de fases de la fuente de alimentaci6n y la tensi6n de la interfaz. Si la tension esta fuera del intervalo de ±10% o si el desequilibrio de tension supera el 2%, consulte con el cliente las contramedidas que debe tomar. • Si existe una unidad amplificadora de transmision conectada, enciendala antes de encender la unidad exterior. Si enciende primero la unidad exterior, no se verificara correctamente la informaci6n de conexi6n del circuito de refrigerante. Si ha encendido primero la unidad exterior, encienda la unidad amplificadora de transmision y, a continuation, apague y vuelva a encender la unidad exterior. • Si hay una fuente de alimentaci6n conectada al cable de transmision de control centralizado o si utiliza un controlador de sistema con funci6n de fuente de alimentaci6n, realice una prueba de funcionamiento con la fuente de alimentaci6n energizada. Deje el conector de puente conectado a CN41. • Al encender la unidad o al recuperar la alimentaci6n, el rendimiento de la misma puede disminuir durante aproximadamente 30 minutos. WT09115X03 E-48 11-2. Ajuste de funci6n Realice el ajuste de funci6n configurando los interruptores DIP SW4, SW6 y SWP3 del panel principal. Anote los ajustes de los interruptores en la etiqueta del diagrama del cableado electrico en el panel frontal de la caja de control para referencia futura cuando sea necesario sustituir el tablero de control. • Complete los siguientes pasos para realizar el ajuste de unidad de temperatura (°C o OF). 1O Establezca el 101 digito binario de SW6 en ON. 02 Ajuste SW4 como muestra la siguiente tabla para seleccionar el elemento de ajuste No. 921. (El n ° de elemento de ajuste aparecera en el LED1). 03 Presione SWP3 durante dos segundos o mas para cambiar el ajuste. (Los ajustes pueden comprobarse en el LED3). No. de elemento de ajuste SW4 0: OFF, 1: ON *' Ajuste (visualizaci6n de LED3) *2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Apagado Encendido Ajuste de unidad de 921 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 °C OF temperature *1 Realice el ajuste de SW4 con la unidad energizada. *2 Se encendera de manera intermitente mientras el sistema esta poniendose an funcionamiento. • Para realizar varios ajustes de funci6n mediante el SW5 y SW6, consulte la siguiente tabla. Indite de ajustes Ajuste Temporizaci6n de ajuste del interruptor OFF ON SW5-1 Interruptor de control centralizado Sin conexi6n al controlador centralizado Con conexi6n al controlador centralizado Antes de energizer la unidad SW5-2 Borrado de la informaci6n de conexi6n Control normal Borrado Antes de energizer la unidad SW5-3 — Predeterminado antes del envio — SW5-4 — — SW5-5 — — SW5-6 — — SW5-7 — — SW5-8 — — Indite de ajustes Ajuste Temporizaci6n de ajuste del interruptor OFF ON SW6-1 — — — — SW6-2 — — — — SW6-3 — — — — SW6-4 Ajuste de presi6n est6tica alta Consulte *1. Consulte *1. Antes de energizer la unidad SW6-5 SW6-6 — — — — SW6-7 Selecci6n del modo de bajo ruido Prioridad de rendimiento Prioridad de bajo ruido En cualquier momento despues de ser energizado SW6-8 Selecci6n de bajo ruido o demanda Belo ruido (Noche) Demanda Antes de energizer la unidad SW6-9 Selecci6n de visualizaci6n diagn6stico o ajuste de detalles de funcionamiento Consulte *2. Consulte *2. En cualquier momento despues de ser energizado SW6-10 No cambie los ajustes de fabrica de SW5-3 a SW5-8. A menos qua se especifique Io contrario, dale el interruptor an OFF cuando este indicado por "-," qua puede estar ajustado an OFF por algun motivo. *1 *2 SW6-5: ON SW6-5: OFF SW6-4: ON 80 Pa 60 Pa SW6-4: OFF 30 Pa 0 Pa SW6-10: ON SW6-10: OFF SW6-9: ON LED (tipo redondo) n° 0 a 1023 LED (7 segundos) n° 1024 a 2047 SW6-9: OFF Ajuste de funci6n n* 0 a 1023 LED (7 segundos) n° 0 a 1023 11-3. Caracteristicas de funcionamiento relacionadas con la carga de refrigerante Antes de intentar ajustar la carga de refrigerante de un sistema determinado, es importante entender claramente las caracteristicas del refrigerante y las caracterlstica de funcionamiento de los acondicionadores de aire. • Durante la operation de refrigeration, la cantidad de refrigerante presente en el acumulador es la minima con todas las unidades interiores en funcionamiento. • Durante la operaci6n de calefacci6n, la cantidad de refrigerante presente en el acumulador es la maxima con todas las unidades interiores en funcionamiento. • Una carga insuficiente de refrigerante tiende a aumentar la temperatura de descarga. • Cambiar la cantidad de refrigerante del sistema habiendo refrigerante en el acumulador apenas afecta a la temperatura de descarga. • Cuanto mayor es el nivel de presi6n alta, mas probable es que aumente la temperatura de descarga. • Cuanto menor es el nivel de presi6n baja, mas probable es que aumente la temperatura de descarga. • Cuando la cantidad de refrigerante presente en el sistema es la adecuada, la temperatura de la carcasa del compresor es de 10 a 60 °C (de 50 a 140 OF) mas alta que la temperatura de saturaci6n de baja presi6n. Si la diferencia de temperatura entre la temperatura de la carcasa del compresor y la temperatura de saturacion de baja presi6n es de 5 °C (41 OF) o inferior, puede producirse una sobrecarga de refrigerante. WT09115X03 E-49 11-4. Comprobacion de funcionamiento Los sintomas citados a continuaci6n son normales y no representan ning6n problema. Situaciones Aparici6n en pantalla Causa del controlador remoto La palate autom6tica cambia autom6ticamente la Visualizaci6n normal La palate autom6tica puede cambiar el funcionamiento del flujo de afire de vertical a horizontal en el modo direcci6n del flujo de aire. refrigeraci6n si el funcionamiento del flujo de aire vertical he estado en marcha durante 1 hora. En descongelaci6n an el modo calefacci6n o inmediatamente despu6s de activar/desactivar la calefacci6n, la palate autom6tica cambia autom6ticamente a flujo de aire horizontal durante un breve periodo de tiempo. La velocidad del ventilador cambia autom6ticamente Visualizaci6n normal El ventilador funciona a velocidad muy baja cuando el termostato est6 desactivado y cambia autom6ticamente durante el funcionamiento de la calefacci6n. a la velocidad preestablecida de acuerdo con el ajuste del temporizador o de la temperatura del refrigerante cuando se enciende el termostato. El ventilador se para durante el funcionamiento de la 'Defrost' El ventilador permanece detenido durante el ciclo de descongelaci6n. calefacci6n. El ventilador sigue funcionando despu6s de qua la Ninguna visualizaci6n La unidad se detiene durante la operaci6n de calefacci6n y, a continuaci6n, el ventilador se pone an marcha unidad se haya detenido. durante un minuto para expulsar el color. Al principio del modo de funcionamiento calefacci6n, no 'Stand By" El ventilador funciona a velocidad muy baja durante cinco minutos tras el inicio de la operaci6n de calefacci6n es posible ajustar el ventilador manualmente. o haste que la temperature alcance los 35°C (95°F). A continuaci6n, el ventilador funciona a baja velocidad durante dos minutos y finalmente se ajusta a la velocidad preestablecida. Cuando se enciende la unidad, aparece la pantalla de la El mensaje "HO" o El sistema se inicia. Espere haste que el mensaje "HO" o "PLEASE WAIT' deje de parpadear y se apague e derecha an el controlador remoto durante alrededor de 'PLEASE WAIT' int6ntelo de nuevo. cinco minutos. aparece de manera intermitente. La bomba de drenaje sigue funcionando despu6s de Ninguna visualizaci6n La bomba de drenaje sigue an funcionamiento durante tres minutos despu6s de haberse detenido el modo de que la unidad se haya detenido. refrigeraci6n. La bomba de drenaje se pone an marcha cuando detecta agua de drenaje, incluso con la unidad detenida. La unidad interior emite ruido al cambiar de calefacci6n Visualizaci6n normal Se trata de un sonido normal del circuito de refrigeraci6n funcionando correctamente. a refrigeraci6n y viceversa. Inmediatamente despu6s del encendido, la unidad Visualizaci6n normal Un flujo inestable del medio de calefacci6n produce sonido. Se trata de algo temporal y no indica un problema. interior emite el sonido del flujo de liquido. Un momento despu6s de que la unidad exterior se Ninguna visualizaci6n Una vez que la unidad se detiene y antes de realizarse la ecualizaci6n de presi6n, la diferencia de presi6n se detiene, la unidad produce un chasquido. vuelve temporalmente pequena, y la v6lvula de retenci6n puede vibrar y producir un sonido. Esto as temporado, y no implica un problema. El agua de drenaje sale de la unidad exterior por la Ninguna visualizaci6n Esto asegura el drenaje adecuado del ague de drenaje an el caso de que el ague de drenaje se congele y se parte inferior del intercambiador de color. I quede an la unidad exterior durante la operaci6n de calefacci6n a temperature ambiente baja. 12. Inspeccion y mantenimiento Solo personal cualificado debe reubicar o reparar la unidad. No intente desmontar ni alterar la unidad. - Si to hace, podrian producirse fugas de refrigerante, fugas de agua, lesiones graves, descargas electricas o incendios. • Mientras la unidad este encendida, el compresor seguira energizado incluso cuando este detenido. Antes de inspeccionar el interior de la caja de control, apague la unidad, mantenga la unidad apagada durante 10 minutos Como minimo y confirme que la tensi6n del capacitador (circuito principal del inversor) haya caido a 20 V CC o menos. (Llevar6 alrededor de 10 minutos descargar la electricidad despues de cortar el suministro electrico). • Las cajas de control alojan componentes el6ctricos de alta tensi6n y altas temperaturas. Estos pueden seguir energizados o calientes despu6s de cortar el suministro el6ctrico. • Realice las reparaciones despu6s de haber desconectado los conectores (RYFAN1 y RYFAN2). (Para enchufar o desenchufar los conectores, compruebe que el ventilador de la unidad exterior no este girando y que la tensi6n del condensador en el circuito principal sea de 20 V CC o menos. El condensador podria cargarse y provocar Una descarga el6ctrica cuando el ventilador de la unidad exterior gira por la acci6n del viento. Para m6s informaci6n, consulte la placa de caracterfsticas del cableado). Despu6s de realizar las reparaciones, vuelva a conectar los conectores (RYFAN1 y RYFAN2). • Despu6s de un use prolongado de la unidad, los componentes de la unidad pueden estropearse y provocar Una reducci6n del rendimiento o convertir la unidad en un riesgo para la seguridad. Para utilizar la unidad con seguridad y maximizar su vida Otil, se recomienda firmar un contrato de mantenimiento con un distribuidor o t6cnico cualificado. Si firma un contrato de este tipo, los t6cnicos de mantenimiento inspeccionar6n peri6dicamente la unidad para identificar cualquier daho de forma oportuna y tomar las medidas correspondientes. • Para m6s informaci6n sobre los intervalos de mantenimiento y recomendaciones operativas, p6ngase en contacto con su oficina local de ventas de MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC. • Cuando la unidad exterior est6 instalada en la chaps impermeable, esta puede ensuciarse debido al componente de cobre que filtra de la unidad. En este caso, se recomienda instalar Una bandeja de drenaje para el drenaje centralizado. WT09115X03 E-50 13. Informacion en la placa de datos tecnicos (1) 208-230 V Modelo TURYP0723AN40AN/AB TURYP0963AN40AN/AB TURYP1203AN40AN/AB TURYP1443AN40AN/AB TURYP1683AN40AN/AB Combinacion de unidades - - - - - Refrigerante (R410A) 5,2 kg [11 lb 7 oz] 8,0 kg [17 lb 10 oz] 8,0 kg [17 lb 10 oz] 10,8 kg [23 lb 12 oz] 10,8 kg [23 lb 12 oz] Presi6n admisible (Ps) AP: 4,15 We [601 psi], BP: 2,21 We [320 psi] Peso neto 219 kg [483 lb] 261 kg [576 lb] 1 271 kg [598 lb] 1 293 kg [646 lb] 335 kg [739 lb] Modelo TURYP1923BN40AN/AB I TURYP2163BN40AN/AB Combinaci6n de unidades TURYP0963AN40AN/AB TURYP0963AN40AN/AB TURYP1203AN40AN/AB TURYP0963AN40AN/AB Refrigerants (R410A) 8,0 kg [17 lb 10 oz] 8,0 kg [17 lb 10 oz] 8,0 kg [17 lb 10 oz] 8,0 kg [17 lb 10 oz] Presi6n admisible (Ps) AP: 4,15 We [601 psi], BP: 2,21 MPa [320 psi] Peso neto 261 kg [576 lb] 261 kg [576 lb] 1 271 kg [598 lb] 261 kg [576 lb] Modelo TURYP2403BN40AN/AB TURYP2643BN40AN/AB Combinacion de unidades TURYP1203AN40AN/AB TURYP1203AN40AN/AB TURYP1443AN40AN/AB TURYP1203AN40AN/AB Refrigerants (R410A) 8,0 kg [17 lb 10 oz] 8,0 kg [17 lb 10 oz] 10,8 kg [23 lb 12 oz] 8,0 kg [17 lb 10 oz] Presi6n admisible (Ps) AP: 4,15 We [601 psi], BP: 2,21 MPa [320 psi] Peso neto 271 kg [598 lb] 271 kg [598 lb] 293 kg [646 lb] 271 kg [598 lb] Modelo TURYP2883BN40AN/AB TURYP3123BN40AN/AB Combinacion de unidades TURYP1443AN40AN/AB TURYP1443AN40AN/AB TURYP1683AN40AN/AB TURYP1443AN40AN/AB Refrigerante (R410A) 10,8 kg [23 lb 12 oz] 10,8 kg [23 lb 12 oz] 10,8 kg [23 lb 12 oz] 10,8 kg [23 lb 12 oz] Presi6n admisible (Ps) AP: 4,15 We [601 psi], BP: 2,21 MPa [320 psi] Peso neto 293 kg [646 lb] 293 kg [646 lb] 335 kg [739 lb] 293 kg [646 lb] Modelo TURYP3363BN40AN/AB Combinacion de unidades TURYP1683AN40AN/AB TURYP1683AN40AN/AB Refrigerante (R410A) 10,8 kg [23 lb 12 oz] 10,8 kg [23 lb 12 oz] Presi6n admisible (Ps) AP: 4,15 MPa [601 psi], BP: 2,21 We [320 psi] Peso neto 335 kg [739 lb] 1 335 kg [739 lb] Modelo TURYE0723AN40AN/AB TURYE0963AN40AN/AB TURYE1203AN40AN/AB TURYE1443AN40AN/AB TURYE1683AN40AN/AB Combinacion de unidades - - - - - Refrigerante (R410A) 5,2 kg [11 lb 7 oz] 8,0 kg [17 lb 10 oz] 8,0 kg [17 lb 10 oz] 10,8 kg [23 lb 12 oz] 10,8 kg [23 lb 12 oz] Presi6n admisible (Ps) AP: 4,15 MPa [601 psi], BP: 2,21 MPa [320 psi] Peso neto 235 kg [519 lb] 278 kg [613 lb] 1 282 kg [622 lb] 1 308 kg [680 lb] 352 kg [777 lb] Modelo TURYE1923AN40AN/AB TURYE1923BN40AN/AB TURYE2163AN40AN/AB Combinacion de unidades - TURYE0963AN40AN/AB TURYE0963AN40AN/AB - Refrigerants (R410A) 11,8 kg [26 lb 1 oz] 8,0 kg [17 lb 10 oz] 8,0 kg [17 lb 10 oz] 11,8 kg [26 lb 1 oz] Presi6n admisible (Ps) AP: 4,15 We [601 psi], BP: 2,21 We [320 psi] Peso neto 402 kg [887 lb] 278 kg 1613 lb] 1 278 kg [613 lb] 402 kg [887 lb] Modelo TURYE2163BN40AN/AB TURYE2403AN40AN/AB TURYE2403BN40AN/AB Combinacion de unidades TURYE1203AN40AN/AB TURYE0963AN40AN/AB - TURYE1203AN40AN/AB TURYE1203AN40AN/AB Refrigerante (R410A) 8,0 kg [17 lb 10 oz] 8,0 kg [17 lb 10 oz] 11,8 kg [26 lb 1 oz] 8,0 kg [17 lb 10 oz] 8,0 kg [17 lb 10 oz] Presi6n admisible (Ps) AP: 4,15 MPa [601 psi], BP: 2,21 We [320 psi] Peso neto 282 kg [622 lb] 278 kg [613 lb] 402 kg [887 lb] 1 282 kg [622 lb] 282 kg [622 lb] Modelo TURYE2643BN40AN/AB TURYE2883BN40AN/AB Combinacion de unidades TURYE1443AN40AN/AB TURYE1203AN40AN/AB TURYE1443AN40AN/AB TURYE1443AN40AN/AB Refrigerante (R410A) 10,8 kg [23 lb 12 oz] 8,0 kg [17 lb 10 oz] 10,8 kg [23 lb 12 oz] 10,8 kg [23 lb 12 oz] Presi6n admisible (Ps) AP: 4,15 We [601 psi], BP: 2,21 MPa [320 psi] Peso neto 308 kg [680 lb] 282 kg [622 lb] 1 308 kg [680 lb] 308 kg [680 lb] Modelo TURYE3123BN40AN/AB TURYE3363BN40AN/AB Combinacion de unidades TURYE1683AN40AN/AB TURYE1443AN40AN/AB TURYE1683AN40AN/AB TURYE1683AN40AN/AB Refrigerante (R410A) 10,8 kg [23 lb 12 oz] 10,8 kg [23 lb 12 oz] 10,8 kg [23 lb 12 oz] 10,8 kg [23 lb 12 oz] Presi6n admisible (Ps) AP: 4,15 MPa [601 psi], BP: 2,21 MPa [320 psi] Peso neto 352 kg [777 lb] 308 kg [680 lb] 1 352 kg [777 lb] 352 kg [777 lb] Modelo TURYE3843BN40AN/AB TURYE4323BN40AN/AB Combinaci6n de unidades TURYE1923AN40AN/AB TURYE1923AN40AN/AB TURYE2163AN40AN/AB TURYE2163AN40AN/AB Refrigerante (R410A) 11,8 kg [26 lb 1 oz] 11,8 kg [26 lb 1 oz] 11,8 kg [26 lb 1 oz] 11,8 kg [26 lb 1 oz] Presi6n admisible (Ps) AP: 4,15 MPa [601 psi], BP: 2,21 MPa [320 psi] Peso neto 402 kg [887 lb] 402 kg [887 lb] 402 kg [887 lb] 402 kg [887 lb] WT09115X03 E-51 (2) 460 V Modelo TURYP0724AN40AN/AB TURYP0964AN40AN/AB TURYP1204AN40AN/AB TURYP1444AN40AN/AB TURYP1684AN40AN/AB Combinaci6n de unidades - - - - - Refrigerante (R410A) 5,2 kg [11 lb 7 oz] 8,0 kg [17 lb 10 oz] 8,0 kg [17 lb 10 oz] 10,8 kg [23 lb 12 oz] 10,8 kg [23 lb 12 oz] Presi6n admisible (Ps) AP: 4,15 We [601 psi], BP: 2,21 MPa [320 psi] Peso neto 234 kg [516 lb] 277 kg [611 lb] 287 kg [633 lb] 1 309 kg [682 lb] 351 kg [774 lb] Modelo TURYP1924BN40AN/AB TURYP2164BN40AN/AB Combinaci6n de unidades TURYP0964AN40AN/AB TURYP0964AN40AN/AB TURYP1204AN40AN/AB TURYP0964AN40AN/AB Refrigerants (R410A) 8,0 kg [17 lb 10 oz] 8,0 kg [17 lb 10 oz] 8,0 kg [17 lb 10 oz] 8,0 kg [17 lb 10 oz] Presi6n admisible (Ps) AP: 4,15 MPa [601 psi], BP: 2,21 MPa [320 psi] Peso neto 277 kg [611 lb] 277 kg [611 lb] 287 kg [633 lb] 277 kg [611 lb] Modelo TURYP2404BN40AN/AB TURYP2644BN40AN/AB Combinaci6n de unidades TURYP1204AN40AN/AB TURYP1204AN40AN/AB TURYP1444AN40AN/AB TURYP1204AN40AN/AB Refrigerants (R410A) 8,0 kg [17 lb 10 oz] 8,0 kg [17 lb 10 oz] 10,8 kg [23 lb 12 oz] 8,0 kg [17 lb 10 oz] Presi6n admisible (Ps) AP: 4,15 We [601 psi], BP: 2,21 MPa [320 psi] Peso neto 287 kg [633 lb] 287 kg [633 lb] 1 309 kg [682 lb] 287 kg [633 lb] Modelo TURYP2884BN40AN/AB TURYP3124BN40AN/AB Combinaci6n de unidades TURYP1444AN40AN/AB TURYP1444AN40AN/AB TURYP1684AN40AN/AB TURYP1444AN40AN/AB Refrigerante (R410A) 10,8 kg [23 lb 12 oz] 10,8 kg [23 lb 12 oz] 10,8 kg [23 lb 12 oz] 10,8 kg [23 lb 12 oz] Presi6n admisible (Ps) AP: 4,15 MPa [601 psi], BP: 2,21 MPa [320 psi] Peso neto 309 kg [682 lb] 309 kg [682 lb] 351 kg [774 lb] 309 kg [682 lb] Modelo TURYP3364BN40AN/AB Combinaci6n de unidades TURYP1684AN40AN/AB TURYP1684AN40AN/AB Refrigerante (R410A) 10,8 kg [23 lb 12 oz] 10,8 kg [23 lb 12 oz] Presi6n admisible (Ps) AP: 4,15 MPa [601 psi], BP: 2,21 We [320 psi] Peso neto 351 kg [774 lb] 1 351 kg [774 lb] Modelo TURYE0724AN40AN/AB TURYE0964AN40AN/AB TURYE1204AN40AN/AB TURYE1444AN40AN/AB TURYE1684AN40AN/AB Combinaci6n de unidades - - - - - Refrigerants (R410A) 5,2 kg [11 lb 7 oz] 8,0 kg [17 lb 10 oz] 8,0 kg [17 lb 10 oz] 10,8 kg [23 lb 12 oz] 10,8 kg [23 lb 12 oz] Presi6n admisible (Ps) AP: 4,15 We [601 psi], BP: 2,21 MPa [320 psi] Peso neto 250 kg [552 lb] 294 kg [649 lb] 1 298 kg [657 lb] 1 324 kg [715 lb] 366 kg [807 lb] Modelo TURYE1924AN40AN/AB TURYE1924BN40AN/AB TURYE2164AN40AN/AB Combinaci6n de unidades - TURYE0964AN40AN/AB TURYE0964AN40AN/AB - Refrigerants (R410A) 11,8 kg [26 lb 1 oz] 8,0 kg [17 lb 10 oz] 1 8,0 kg [17 lb 10 oz] 11,8 kg [26 lb 1 oz] Presi6n admisible (Ps) AP: 4,15 We [601 psi], BP: 2,21 We [320 psi] Peso neto 416 kg [918 lb] 294 kg [649 lb] 294 kg [649 lb] 416 kg [918 lb] Modelo TURYE2164BN40AN/AB TURYE2404AN40AN/AB TURYE2404BN40AN/AB Combinaci6n de unidades TURYE1204AN40AN/AB TURYE0964AN40AN/AB - TURYE1204AN40AN/AB TURYE1204AN40AN/AB Refrigerante (R410A) 8,0 kg [17 lb 10 oz] 8,0 kg [17 lb 10 oz] 11,8 kg [26 lb 1 oz] 8,0 kg [17 lb 10 oz] 8,0 kg [17 lb 10 oz] Presi6n admisible (Ps) AP: 4,15 MPa [601 psi], BP: 2,21 MPa [320 psi] Peso neto 298 kg [657 lb] 294 kg [649 lb] 1 416 kg [918 lb] 1 298 kg [657 lb] 298 kg [657 lb] Modelo TURYE2644BN40AN/AB I TURYE2884BN40AN/AB Combinaci6n de unidades TURYE1444AN40AN/AB TURYE1204AN40AN/AB TURYE1444AN40AN/AB TURYE1444AN40AN/AB Refrigerante (R410A) 10,8 kg [23 lb 12 oz] 8,0 kg [17 lb 10 oz] 10,8 kg [23 lb 12 oz] 10,8 kg [23 lb 12 oz] Presi6n admisible (Ps) AP: 4,15 MPa [601 psi], BP: 2,21 We [320 psi] Peso neto 324 kg [715 lb] 298 kg [657 lb] 1 324 kg [715 lb] 324 kg [715 lb] Modelo TURYE3124BN40AN/AB TURYE3364BN40AN/AB Combinaci6n de unidades TURYE1684AN40AN/AB TURYE1444AN40AN/AB TURYE1684AN40AN/AB TURYE1684AN40AN/AB Refrigerante (R410A) 10,8 kg [23 lb 12 oz] 10,8 kg [23 lb 12 oz] 10,8 kg [23 lb 12 oz] 10,8 kg [23 lb 12 oz] Presi6n admisible (Ps) AP: 4,15 We [601 psi], BP: 2,21 We [320 psi] Peso neto 366 kg [807 lb] 324 kg [715 lb] 1 366 kg [807 lb] 366 kg [807 lb] Modelo TURYE3844BN40AN/AB TURYE4324BN40AN/AB Combinaci6n de unidades TURYE1924AN40AN/AB TURYE1924AN40AN/AB TURYE2164AN40AN/AB TURYE2164AN40AN/AB Refrigerante (R410A) 11,8 kg [26 lb 1 oz] 11,8 kg [26 lb 1 oz] 11,8 kg [26 lb 1 oz] 11,8 kg [26 lb 1 oz] Presi6n admisible (Ps) AP: 4,15 We [601 psi], BP: 2,21 We [320 psi] Peso neto 416 kg [918 lb] 416 kg [918 lb] 416 kg [918 lb] 416 kg [918 lb] WT09115X03 E-52 This product is designed and intended for use in the residential, commercial and light -industrial environment. Please be sure to put the contact address/telephone number on this manual before handing it to the customer. MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC TRANE HVAC US LLC HEAD OFFICE: 1340 SATELLITE BLVD, SUWANEE GA 30024 USA WT09115X03 T/?ANE° I MITSUBISHI /_ ELECTRIC Air -Conditioners OUTDOOR UNIT TRUZA0121 KA70N*, TRUZA0181 KA70N*, TRUZA0241 HA70N*, TRUZA0301 HA70N*, TRUZA0361 KA70N*, TRUZA0421 KA70N*, TRUYA0121 KA70N*, TRUYA0181 KA70N*, TRUYA0241 HA70N*, TRUYA0301 HA70N*, TRUYA0361 KA70N*, TRUYA0421 KA70N*, TRUZA0121 KA70B* TRUZA0181 KA70B* TRUZA0241 HA70B* TRUZA0301 HA70B* TRUZA0361 KA70B* TRUZA0421 KA70B* TRUYA0121 KA70B* TRUYA0181 KA70B* TRUYA0241 HA70B* TRUYA0301 HA70B* TRUYA0361 KA70B* TRUYA0421 KA70B* INSTALLATION MANUAL F FOR INSTALLER For safe and correct use, read this manual and the indoor unit installation manual thoroughly before installing the air -conditioner unit. MANUEL D'INSTALLATION POUR L'INSTALLATEUR Avant d'installer le climatiseur, lire attentivement ce manuel, ainsi que le manuel d'installation de I'appareil interieur pour une utilisation sure et correcte. MANUAL DE INSTALACION PARAELINS TALADOR Para un use correcto y seguro, lea detalladamente este manual y el manual de instalacion de la unidad interior antes de instalar la unidad de aire acondicionado. Contents 1. Safety precautions .............................................. 1 2. Installation location ............................................. 3 3. Installing the outdoor unit ......................................... 5 4. Installing the refrigerant piping ..................................... 6 5. Drainage piping work ............................................ 8 1. Safety precautions ► Before installing the unit, make sure you read all the "Safety precau- tions". ► Please report to or take consent by the supply authority before connec- tion to the system. Warning: Describes precautions that must be observed to prevent danger of injury or death to the user. Caution: Describes precautions that must be observed to prevent damage to the unit. A\ Warning: • The unit must not be installed by the user. Ask a dealer or an author- ized technician to install the unit. If the unit is installed incorrectly, water leakage,electric shock, or fire may result. • For installation work, follow the instructions in the Installation Manual and use tools and pipe components specifically made for use with R410A re- frigerant. The R410A refrigerant in the HFC system is pressurized 1.6 times the pressure of usual refrigerants. If pipe components not designed for R410A refrigerant are used and the unit is not installed correctly, the pipes may burst and cause damage or injuries. In addition, water leakage, electric shock, or fire may result. • When installing the unit, use appropriate protective equipment and tools for safety. Failure to do so could cause injuries. • The unit must be installed according to the instructions in order to minimize the risk of damage from earthquakes, typhoons, or strong winds. An incor- rectly installed unit may fall down and cause damage or injuries. • The unit must be securely installed on a structure that can sustain its weight. If the unit is mounted on an unstable structure, it may fall down and cause damage or injuries. • If the air conditioner is installed in a small room, measures must be taken to prevent the refrigerant concentration in the room from exceeding the safety limit in the event of refrigerant leakage. Consult a dealer regarding the ap- propriate measures to prevent the allowable concentration from being ex- ceeded. Should the refrigerant leak and cause the concentration limit to be exceeded, hazards due to lack of oxygen in the room may result. • Ventilate the room if refrigerant leaks during operation. If refrigerant comes into contact with a flame, poisonous gases will be released. • All electric work must be performed by a qualified technician according to local regulations and the instructions given in this manual. The units must be powered by dedicated power lines and the correct voltage and circuit breakers must be used. Power lines with insufficient capacity or incorrect electrical work may result in electric shock or fire. • Use C1220 copper phosphorus, for copper and copper alloy seamless pipes, to connect the refrigerant pipes. If the pipes are not connected correctly, the unit will not be properly grounded and electric shock may result. 1.1. Before installation As Caution: • Do not use the unit in an unusual environment. If the air conditioner is in- stalled in areas exposed to steam, volatile oil (including machine oil), or sul- furic gas, areas exposed to high salt content such as the seaside, or areas where the unit will be covered by snow, the performance can be significantly reduced and the internal parts can be damaged. • Do not install the unit where combustible gases may leak, be produced, flow, or accumulate. If combustible gas accumulates around the unit, fire or explo- sion may result. • The outdoor unit produces condensation during the heating operation. Make sure to provide drainage around the outdoor unit if such condensation is likely to cause damage. 1.2. Before installation (relocation) ds Caution: • Be extremely careful when transporting the units. 2 or more persons are needed to handle the unit, as it weighs 20 kg, 44 Ibs or more. Do not grasp the packaging bands. Wear protective gloves to remove the unit from the packaging and to move it, as you can injure your hands on the fins or the edge of other parts. • Be sure to safely dispose of the packaging materials. Packaging materials, such as nails and other metal or wooden parts may cause stabs or other injuries. 6. Electrical work ................................................. 8 7. Test run ..................................................... 10 8. Special functions .............................................. 11 9. System control (Fig. 9-1)........................................ 12 10. Low ambient cooling ............................................ 12 After installation work has been completed, explain the "Safety precautions," use,and maintenance of the unit to the customer according to the information in the Operation Manual and perform the test run to ensure normal operation. Both the Installation Manual and Operation Manual must be given to the user for keeping. These manuals must be passed on to subsequent users. O: Indicates a part which must be grounded. 11 Warning: Carefully read the labels affixed to the main unit. • Use only specified cables for wiring. The wiring connections must be made securely with no tension applied on the terminal connections. Also, never splice the cables for wiring (unless otherwise indicated in this document). Failure to observe these instructions may result in overheating or a fire. • The terminal block cover panel of the outdoor unit must be firmly attached. If the cover panel is mounted incorrectly and dust and moisture enter the unit, electric shock or fire may result. • When installing or relocating, or servicing the air conditioner, use only the specified refrigerant (R410A) to charge the refrigerant lines. Do not mix it with any other refrigerant and do not allow air to remain in the lines. If air is mixed with the refrigerant, then it can be the cause of abnormal high pressure in the refrigerant line, and may result in an explosion and other hazards. The use of any refrigerant other than that specified for the system will cause mechanical failure or system malfunction or unit breakdown. In the worst case, this could lead to a serious impediment to securing product safety. • Use only accessories authorized by Mitsubishi Electric and ask a dealer or an authorized technician to install them. If accessories are incorrectly in- stalled, water leakage, electric shock, or fire may result. • Do not alter the unit. It may cause fire, electric shock, injury or water leakage. • The user should never attempt to repair the unit or transfer it to another loca- tion. If the unit is installed incorrectly, water leakage, electric shock, or fire may result. If the air conditioner must be repaired or moved, ask a dealer or an authorized technician. • After installation has been completed, check for refrigerant leaks. If refriger- ant leaks into the room and comes into contact with the flame of a heater or portable cooking range, poisonous gases will be released. • When opening or closing the valve below freezing temperatures, refriger- ant may spurt out from the gap between the valve stem and the valve body, resulting in injuries. • When installing the unit in a hospital or communications office, be prepared for noise and electronic interference. Inverters, home appliances, high - frequency medical equipment, and radio communications equipment can cause the air conditioner to malfunction or breakdown. The air conditioner may also affect medical equipment, disturbing medical care, and communi- cations equipment, harming the screen display quality. • The base and attachments of the outdoor unit must be periodically checked for looseness, cracks or other damage. If such defects are left uncorrected,the unit may fall down and cause damage or injuries. • Do not clean the air conditioner unit with water. Electric shock may result. • Tighten all flare nuts to specification using a torque wrench. If tightened too much, the flare nut can break after an extended period and refrigerant can leak out. 1. Safety precautions 1.3. Before electric work Caution: • Be sure to install circuit breakers. If not installed, electric shock may result. • For the power lines, use standard cables of sufficient capacity. Otherwise, a short circuit, overheating, or fire may result. • When installing the power lines, do not apply tension to the cables. If the connections are loosened, the cables can snap or break and overheating or fire may result. 1.4. Before starting the test run 0 Caution: Turn on the main power switch more than 12 hours before starting opera- tion. Starting operation just after turning on the power switch can severely damage the internal parts. Keep the main power switch turned on during the operation season. Before starting operation, check that all panels, guards and other protective parts are correctly installed. Rotating, hot, or high voltage parts can cause injuries. Do not touch any switch with wet hands. Electric shock may result. 1.5. Using R410A refrigerant air conditioners A\ Caution: • Use C1220 copper phosphorus, for copper and copper alloy seamless pipes, to connect the refrigerant pipes. Make sure the insides of the pipes are clean and do not contain any harmful contaminants such as sulfuric compounds, oxidants, debris, or dust. Use pipes with the specified thickness. (Refer to page 5) Note the following if reusing existing pipes that carried R22 refriger- ant. Replace the existing flare nuts and flare the flared sections again. Do not use thin pipes. (Refer to page 5) • Store the pipes to be used during installation indoors and keep both ends of the pipes sealed until just before brazing. (Leave elbow joints, etc. in their packaging.) If dust, debris, or moisture enters the refrigerant lines, oil dete- rioration or compressor breakdown may result. • Use ester oil, ether oil, alkylbenzene oil (small amount) as the refrigeration oil applied to the flared sections. If mineral oil is mixed in the refrigeration oil, oil deterioration may result. • Be sure to ground the unit. Do not connect the ground wire to gas or water pipes, lighting rods, or telephone grounding lines. If the unit is not properly grounded, electric shock may result. • Use circuit breakers (ground fault interrupter, isolating switch (+B fuse), and molded case circuit breaker) with the specified capacity. If the circuit breaker capacity is larger than the specified capacity, breakdown or fire may result. • Do not touch the refrigerant pipes with bare hands during operation. The refrigerant pipes are hot or cold depending on the condition of the flowing refrigerant. If you touch the pipes, burns or frostbite may result. • After stopping operation, be sure to wait at least five minutes before turn- ing off the main power switch. Otherwise, water leakage or breakdown may result. Do not use refrigerant other than R410A refrigerant. If another refrigerant is used, the chlorine will cause the oil to deteriorate. Use the following tools specifically designed for use with R410A refrigerant. The following tools are necessary to use R410A refrigerant. Contact your nearest dealer for any questions. Tools (for R410A) Gauge manifold Flare tool Charge hose Size adjustment gauge Gas leak detector Vacuum pump adapter Torque wrench Electronic refrigerant charging scale • Be sure to use the correct tools. If dust, debris, or moisture enters the refrig- erant lines, refrigeration oil deterioration may result. • Do not use a charging cylinder. If a charging cylinder is used, the composi- tion of the refrigerant will change and the efficiency will be lowered. 2. Installation location ■ TRUZA0121 KA70N* TRUZA0181 KA70N* TRUZA0121 KA70B* TRUZA0181 KA70B* TRUYA0121 KA70N* TRUYA0181KA70N* TRUYA0121 KA70B* TRUYA0181KA70B* 10152 6, ■ TRUZA0361 KA70N* TRUZA0421 KA70N* TRUZA0361 KA70B* TRUZA0421 KA70B* TRUYA0361 KA70N* TRUYA0421 KA70N* TRUYA0361 KA70B* TRUYA0421 KA70B* Fig. 2-1 (inch) ■ TRUZA0241 HA70N* TRUZA0301HA70N* TRUZA0241 HA70B* TRUZA0301HA70B* TRUYA0241 HA70N* TRUYA0301 HA70N* TRUYA0241 HA70B* TRUYA0301 HA70B* 6, Fig. 2-2 . 'N'b (inch) YV icnf 2.1. Refrigerant pipe (Fig. 2-1) ► Check that the difference between the heights of the indoor and outdoor units, the length of refrigerant pipe, and the number of bends in the pipe are within the limits shown below. OO Pipe length ©Height ©Number of Models one way) difference bends one way) TRUZA0121KA70N* TRUZA0181 KA70N* Max. 30 m, 100 ft Max. 30 m,100 ft Max. 15 TRUZA0121KA70B* TRUZA0181KA70B* TRUZA0241 HA70N* TRUZA0301HA70N* TRUZA0241 HA70B* TRUZA0301 HA70B* TRUZA0361KA70N* Max. 50 m, 165 ft Max. 30 m,100 ft Max. 15 TRUZA0421 KA70N* TRUZA0361KA70B* TRUZA0421 KA70B* TRUYA0121KA70N* TRUYA0181KA70N* TRUYA0121KA70B* Max. 50 m, 165 ft Max. 30 m,100 ft Max. 15 TRUYA0181KA70B* TRUYA0241 HA70N* TRUYA0301 HA70N* TRUYA0241 HA70B* TRUYA0301 HA70B* TRUYA0361 KA70N* Max. 69 m, 225 ft Max. 30 m,100 ft Max. 15 TRUYA0421 KA70N* TRUYA0361 KA70B* TRUYA0421 KA70B* • Height difference limitations are binding regardless of which unit, indoor or out- door, is positioned higher. Oc Indoor unit © Outdoor unit 2.2. Choosing the outdoor unit installation location • Avoid locations exposed to direct sunlight or other sources of heat. • Select a location from which noise emitted by the unit will not inconvenience neigh- bors. • Select a location permitting easy wiring and pipe access to the power source and indoor unit. • Avoid locations where combustible gases may leak, be produced, flow, or accumu- late. • Note that water may drain from the unit during operation. • Select a level location that can bear the weight and vibration of the unit. • Avoid locations where the unit can be covered by snow. In areas where heavy snow fall is anticipated, special precautions such as raising the installation location or installing a hood on the air intake must be taken to prevent the snow from block- ing the air intake or blowing directly against it. This can reduce the airflow and a malfunction may result. • Avoid locations exposed to oil, steam, or sulfuric gas. • Use the transportation handles of the outdoor unit to transport the unit. If the unit is carried from the bottom, hands or fingers may be pinched. 2.3. Outline dimensions (Outdoor unit) (Fig. 2-2) 3 2. Installation location Fig. 2-5 2.4. Ventilation and service space 2.4.1. Windy location installation When installing the outdoor unit on a rooftop or other location unprotected from the wind, situate the air outlet of the unit so that it is not directly exposed to strong winds. Strong wind entering the air outlet may impede the normal airflow and a malfunction may result. The following shows three examples of precautions against strong winds. 0 Face the air outlet towards the nearest available wall about 500 mm, 19-11/16 inch away from the wall. (Fig. 2-3) 0 Install an optional air outlet guide and air guide if the unit is installed in a location where strong winds from a typhoon, etc. may directly enter the air outlet. (Fig. 2-4) O Air outlet guide 0 Position the unit so that the air outlet blows perpendicularly to the seasonal wind direction, if possible. (Fig. 2-5) OO Wind direction 2.4.2. When installing a single outdoor unit (Refer to the last page) Minimum dimensions are as follows, except for Max., meaning Maximum dimen- sions, indicated. The figures in parentheses are for TRU*A0361 KA70**, TRU*A0421 KA70** models. Refer to the figures for each case. i0 Obstacles at rear only (Fig. 2-6) OO Obstacles at rear and above only (Fig. 2-7) OO Obstacles at rear and sides only (Fig. 2-8) * 350 mm, 13-25/32 inch for TRU*A0121 KA70**, TRU*A0181 KA70** n0 Obstacles at front only (Fig. 2-9) * When using an optional air outlet guide, the clearance for TRU*A0421 KA70** models is 500 mm, 19-11/16 inch or more. Oe Obstacles at front and rear only (Fig. 2-10) *When using an optional air outlet guide, the clearance for TRU*A0421KA70** models is 500 mm, 19-11/16 inch or more. © Obstacles at rear, sides, and above only (Fig. 2-11) 350 mm, 13-25/32 inch for TRU*A0121 KA70**, TRU*A0181 KA70** Do not install the optional air outlet guides for upward airflow. 2.4.3. When installing multiple outdoor units (Refer to the last page) Leave 350 mm, 13-25/32 inch for TRU*A0121 KA70**, TRU*A0181 KA70** and 10 mm, 13/32 inch for TRU*A0241 HA70**, TRU*A0301 HA70**, TRU*A0361 KA70**, TRU*A0421 KA70** space or more between the units. i0 Obstacles at rear only (Fig. 2-12) OO Obstacles at rear and above only (Fig. 2-13) • No more than three units must be installed side by side. In addition, leave space as shown. • Do not install the optional air outlet guides for upward airflow. OO Obstacles at front only (Fig. 2-14) * When using an optional air outlet guide, the clearance for TRU*A0361 KA70**, TRU*A0421KA70** models is 1000 mm, 39-3/8 inch or more. a0 Obstacles at front and rear only (Fig. 2-15) When using an optional air outlet guide, the clearance for TRU*A0361 KA70**, TRU*A0421KA70** models is 1000 mm, 39-3/8 inch or more. Oe Single parallel unit arrangement (Fig. 2-16) When using an optional air outlet guide installed for upward airflow, the clearance is 500 (1000) mm, 19-11/16 (39-3/8) inch or more. © Multiple parallel unit arrangement (Fig. 2-17) * When using an optional air outlet guide installed for upward airflow, the clearance is 1000 (1500) mm, 39-3/8 (59-1116) inch or more. 07 Stacked unit arrangement (Fig. 2-18) The units can be stacked up to 2 units high. No more than two stacked units must be installed side by side. In addition, leave space as shown. 2 3. Installing the outdoor unit A 0 .............. �IO 0 0 0000 rQQ�QnQ nr-QQ�rQQ� YY 22YY N W N M M N 000000 as aaaa a o N � M M T N � X X ■ TRU*A0121 KA70** TRU*A0181 KA70** ■ TRU*A0241 HA70** TRU*A0301 HA70** n0 M10(3/8") bolt © Base © As long as possible. DD Vent OO Set deep in the ground. 19-11/16 Min. 25-19/3219-11/16 (Inch) N Min.13-25/32 m 6-3/32 6-3/32 31-7/8 Min.14.25/32 (inch) 23-5/8 23-5/8 M Min. 1 0 6-7/8 6-7/8 37-13/32 ■ TRU*A0361 KA70** TRU*A0421 KA70** 23-5/8 Min. 18-7/91. 23-5/8 (inch) D �I M Min.1 8-7/8 8-7/8 41-11/32 Fig. 3-1 • Be sure to install the unit in a sturdy, level surface to prevent rattling noises during operation. (Fig. 3-1) <Foundation specifications> Foundation bolt M10 (3/8") Thickness of concrete 120 mm 4-23/32 inch Length of bolt 70 mm 2-3/4 inch Weight -bearing capacity 320 ka. 264 Ibs • Make sure that the length of the foundation bolt is within 30 mm, 1-3/16 inch of the bottom surface of the base. • Secure the base of the unit firmly with four-M10 foundation bolts in sturdy locations. Installing the outdoor unit • Do not block the vent. If the vent is blocked, operation will be hindered and break- down may result. • In addition to the unit base, use the installation holes on the back of the unit to attach wires, etc., if necessary to install the unit. Use self -tapping screws (ray x 15 mm, m13/16 x 19/32 inch or less) and install on site. AS Warning: • The unit must be securely installed on a structure that can sustain its weight. If the unit is mounted on an unstable structure, it may fall down and cause damage or injuries. • The unit must be installed according to the instructions in order to minimize the risk of damage from earthquakes, typhoons, or strong winds. An incor- rectly installed unit may fall down and cause damage or injuries. 5 4. Installing the refrigerant piping O G) Fig. 4-1 4.1. Precautions for devices that use R41OA refrigerant • Refer to page 3 for precautions not included below on using air conditioners OO Liquid pipe with R410A refrigerant. • Use ester oil, ether oil, alkylbenzene oil (small amount) as the refrigeration © Gas pipe oil applied to the flared sections. © Inslation • Use C1220 copper phosphorus, for copper and copper alloy seamless pipes, 0 Taping to connect the refrigerant pipes. Use refrigerant pipes with the thicknesses specified in the table to the below. Make sure the insides of the pipes are clean and do not contain any harmful contaminants such as sulfuric com- pounds, oxidants, debris, or dust. Flare cutting dimensions Flare nut tightening torque Q4\-,= Fig. 4-2 AN Warning: When installing or relocating, or servicing the air conditioner, use only the (inch) specified refrigerant (R410A) to charge the refrigerant lines. Do not mix it with any other refrigerant and do not allow air to remain in the lines. If air is mixed with the refrigerant, then it can be the cause of abnormal high pres- sure in the refrigerant line, and may result in an explosion and other hazards. The use of any refrigerant other than that specified for the system will cause mechanical failure or system malfunction or unit breakdown. In the worst case, this could lead to a serious impediment to securing product safety. TRU*A0121 KA70** TRU*A0241 HA70**, TRU*A0301 HA70** TRU*A0181 KA70** TRU*A0361 KA70**, TRU*A0421 KA70** Liquid pipe a6.35 mm, 1/4inch o9.52 mm, 3/8 inch thickness 0.8 mm, 1/32 inch thickness 0.8 mm, 1/32 inch Gas pipe o12.7 mm, 1/2 inch o15.88 mm, 5/8 inch thickness 0.8 mm, 1/32 inch thickness 1.0 mm, 3/64 inch TRU*A0241 HA70** TRU*A0301 HA70** TRU*A0121 KA70** TRU*A0361 KA70** TRU*A0181KA70** TRU*A0421KA70** Gas side Pipe size (mm, inch) o12.7, 1/2" o15.88, 5/8" Liquid side Pipe size (mm, inch) o6.35, 1/4" o9.52, 3/8" ® (Fig. 4-1) Copper pipe O.D. pp p p Flare dimensions oA dimensions mm inch mm inch o6.35 1/4" 8.7 - 9.1 11/32 - 23/64 o9.52 3/8" 12.8 - 13.2 1/2 - 33/64 o12.7 1/2" 16.2 - 16.6 41/64 - 21/32 o15.88 5/8" 19.3 - 19.7 49/64 - 25/32 © (Fig. 4-1) Copper i e O.D. Flare nut O.D. Ti htenina for ue mm inch mm inch N-m o6.35 1/4" 17 43/64 14 - 18o9.52 3/8" 22 7/8 34 - 42o12.7 Hlbs 1/2" 26 1 -3/64 49 - 61 o15.88 5/8" 29 1 -9/64 68 - 82 ■ TRU*A0121 KA70** TRU*A0181 KA70** Front piping cover OO Piping cover © Stop valve ■ TRU*A0241HA70**, TRU*A0301HA70** TRU*A0361KA70**, TRU*A0421KA70** Service panel Bend radius: 100 mm, 3-15/16 inch-150 mm, 5-27/32 inch Fig. 4-3 • Do not use pipes thinner than those specified above. 4.2. Connecting pipes (Fig. 4-1) (Fig. 4-2) When commercially available copper pipes are used, inslate both the liquid and gas pipes separately with commercially available insulation materials (heat -resist- ant to 100 °C, 212 *F or more, thickness of 12 mm, 1/2 inch or more). (Fig. 4-1) • The indoor parts of the drain pipe should be wrapped with polyethylene foam insu- lation materials (specific gravity of 0.03, thickness of 9 mm, 23/64 inch or more). [Fig. 4-2] • Apply thin layer of refrigerant oil to pipe and joint seating surface before tightening flare nut. O • Use 2 wrenches to tighten piping connections. OO • Use leak detector or soapy water to check for gas leaks after connections are completed. • Apply refrigerating machine oil over the entire flare seat surface. • Use the flare nuts for the following pipe size. Oc Notes: 1. The flare nut is attached to its pipe. 2. The flare nut is in the outdoor unit accessory. Do not use the flare nut attached. If it is used, a gas leakage or even a pipe extraction may occur. • When bending the pipes, be careful not to break them. Bend radii of 100 mm, 3-15/16 inch to 150 mm, 5-27/32 inch are sufficient. • Make sure the pipes do not contact the compressor. Abnormal noise or vibration may result. 1) Pipes must be connected starting from the indoor unit. Flare nuts must be tightened with a torque wrench. OO Flare the liquid pipes and gas pipes and apply a thin layer of refrigeration oil (Applied on site). Warning: When installing the unit, securely connect the refrigerant pipes before starting the compressor. 4.3. Refrigerant piping (Fig. 4-3) ■ For TRU*A0121 KA70**, TRU*A0181 KA70** Remove the service panel Oo (2 screws). ■ For TRU*A0241 HA70**, TRU*A0301 HA70**, TRU*A0361 KA70**, TRU*A0421 KA70** Remove the service panel Oo (3 screws) and the front piping cover O (2 screws) and rear piping cover © (2 screws: TRU*A0241 HA70**, TRU*A0301 HA70**) (4 screws: TRU*A0361KA70**, TRU*A0421KA70**). O Perform refrigerant piping connections for the indoor/outdoor unit when the out- door unit's stop valve is completely closed. OO Vacuum -purge air from the indoor unit and the connection piping. Os After connecting the refrigerant pipes, check the connected pipes and the indoor unit for gas leaks. (Refer to 4.4 Refrigerant pipe airtight testing method) a0 Vacuumize the refrigerant lines through the service port of the liquid stop valve and then open the stop valves completely (for both the liquid and gas stop valves). This will completely connect the refrigerant lines of the indoor and outdoor units. • If the stop valves are left closed and the unit is operated, the compressor and control valves will be damaged. • Use a leak detector or soapy water to check for gas leaks at the pipe connection sections of the outdoor unit. • Do not use the refrigerant from the unit to purge air from the refrigerant lines. • After the valve work is completed, tighten the valve caps to the correct torque: 20 to 25 N•m, 14 to 18 ft•lbs (200 to 250 kgf•cm). Failure to replace and tighten the caps may result in refrigerant leakage. In addi- tion, do not damage the insides of the valve caps as they act as a seal to prevent refrigerant leakage. Oe Use sealant to seal the ends of the thermal insulation around the pipe connection sections to prevent water from entering the thermal insulation. 4. Installing the refrigerant piping AC(BB ©• — Stop valve <Liquid side> © Stop valve <Gas side> © Service port Oc Open/Close section Fig. 4-4 B A d6 x 0 x © Local pipe OO Sealed, same way for gas side © Pipe cover © Do not use a wrench here. Refrigerant leakage may result. (D Use 2 wrenches here. Notes: 1. The figure to the left is an example only. The stop valve shape, service port po- sition, etc., may vary according to the model. 2. Turn section A only. (Do not further tighten sections A and B together.) © Charge hose Oc Service port Fig. 4-6 4.4. Refrigerant pipe airtight testing method (1) Connect the testing tools. Make sure the stop valves OO © are closed and do not open them. • Add pressure to the refrigerant lines through the service port © of the liquid stop valve Oc . (2) Do not add pressure to the specified pressure all at once; add pressure little by little. i0 Pressurize to 0.5 MPa (5 kgf/cm2G), wait 5 minutes, and make sure the pressure does not decrease. Oz Pressurize to 1.5 MPa (15 kgf/cmzG), wait 5 minutes, and make sure the pressure does not decrease. Os Pressurize to 4.15 MPa (41.5 kgf/cmzG) and measure the surrounding temperature and refrigerant pressure. (3) If the specified pressure holds for about one day and does not decrease, the pipes have passed the test and there are no leaks. • If the surrounding temperature changes by 1 °C, the pressure will change by about 0.03 MPa (0.3 kgf/cmzG). Make the necessary corrections. (4) If the pressure decreases in steps (2) or (3), there is a gas leak. Look for the source of the gas leak. 4.5. Stop valve opening method (Fig. 4-5) 0 Remove the cap and turn the valve rod counterclockwise as far as it will go with the use of a 4 mm, 5/32 inch hexagonal wrench. Stop turning when it hits the stopper. (o6.35, 1/4 inch: Approximately 4.5 revolutions) (o9.52, 3/8 inch: Approximately 10 revolutions) Oz Make sure that the stop valve is open completely, push in the handle and rotate he cap back to its original position. ® Valve body OO Double spanner section © Unit side (Do not apply a spanner other than to this sec- © Cap tion.Doing so would cause refrigerant leaks.) Oo Local pipe side (D Seal section OO Pipe cover (Seal the end of the heat insulation material at (D Service port the pipe connection section with whatever seal © Valve stem material you have on hand so that water does not infiltrate the heat insulation material.) Refrigerant pipes are protectively wrapped for TRU*A0241 HA70**, TRU*A0301 HA70**, TRU*A0361 KA70**, TRU*A0421 KA70** - The pipes can be protectively wrapped up to a diameter of o90 mm, 3-35/64 inch before or after connecting the pipes. Cut out the knockout in the pipe cover follow- ing the groove and wrap the pipes. Pipe inlet gap for TRU*A0241 HA70**, TRU*A0301 HA70**, TRU*A0361 KA70**, TRU*A0421KA70** • Use putty or sealant to seal the pipe inlet around the pipes so that no gaps remain. (If the gaps are not closed, noise may be emitted or water and dust will enter the unit and breakdown may result.) Precautions when using the charge valve (Fig.4-6) Do not tighten the service port too much when installing it. otherwise. the valve core could be deformed and become loose, causing a gas leak. After positioning section OO in the desired direction, turn section (A) only and tighten it Do not further tighten sections (D and OB together after tightening section & Warning: When opening or closing the valve below freezing temperatures, refrigerant may spurt out from the gap between the valve stem and the valve body, result- ing in injuries. 7 4. Installing the refrigerant piping 4.6. Addition of refrigerant • Additional charging is not necessary if the pipe length does not exceed 20 m, 70 ft for TRU*AO121 KA70**, TRU*A0181 KA70**, TRU*A0241 HA70**, TRU*A0301 HA70**, 30 m 100 ft for TRU*A0361 KA70**, TRU*A0421 KA70**. • If the pipe length exceeds the specified length above, charge the unit with additional R410A refrigerant according to the permitted pipe lengths in the chart below. Notes: 1. When the unit is stopped, charge the unit with the additional refrigerant through the liquid stop valve after the pipe extensions and indoor unit have been vacu- umized. When the unit is operating, add refrigerant to the gas check valve using a safety charger. Do not add liquid refrigerant directly to the check valve. 2. After charging the unit with refrigerant, note the added refrigerant amount on the service label (attached to the unit). Refer to the 1.5. Using R410A refrigerant air conditioners" for more informa- tion. • Be careful when installing multiple units. Connecting to an incorrect indoor unit can lead to abnormally high pressure and have a serious effect on operation per- formance. Max Max Additional refrigerant charging amount (kg/oz) 20 m 24 m 27 m 30 m 34 m 37 m 40 m 43 m 46 m 49 m 50 m 52 m 55 m 58 m 61 m 64 m 67 m 69 m Model pipe height length difference 70 ft 80 ft 90 ft 100 ft 110 ft 120 ft 130 ft 140 ft 150 ft 160 ft 165 ft 170 ft 180 ft 190 ft 200 ft 210 ft 220 ft 225 ft TRUZA0121 KA70** 30 m, 30 m, 0.06 kg 0.11 kg 0.17 kg TRUZA0181 KA70** 100 ft 100 ft 0 2 oz 4 oz 6 oz TRUZA0241 HA70** 50 m, 30 m, 0.20 kg 0.40 kg 0.60 kg 0.79 kg 0.99 kg 1.19 kg 1.39 kg 1.59 kg 1.79 kg 1.89 kg TRUZA0301 HA70** 165 ft 100 ft 0 7 oz 14 oz 21 oz 28 oz 35 oz 42 oz 49 oz 56 oz 63 oz 67 oz TRUZA0361 KA70** 50 m, 30 m, 0.20 kg 0.40 kg 0.26 kg 0.79 kg 0.99 kg 1.19 kg 1.29 kg TRUZA0421 KA70** 165 ft 100 ft 0 0 0 0 7 oz 14 oz 21 oz 28 oz 35 oz 42 oz 46 oz TRUYA0121 KA70** 50 m, 30 m, 0.03 kg 0.06 kg 0.09 kg 0.11 kg 0.14 kg 0.17 kg 0.20 kg 0.23 kg 0.26 kg 0.27 kg TRUYA0181 KA70** 165 ft 100 ft 0 1 oz 1 2 oz 1 3 oz I 4 oz I 5 oz I 6 oz I 7 oz 8 oz I 9 oz 10 oz TRUYA0241 HA70** 69 m, 30 m, 0.09 kg 0.17 kg 0.26 kg 0.34 kg 0.43 kg 0.51 kg 0.60 kg 0.68 kg 0.77 kg 0.81 kg 0.85 kg 0.94 kg 1.02 kg 1.11 kg 1.19 kg 1.28 kg 1.32 kg TRUYA0301 HA70** 225 ft 100 ft 0 3 oz 6 oz 9 oz 12 oz 15 oz 18 oz 21 oz 24 oz 27 oz 29 oz 30 oz 33 oz I36 oz I39 oz 1 42 oz 1 45 oz 147 oz TRUYA0361 KA70-* 69 m, 30 m, 0.09 kg 0.17 kg 0.26 kg 0.34 kg 0.43 kg 0.51 kg 0.55 kg 0.60 kg 0.68 kg 0.77 kg 0.85 kg 0.94 kg 1.02 kg 1.06 kg TRUYA0421 KA70** 225 ft 100 ft 0 0 0 0 3 oz 6 oz 9 oz 12 oz 15 oz 18 oz 20 oz 21 oz 24 oz 27 oz 1 30 oz 33 oz 36 oz 'As' oz 5. Drainage piping work Outdoor unit drainage pipe connection When drain piping is necessary, use the drain socket or the drain pan (option). TRU*A0121 KA70** TRU*A0181KA70** TRU*A0241 HA70** TRU*A0301HA70** TRU*A0361 KA70** TRU*A0421KA70** Drain socket PAC-SJ08DS-E PAC-SG61 DS-E Drain an PAC-SG63DP-E PAC-SG64DP-E PAC-SH97DP-E 6. Electrical work 6.1. Outdoor unit (Fig. 6-1, Fig. 6-2) D Remove the service panel. (Z Wire the cables referring to the Fig. 6-1 and the Fig. 6-2. ) Indoor unit D Outdoor unit D Remote controller Main switch (Breaker) Earth For Power For Pze ne K =0 ■ TRU*A0121 KA70** TRU*A0181 KA70** B A F L1 L2 G ®S1 S2 S3 VC ■ TRU*A0241 HA70**, TRU*A0301 HA70** TRU*A0361 KA70**, TRU*A0421 KA70** OO Earth terminal Fig. 6-1 OO Terminal block © Clamp Oc Service panel © Wire the cables so that they do not contact the center of the service panel or the gas valve. Fig. 6-2 ■ TRU*A0121 KA70** TERMINAL BED TRU*A01 ■ TRU*A0241 HA70** TRU*A0301 HA70** TRII*A(13R1 KA70** TRU*A0421 KA7 CONDUIT PLATE: accessory SERVICE PANEL iVER 6. Electrical work 6.2. Field electrical wiring Outdoor unit model TRU*A0121KA70** TRU*A0181KA70** TRU*A0241HA70** TRU*A0301HA70** TRU*A0361KA70** TRU*A0421KA70** Outdoor unit power supply -/N (single), 60Hz, 208/230 V -/N (single), 60Hz, 208/230 V -/N (single), 60Hz, 208/230 V -/N (single), 60Hz, 208/230 V -/N (single), 60Hz, 208/230 V -/N (single), 60Hz, 208/230 V Outdoor unit input capacity Main switch (Breaker) *1 15 A 15 A 25 A 25 A 30 A 30 A T ^ Outdoor unit power supply 2 x Min. AWG 14 2 x Min. AWG 14 2 x Min. AWG 12 2 x Min. AWG 12 2 x Min. AWG 10 2 x Min. AWG 10 E Indoor unit -Outdoor unit *2 3 x AWG 14 (polar) 3 x AWG 14 (polar) 3 x AWG 14 (polar) 3 x AWG 14 (polar) 3 x AWG 14 (polar) 3 x AWG 14 (polar) c z N Indoor unit -Outdoor unit earth *2 1 x Min. AWG 14 (polar) 1 x Min. AWG 14 (polar) 1 x Min. AWG 14 (polar) 1 x Min. AWG 14 (polar) 1 x Min. AWG 14 (polar) 1 x Min. AWG 14 (polar) Remote controller -Indoor unit *4 2 x AWG 22 (Non -polar) 2 x AWG 22 (Non -polar) 2 x AWG 22 (Non -polar) 2 x AWG 22 (Non -polar) 2 x AWG 22 (Non -polar) 2 x AWG 22 (Non -polar) Outdoor unit 1_1-1_2 (single) *5 208/230 V AC 208/230 V AC 208/230 V AC 208/230 V AC 208/230 V AC 208/230 V AC Indoor unit -Outdoor unit S1-S2 (single) *5 208/230 V AC 208/230 V AC 208/230 V AC 208/230 V AC 208/230 V AC 208/230 V AC ij Indoor unit -Outdoor unit S2-S3 (single) *5 24 V DC 24 V DC 24 V DC 24 V DC 24 V DC 24 V DC Remote controller -Indoor unit *5 12 V DC 12 V DC 12 V DC 12 V DC 12 V DC 12 V DC *1. Be sure to ground the unit correctly. If required, take measures against leakage. *2. Max. 50 m, 164 ft S3 separated, Max. 80 m, 262 ft *3. Max. 30 m, 100 ft *4. The 10 m, 30 ft wire is attached in the remote controller accessory. *5. The figures are NOT always against the ground. S3 terminal has 24V DC against S2 terminal. However between S3 and S1, these terminals are NOT electrically insulated by the transformer or other device. Notes: 1. Wiring size must comply with the applicable local and national code. 2. Power supply cords, the Indoor -Outdoor connecting cable and the water heater -Outdoor connecting cable shall not be lighter than polychloroprene sheathed flexible cord. (Design 60245 IEC 57) 3. Use an earth wire which is longer than the other cords so that it will not become disconnected when tension is applied. 208/230V Single phase Isolator S1 A -Control S2 Outdoor Unit S3 3 poles isolator S1 S2 A -Control Indoor Unit S3 11 Warning: In case of A -control wiring, there is high voltage potential on the S3 terminal caused by electrical circuit design that has no electrical insulation between power line and communication signal line. Therefore, please turn off the main power supply when servicing. And do not touch the S1, S2, S3 terminals when the power is energized. If isolator should be used between indoor unit and outdoor unit, please use 3-pole type. Never splice the power cable or the indoor -outdoor connection cable, otherwise it may result in a smoke, a fire or communication failure. 7. Test run 7.1. Before test run ► After completing installation and the wiring and piping of the indoor and outdoor units, check for refrigerant leakage, looseness in the power supply or control wiring, wrong polarity, and no disconnection of one phase in the supply. ► Use a 500-volt megohmmeter to check that the resistance between the pow- er supply terminals and ground is at least 1 MCI. ► Do not carry out this test on the control wiring (low voltage circuit) terminals. A\ Warning: Do not use the air conditioner if the insulation resistance is less than 1 MO. Insulation resistance After installation or after the power source to the unit has been cut for an extended period, the insulation resistance will drop below 1 MD due to refrigerant accumulat- ing in the compressor. This is not a malfunction. Perform the following procedures. 1. Remove the wires from the compressor and measure the insulation resistance of the compressor. 2. If the insulation resistance is below 1 MO, the compressor is faulty or the resist- ance dropped due the accumulation of refrigerant in the compressor. 3. After connecting the wires to the compressor, the compressor will start to warm up after power is supplied. After supplying power for the times indicated below, measure the insulation resistance again. • The insulation resistance drops due to accumulation of refrigerant in the com- pressor. The resistance will rise above 1 Mf2 after the compressor is warmed up for 12 hours. (The time necessary to warm up the compressor varies according to atmos- pheric conditions and refrigerant accumulation.) • To operate the compressor with refrigerant accumulated in the compressor, the compressor must be warmed up at least 12 hours to prevent breakdown. 4. If the insulation resistance rises above 1 Mf2, the compressor is not faulty. Caution: • The compressor will not operate unless the power supply phase connection is correct. • Turn on the power at least 12 hours before starting operation. Starting operation immediately after turning on the main power switch can result in severe damage to internal parts. Keep the power switch turned on during the operational season. 10 7. Test run ► The followings must be checked as well. • The outdoor unit is not faulty. LED1 and LED2 on the control board of the outdoor unit flash when the outdoor unit is faulty. • Both the gas and liquid stop valves are completely open. • A protective sheet covers the surface of the DIP switch panel on the control board of the outdoor unit. Remove the protective sheet to operate the DIP switches easily. 7.2. Test run 7.2.1. Using SW4 in outdoor unit 1) TRUZ Type SW4-1 ON I Cooli ng operation SW4-2 OFF SW4-1 ON Heating operation SW4-2 ON 2) TRUY Type SW4-1 ION Cooling operation SW4-2 I ON or OFF • After performing the test run, set SW4-1 to OFF. • After power is supplied, a small clicking noise may be heard from the inside of the outdoor unit. The electronic expansion valve is opening and closing. The unit is not faulty. 8. Special functions - i I II I Orane I CNDM X i Brown 0 1 — SW7 Red a 3 Fig. 8-1 ® OO 0 Circuit diagram example (low noise mode) OD Outdoor unit control board OO On -site arrangement OO Max. 10 m, 33 ft © External input adapter (PAC-SC36NA-E) Or Power supply for relay X: Relay j--- ---------------------- I —--------i M ii X y I j Oran a CND Brawn ! 01 —SW2 SW3 II I Red Fig. 8-2 II y 3 i II I I I `----------' OO Circuit diagram example © External input adapter (Demand function) (PAC-SC36NA-E) OO On -site arrangement OD Outdoor unit control board X, Y: Relay OO Max. 10 m, 33 ft Or Power supply for relay 8.3. Refrigerant collecting (pump down) Perform the following procedures to collect the refrigerant when moving the indoor unit or the outdoor unit. 0 Supply power (circuit breaker). • When power is supplied, make sure that "CENTRALLY CONTROLLED" is not displayed on the remote controller. If "CENTRALLY CONTROLLED" is dis- played, the refrigerant collecting (pump down) cannot be completed normally. • Start-up of the indoor -outdoor communication takes about 3 minutes after the power (circuit breaker) is turned on. Start the pump -down operation 3 to 4 min- utes after the power (circuit breaker) is turned ON. O After the liquid stop valve is closed, set the SWP switch on the control board of the outdoor unit to ON. The compressor (outdoor unit) and fans (indoor and outdoor units) start operating and refrigerant collecting operation begins. LED1 and LED2 on the control board of the outdoor unit are lit. • Only set the SWP switch (push-button type) to ON if the unit is stopped. How- ever, even if the unit is stopped and the SWP switch is set to ON less than 3 minutes after the compressor stops, the refrigerant collecting operation cannot be performed. Wait until compressor has been stopped for 3 minutes and then set the SWP switch to ON again. • Make sure that the all of the SW5 DIP switches for function changes on the control board of the outdoor unit are set to OFF. If all of the SW5 switches are not set to OFF, record the settings and then set all of the switches to OFF. Begin recovering the refrigerant. After moving the unit to a new location and completing the test run, set the SW5 switches to the previously recorded settings. • A few seconds after the compressor starts, a clanging noise may be heard from the inside of the outdoor unit. The noise is coming from the check valve due to the small difference in pressure in the pipes. The unit is not faulty. The test run operation mode cannot be changed by DIP switch SW4-2 during the test run. (To change the test run operation mode during the test run, stop the test run by DIP switch SW4-1. After changing the test run operation mode, resume the test run by switch SW4-1.) 7.2.2. Using remote controller Refer to the indoor unit installation manual. 8.1. Low noise mode (on -site modification) (Fig. 8-1) By performing the following modification, operation noise of the outdoor unit can be reduced by about 3-4 dB. The low noise mode will be activated when a commercially available timer or the contact input of an ON/OFF switch is added to the CNDM connector (option) on the control board of the outdoor unit. • The ability varies according to the outdoor temperature and conditions, etc. 0 Complete the circuit as shown when using the external input adapter (PAC-SC36NA-E). (Option) OO SW7-1 (Outdoor unit control board): OFF O SW1 ON: Low noise mode SW1 OFF: Normal operation 8.2. Demand function (on -site modification) (Fig. 8-2) By performing the following modification, energy consumption can be reduced to 0-100% of the normal consumption. The demand function will be activated when a commercially available timer or the contact input of an ON/OFF switch is added to the CNDM connector (option) on the control board of the outdoor unit. D Complete the circuit as shown when using the external input adapter (PAC-SC36NA-E). (Option) OO By setting SW7-1 on the control board of the outdoor unit, the energy consump- tion (compared to the normal consumption) can be limited as shown below. SW7-1 SW2 SW3 Energy consumption Demand function ON OFF OFF 100% ON OFF 75% ON ON 50% OFF ON 0% (Stop) OO Because the unit automatically stops in about 2 to 3 minutes when the refrigerant collecting operation is completed (LED1 off, LED2 lit), be sure to quickly close the gas stop valve. If LED1 is lit and LED 2 is off and the outdoor unit is stopped, refrigerant collection is not properly performed. Open the liquid stop valve com- pletely, and then repeat step 2 after 3 minutes have passed. • If the refrigerant collecting operation has been completed normally (LED1 off, LED2 lit), the unit will remain stopped until the power supply is turned off. ® Turn off the power supply (circuit breaker). • Note that when the extension piping is very long with large refrigerant amount, it may not be possible to perform a pump -down operation. When performing the pump -down operation, make sure that the low pressure is lowered to near 0 MPa (gauge). Zt Warning: When pumping down the refrigerant, stop the compressor before disconnect- ing the refrigerant pipes. The compressor may burst if air etc. get into it. 11 9. System control (Fig. 9-1) T€ SW 1 - 3 - 6 ON OO Outdoor unit Set the refrigerant address using the DIP switch of the outdoor unit. OFF OO Indoor unit 0 Wiring from the Remote Control 3 4 5 6 © Master remote controller This wire is connected to TB5 (terminal board for remote controller) of the indoor OO Subordinate remote controller unit (non -polar). O SW 1 - 3 - 6 ON OO Standard 1:1 (Refrigerant address = 00) 0When a Different Refrigerant System Grouping is Used. OFF OO Simultaneous twin (Refrigerant address = 01) © Simultaneous twin (Refrigerant address = 02) Up to 16 refrigerant systems can be controlled as one group using the slim MA 3 4 5 6 remote controller. ©SW1-3-6 ON OFF Note: 3 4 5 6 In single refrigerant system (twin), there is no need of wiring OO . (E) 0 0 © SW1 Operation accordin to switch setting TB 1 _ TB1 TB1 TB4 TB4 TB4 TB4 TB4 <SW1> OO © z OO TB5 OO TB5 TB5 OFF o00000 Fig. 9-1 10. Low ambient cooling Precautions for low ambient cooling • If the outdoor temperature is 23 °F or lower during cooling operation, install an optional air guide to prevent wind from blowing into the outdoor unit. • Install the outdoor unit in a location where wind will not blow onto the back of the unit. • To prevent damage to the parts, be sure to install the unit, turn on the main power, and perform service in an environment where the ambient temperature is 0 °F or higher. • In order to protect the compressor and electrical components, do not turn off the circuit breaker if the unit is installed in an environment where the ambient temperature is 0 °F or lower. • It needs at least 12hr standby to operation in order to warm the electrical parts. 12 Index 1. Consignes de securite............................................. 1 2. Emplacement pour I'installation...................................... 3 3. Installation de I'appareil exterieur.................................... 5 4. Installation de la tuyauterie du refrigerant .............................. 6 5. Mise en place du tuyau d'ecoulement................................. 8 1. Consignes de securite ► Avant d'installer le climatiseur, lire attentivement toutes les "Consignes de securite". ► Veuillez consulter ou obtenir la permission votre compagnie d'61ectricit6 avant de connecter votre systeme. As Avertissement: Precautions a suivre pour 6viter tout danger de blessure ou de d6ces de l'uti- lisateur. Pr6caution: Decrit les precautions qui doivent titre prises pour 6viter d'endommager I'ap- pareil. 0 Avertissement: • L'appareil ne doit pas titre installe par I'utilisateur. Contacter un revendeur ou un technicien agree pour installer I'appareil. Si I'appareil nest pas cor- rectement installe, des fuites d'eau, des chocs 6lectriques ou des incendies peuvent se produire. • Pour ('installation, respecter les instructions du manuel d'installation et uti- liser des outils et des composants de tuyau specialement congus pour une utilisation avec le refrigerant R410A. La pression du refrigerant R410A du systeme HFC est 1,6 fois superieure a Celle des refrigerants traditionnels. Si des composants de tuyau non adaptes au refrigerant R410A sont utilises et si I'appareil nest pas correctement installe, les tuyaux peuvent eclater et provoquer des dommages ou des blessures. Des fuites d'eau, des chocs 6lectriques et des incendies peuvent egalement se produire. • Lors de ('installation de I'appareil, utiliser un equipement de protection et des outils appropries pour assurer la securite. Le non -respect de cette consigne peut entrainer des blessures. • L'appareil doit titre installe conformement aux instructions pour reduire les risques de dommages lies a des tremblements de terre, des typhons ou des vents violents. Une installation incorrecte peut entrainer la chute de l'appa- reil et provoquer des dommages ou des blessures. • L'appareil doit titre solidement installe sur une structure pouvant supporter son poids. Si I'appareil est fix6 sur une structure instable, it risque de tomber et de provoquer des dommages ou des blessures. • Si le climatiseur est installe dans une petite piece, certaines mesures doivent titre prises pour 6viter que la concentration de refrigerant ne depasse le seuil de securite en cas de fuite. Consulter un revendeur pour obtenir les mesures adequates et ainsi 6viter de depasser la concentration autorisee. En cas de fuite de refrigerant et de depassement du seuil de concentration, des risques lies au manque d'oxygene dans la piece peuvent survenir. • A6rer la piece en cas de fuite de refrigerant lors de ('utilisation. Le contact du refrigerant avec une flamme peut provoquer des emanations de gaz toxiques. • Toutes les installations 6lectriques doivent titre effectuees par un technicien qualifie conformement aux reglementations locales et aux instructions four- nies dans ce manuel. Les appareils doivent titre alimentes par des lignes 6lectriques adaptees. Utiliser la tension correcte et des coupe -circuits. Des lignes 6lectriques de capacite insuffisante ou des installations 6lectriques incorrectes peuvent provoquer un choc 6lectrique ou un incendie. • Utiliser le cuivre phosphoreux C1220, pour des tuyaux sans soudure en cuivre et en alliage de cuivre, pour raccorder les tuyaux de r6frig6rant. Si les 1.1. Avant ('installation QI Precaution: • Ne pas utiliser I'appareil dans un environnement inhabituel. Si le climati- seur est installe dans des endroits exposes a la vapeur, a Thuile volatile (notamment Thuile de machine), au gaz sulfurique, a une forte teneur en sel, par exemple, a la mer, ou dans des endroits ou I'appareil sera recouvert de neige, les performances peuvent cons iderablement diminuer at les pieces internes de l'appareil We endommagees. • Ne pas installer I'appareil dans des endroits oia des gaz de combustion peu- vent s'echapper, se degager ou s'accumuler. L'accumulation de gaz de com- bustion autour de I'appareil peut provoquer un incendie ou une explosion. 1.2. Avant ('installation (d6placement) QI Precaution: • Transportez et installez les appareils avec pr6caution. L'appareil doit titre transport6 par 2 personnes ou plus, car it pese 20 kg, 44 Ibs minimum. Ne pas tirer les rubans d'emballage. Portez des gants de protection pour sortir I'appareil de son emballage et pour le deplacer, car vous risquez de vous blesser les mains sur les ergots ou les aretes des autres pieces. • Willer a eliminer le materiel d'emballage en toute securite. Le materiel d'em- ballage (clous at autres pieces en metal ou en bois) peut provoquer des blessures. 6. Installations 6lectriques............................................ 8 7. Marche d'essai................................................. 10 8. Fonctions speciales.............................................. 11 9. Contr6le du systeme (Fig. 9-1)..................................... 12 10. Rafraichissement a basse temperature ambiante...................... 12 Une fois ('installation terminee, expliquer les "Consignes de securite", ('utilisation et 1'entretien de I'appareil au client conformement aux informations du mode d'emploi et effectuer 1'essai de fonctionnement en continu pour garantir un fonctionnement normal. Le manuel d'installation et le mode d'emploi doivent titre fournis a I'utilisa- teur qui dolt les conserver. Ces manuels doivent egalement titre transmis aux nou- veaux utilisateurs. O: Indique un element qui dolt titre mis a la terre. Avertissement: Prendre soin de lire les etiquettes se trouvant sur I'appareil principal. tuyaux ne sont pas correctement raccordes, la mise a la terre de I'appareil ne sera pas conforme et des chocs 6lectriques peuvent se produire. • N'utiliser que les cables specifies pour les raccordements. Les raccorde- ments doivent titre realises correctement sans tension sur les bornes. Ne jamais effectuer de jonction sur les cables (sauf en cas d'indications contraires). Le non respect de cette consigne peut entrainer une surchauffe ou un incendie. • Lors de ('installation, du deplacement ou de 1'entretien du climatiseur, n'utili- sez que le refrigerant specifie (R410A) pour remplir les tuyaux de refrigerant. Ne pas le melanger avec un autre refrigerant et faire le vide d'air dans les tuyaux. Si du refrigerant est melange avec de I'air, cela peut provoquer des pointes de pression dans les tuyaux de refrigerant et entrainer une explosion et d'autres risques. L'utilisation d'un refrigerant different de celui specifie pour le climatiseur peut entrainer des defaillances mecaniques, des dysfonctionnements du systeme ou une panne de I'appareil. Dans le pire des cas, cela peut entrainer un obstacle a la mise en securite du produit. • Le couvercle du bloc de sortie de l'appareil exterieur doit titre solidement fix6. S'i1 nest pas correctement installe et si des poussieres et de I'humidit6 s'infiltrent dans I'appareil, un choc 6lectrique ou un incendie peut se pro- duire. • N'utiliser que les accessoires agrees par Mitsubishi Electric et Contacter un revendeur ou un technicien agree pour les installer. Si les accessoires ne sont pas correctement install6s, une fuite d'eau, un choc 6lectrique ou un incendie peut se produire. • Ne pas modifier I'appareil. Cela risquerait de provoquer un incendie, un choc 6lectrique, des blessures ou une fuite d'eau. • L'utilisateur ne doit jamais essayer de reparer ou de deplacer I'appareil. Si l'appareil nest pas correctement installe, des fuites d'eau, des chocs 6lec- triques ou des incendies peuvent se produire. Si le climatiseur doit titre repar6 ou deplace, Contacter un revendeur ou un technicien agree. • Une fois l'installation terminee, verifier les eventuelles fuites de refrigerant. Si le refrigerant fuit dans la piece et entre en contact avec la flamme d'un chauffage ou d'une cuisiniere, des gaz toxiques peuvent se degager. • Lors de I'ouverture ou de la fermeture de la vanne sous des temperatures de congelation, le r6frig6rant peut jaillir de 1'espace entre la tige de vanne et le corps de vanne et provoquer des blessures. • L'appareil exterieur produit de la condensation lors du fonctionnement du chauffage. Prevoir un systeme de drainage autour de I'appareil exterieur au cas ou la condensation provoquerait des dommages. • Lors de ('installation de I'appareil dans un h6pital ou un centre de commu- nications, se preparer au bruit et aux interferences electroniques. Les in- verseurs, les appareils 6lectromenagers, les equipements medicaux haute frequence et de communications radio peuvent provoquer un dysfonction- nement ou une d6faillance du climatiseur. Le climatiseur peut 6galement endommager les equipements medicaux et de communications, perturbant ainsi les soins et r6duisant la qualit6 d'affichage des 6crans. • La base et les fixations de I'appareil exterieur doivent titre v6rifiees regu- lierement pour 6viter qu'elles ne se desserrent, se fissurent ou subissent d'autres dommages. Si ces d6fauts ne sont pas corriges, I'appareil peut tom- ber et provoquer des dommages ou des blessures. • Ne pas nettoyer le climatiseur a I'eau au risque de provoquer un choc 61ec- trique. • Serrer les ecrous evases, conformement aux specifications, a I'aide d'une cle dynamometrique. Si les ecrous sont trop serres, its peuvent se casser apres un certain temps at provoquer une fuite de refrigerant. 1. Consignes de securite 1.3. Avant ('installation electrique As Precaution: • Willer a installer des coupe -circuits. Dans le cas contraire, un choc 6lec- trique peut se produire. • Pour les lignes electriques, utiliser des cables standard de capacit6 suf- fisante. Dans le cas contraire, un court -circuit, une surchauffe ou un in- cendie peut se produire. • Lors de ('installation des lignes 6lectriques, ne pas mettre les cables sous tension. Si les connexions sont desserr6es, les cables peuvent se rompre at provoquer une surchauffe ou un incendie. 1.4. Avant la marche d'essai As Precaution: • Activer I'interrupteur principal au moins 12 heures avant la mise en fonc- tionnement de I'appareil. L'utilisation de I'appareil juste aprbs sa mise sous tension peut endommager s6rieusement les pi6ces internes. Laisser I'interrupteur activ6 pendant la p6riode d'utilisation. • Avant d'utiliser I'appareil, v6rifier qua tous les panneaux, toutes les protec- tions et les autres pi6ces de s6curit6 sont correctement installes. Les pi6ces tournantes, chaudes ou a haute tension peuvent provoquer des blessures. • Ne pas toucher les interrupteurs les mains humides au risque de provoquer un choc electrique. 1.5. Utilisation de climatiseurs utilisant le refrigerant R410A Precaution: • Utiliser le cuivre phosphoreux C1220, pour des tuyaux sans soudure en cuivre et en alliage de cuivre, pour raccorder les tuyaux de refrigerant. Verifier que I'int6rieur des tuyaux est propre et depourvu de tout agent nocif tel que des composes sulfuriques, des oxydants, des debris ou des saletes. Utiliser des tuyaux d'epaisseur sp6cifiee. (Se reporter a la page 16). Respecter les instruc- tions suivantes en cas de r'tutilisation de tuyaux de r6frig6rant R22 existants. Remplacer les 6crous 6vas6s existants et 6vaser de nouveau les sections 6vas6es. Ne pas utiliser de tuyaux fins. (Se reporter 6 la page 16) • Stocker a I'int6rieur les tuyaux a utiliser pendant ('installation et couvrir les deux extremitds jusqu'au processus de brasage. (Laisser les joints de coude, etc. dans leur emballage.) L'infiltration de poussieres, de debris ou d'humidit6 dans les tuyaux de r6frig6rant peut affecter la qualite de Thuile ou endommager le compresseur. • Appliquer une petite quantite d'huile ester, ether ou alkylbenzbne comme huile refrig6rante sur les sections 6vas6es. Le m6lange d'huile min6rale et d'huile refrig6rante peut affecter la qualite de Thuile. • Willer a mettre I'appareil a la terre. Ne pas relier le fil de terre aux conduites de gaz ou d'eau, aux paratonnerres ou aux lignes de terre t6l6phoniques. Line mise a la terre incorrecte de I'appareil peut provoquer un choc electrique. • Utiliser des coupe -circuits (disjoncteur de fuite a la terre, interrupteur d'isolement (fusible +B) at disjoncteur a boitier mould) a la capacit6 sp6ci- fiee. Si la capacit6 du coupe -circuit est sup6rieure a celle sp6cifiee, une defaillance ou un incendie peut se produire. • Ne pas toucher les tuyaux de r6frig6rant les mains nues lors de ('utilisation. Les tuyaux de r6frig6rant sont chauds ou froids en fonction de I'6tat du r6frig6rant qu'ils contiennent. Toucher les tuyaux peut provoquer des brulures ou des gelures. • A la fin de ('utilisation de I'appareil, attendre au moins cinq minutes avant de d6sactiver I'interrupteur principal. Dans le cas contraire, une fuite d'eau ou une defaillance peut se produire. • Ne pas utiliser un r6frig6rant autre que le refrigerant R410A. Si c'est le cas, le chlore peut affecter la qualit6 de Thuile. • Utiliser les outils suivants specialement congus pour une utilisation avec le r6frig6rant R410A. Les outils suivants sont necessaires pour utiliser le r6fri- g6rant R410A. En cas de questions, contacter le revendeur le plus proche. Outils (pour R410A) Collecteurjauge Outil d'6vasement Tuyau de charge Jauge de r6glage de la taille D6tecteur de fuite de gaz Adaptateur pour pompe 6 vide C16 dynamom6trique JEchelle 6lectronique de charge de r6frig6rant • Willer a utiliser les outils adapt6s. L'infiltration de poussi6res, de debris ou d'humidite dans les tuyaux de refrigerant peut affecter la qualite de Thuile refrig6rante. • Ne pas utiliser un cylindre de charge. L'utilisation d'un cylindre de charge peut modifier la composition du refrigerant at reduire son efficacite. 2 2. Emplacement pour ('installation ■ TRUZA0121 KA70N* TRUZA0181 KA70N* TRUZA0121 KA70B* TRUZA0181 KA70B* TRUYA0121 KA70N* TRUYA0181 KA70N* TRUYA0121 KA70B* TRUYA0181 KA70B* ,. 29tg2 k Fig. 2-1 (inch) ■ TRUZA0241 HA70N* TRUZA0301 HA70N* TRUZA0241 HA70B* TRUZA0301 HA70B* TRUYA0241 HA70N* TRUYA0301 HA70N* TRUYA0241 HA70B* TRUYA0301 HA70B* 6, a1N6 N. ■ TRUZA0361 KA70N* TRUZA0421 KA70N* TRUZA0361 KA70B* TRUZA0421 KA70B* TRUYA0361 KA70N* TRUYA0421 KA70N* TRUYA0361 KA70B* TRUYA0421 KA70B* nch) ch) 2.1. Tuyaux de refrigerant (Fig. 2-1) ► Verifier qua la difference de hauteur entre les appareils interieur at exterieur, la longueur du tuyau de refrigerant et le nombre de coudes permis dans le tuyau se situent au sein des limites reprises dans le tableau ci-dessous. Modeles OO Longueur du © Difference de 0 Nombre de tuyau (un sens) haueur coudes (un sens) TRUZA0121KA70N* TRUZA0181 KA70N* Max. 30 m, 100 ft Max. 30 m,100 ft Max. 15 TRUZA0121KA70B* TRUZA0181KA70B* TRUZA0241 HA70N* TRUZA0301 HA70N* TRUZA0241 HA70B* TRUZA0301 HA70B* Max. 50 m, 165 ft Max. 30 m,100 ft Max. 15 TRUZA0361KA70N* TRUZA0421 KA70N* TRUZA0361KA70B* TRUZA0421 KA70B* TRUYA0121KA70N* TRUYA0181 KA70N* TRUYA0121KA70B* Max. 50 m, 165 ft Max. 30 m,100 ft Max. 15 TRUYA0181KA70B* TRUYA0241 HA70N* TRUYA0301 HA70N* TRUYA0241 HA70B* TRUYA0301 HA70B* Max. 69 m, 225 ft Max. 30 m,100 ft Max. 15 TRUYA0361 KA70N* TRUYA0421 KA70N* TRUYA0361 KA70B* TRUYA0421 KA70B* • Les specifications concernant la difference d'elevation s'appliquent a toutes dis- positions des appareils interieurs et exterieurs, sans tenir compte de celui qui est le plus elev(5. 0 Appareil interieur OO Appareil exterieur 2.2. Selection de 1'emplacement d'installation de I'appareil exterieur • Eviter les endroits exposes au rayonnement solaire direct ou a d'autres sources de chaleur. • Selectionner un endroit ou le bruit de I'appareil n'incommodera pas le voisinage. • Selectionner un endroit permettant un acces facile des cables et tuyaux a la source d'alimentation et a I'appareil interieur. • Eviter les endroits exposes a des risques de fuite, d'echappement ou d'accumulation de gaz. • Ne pas oublier que des gouttes d'eau peuvent couler de I'appareil lors de son utilisation. • Selectionner un endroit de niveau pouvant supporter le poids et les vibrations de I'appareil. • Eviter les endroits ou I'appareil peut titre recouvert de neige. Dans les zones ou les chutes de neige importantes sont previsibles, certaines precautions (par ex., relever 1'emplacement d'installation ou installer une hotte sur I'arrivee d'air) doivent We prises pour eviter que la neige ne bloque I'arrivee d'air ou ne tombe directement des - sus. La circulation de I'air risque de diminuer et d'entrainer un dysfonctionnement. • Eviter les endroits exposes a I'huile, a la vapeur ou au gaz sulfurique. • Utiliser les poignees de transport (quatre emplacements a gauche, a droite, a I'avant et a I'arriere) de I'appareil exterieur pour le deplacer. Transporter I'appareil par le bas peut provoquer des pincements aux mains ou aux doigts. 2.3. Dimensions exterieures (Appareil exterieur) (Fig. 2-2) Fig. 2-2 3 2. Emplacement pour ('installation Fig. 2-3 li !'il , I;IiIhIIIIIIIIiiIIIIV'IIIIIIIIIIIVIip \ / i r���ili� �illlll�'lllll6 Ilhl!IIIIIIIIVumI�IVII ��' III ��IIIII Fig. 2-5 2.4. Ventilation et espace de service 2.4.1. Installation a un endroit expose au vent Lors de ('installation de I'appareil exterieur sur un toit ou a d'autres endroits non proteges du vent, diriger la sortie d'air de I'appareil vers le cote qui nest pas directe- ment expose aux vents forts. Le vent soufflant dans la sortie d'air peut empecher I'air de circular normalement at provoquer un dysfonctionnement. Voici trois examples de precautions a prendre. t0 Positionner la sortie d'air vers le mur le plus proche et a environ 500 mm, 19- 11/16 inch de celui-ci. (Fig. 2-3) OO Installer un guidage d'air et un guidage de sortie d'air en option si I'appareil a ate place a un endroit oil les vents violents d'un typhon, etc. peuvent directement s' engouffrer dans la sortie d'air. (Fig. 2-4) OO Guidage de sortie d'air O Placer I'appareil de sorte que la sortie d'air souffle dans la direction perpendicu- laire a celle des vents saisonniers, si celle-ci est connue. (Fig. 2-5) OO Sens du vent 2.4.2. Lors de ('installation d'un seul appareil exterieur (Voir en derriere page) Le dimensions minimales sont les suivantes, a 1'exception des valeurs Max., indi- quant les dimensions maximales. Le chiffre entre parentheses concerne les modeles TRU*A0361KA70**, TRU*A0421 KA70**. Utiliser les chiffres pour chaque cas. i0 Obstacles uniquement a I'arriere (Fig. 2-6) OO Obstacles uniquement a I'arriere et au-dessus (Fig. 2-7) OO Obstacles uniquement a I'arriere et sur les cotes (Fig. 2-8) * 350 mm, 13-25/32 inch pour TRU*A0121 KA70**, TRU*A0181 KA70** 9) Obstacles uniquement a ('avant (Fig. 2-9) Lors de ('utilisation d'un guidage de sortie d'air en option, le jeu des modeles TRU*A0421 KA70** est de 500 mm, 19-11/16 inch minimum. © Obstacles uniquement a ('avant et a I'arriere (Fig. 2-10) Lors de ('utilisation d'un guidage de sortie d'air en option, le jeu des modeles TRU*A0421 KA70** est de 500 mm, 19-11/16 inch minimum. © Obstacles uniquement a l'arriere, sur les cotes et au-dessus (Fig. 2-11) 350 mm, 13-25/32 inch pour TRU*A0121 KA70**, TRU*A0181 KA70** Ne pas utiliser les guidages de sortie d'air en option pour un debit d'air vers le haut. 2.4.3. Lors de I'installation de plusieurs appareils exterieurs (Voir en derniere page) Pour TRU*A0121 KA70**, TRU*A0181 KA70**, laisser 350 mm, 13-25/32 inch et pour TRU*A0241 HA70**, TRU*A0301 HA70**, TRU*A0361 KA70**, TRU*A0421KA70** laisser 10 mm, 13/32 inch d'espace entre les appareils. i0 Obstacles uniquement a I'arriere (Fig. 2-12) OO Obstacles uniquement a l'arriere et au-dessus (Fig. 2-13) Ne pas installer c6te a c6te plus de trois appareils. Espacer egalement les appareils, comme illustre. Ne pas utiliser les guidages de sortie d'air en option pour un debit d'air vers le haut. OO Obstacles uniquement a ('avant (Fig. 2-14) * Lors de ('utilisation d'un guidage de sortie d'air en option, le jeu des modeles TRU*A0361 KA70**, TRU*A0421 KA70** est de 1000 mm, 39-3/8 inch minimum. O Obstacles uniquement a ('avant et a I'arriere (Fig. 2-15) Lors de ('utilisation d'un guidage de sortie d'air en option, le jeu des modeles TRU*A0361 KA70**, TRU*A0421 KA70** est de 1000 mm, 39-3/8 inch minimum. © Disposition pour un seul appareil parallele (Fig. 2-16) * Lors de ('utilisation d'un guidage de sortie d'air an option installe pour un debit d'air vers le haut, le jeu est de 500 (1000) mm, 19-11/16 (39-3/8) inch minimum. © Disposition pour plusieurs appareils paralleles (Fig. 2-17) Lors de ('utilisation d'un guidage de sortie d'air en option installe pour un debit d'air vers le haut, le jeu est de 1000 (1500) mm, 39-3/8 (59-1/16) inch minimum. OO Disposition pour appareils empiles (Fig. 2-18) II est possible d'empilerjusqu'a deux appareils. No pas installer c6te a c6te plus de deux appareils empiles. Espacer 6galement les appar- eils, comme illustre. 2 3. Installation de Pappareil exterieur 0 Boulon M10 (3/8 time de pouce) © Base © Aussi long que possible. Oc Ventilateur OO Profondement enfonce dans la terre ■ TRU*A0121 KA70** TRU*A0181 KA70** 19-11/16 Min. 25-19/3219-11/16 (Inch) N Min.13-25/32 m 6-3/32 6-3/32 31-7/8 ■ TRU*A0241 HA70** TRU*A0301 HA70** Min.14.25/32 (inch) 23-5/8 23-5/8 M Min. 1 0 6-7/8 6-7/8 37-13/32 ■ TRU*A0361 KA70** TRU*A0421 KA70** 23-5/8 Min. 18-7/91. 23-5/8 (inch) D �I M m Min.1 8-7/8 8-7/8 41-11/32 Fig. 3-1 • Bien installer I'appareil sur une surface solide at de niveau, de fagon a eviter tout bruit de crecelle pendant le fonctionnement. (Fig. 3-1) <Specifications de la fondation> Boulon de fondation M10 (3/8") Epaisseur de beton 120 mm, 4-23/32 inch Longueur des boulons 70 mm, 2-3/4 inch Resistance au poids 320 kg, 264 Ibs • S'assurer que la longueur des boulons de fondation ne depasse pas 30 mm, 1-3/16 inch par rapport a la surface inferieure de la base. • Fixer fermement la base de I'appareil avec quatre boulons de fondation M10 pla- ces a des endroits suffisamment robustes. Installation de I'appareil exterieur • Ne pas bloquer le ventilateur. Si le ventilateur est bloque, I'appareil sera ralenti et risque d'etre endommage. • Pour installer I'appareil, utiliser, si necessaire at en plus de la base de I'appareil, les orifices d'installation situes a I'arriere pour fixer les cables, etc. Utiliser des vis autotaraudeuses (o5 x 15 mm, o13/16 x 19/32 inch moins) at installer I'appareil sur site. zt Avertissement: • L'appareil doit titre solidement installe sur une structure pouvant supporter son poids. Si I'appareil est fixe sur une structure instable, it risque de tomber et de provoquer des dommages ou des blessures. • L'appareil doit titre installe conformement aux instructions pour reduire les risques de dommages lies a des tremblements de terre, des typhons ou des vents violents. Une installation incorrecte peut entrainer la chute de I'appareil et provoquer des dommages ou des blessures. 5 4, Installation de la tuyauterie du refrigerant O Conduit de liquide OO Conduit de gaz © Isolation thermique OO Rubanage (inch) 45°± 2' uO o Q +i m rn 6Q 0 2 Dimension de I'evasement © Couple de serrage du raccord conique fo� D Fig. 4-2 TRU*A0241 HA70** TRU*A0301 HA70** TRU*A0121 KA70** TRU*A0361 KA70** TRU*A0181 KA70** TRU*A0421 KA70** Cote gaz I Diametre du tuyau (mm, inch) o12,7, 1/2" o15,88, 5/8" Cote liquide I Diametre du tuyau (mm, inch) o6,35, 1/4" o9,52, 3/8" ® (Fig. 4-1) Diam. ext. Tuyau en cuivre Dimensions evasement Dimensions oA (mm) (inch) (mm) (inch) o6,35 1/4" 8,7 - 9.1 11/32 - 23/64 o9,52 3/8" 12,8 - 13,2 1/2 - 33/64 o12,7 1/2" 16,2 - 16,6 41/64 - 21/32 015,88 5/8" 19,3 - 19,7 49/64 © (Fig. 4-1) Diam. ext. Tuyau en cuivre Diam.ext. raccord conique Couple de serrage (mm) (inch) (mm) (inch) (N-m) (ft-lbs) o6,35 1/4" 17 43/64 14 - 18 10 - 13 o9,52 3/8" 22 7/8 34 - 42 25 - 30 o12,7 1/2" 26 1 - 3/64 49 - 61 35 - 44 o15,88 5/8" 29 1 - 9/64 68 - 82 49 - 59 ■ TRU*A0121 KA70** TRU*A0181 KA70** 0 Couvercle de la tuyauterie eve ® Couvercle de la tuyauterie 0 Vanne d'arret 0 Panneau de service ■ TRU*A0241 HA70**, TRU*AO301 HA70** TRU*A0361KA70**, TRU*A0421KA70** © Rayon de cintrage : 100 mm, 3-15/16 inch-150 mm, 5-27/32 inch 4.1. Consignes pour appareils utilisant le refrigerant R410A • Se reporter a la page 14 pour les consignes non reprises ci-dessous concer- nant ('utilisation de climatiseurs avec un refrigerant R410A. • Appliquer une petite quantite d'huile ester, ether ou alkylbenzene comme huile refrigerante sur les sections evasees. • Utiliser le cuivre phosphoreux C1220, pour des tuyaux sans soudure en cuivre et en alliage de cuivre, pour raccordes les tuyaux de refrigerant. Utiliser les tuyaux de refrigerant dont I'epaisseur est specifiee clans le tableau ci-dessous. Verifier que ('interieur des tuyaux est propre et depourvu de tout agent nocif tel que des composes sulfuriques, des oxydants, des debris ou des saletes. AN Avertissement: Lors de ('installation, du deplacement ou de 1'entretien du climatiseur, n'utilisez que le refrigerant specife (R410A) pour remplir les tuyaux de refrigerant. Ne pas le melanger avec un autre refrigerant et faire le vide d'air dans les tuyaux. Si du refrigerant est melange avec de I'air, cela peut provoquer des pointes de pres- sion dans les tuyaux de refrigerant et entrainer une explosion et d'autres risques. L'utilisation d'un refrigerant different de celui specifie pour le climatiseur peut entrainer des defaillances mecaniques, des dysfonctionnements du systeme ou une panne de I'appareil. Dans le pire des cas, cela peut entrainer un obs- tacle a la mise en securite du produit. TRU*A0121 KA70** TRU*A0241 HA70**, TRU*A0301 HA70** TRU*A0181 KA70** TRU*A0361 KA70**, TRU*A0421 KA70** Conduit de o6,35 mm, 1/4inch o9,52 mm, 3/8 inch liquide epaisseur 0,8 mm, 1/32 inch epaisseurs 0,8 mm, 1/32 inch Conduit de o12,7 mm, 1/2 inch o15,88 mm, 5/8 inch gaz epaisseur 0,8 mm, 1/32 inch epaisseur 1,0 mm, 3/64 inch • Ne pas utiliser de tuyaux plus fins que ceux specifies ci-dessus. 4.2. Connexion des tuyaux (Fig. 4-1) (Fig. 4-2) En cas d'utilisation de tuyaux en cuivre disponibles sur le marche, isoler separe- ment les tuyaux de liquide et de gaz avec un materiau isolant vendu dans le com- merce (resistant a une temperature de 100 °C, 212 °F ou plus, et d'une epaisseur de 12 mm, 1/2 inch ou plus). (Fig. 4-1) • Les parties interieures du tuyau d'ecoulement doivent egalement titre entourees de matiere isolante an mousse de polyethylene (avec une poids specifique de 0,03 et de 9 mm, 23/64 inch d'epaisseur ou plus). [Fig. 4-2] • Appliquer un film mince d'huile refrigerante sur la surface du tuyau et du support du joint avant de serrer I'ecrou evase. O • Utiliser deux cles pour serrer les connexions des tuyaux. • Lorsque Is raccord des tuyaux est terming, utiliser un detecteur de fuite de gaz ou une solution savonneuse a base d'eau pour s'assurer qu'il n'y aft pas de fuite de gaz. • Appliquer de Thuile refrigerante sur toute la surface evasee du fond. • Utiliser les ecrous evases correspondant aux tallies de tuyaux suivantes. OO Remarques: 1. Le raccord conique est fixe a son tuyau. 2. Le raccord conique se trouve dans I'accessoire pour apparel exterieur. Ne pas utiliser le raccord conique fixe : cela pourrait provoquer une fuite de gaz, voire 1'extraction du tuyau. • Veiller a ne pas rompre les tuyaux lors de leur courbure. Des rayons de courbure compris entre 100 mm, 3-15/16 inch 1150 mm, 5-27/32 inch suffisent. • Verifier que les tuyaux ne touchent pas le compresseur. Des vibrations ou des bruits anormaux pourraient se produire. i0 Raccorder les tuyaux en commengant par I'appareil interieur. Serrer les ecrous evases a I'aide d'une c1e dynamometrique. 0 Evaser les conduits de liquide at de gaz, puis appliquer un film mince d'huile refrigerante (application sur site). Zt Avertissement: Pendant ('installation de I'appareil, brancher correctement les tuyaux de refri- gerant avant de lancer le compresseur. 4.3. Mise en place des tuyaux de refrigerant (Fig. 4-3) ■ Pour TRU*A0121 KA70**, TRU*A0181 KA70** Retirer le panneau de service Oe (2 vis). ■ Pour TRU*A0241 HA70**, TRU*A0301 HA70**, TRU*A0361 KA70**, TRU*A0421 KA70** Retirer le panneau de service 0 (3 vis) le cache-tuyaux avant ® (2 vis) at le cachetuyaux arriere © (2 vis: TRU*A0241 HA70**, TRU*A0301 HA70**) (4 vis: TRU*A0361 KA70**, TRU*A0421 KA70**). i0 Effectuer les raccordements des tuyaux de refrigerant de I'appareil interieur/exte- rieur lorsque la vanne d'arret de I'appareil exterieur est completement fermee. OO Faire le vide d'air de I'appareil interieur et des tuyaux de raccordement. OO Line fois les tuyaux de refrigerant raccordes, verifier les eventuelles fuites de gaz dans les tuyaux raccordes et I'appareil interieur. (Voir 4.4. Test d'etancheite des tuyaux de refrigerant.) u0 Vider les tuyaux de refrigerant par ('orifice de service de la vanne d'arret de li- quide, puis ouvrir completement les vannes d'arret (de gaz at de liquide). Cette operation permet le raccordement complet des tuyaux de refrigerant des appa- reils interieur et exterieur. • Faire fonctionner I'appareil sans avoir ouvert les vannes d'arret risque d'endom- mager le compresseur et la vanne de commande. • Utiliser un detecteur de fuites ou de I'eau savonneuse pour verifier les eventuelles fuites de gaz aux sections de raccordement des tuyaux de I'appareil exterieur. • Ne pas utiliser le refrigerant de I'appareil pour faire le vide d'air des tuyaux de refrigerant. • Apres avoir utilise les vannes, resserrer leurs capuchons au couple correct : 20 a 25 N-m, 14 a 18 ft-lbs (200 a 250 kgf-cm). Si les capuchons sont mal replaces ou resserres, une fuite de refrigerant peut se produire. Veiller egalement a ne pas endommager ('interieur des capuchons des vannes car leur etancheite empeche les fuites de refrigerant. OO Appliquer un agent d'etancheite sur les extremites de ('isolation thermique autour des sections de raccordement des tuyaux afin d'empecher I'eau de penetrer dans ('isolation thermique. 4. Installation de la tuyauterie du refrigerant AC(BB Vanne d'arret <c6te liquide> Oe Vanne d'arret <c6te gaz> C Orifice pour 1'entretien C Section d'ouverture/fermeture H x x ©• ` .. V Tuyaulocal Q Hermetique, idem pour le cote gaz © Fourrure du tuyau ® Ne pas utiliser de c16 ici. II pourrait y avoir des fuites de r6frig6rant. (D Utiliser deux cl6s ici. Fig. 4-4 Remarques: 1. La figure a gauche nest representee qu'a titre d'exemple. La forme de la vanne d'arret, la position de l'ouverture de service, etc., peuvent differer selon Is mod6le. 2.Tournez Is section @ uniquement. (Ne serrez pas davantage les sections OO at (1) Tune contre I'autre.) C Flexible de charge D Ouverture de service Fig. 4-6 4.4. Test d'etancMM des tuyaux de refrigerant (1) Connecter les outils de test. • Verifier qua lea vannes d'arret OO at © sont fermees et ne pas les ouvrir. - Ajouter de la pression dans les tuyaux de refrigerant par ('orifice de service C de la vanne d'arret de liquide C. (2) Ne pas ajouter en une seule fois de pression a la pression specifiee mais progressivement. 0 Pressuriser jusqu'a 0,5 MPa (5 kgf/cm'G), attendre cinq minutes et verifier que la pression ne diminue pas. OO Pressuriser jusqu'a 1,5 MPa (15 kgf/cm2G), attendre cinq minutes et verifier que la pression ne diminue pas. O Pressuriser jusqu'a 4,15 MPa (41,5 kgf/cm2G), puffs mesurer la temperature ambiante at la pression du refrigerant. (3) Si la pression specifiee se maintient pendant environ une journee sans diminu- er, les tuyaux ne presentent pas de fuite. • Si la temperature ambiante varie de 1 °C, la pression varie d'environ 0,03 MPa (0,3 kgf/cm'G). Apporter les corrections necessaires. (4) Si la pression diminue a 1'etape (2) ou (3), it y a une fuite de gaz. Rechercher I'origine de la fuite de gaz. 4.5. Comment ouvrir la vanne d'arret (Fig. 4-5) t0 Retirez le bouchon, et tournez la tige de soupape a fond dans le sens antihoraire avec une cle hexagonale de 4 mm, 5/32 inch. Arretez de tourner quand elle frappe la retenue. (o6,35, 1/4 inch: env. 4,5 tours) (o9,52, 3/8 inch: env. 10 tours) OO Verifier que la vanne d'arret est completement ouverte, appuyer sur la poignee at tourner le capuchon pour le ramener sur sa position d'origine. OO Corps de vanne ® Cote c1e double Oe Cote appareil (Utiliser une cle de ce cote uniquement. Dans le cas C Capuchon contraire, une fuite de liquide pourrait en resulter.) C Cote tuyau local (D Cote joint d'etancheite C Gaine du tuyau (Etancher 1'extremite de ('isolation thermique OO Orifice pour 1'entretien du cote du raccord du tuyau avec un produit © Tige de vanne d'etancheite quelconque pour eviter toute infiltra- tion d'eau dans le materiel d'isolation thermique.) Les tuyaux de refrigerant sont entoures d'une couche de protection pour TRU*A0241 HA70**, TRU*A0301 HA70**, TRU*A0361 KA70**, TRU*A0421 KA70** • Les tuyaux peuvent titre entoures, apres ou avant avoir ete raccordes, d'une couche de protection allant jusqu'a o90 mm, 3-35/64 inch. Decouper la rondelle defon4;able du cache-tuyaux en suivant la rainure et envelopper les tuyaux. Orifice d'entree du tuyau pour TRU*A0241 HA70**, TRU*A0301 HA70**, TRU*A0361 KA70**, TRU*A0421 KA70** • Appliquer du mastic ou un agent d'etancheite sur 1'entree des tuyaux pour eviter tout espace. (Si les espaces ne sont pas supprimes, I'appareil risque de fonctionner bruyam- ment ou d'etre endommage a cause d'une infiltration d'eau et de poussieres). Precautions a prendre lors de ('utilisation de la soupape de charge (Fig. 4-6) Ne serrez pas trod I'ouverture de service au moment de ('installer. car vous Dour- riez deformer le corps de la souoaDe et des fuites Dourraient se Droduire. Apres avoir pose la section OO dans la direction desiree, tournez la section OO uniquement et serrez-la. Ne serrez pas davantage les sections OO et © Tune contre I'autre apres avoir serre la section OO . Avertissement: Lors de I'ouverture ou de la fermeture de la vanne sous des temperatures de congelation, le refrigerant peut jaillir de 1'espace entre la tige de vanne et le corps de vanne et provoquer des blessures. 7 4, Installation de la tuyauterie du refrigerant 4.6. Ajout de produit refrigerant Une charge supplementaire n'est pas necessaire si la longueur du tuyau ne depasse pas 20 m, 70 ft pour TRU*A0121 KA70**, TRU*A0181 KA70**, TRU*A0241 HA70**, TRU*A0301 HA70**, 30 m 100 ft pour TRU*A0361 KA70**, TRU*A0421 KA70**. • Si la longueur du tuyau depasse la longueur specifiee ci-dessus, recharges ('appareil en gaz refrigerant R410A en fonction des longueurs de tuyau autorisees dans le tableau ci-dessous. Remarques: 1. Une fois ('appareil arrete, le charger de refrigerant supplementaire par la vanne d'arret de liquide apres avoir vide les extensions de tuyaux et I'appareil interieur. Lors de ('utilisation de I'appareil, ajouter du refrigerant par le clapet de non-retour du gaz a I'aide d'un chargeur de securite. Ne pas ajouter de refrigerant liquide directement par le clapet de non-retour. 2. Une fois ('appareil charge de refrigerant, noter la quantite de refrigerant ajoute sur 1'etiquette de service (collee sur I'appareil). Pour plus d'informations, se reporter a la section "1.5. Utilisation de climati- seurs utilisant le refrigerant R410A". L'installation de plusieurs appareils doit se faire avec precaution. Le raccorde- ment a un appareil interieur defaillant peut entramer une pression anormalement elevee et alterer serieusement les performances de I'appareil. Diffe- Quantite de charge de refrigerant ajoute (kg/oz) Longueur 20 m 24 m 27 m 30 m 34 m 37 m 40 m 43 m 46 m 49 m 50 m 52 m 55 m 58 m 61 m 64 m 67 m 69 m Modele de tuyau rence de max. hauteur 70 ft 80 ft 90 ft 100 ft 110 ft 120 ft 130 ft 140 ft 150 ft 160 ft 165 ft 170 ft 180 ft 190 ft 200 ft 210 ft 220 ft 225 ft max. TRUZA0121KA70** 30 m, 30 m, 0,06 kg 0,11 kg 0,17 kg TRUZA0181 KA70** 100 ft 100 ft 0 2 oz 4 oz 6 oz TRUZA0241HA70** 50 m, 30 m, 0,20 kg 0,40 kg 0,60 kg 0,79 kg 0,99 kg 1,19 kg 1,39 kg 1,59 kg 1,79 kg 1,89 kg TRUZA0301 HA70** 165 ft 100 ft 0 7 oz 14 oz 21 oz 28 oz 35 oz 42 oz 49 oz 56 oz 63 oz 67 oz TRUZA0361KA70** 50 m, 30 m, 0,20 kg 0,40 kg 0,26 kg 0,79 kg 0,99 kg 1,19 kg 1,29 kg TRUZA0421 KA70** 165 ft 100 ft 0 0 0 0 7 oz 14 oz 21 oz 28 oz 35 oz 42 oz 46 oz TRUYA0121KA70** 50 m, 30 m, 0,03 kg 0,06 kg 0,09 kg 0,11 kg 0,14 kg 0,17 kg 0,20 kg 0,23 kg 0,26 kg 0,27 kg TRUYA0181 KA70** 165 ft 100 ft 0 1 oz 2 oz 3 oz 4 oz 5 oz 6 oz 7 oz 8 oz 9 oz 10 oz TRUYA0241HA70** 69 m, 30 m, 0,09 kg 0,17 kg 0,26 kg 0,34 kg 0,43 kg 0,51 kg 0,60 kg 0,68 kg 0,77 kg 0,81 kg 0,85 kg 0,94 kg 1,02 kg 1,11 kg 1,19 kg 1,28 kg 1,32 kg TRUYA0301 HA70** 225 ft 100 ft 0 3 oz 6 oz 9 oz 12 oz 15 oz 18 oz 21 oz 24 oz 27 oz 29 oz 30 oz 33 oz 36 oz 39 oz 42 ort45 47 oz TRUYA0361KA70** 69 m, 30 m, 0,09 kg 0,17 kg0,26 kg 0,34 kg 0,43 kg 0,51 kg 0,55 kg 0,60 kg 0,68 kg 0,77 kg 0,85 kg 0,94 k 1,06 kg TRUYA0421 KA70** 225 ft 100 ft 0 0 0 0 3 oz 6 oz 9 oz 12 oz 15oz 18 oz 20 oz 21 oz 24 oz 27 oz 30 oz 33 oz 38 oz 5. Mise en place du tuyau d'ecoulement Raccordement du tuyau d'ecoulement de I'appareil exterieur Lorsqu'un tuyau d'ecoulement s'avere necessaire, utiliser la douille de drainage ou la cuvette de drainage (en option). TRU*A0121 KA70** TRU*A0181 KA70** TRU*A0241 HA70** TRU*A0301 HA70** 1 TRU*A0361 KA70** TRU*A0421 KA70** Douille de drainage PAC-SJ08DS-E PAC-SG61 DS-E Cuvette de drainage PAC-SG63DP-E PAC-SG64DP-E PAC-SH97DP-E 6. Installations electriques 6.1. Appareil exterieur (Fig. 6-1, Fig. 6-2) 0 Retirer le panneau de service. OO Effectuer le cablage conformement aux figures 6-1 at 6-2. Pour alimentation Pour D alimentation © 0 _� =QE © I Is 4ppareil interieur 4ppareil exterieur relecommande nterrupteur/fusible principal Disjoncteur) OO Mise a la terre ■ TRU*A0121 KA70** TRU*A0181 KA70** B A F + L1 L2 GR ® 51 S2 S3 0 0 \ ® o V ■ TRU*A0241 HA70**, TRU*A0301 HA70** TRU*A0361 KA70**, TRU*A0421 KA70** OO Borne de terre Fig. 6-1 © Embase de borne © Attache OO Panneau de service 0 Acheminer les cables de maniere qu'ils ne touchent pas le centre du panneau de service ou la vanne de gaz. Fig. 6-2 ■ TRU*A0121 KA70** TRU*A0181 KA70** ■ TRU*A0241 HA70** TRU*A0301 HA70** TRI I*003R1 K070** TRU*A0421 KA7 PLAQUETTE DE TUBE: accessoire CABLE 2 PANNEAU DE SERVICE 4BLE JIBE 6. Installations electriques 6.2. Cablage des champs electriques Modeledel'appareilexterieur TRU*A0121KA70** TRU*A0181KA70** TRU*A0241HA70** TRU*A0301HA70** TRU*A0361KA70** TRU*A0421KA70** -IN (monophase) , 60 Hz, -IN (monophase), 60 Hz, -IN (monophase) , 60 Hz, -IN (monophase) , 60 Hz, -IN (monophase) , 60 Hz, -IN (monop60hase) , Hz, Appareil exterieur alimentation 208/230V 208/230V 208/230V 208/230V 208/230V 208/230V Interrupteur principal (Disjoncteur) de capacite *1 15 A 15 A 25 A 25 A 30 A 30 A d'entree de ('appareil exterieur Appareil exterieur alimentation 2 x Min. AWG 14 2 x Min. AWG 14 2 x Min. AWG 12 2 x Min. AWG 12 2 x Min. AWG 10 2 x Min. AWG 10 x E Appareil interieur-appareil exterieur *2 3 x AWG 14 (polar) 3 x AWG 14 (polar) 3 x AWG 14 (polar) 3 x AWG 14 (polar) 3 x AWG 14 (polar) 3 x AWG 14 (polar) m E Mise a la terre de I'appareil exterieur- a * 2 1 x Min. AWG 14 olar (polar) 1 x Min. AWG 14 polar (polar) 1 x Min. AWG 14 olar (polar) 1 x Min. AWG 14 olar (polar) 1 x Min. AWG 14 olar (polar) 1 x Min. AWG 14 olar (p ) U appareil interieur z :° Raccordement de la commande A 2 x AWG 22 2 x AWG 22 2 x AWG 22 2 x AWG 22 2 x AWG 22 2 x AWG 22 *4 distance-appareil interieur (Non -polarise) (Non -polarise) (Non -polarise) (Non -polarise) (Non -polarise) (Non -polarise) Appareil exterieur 11-12 (monophase) *5 208/230 V AC 208/230 V AC 208/230 V AC 208/230 V AC 208/230 V AC 208/230 V AC Appareil interieur-appareil exterieur S1-S2 *5 o '5 (monophase) 208/230 V AC 208/230 V AC 208/230 V AC 208/230 V AC 208/230 V AC 208/230 V AC Appareil interieur-appareil exterieur S2-S3 ,5 t- (monophase) 24 V DC 24 V DC 24 V DC 24 V DC 24 V DC 24 V DC Raccordement de la commande A *5 distance-appareil interieur 12 V DC 12 V DC 12 V DC 12 V DC 12 V DC 12 V DC *1. Willer a correctement relier I'appareil a la terre. Si necessaire, prendre des precautions contre les fuites. *2. Max, 50 m, 164 pi S3 separe, max. 80 m, 262 pi *3. Max. 30 m, 100 pi *4. Le fil de 10 m, 30 pi est rattache a la telecomande. *5. Les chiffres ne s'appliquent PAS toujours a la mise A la terre. La borne S3 presente un courant de 24 V CC par rapport a la borne S2. Les bornes S3 et S1 NE SONT PAS isolees electriquement par le transformateur ou tout autre appareil. Remarques : 1. La taille des fils doit titre conforme aux reglementations nationales et locales pertinentes. 2. Les cables d'alimentation, le cable exterieur entre I'appareil interieur/exterieur et le chauffe-eau doivent avoir une isolation au moins egale a celle que procure le polychloroprene. (Conception 60245 IEC 57) 3. Utiliser un cable de terre plus long que Ies autres cables de fagon A ce qu'il ne se debranche pas lorsque I'appareil est sous tension. 208/230V Monophase Sectionneur S1 Appareil exterieur de S2 "commande A" S3 Sectionneur tripolaire S1 S2 Appareil interieur de "commande A" S3 Avertissement: S'il s'agit d'un cablage de commande A, un risque de haute tension existe sur la borne S3 en raison d'une conception de circuit electrique depourvue d'un isolant electrique entre la ligne de commande et la ligne de signal de communication. Par consequent, mettre I'alimentation principale hors tension lors de 1'entretien. Veiller egalement a ne pas toucher Ies bornes S1, S2 et S3 lorsque I'alimentation est sous tension. S'il faut placer un sectionneur entre Ies appareils exterieur et interieur, en utiliser un de type tripolaire. Ne jamais effectuer de jonction du cable d'alimentation ou du cable de raccordement interieur-exterieur car cela peut entrainer une surchauffe, un incendie ou un raccor- dement defaillant. 7. Marche d'essai 7.1. Avant la marche d'essai ► Lorsque ('installation, le tuyautage et le cablage des appareils interieur et exterieur sont termines, verifier I'absence de fuites de refrigerant, la fixation des cables d'alimentation et de commande, I'absence d'erreur de polarite et controler qu'aucune phase de I'alimentation nest deconnectee. ► Utiliser un megohm-metre de 500V pour s'assurer que la resistance entre Ies terminaux d'alimentation electrique et la terre soft au moins de 1 M.O. ► Ne pas effectuer ce test sur Ies terminaux des cables de controle (circuit a basse tension). Q1 Avertissement: Ne pas utiliser le climatiseur si la resistance de I'isolation est inferieure a 1 MCI. Resistance de ('isolation Apres ('installation ou apres la coupure prolongee de la source d'alimentation, la resistance de ('isolation chutera an delta d'1 MO en raison de I'accumulation de refrigerant clans le compresseur. II ne s'agit pas d'un dysfonctionnement. Respectez Ies procedures suivantes. 1. Retirer Ies cables du compresseur et mesurer la resistance de ('isolation du compresseur. 2. Si la resistance de ('isolation est inferieure A 1 Mf2, le compresseur est defaillant ou du refrigerant s'est accumule dans le compresseur. 3. Apres avoir connecte Ies cables au compresseur, celui-ci commence a chauffer des qu'il est sous tension. Apres avoir mis sous tension le compresseur pendant Ies clurees indiquees ci-dessous, mesurer de nouveau la resistance de ('isolation. • La resistance de ('isolation chute en raison de I'accumulation de refrigerant dans le compresseur. La resistance depassera 1 MO apres que le compresseur a chauffe pendant 12 heures. (Le temps mis par le compresseur pour chauffer varie selon Ies conditions at- mospheriques at I'accumulation de refrigerant). • Pour faire fonctionner le compresseur dans lequel s'est accumule du refrigerant, it est necessaire de le faire chauffer pendant au moins 12 heures afin d'eviter toute defaillance. 4. Si la resistance de ('isolation depasse 1 MO, le compresseur nest pas defectueux. QPrecaution: • Le compresseur fonctionnera uniquement si Ies connexions des phases de I'alimentation electrique sont correctes. • Mettez ('appareil sous tension au moins 12 heures avant de le faire fonction- ner. La mise en marche de ('appareil immediatement apres sa mise sous tension pour- rait provoquer de serieux degats aux elements internes. Ne mettez pas ('appareil hors tension pendant la saison de fonctionnement. 10 7. Marche d'essai ► Les points suivants doivent @tre contr6l6s egalement. • L'appareil exterieur nest pas defectueux. Les temoins 1 et 2 (DEL1 et DEL2) sur la carte de commande de I'appareil exterieur clignotent lorsque celui-ci est defec- tueux. • Les vannes d'arret de liquide et de gaz sont completement ouvertes. • Line feuille protectrice recouvre la surface du panneau des commutateurs DIP sur la carte de commande de I'appareil exterieur. Retirer la feuille protectrice pour utiliser aisement les commutateurs DIP. 7.2. Marche d'essai 7.2.1. Utilisation de SW4 dans I'appareil exterieur 1) Type TRUZ SW4-1 ON Fonctionnement du rafraichissement SW4-2 OFF SW4-1 ON Fonctionnement du chauffage SW4-2 ON 2) Type TRUY SW4-1 ON SW4-2 ON ou OFF Fonctionnement du rafraichissement Apr6s avoir effectu6 I'essai de Fonctionnement, placer SW 4-1 sur OFF. • Line fois sous tension, un cliquetis provenant de ('interieur de I'appareil exterieur se fait entendre. Le detendeur electronique s'ouvre et se ferme. L'appareil nest pas defectueux. 8. Fonctions speciales OA ----I' '--------------------I © OD ---------i I Orange I CNDM Fig. 8-1 L----------- ' OO Example de diagramme de circuit ® Carte de commande de I'appareil exterieur (mode a faible bruit) OE Max. 10 m, 33 pi OB Disposition sur site Or Alimentation pour Is relais © Adaptateur d'entree exteme (PAC-SC36NA-E) X : Relais ---, --------------------I ----------; I �!!Rouge nge I CNDM X V -- . o y o s Fig. 8-2 ii i --------------- ----- — i II `---------- ' ® Example de diagramme de circuit © Adaptateur d'entree externe (PAC-SC36NA-E) (Fonction de demande) ® Carte de commande de I'appareil exterieur © Disposition sur site S Max. 10 m, 33 pi X, Y : Relais O Alimentation pour le relais 8.3. Recuperation du refrigerant (Aspiration) Effectuer les operations suivantes pour recup6rer le refrigerant en cas de deplace- ment des appareils interieur ou exterieur. 0 Mettre sous tension (coupe -circuit). • Lors de la mise sous tension, verifier que "CENTRALLY CONTROLLED" ne s'affiche pas sur la telecommande. Si "CENTRALLY CONTROLLED" s'afftche, la recuperation de refrigerant ne peut pas s'effectuer normalement. • Le d6marrage de la communication interne-externe prend environ 3 minutes apres la mise sous tension (coupe -circuit). Demarrer la purge 3 6 4 minutes apres la mise sous tension (coupe -circuit). OO Line fois la vanne d'arret de gaz fermee, activer le commutateur SWP sur la carte de commande de I'appareil exterieur. Le compresseur (appareil exterieur) at les ventilateurs (appareils interieurs et exterieurs) demarrent et la collecte du refrige- rant commence. Les temoins DEL1 et 2 de la carte de commande de I'appareil exterieur s'allument. • Wactiver le commutateur SWP (type bouton-poussoir) que si I'appareil est ar- rete. Cependant, meme si I'appareil est arrete et que le commutateur SWP est active moins de 3 minutes apres I'arret du compresseur, la recuperation du refri- gerant ne peut pas s'effectuer. Attendre 3 minutes apres I'arret du compresseur avant de r6activer le commutateur SWP. 11 • Verifier que tous les commutateurs DIP SW5 de changement de fonction sur la carte de commande de I'appareil exterieur sont regles sur OFF. Si tous les com- mutateurs SW5 ne sont pas desactives, enregistrer les parametres, puis desacti- ver tous les commutateurs. Commencer A recup6rer le refrigerant. Line fois I'appa- reil installe 6 son nouvel emplacement at la marche d'essai effectuee, regler les commutateurs SW5 sur les parametres precedemment definis. • Quelques secondes apres le d6marrage du compresseur, un bruit metallique provenant de ('interieur de I'appareil exterieur peut retentir. Le bruit provient de la valve de controle et s'explique par une diff6rence de pression minime dans Ies tuyaux. L'appareil nest pas defectueux. Le mode d'essai ne peut pas titre modift6 via le commutateur DIP SW4-2 lors de la marche d'essat. (Pour ce faie, arreter I'essai via le commutateur DIP SW4-1. Une fois le mode modifie, reprendre I'essai via le commutateur SW4-1.) 7.2.2. Utilisation de la telecommande Reportez-vous au manual d'installation de I'appareil interieur. 8.1. Mode a faible bruit (modification sur site) (Fig. 8-1) En apportant la modification suivante, Is bruit de fonctionnement de I'appareil exterieur peut titre reduit d'environ 3 A 4 dB. Le mode 6 faible bruit est active lorsqu'un temporisateur disponible dans le com- merce ou 1'entree par contact d'un commutateur MARCHE/ARRET est ajoute au connecteur CNDM (option) sur la carte de commande de I'appareil exterieur. - La capacite depend de la temperature et des conditions exterieures, etc. D Etablir Is circuit comme illustre lors de ('utilisation de I'adaptateur d'entree externe (PAC-SC36NA-E). (Option) OO SW7-1 (Carte de commande de I'appareil exterieur) : OFF OO SW1 ON : Mode A faible bruit SW1 OFF: Fonctionnement normal 8.2. Fonction de demande (modification sur site) (Fig. 8-2) En effectuant la modification suivante, it est possible de diminuer la consommation d'energie de 0-100% de la consommation normale. La fonction de demande sera activee lorsqu'on ajoutera un temporisateur disponible dans le commerce ou 1'entree par contact d'un commutateur ON/OFF au connecteur CNDM (option) au panneau de commande de I'appareil exterieur. D Terminer le circuit comme illustre en utilisant I'adaptateur de I'appareil exterieur (PAC-SC36NA-E). (Option) z0 En reglant SW7-1 sur ON sur le panneau de commande de I'appareil exterieur, it est possible de limiter la consommation d'energie (comparee 6 une consommation normale) comme illustre ci-apres. SW7-1 SW2 SW3 Consommation d'energie Fonction de demande ON OFF OFF 100% ON OFF 75% ON ON 50% OFF ON 0% (Arret) OO Etant donn6 que I'appareil s'arrete automatiquement apres 2 6 3 minutes lorsque la collecte du refrigerant est terminee (DEL1 eteinte, DEL2 allumee), veiller A Termer rapidement Is robinet d'arret du gaz. Si la DEL1 est allumee et la DEL2 eteinte at que I'unite exterieure est arr6tee, la collecte du refrigerant ne s'est pas effectuee correctement. Ouvrir completement le robinet d'arret du liquide puis attendre 3 minutes avant de repeter 1'etape 2. • Si la collecte de refrigerant s'est effectuee normalement (DEL1 eteinte, DEL2 allumee), I'appareil restera A I'arr6t jusqu'A la remise sous tension. ® Mettre hors tension (coupe -circuit). • Attention : si le tuyau de rallonge est tres long et contient une grande quantite de refrigerant, it peut titre impossible d'effectuer une purge. Lors de ('operation d'evacuation, s'assurer que la basse pression est proche de 0 MPa Qauge). As Avertissement: Pendant la purge du refrigerant, arreter le compresseur avant de debrancher les tuyaux de refrigerant. Le compresseur peut eclater si de I'air, etc. penetre A ('interieur. 9. Controle du systeme (Fig. 9-1) €: SW 1 - 3 - 6 ON O Appareil exterieur OFF O Appareil interieur 3 4 5 6 0 Teeecommande principale O T616commande secondaire O SW 1 - 3 - 6 ON OO Standard 1:1 (Adresse de refrigerant = 00) OFF OO Jumele simultane (Adresse de refrigerant = 01) 3 4 5 6 O Double simultane (Adresse du refrigerant = 02) OSW1-3-6 ON OFF 3 4 5 6 (E) I (A) I (E) 0 TB 1 _ TB1 __ __A SW1 TB4 TB4 T64 T64� Tableau des OO © z OO© fonctions TB5 0 TB5 <SW1> t ON o00000 © Q t Fig. 9-1 10. Rafraichissement a basse temperature ambiante • Regler I'adresse de refrigerant avec le commutateur DIP de I'appareil exterieur. 0 Cablage depuis la telecommande Ce fil se raccorde a TB5 (bornier de la telecommande) de I'appareil interieur (non polaire). 0 Lors de I'utilisation d'un groupe a systeme de refrigerant different II est possible de contrbler un maximum de 16 systemes de refrigerant comme un groupe unitaire avec la telecommande MA plate. Remarque: II nest pas necessaire d'effectuer de cablage 20 dans les systemes de refri- geration simples Qumele). Fonctionnement selon le reglage du commutateur Fonction ON OFF 1 Degivrage Marche Normal obligatoire Reglag- 2 Historique des Effacer Normal es des erreurs effacee fonctions 3 Reglage des Reglages des adresses des du SW1 4 adresses du appareils exterieurs de 0 s 15 5 systeme de 6 refrigerant Precautions pour le rafraichissement a basse temperature ambiante • Si la temperature exterieure est inferieure ou egale a -5 °C, 23 °F pendant le Fonctionnement en mode de rafraichissement, installez un guidage d'air en option pour empecher qua le vent ne souffle dans I'appareil exterieur. • Installez I'appareil exterieur dans un endroit oO le vent ne soufflera pas sur I'arriere de I'appareil. • Pour eviter d'endommager les pieces, veillez a installer I'appareil, a le mettre sous tension et a 1'entretenir dans un environnement oO la temperature ambiante est superieure ou egale a -17 °C, 0 *F. • Pour proteger le compresseur et les composants electriques, ne desactivez pas le coupe -circuit si I'appareil est installs dans un environnement oO la temperature ambiante est inferieure ou egale a -17 °C, 0 'F. • L'appareil doit We an veille pendant 12 heures minimum avant d'etre mis an fonctionnement afin de rechauffer les composants electriques. 12 Contenido 1. Medidas de Seguridad............................................. 1 2. Lugar en que se instalara.......................................... 3 3. Instalaci6n de la unidad exterior ..................................... 5 4. Instalaci6n de los tubos del refrigerante ............................... 6 5. Tuberia de drenaje............................................... 8 1. Medidas de Seguridad ► Antes de instalar la unidad, asegurese de haber leido el capitulo de "Me- didas de seguridad". ► Antes de conectar el sistema, informe al servicio de suministro o pidale permiso para efectuar la conexi6n. 0 Atenci6n: Describe las precauciones que deben tenerse en cuenta para evitar el riesgo de lesiones o muerte del usuario. 0 Cuidado: Describe las precauciones que deben tenerse en cuenta para evitar danos en la unidad. 0 Atenci6n: • El usuario no debe instalar la unidad. La instalaci6n del aire acondicionado debe correr a cargo del distribuidor o tecnico autorizado. La instalaci6n incorrecta de la unidad puede provocar escapes de agua, descargas electri- cas o incendios. • Para la instalaci6n, siga las instrucciones del Manual de instalaci6n y utili- ce las herramientas y piezas de fontaneria especificamente disenados para utilizar con el refrigerante R410A. El refrigerante R410A en el sistema de HFC puede asimilar una presi6n 1,6 veces superior a la de los refrigerantes convencionales. Si los accesorios de fontaneria que se instalan no estan fa- bricados para el refrigerante R410A, los tubos se pueden quemar y causar danos o lesiones. Ademas, pueden producirse escapes de agua, descargas electricas o incendios. • Al instalar la unidad, utilice las herramientas y el equipo de protecci6n apro- ptados por seguridad. El hecho de no hacerlo puede provocar lesiones. • La unidad debe instalarse segun las instrucciones para reducir posibles danos en caso de terremoto, huracan o vientos fuertes. Si no se instala co- rrectamente, la unidad podria caerse y provocar danos o lesiones. • La unidad debe instalarse firmemente sobre una estructura capaz de sopor- tar su peso. Si la unidad se instala sobre una estructura inestable, podria caerse y provocar danos o lesiones. • Si el equipo de aire acondicionado se instala en una Sala pequena deberan tomarse medidas para prevenir que la concentraci6n de refrigerante exceda los limites de seguridad en caso de fugas. Pregunte a un distribuidor por las medidas adecuadas para evitar que la concentraci6n exceda los limites. Si se produce una fuga de refrigerante que sobrepase los limites de con- centraci6n, la estancia en la sala puede ser peligrosa por falta de oxigeno. • Si se produce una fuga de refrigerante durante el funcionamiento, ventile la sala. Si el refrigerante entra en contacto con una llama, se desprenderan gases nocivos. • Todas las conexiones electricas deberan ser realizadas por un tecnico cua- lificado segun la normativa local y las instrucciones de este manual. Cada unidad debe tener su linea electrica y se deben usar disyuntores y un voltaje correcto. El use de lineas electricas con una capacidad insuficiente o una co- nexi6n electrica incorrecta puede provocar descargas electricas o incendios. • Utilice tubos de cobre fosforoso del tipo C1220 y tubos de aleaci6n de co- bre sin costuras para conectar los tubos del refrigerante.Si los tubos no se conectan correctamente, la unidad no estara bien puesta a tierra y puede provocar descargas electricas. 1.1. Cuestiones previas a la instalaci6n 0 Cuidado: • No utilice la unidad en un ambiente enrarecido. Este aire acondicionado no se puede instalar en areas expuestas a vapor, aceite esencial (incluyendo el aceite para maquinas) o al humo sulf6rico, ni en areas con alto contenido en sal, como playas, o en zonas donde la nieve pueda cubrir la unidad, ya que pueden reducir significativamente su rendimiento y danar las piezas internas. • No instale la unidad donde se puedan verter, producir, circular o acumular gases inflamables. Si se acumula gas inflamable en zonas pr6ximas a la unidad, se podria producir un incendio o una explosion. • La unidad exterior produce condensaci6n cuando funciona como calefac- ci6n. Asegurese de habilitar drenaje alrededor de la unidad exterior si la condensaci6n puede provocar danos. 1.2. Cuestiones previas a la instalaci6n (reubicaci6n) 0 Cuidado: • Extreme las precauciones al transportar o instalar las unidades. Se nece- sitan dos o mas personas para Ilevar la unidad porque pesa 20 kg, 44 Ibs o mas. No la sujete por las bandas de embalaje. Utilice guantes protectores para sacar la unidad de la caja y para moverla, ya que se podria lastimar las manos con las aletas o con los bordes de alguna de las piezas. • Guarde los embalajes en un lugar seguro. Los materiales de embalaje, como clavos y otras piezas de metal o de madera pueden producir pincha- zos y otras lesiones. 6. Trabajo electrico................................................. 8 7. Prueba de funcionamiento......................................... 10 8. Funciones especiales............................................ 11 9. Sistema de control (Fig. 9-1)....................................... 12 10. Refrigeraci6n con temperatura Baja ................................ 12 Despues de terminar la instalaci6n, explique las "Medidas de Seguridad", funciona- miento y mantenimiento de la unidad al cliente segun el Manual de instrucciones y realice una prueba para asegurarse de que funciona correctamente. Entregue una copia del Manual de instalaci6n y del Manual de instrucciones al usuario. Estos manuales deben pasar a usuarios pootecores del equipo. U: Indica una pieza que debe estar conectada a tierra. AS Atenci6n: Lea atentamente las etiquetas adheridas a la unidad principal. • Utilice solo cables especificados para el cableado. Las conexiones del cableado se deben realizar con seguridad sin que se ejerza tension en las conexiones de los terminales. Asimismo, no empalme nunca los cables al realizar el cableado (a menos que se indique to contrario en este documen- to). El hecho de no seguir estas instrucciones puede provocar un sobreca- lentamiento o un incendio. • Cuando instale, mueva o revise el equipo de aire acondicionado, utilice solo el refrigerante indicado (R410A) para cargar los tubos del refrigerante. No to mezcle con otro tipo de refrigerante y vacie completamente de aire los tubos. Si el afire se mezcla con el refrigerante, podria producir una tension anor- malmente alta en el tubo del refrigerante y ocasionar una explosion u otros peligros. Usar un refrigerante distinto al indicado para el sistema provocara un fallo mecanico, un funcionamiento defectuoso del sistema o la averia de la uni- dad. En el peor de los cavos, podria suponer un grave impedimento para garantizar la seguridad del producto. • La cubierta del bloque de terminales de la unidad exterior tiene que estar bien sujeta. Si la cubierta no se instala correctamente y el polvo y la hume- dad entran en la unidad, se pueden producir una descarga electrica o un incendio. • Utilice solo accesorios autorizados por Mitsubishi Electric y pida a su dis- tribuidor o a un tecnico autorizado que se los instate. Si los accesorios no se instalan correctamente, pueden producirse escapes de agua, descargas electricas o incendios. • No modifique la unidad. Podria producirse un incendio, descargas elec- tricas, fugas de agua o lesiones. • El usuario nunca debe intentar reparar la unidad o moverla de sitio. Si la unidad no se instala correctamente, pueden producirse escapes de agua, descargas electricas o incendios. Si debe reparar o mover el equipo de aire acondicionado, acuda a su distribuidor o tecnico autorizado. • Tras haber realizado la instalaci6n, compruebe si hay fugas de refrigerante. Si en caso de fuga el refrigerante entra en contacto con las llamas de un ca- lentador o de un equipo de cocina portatil, se desprenderan gases nocivos. • Al abrir o cerrar la valvula por debajo de las temperaturas de congelaci6n, el refrigerante puede salir a chorros desde el espacio entre el vastago de la valvula y el cuerpo de la valvula y resultar en lesiones. • Si instala la unidad en un hospital o en un centro de comunicaciones, recuerde que la unidad produce ruidos a interferencias electr6nicas. Los conmutadores, aparatos domesticos, equipos medicos de alta frecuencia y las comunicaciones de radio pueden provocar un mal funcionamiento o la averia del equipo de aire acondicionado. El equipo de aire acondiciona- do tambien puede afectar los equipos medicos a interrumpir los cuidados medicos, asi como los equipos de comunicaci6n y danar la calidad de la pantalla. • La base y los aditamentos de fijaci6n de la unidad exterior deben com- probarse peri6dicamente para detectar posibles roturas, tuercas flojas o cualquier otro dano que hayan podido sufrtr. Si no se solucionan esos pro- blemas, la unidad podria caerse y causar danos o lesiones. • No limpie con agua el equipo de aire acondicionado. Puede sufrtr una des- carga electrica. • Apriete las tuercas de abocardado a los niveles recomendados mediante una Have dinamometrica. Si las aprieta demasiado, se pueden romper al cabo de un tiempo y producirse fugas de refrigerante. 1. Medidas de Seguridad 1.3. Antes de la instalacift electrica Zt Cuidado: • Asegurese de instalar disyuntores. Si no se instalan, se podrian producir descargas electricas. • Use cables estandar de suficiente capacidad para las lineas electricas. Si no to hate asi, se podria producir un cortocircuito, un sobrecalentamiento o un incendio. • Cuando instale las lineas electricas, los cables no deben tener corriente. Si las conexiones se aflojan, los cables se podrian cruzar o romper y se po- dria producir un incendio o un sobrecalentamiento. 1.4. Antes de realizar las pruebas de funcionamiento As Cuidado: • Conecte la corriente al menos 12 horas antes de que empiece a funcionar el equipo. Si se acciona inmediatamente despues de haberlo conectado a la corriente, pueden producirse danos graves en las piezas internas. Mantenga la unidad conectada a la corriente durante la temporada de funcionamiento. • Antes de que comience a funcionar el equipo, compruebe que todos los paneles y protectores estan instalados correctamente. Las piezas girato- rias, calientes o de alto voltaje pueden provocar lesiones. • No toque ningun interruptor con las manos mojadas. Puede sufrir una des- carga electrica. 1.5. Utilizaci6n del refrigerante R410A para equipos de aire acondicionado Zt Cuidado: • Utilice tubos de cobre fosforoso del tipo C1220 y tubos de aleaci6n de co- bre sin costuras para conectar los tubos del refrigerante. Asegurese de que el interior de las tuberias esta limpio y que no contienen ningun contami- nante danino como compuestos sulfuricos, oxidantes, impurezas o polvo. Utilice tuberias con el grosor especificado. (Consulte la pagina 27) Tenga en cuenta to siguiente si reutiliza tuberias que contenian refrigerante R22. Sustituya las tuercas de abocardado existentes y vuelva a abocardar las secciones abocardadas. No use tuberias de poco grosor. (Consulte la pagina 27) • Almacene las tuberias que se deban instalar en el interior y mantenga los orificios tapados hasta el momento de instalarlas. (Deje las juntas articula- das y otras piezas en sus embalajes.) Si el polvo, los restos o la humedad entran en las tuberias de refrigeration, se puede producir el deterioro del aceite o una averia en el aparato. • Utilice aceite de ester, de titer o alquilobenceno (en pequenas cantidades) para recubrir las secciones abocardadas. Si se mezcla aceite mineral con • Asegurese de instalar una toma de tierra. No conecte el cable de tierra a las tomas de tierra de las tuberias de gas o de agua, de postes de iluminaci6n o de telefono. Si la unidad no esta bien conectada a la linea de tierra, se pu- ede producir una descarga electrica. • Utilice disyuntores (interruptor de falta de tierra, interruptor aislante (+fus- ible B) a interruptores en caja moldeada) con la potencia especificada. Si la potencia del interruptor es mayor que la especificada, puede ocurrir un incendio o una averia. • No toque la tuberia del refrigerante sin guantes mientras durante el funcio- namiento. La tuberia del refrigerante esta caliente o frio segun las condicio- nes de la corriente de refrigerante. Si toca la tuberia puede sufrir quemadu- ras por el calor o por el frio. • Una vez deje de funcionar el aparato, espere cinco minutos antes de apagar el interruptor principal. De to contrario, se puede producir un goteo de agua o una averia. aceite de refrigeration se puede deteriorar el aceite. • No utilice otro refrigerante que no sea R410A. Si utiliza otro refrigerante, el cloro provocara el deterioro del aceite. • Utilice las siguientes herramientas especialmente disenadas para usar con el refrigerante R410A. Se necesitan las siguientes herramientas para utilizar el refrigerante R410A. Si tiene alguna duda, consulte con su distribuidor mas cercano. Herramientas (para R410A) Man6metro Abocardador Manguera de carga Ajustador del tamano Detector de fugas de gas Adaptador de la bomba de vacio Llave dinamometrica Bascula electr6nica de carga del refrigerante • Asegurese de utilizar las herramientas adecuadas. Si el polvo, los restos o la humedad entran en las tuberias de refrigeracion, se puede producir el deterioro del aceite de refrigeracion. • No utilice un cilindro de carga. Si utiliza un cilindro de carga, variara la com- posici6n del refrigerante y no sera tan eficaz. 2 2. Lugar en que se instalara Fig. 2-1 ■ TRUZA0121 KA70N* TRUZA0181 KA70N* TRUZA0121 KA70B* TRUZA0181 KA70B* TRUYA0121 KA70N* TRUYA0181KA70N* TRUYA0121 KA70B* TRUYA0181KA70B* "V2 11 (inch) ■ TRUZA0361 KA70N* TRUZA0421 KA70N* TRUZA0361 KA70B* TRUZA0421 KA70B* TRUYA0361 KA70N* TRUYA0421 KA70N* TRUYA0361 KA70B* TRUYA0421 KA70B* ■ TRUZA0241 HA70N* TRUZA0301HA70N* TRUZA0241 HA70B* TRUZA0301HA70B* TRUYA0241 HA70N* TRUYA0301 HA70N* TRUYA0241 HA70B* TRUYA0301 HA70B* 6, Fig. 2-2 . \N'b (inch) YV icn) 2.1. Tuberia de refrigerante (Fig. 2-1) ► Compruebe que la diferencia de altura entre las unidades interior y exteri- or, la longitud del tubo de refrigerante y la cantidad de codos en la tuberia se encuentren dentro de los limites que se indican a continuaci6n. Modelos OO Longitud de las © Diferencia © Numero de tuberias (un sentido) de altura codos (un sentido) TRUZA0121KA70N* TRUZA0181 KA70N* TRUZA0121KA70B* Max. 30 m, 100 ft Max. 30 m,100 ft Mex. 15 TRUZA0181KA70B* TRUZA0241 HA70N* TRUZA0301HA70N* TRUZA0241 HA70B* TRUZA0301 HA7013* Max. 50 m, 165 ft Max. 30 m,100 ft Max. 15 TRUZA0361KA70N* TRUZA0421 KA70N* TRUZA0361KA70B* TRUZA0421 KA70B* TRUYA0121KA70N* TRUYA0181 KA70N* Max. 50 m, 165 ft Max. 30 m,100 ft Max. 15 TRUYA0121KA70B* TRUYA0181KA70B* TRUYA0241 HA70N* TRUYA0301 HA70N* TRUYA0241 HA70B* TRUYA0301 HA70B* Max. 69 m, 225 ft Max. 30 m,100 ft Max. 15 TRUYA0361 KA70N* TRUYA0421 KA70N* TRUYA0361KA706* TRUYA0421 KA70B* • Las limitaciones de diferencia de altura son obligatorias sin importar que unidad, la interior o la exterior, esta colocada mas alta. OO Unidad interior OO Unidad exterior 2.2. Elecci6n del lugar de instalaci6n de la unidad exterior • No instale la unidad en lugares expuestos directamente al sol o a otras Fuentes de calor. • Escoja un lugar donde el ruido de la unidad no moleste a los vecinos. • Escoja un lugar donde sea facil instalar el cableado y las tuberias y acceder a la fuente de alimentaci6n y a la unidad exterior. • No instale la unidad donde se puedan verter, producir, circular o acumular gases inflamables. • Durante el funcionamiento, la unidad puede perder agua. • Escoja un lugar nivelado que pueda soportar el peso y la vibracidn de la unidad. • No instale la unidad en lugares donde la pueda cubrir la nieve. En zonas propen- sas a las nevadas intensas, se deben tomar medidas de precauci6n, como por ejemplo, situar la unidad elevada o instalar una proteccion en la entrada de aire para evitar que la nieve la obstruya o fluya directamente contra esta. Esto reduce la corriente de aire a impide que la unidad funcione correctamente. • No instale la unidad en lugares expuestos a aceite, vapor o humo sulfurico. • Utilice las asas de transporte de la unidad exterior parar transportarla. Si transporta la unidad tomandola por la parte inferior se podria lesionar las manos o los dedos. 2.3. Dimensiones exteriores (Unidad exterior) (Fig. 2-2) 3 2. Lugar en que se instalara Fig. 2-5 2.4. Ventilacion y espacio de servicio 2.4.1. Instalacion en lugares expuestos al viento Cuando instale una unidad en el tejado o an otros lugares desprotegidos del viento, la salida de aire de la unidad no debe quedar expuesta directamente al viento fuerte. Si el viento fuerte entra an la salida de aire puede impedir la circulaci6n normal del aire y causar un mal funcionamiento. A continuaci6n se muestran tres ejemplos de precauciones a tomar contra el viento fuerte. 1) Coloque la salida de aire de frente a la pared mas proxima a una distancia de unos 500 mm, 19-11/16 inch de ella. (Fig. 2-3) OO Si la unidad esta situada en un lugar expuesto a vientos fuertes como huracanes que puedan entrar an la salida de aire coloque una guia para la salida de aire o una guia de aire. (Fig. 2-4) (�) Guia para la salida de aire 0 Coloque la unidad de manera que la salida de aire sople an direccion perpen- dicular a la direccidn estacional del viento, si la conoce. (Fig. 2-5) OO Direccidn del viento 2.4.2. Cuando se instala una unidad exterior simple (Consulte la pa- gina anterior) Las dimensiones minimas son las siguientes, excepto para max. (dimensiones maximas), las cuales tambien estan indicadas. Las cifras que aparecen an parentesis son para los modelos TRU*A0361 KA70**, TRU*A0421 KA70**. Consulte los n6meros correspond ientes para cada caso. i0 Obstaculos solo en la parte trasera (Fig. 2-6) 0 Obstaculos solo an la parte trasera y superior (Fig. 2-7) OO Obstaculos solo en la parte trasera y los laterales (Fig. 2-8) * 350 mm, 13-25/32 inch para TRU*A0121 KA70**, TRU*A0181 KA70** a0 Obstaculos solo an la parte delantera (Fig. 2-9) * Si utiliza una guia para salida de aire opcional, el espacio libre para los modelos TRU*A0421 KA70** debe ser de 500 mm, 19-11/16 inch o mas. © Obstaculos solo an la parte delantera y trasera (Fig. 2-10) * Si utiliza una guia para salida de aire opcional, el espacio libre para los modelos TRU*A0421 KA70** debe ser de 500 mm, 19-11/16 inch o mas. © Obstaculos solo an la parte trasera, los laterales y superior (Fig. 2-11) 350 mm, 13-25/32 inch para TRU*A0121 KA70**, TRU*A0181 KA70** • No utilice las guias para salida de aire opcionales para corriente de aire hacia arriba. 2.4.3. Cuando instale varias unidades exteriores (Consulte la pagina anterior) Deje 350 mm, 13-25/32 inch para TRU*A0121 KA70**, TRU*A0181 KA70** y 10 mm, 13/32 inch para TRU*A0241 HA70**, TRU*A0301 HA70**, TRU*A0361 KA70**, TRU*A0421KA70** de holgura o mas entre las unidades. t0 Obstaculos solo en la parte trasera (Fig. 2-12) 0 Obstaculos solo an la parte trasera y superior (Fig. 2-13) No se deben instalar mas de tres unidades correlativas. Ademas, se debe dejar el espacio indicado. No utilice las guias para salida de aire opcionales para corriente de aire hacia arriba. ® Obstaculos solo an la parte delantera (Fig. 2-14) * Si utiliza una guia para salida de aire opcional, el espacio libre para los modelos TRU*A0361 KA70**, TRU*A0421 KA70** debe ser de 1000 mm, 39-3/8 inch o mas. a0 Obstaculos solo an la parte delantera y trasera (Fig. 2-15) * Si utiliza una guia para salida de aire opcional, el espacio libre para los modelos TRU*A0361 KA70**, TRU*A0421 KA70** debe ser de 1000 mm, 39-3/8 inch o mas. © Disposicion en paralelo de unidades simples (Fig. 2-16) Si utiliza un guia para salida de aire opcional instalada para que el aire salga hacia arriba, el espacio libre debe ser de 500 (1000) mm, 19-11/16 (39-3/8) inch o mas. © Disposicion en paralelo de varias unidades (Fig. 2-17) * Si utiliza un guia para salida de aire opcional instalada para que el afire salga hacia arriba, el espacio libre debe ser de 1000 (1500) mm, 39-3/8 (59-1/16) inch o mas. 07 Disposicion de unidad apilada (Fig. 2-18) • Se pueden apilar hasta dos unidades de altura. No se deben instalar mas de dos unidades correlativas. Ademas, se debe dejar el espacio indicado. 2 3. Instalacion de la unidad exterior A 0 �I-77�7- O I - N O D N M M a 0 0 0 0 0 0 Perno M10 (3/8") » » » ©Base 2 © Lo mas largo posible. Oo Salida de aire N m © Profondement enfonce N _ N X X dans la terre •m •m ■ TRU*A0121 KA70** TRU*A0181 KA70** 19-11/16 Min. 25-19/3219-11/16 (Inch) N Min.13-25/32 m 6-3/32 6-3/32 31-7/8 ■ TRU*A0241 HA70** TRU*A0301 HA70** Min.14.25/32 (inch) 23-5/8 23-5/8 M Min. 1 0 6-7/8 6-7/8 37-13/32 ■ TRU*A0361 KA70** TRU*A0421 KA70** 23-5/8 Min. 18-7/91. 23-5/8 .I (inch) D M m Min.1 8-7/8 8-7/8 41-11/32 Fig. 3-1 • Cerci6rese de instalar la unidad en una superficie robusta y nivelada para evitar los ruidos de traqueteo durante la operaci6n. (Fig. 3-1) <Especificaciones de la cimentacion> Perno de cimentacion M10 (3/8") Grosor del hormig6n 120 mm, 4-23/32 inch Longitud del perno 70 mm, 2-3/4 inch Capacidad de soporte de peso 320 kg, 264 Ibs • Cerci6rese de que la longitud del perno de cimentacion este dentro de 30 mm, 1-3/16 inch de la superficie inferior de la base. • Asegure firmemente la base de la unidad con cuatro pernos de cimentacion M10 en lugares robustos. Instalaci6n de la unidad exterior • No obstruya la salida de aire. Si se obstruye la salida de aire, se puede dificultar el funcionamiento del aparato y puede causar una averia. • Ademas de la base de la unidad, utilice los orificios de instalaci6n situados an la parte trasera de la unidad para anadirle cables u otros elementos necesarios para instalar la unidad. Utilice tirafondos (o5 X 15 mm, o13/16 X 19/32 inch o me - nos) para instalar el equipo. Zt Atenci6n: • La unidad debe instalarse firmemente sobre una estructura capaz de sopor- tar su peso. Si la unidad se instala sobre una estructura inestable, podria caerse y provocar dafios o lesiones. • La unidad debe instalarse segun las instrucciones para reducir posibles danos an caso de terremoto, huracan o vientos fuertes. Si no se instala cor- rectamente, la unidad podria caerse y provocar danos o lesiones. 5 4, Instalacion de los tubos del refrigerante O 0) Fig. 4-1 45i 2° Ln o Q rn ® Dimensiones del torte abocinado OO Torsion de apriete de la tuerca abocardada 4.1. Precauciones a tomar en equipos que utilicen el refrigerante R410A OO Tubo de liquido • Consulte la pagina 25 para las precauciones a tomar en equipos que utili- OO Tubo de gas cen el refrigerante R410A y que no se encuentren a continuacion. © Aislamiento termico Utilice aceite de ester, de titer o alquilobenceno (en pequenas cantidades) OD Forrado con cinta para recubrir las secciones abocardadas. • Utilice tubos de cobre fosforoso del tipo C1220 y tubos de aleacfdn de cobre sin costuras para conectar los tubos del refrigerante. Utilice tuberias para refrigerante del grosor especificado en la tabla siguiente. Asegurese de que el interior de las tuberias esta limpio y que no contienen ningun contami- nante nocivo Como compuestos sulfuricos, oxidantes, restos o polvo. O (inch) -EOD�- D Fig. 4-2 TRU*A0241 HA70** TRU*A0301 HA70** TRU*A0121 KA70** TRU*A0361 KA70** TRU*A0181KA70** TRU*A0421KA70** Tubo de Tamano de la tuberfa o12,7, 1/2" o15,88, 5/8" Ifquido (mm, inch) Tubo de Tamano de la tuberia o6,35, 1/4" o9,52, 3/8" gas (mm, inch) (A) (Fig. 4-1) Tubo de cobre O.D. Dimensiones de abocinado dimensiones oA (mm) (inch) (mm) (inch) o6,35 1/4" 8,7 - 9,1 11/32 - 23/64 o9,52 3/8" 12,8 - 13,2 1/2 - 33/64 o12,7 1/2" 16,2 - 16,6 41/64 - 21132 o15,88 5/8" 19,3 - 19,7 49/64 - 25132 © (Fig. 4-1) Tubo de cobre O.D. Tuerca de abocardado O.D. Torsion de apriete (mm) (inch) (mm) (inch) (N•m) (ft•lbs) o6,35 1/4" 17 43/64 14 - 18 10 - 13 o9,52 3/8" 22 7/8 34 - 42 25 - 30 o12,7 1/2" 26 1 - 3/64 49 - 61 35 - 44 o15,88 5/8" 29 1 - 9/64 68 - 82 49 - 59 ■ TRU*A0121 KA70** TRU*A0181 KA70** ® Cubierta de la tuberfa frontal OO Cubierta de la tuberfa © Valvula de parade Oe Panel de servicio ■ TRU*A0241HA70**, TRU*AO301HA70** TRU*A0361KA70**, TRU*A0421KA70** III QE Radio del codo: 100 mm, 3-15/16 inch-150 mm, 5-27/32 inch Fig. 4-3 AS Atencion: Cuando instale, mueva o revise el equipo de aire acondicionado, utilice solo el refrigerante indicado (R410A) para cargar los tubos del refrigerante. No Io mezcle con otro tipo de refrigerante y vacie completamente de afire los tubos. Si el aire se mezcla con el refrigerante, podria producir una tension anormal- mente alta en el tubo del refrigerante y ocasionar una explosion u otros peligros. Usar un refrigerante distinto al indicado para el sistema provocarA un fallo mecanico, un funcionamiento defectuoso del sistema o la averia de la unidad. En el peor de los casos, podria suponer un grave impedimento para garantizar la seguridad del producto. TRU*A0121 KA70** TRU*A0241 HA70**, TRU*A0301 HA70** TRU*A0181 KA70** TRU*A0361 KA70**, TRU*A0421 KA70** Tubo de o6,35 mm, 1/4inch o9,52 mm, 3/8 inch Ifquido grosor 0,8 mm, 1/32 inch grosor 0,8 mm, 1/32 inch Tubo de o12,7 mm, 1/2 inch o15,88 mm, 5/8 inch gas grosor 0,8 mm, 1/32 inch grosor 1,0 mm, 3/64 inch • No utilice tubos con un grosor menor del especificado a continuacion. 4.2. Tubos de conexion (Fig. 4-1) (Fig. 4-2) Si se utilizan tubos de cobre convencionales, aisle los tubos de gas y liquido separadamente con materiales aislantes (resistants al calor hasta 100 *C, 212 T o mas, espesor de 12 mm 1/2 inch o mas). (Fig. 4-1) • Las piezas interiores del tubo de drenaje tienen que estar envueltas en materia- les aislantes de espuma de polietileno (gravedad especffica de 0,03 y espesor de 9 mm, 23/64 inch o mas). [Fig. 4-2] • Aplique una cape delgada de aceite refrigerante a la superficie tubo y de la junta de asiento antes de apretar la tuerca de abocardado. • Utilice dos (laves de apriete para apretar las conexiones de los tubos. • Utilice un detector de fugas o agua jabonosa para comprobar posibles fugas de gas una vez realizadas las conexiones. • Aplique aceite refrigerante para maquinas en toda la superficie abocinada. • Utilice las tuercas abocardadas para el siguiente tmano de tuberfa. Oe Notes: 1. La tuerca abocardada esta acoplada a su tuberfa. 2. La tuerca abocardada est6 en el accesorio de Is unidad exterior. No use la tuerca abocardada adjunta. Si se usa, podria ocurrir una fuga de gas o incluso la extraccidn de una tuberfa. • Cuando doble los tubos, tenga cuidado de no romperlos. Un radio de curvatura de 100 mm, 3-15/16 inch a 150 mm, 5-27/32 inch es suficiente. • Asegurese de que las tuberfas no tocan el compresor. Podrfa producir ruidos o vibraciones extranas. 0) Las tuberias se deben conectar empezando por la unidad interior. Las tuercas abocardadas se deben apretar con una Have dinamometrica. z0 Caliente el tubo de Ifquido y el tubo de gas y aplique una fina caps de aceite de refrigeration (aplicado directamente). AS Atencion: Al instalar la unidad, conecte firmemente las tuberias de refrigerante antes de poner en marcha el compresor. 4.3. Tubos de refrigerante (Fig. 4-3) ■ Para TRU*A0121 KA70**, TRU*A0181 KA70** Elimine el panel de servicio Oe (2 tornillos). ■ Para TRU*A0241 HA70**, TRU*A0301 HA70**, TRU*A0361 KA70**, TRU*A0421 KA70** Quite el panel de servicio O (3 tornillos) y la cubierta de la tuberfa frontal O (2 tornillos) y cubierta de la tuberfa posterior © (2 tornillos: TRU*A0241HA70**, TRU*A0301 HA70**) (4 vis: TRU*A0361 KA70**, TRU*A0421 KA70**). T Realice las conexiones de los tubos de refrigerante de la unidad interior/exterior con la valvula de parada de la unidad exterior completamente cerrada. O Purgue el aire del sistema por suction en la unidad interior y tubos de conexion. O Tras conectar las tuberias de refrigerante con la unidad interior, compruebe que no haya fugas de gas. (Consulte apartado 4.4. Prueba de fuga de gas del tubo de refrigerante.) 9) Aspire las Ifneas de refrigerante a traves del punto de reparaciones de la valvula de parada de Ifquido y a continuacion, abra completamente las valvulas de para- da (tanto las de Ifquido como las de gas). Este operation Is permitirA conectar completamente las Ifneas refrigerantes de las unidades interiores y exteriores. • Si deja cerradas las valvulas de parada y pone en marcha la unidad, el com- presor y la valvula de control sufriran danos. • Utilice un detector de fugas o jabdn y agua para detectar las fugas de gas en las juntas de las conexiones de los tubos de la unidad exterior. • No utilice el refrigerante desde la unidad para purgar el aire de las Ifneas de refrigerante. • Tras haber realizado los trabajos en las valvulas, ajuste las tuercas de las val- vulas a la presion adecuada: 20 a 25 N•m, 14 a 18 ft•lbs (200 a 250 kgf•cm). Si no sustituye o aprieta bien las tuercas puede provocar una fuga de refrig- erante. Ademas, evite danar el interior de las valvulas ya que funcionan como selladoras para evitar fugas de refrigerante. OO Utilice un sellador para proteger las conexiones de los tubos y los extremos del material aislante no se impregnen de agua. 4. Instalaci6n de los tubos del refrigerante #(OBB) 0 Valvula de retenci6n <Lado de Ifquido> GO Valvula de retenci6n <Lado de gas> © Puerto de servicio Go Secci6n Abierto/Cerrado Fig. x C x ©/ Wes/ S Tubo local 0 Sellado, igual para lado de gas © Cubierta del tubo ® No utilice una Have aquf. Podria producirse una perdida de refrigerante. 0 Utilice dos (laves aquf. 4-4 B A C � C96 Notas: 1. La figura de la izquierda no as mas que un ejemplo. La forma de la valvula de parada, la posici6n del Puerto de servicio, etc. pueden varier an funci6n del modelo. 2. Gire unicamente la secci6n & (No siga apretando las secciones 0 y S juntas.) © Manguera de carga 0 Puerto de servicio Fig. 4-6 4.4. Prueba de fuga de gas del tubo de refrigerante (1) Conecte las herramientas para pruebas. Asegurese de que las valvulas de parada OA GO estan cerradas y no las abra. • Made presi6n a las lineas de refrigerante a traves del punto © pare repara- ciones de valvula de parada de IfquidoGe. (2) No anada presi6n al nivel especificado de golpe; hagalo poco a poco. iG Presurice a 05 MPa (5 kgf/cm'G), espere cinco minutos y compruebe que la presi6n no se he reducido. GO Presurice a 15 MPa (15 kgf/cm'G), espere cinco minutos y compruebe que la presi6n no se he reducido. GO Presurice a 4,15 MPa (41,5 kgf/cmzG) y tome la temperatura ambiental y la presi6n del refrigerante. (3) Si la presi6n especificada se mantiene estable durante un dla y no se reduce, las tuberfas han pasado la prueba y no existe riesgo de fugas. • Si la temperatura ambiental cambia 1 *C, la presi6n variara unos 0,03 MPa (0,3 kgf/cm2G). Haga las correcciones necesarias. (4) Si la presi6n se reduce en los pasos (2) o (3), hay una fuga de gas. Busque el punto de fuga del gas. 4.5. Metodo de abertura de la valvula de retenci6n (Fig. 4-5) 0) Abra la tapa y gire la varilla de valvula hacia la izquierda haste su tope, utili- zando una Have hexagonal de 4 mm, 5/32 inch. Deje de girar cuando Ilega al tope. (o6,35, 1/4 inch: Aproximadamente 4,5 revoluciones) (o9,52, 3/8 inch: Aproximadamente 10 revoluciones) OO Cerci6rese de que la valvula de parade este completamente abierta, empuje la manivela y enrosque la tape en su posici6n original. O Cuerpo de la valvula GO Secci6n de Have doble © Lado de la unidad (No utilice una Have en ninguna otra secci6n.De © Tapa hacerlo podrfa provocar fugas de refrigerante). ® Lado del tubo local (D Secci6n de sellado (Selle el extremo del mate- © Cubierta del tubo rial termoaislante en la seccion de conexi6n del GO Puerto de servicio tubo con cualquier material sellante disponible, © Vastago de la valvula de modo que el agua no se filtre a traves del material termoaislante). Las tuberfas de refrigerante estan envueltas con una protecci6n para TRU*A0241 HA70**, TRU*A0301 HA70**, TRU*A0361 KA70**, TRU*A0421 KA70** • Los tubos se pueden envolver para su protecci6n hasta un diametro de o90 mm, 3-35/64 inch antes de conectar los tubos. Corte la tapa del tubo siguiendo la gula y envuelva los tubos. Hueco de entrada de la tuberla para TRU*A0241 HA70**, TRU*A0301 HA70**, TRU*A0361KA70**, TRU*A0421KA70** - Utilice masilla de minio o un sellador para seller el extremo del tuvo alrededor del tubo para que no queden espacios vacfos. (Si no se tapan los vaclos, se puede producir ruido o puede entrar agua o polvo y la unidad se podrfa averiar.) Precauciones al utilizar la valvula de carga (Fig. 4-6) No aoriete demasiado el ouerto de servicio cuando to instale. de to contrario. el nucleo de la valvula oodrfa deformarse v auedar suelto. orovocando fuaas de aas. Tras situar la secci6n © en la direcci6n deseada, gire unicamente la secci6n GA y aprietela. No siga apretando las secciones GO y GO juntas tras apretar la secci6n OA . As Atenci6n: Al abrir o cerrar la valvula por debajo de las temperaturas de congelaci6n, el refrigerante puede salir a chorros desde el espacio entre el vastago de la valvula y el cuerpo de la valvula y resultar en lesiones. 7 4. Instalacion de los tubos del refrigerante 4.6. Anadido de refrigerante • No es necesario realizar una carga adicional si la longitud de la tuberia no supera los 20 m (70 ft) para TRU*A0121 KA70**, TRU*A0181 KA70**, TRU*A0241 HA70**, TRU*A0301 HA70**, o los 30 m (100 ft) para TRU*A0361 KA70**, TRU*A0421KA70**. • Si la longitud de la tuberia es superior a la especificada, cargue la unidad con refrigerante R410A adicional de acuerdo con las longitudes de tuberia permitidas mostradas en la tabla siguiente. Notas: 1. Con la unidad parada, carguela con el refrigerante adicional a traves de la valvula de parada de liquido despues de haber aspirado los tubos y la unidad interior. Si la unidad esta en marcha, anada refrigerante a la valvula de reten- tion de gas con un cargador seguro. No anada refrigerante liquido directa- mente a la valvula de retencion. 2. Despuas de haber cargado la unidad con refrigerante, apunte la cantidad de refrigerante anadida en la etiqueta de mantenimiento (adjunta a la unidad). Para mas informaci6n, consulte la seccion "1.5. Utilizacion del refrigerante R410A para equipos de aire acondicionado°. • Tenga cuidado cuando instale varias unidades. Si conecta los tubos a una uni- dad interior incorrecta puede provocar una presion elevada anormal y ocasionar graves problemas al funcionamiento. Longitud Dife- Cantidad de carga de refrigerante adicional (kg/oz) 20 m 24 m 27 m 30 m 34 m 37 m 40 m 43 m 46 m 49 m 50 m 52 m 55 m 58 m 61 m 64 m 67 m 69 m Modelo maxima de la rencia maxima tuberia de altura 70 ft 80 ft 90 ft 100 ft 110 ft 120 ft 130 ft 140 ft 150 ft 160 ft 165 ft 170 ft 180 ft 190 ft 200 ft 210 ft 220 ft 225 ft TRUZA0121KA70** 30 m, 30 m, 0,06 kg 0,11 kg 0,17 kg TRUZA0181 KA70** 100 ft 100 ft 0 2 oz 4 oz 6 oz TRUZA0241 HA70** 50 m, 30 m, 0,20 kg 0,40 kg 0,60 kg 0,79 kg 0,99 kg 1,19 kg 1,39 kg 1,59 kg 1,79 kg 1,89 kg TRUZA0301 HA70** 165 ft 100 ft 0 7 oz 14 oz 21 oz 28 oz 35 oz 42 oz 49 oz 56 oz 63 oz 67 oz TRUZA0361 KA70** 50 m, 30 m, 0,20 kg 0,40 kg 0,26 kg 0,79 kg 0,99 kg 1,19 kg 1,29 kg TRUZA0421 KA70** 165 ft 100 ft 0 0 0 0 7 oz 14 oz 21 oz 28 oz 35 oz 42 oz 46 oz TRUYA0121 KA70** 50 m, 30 m, 0,03 kg 0,06 kg 0,09 kg 0,11 kg 0,14 kg 0,17 kg 0,20 kg 0,23 kg 0,26 kg 0,27 kg TRUYA0181 KA70** 165 ft 100 ft 0 1 oz 2 oz 3 oz 4 oz 5 oz 6 oz 7 oz 8 oz 9 oz 10 oz TRUYA0241 HA70** 69 m, 30 m, 0,09 kg 0,17 kg 0,26 kg 0,34 kg 0,43 kg 0,51 kg 0,60 kg 0,68 kg 0,77 kg 0,81 kg 0,85 kg 0,94 kg 1,02 kg 1,11 kg 1,19 kg 1,28 kg 1,32 kg TRUYA0301 HA70** 225 ft 100 ft 0 3 oz 6 oz 9 oz 12 oz 15 oz 18 oz 21 oz 24 oz 27 oz 29 oz 30 oz 33 oz 36 oz 39 oz 42 oz 45 oz 47 oz TRUYA0361 KA70** 69 m, 30 m, 0,09 kg 0,17 kg 0,26 kg 0,34 kg 0,43 kg 0,51 kg 0,55 kg 0,60 kg 0,68 kg 0,77 kg 0,85 kg 0,94 kg 1,02 kg 1,06 kg TRUYA0421 KA70** 225 ft 100 ft 0 0 0 0 3 oz 6 oz 9 oz 12 oz 15 oz 18 oz 20 oz 21 oz 24 oz 27 oz 30 oz 33 oz 36 oz 38 oz 5. Tuberia de drenaje Conexion de la tuberia de drenaje con la unidad exterior Cuando sea necesario drenar la tuberia, use la toma de drenaje o la bater(a de drenaje (opcional). TRU*A0121 KA70** TRU*A0181 KA70** TRU*A0241 HA70** TRU*A0301 HA70** TRU*A0361 KA70** TRU*A0421 KA70** Toma de drenaje PAC-SJ08DS-E PAC-SG61 DS-E Bater(a de drenaje PAC-SG63DP-E PAC-SG64DP-E PAC-SH97DP-E 6. Trabajo electrico 6.1. Unidad exterior (Fig. 6-1, Fig. 6-2) i0 Extraiga el panel de servicio. z0 Tienda los cables de acuerdo con la Fig. 6-1 y Fig. 6-2. Para la Alimentacion Para la • Alimentaci6n D © 0 'O © 'O Unidad interior O Unidad exterior © Controlador remoto OO Interruptor/fusible principal (Diferencial) OO Conexidn a tierra ■ TRU*A0121 KA70** TRU*A0181 KA70** B A F L1 L2 G ® S1 82 S3 (ED)0 © �tJ ■ TRU*A0241 HA70**, TRU*A0301 HA70** TRU*A0361 KA70**, TRU*A0421 KA70** Fig. 6-1 ® Tierra del terminal O Bloque de terminates © Grapa O Panel de servicio (E) Enrute los cables de modo qua no entren en contacto con el centro del panel de servicio o la valvula de gas. Fig. 6-2 ■ TRU*A0121 KA70** BANCO DE TERMINALES TRU*A01 ■ TRU*A0241 HA70** TRU*A0301 HA70** TR11*00361 KA70** TRU*A0421KA7 PLACA DEL CONDUCTO: accesorio BLES PANEL DE SERVICIO 6. Trabajo electrico 6.2. Conexitin electrica de campo Modelodelaunidadexterior TRU*A0121KA70** TRU*A0181KA70** TRU*A0241HA70** TRU*A0301HA70** TRU*A0361KA70** TRU*A0421KA70** -IN (monofase), 60 Hz, -IN (monofase), 60 Hz, -IN (monofase), 60 Hz, -IN (monofase), 60 Hz, -IN (monofase), 60 Hz, -IN (monofase), 60 Hz, Unidad exterior alimentaci6n 208I230 V 208/230 V 208/230 V 208I230 V 208/230 V 208/230 V Capacidad de entrada de unidad exterior inter- *1 15 A 15 A 25 A 25 A 30 A 30 A ruptor/fusible principal (diferencial) Unidad exterior alimentaci6n 2 x Mfn. AWG 14 2 x Min. AWG 14 2 x Min. AWG 12 2 x Min. AWG 12 2 x Min. AWG 10 2 x Min. AWG 10 m Unidad interior-unidad exterior *2 3 x AWG 14 (polar) 3 x AWG 14 (polar) 3 x AWG 14 (polar) 3 x AWG 14 (polar) 3 x AWG 14 (polar) 3 x AWG 14 (polar) d o Cable a tierra de unidad a a E *2 interior-unidad exterior 1 x Min. AWG 14 (polar) 1 x Min. AWG 14 (polar) 1 x Min. AWG 14 (polar) 1 x Min. AWG 14 (polar) 1 x Min. AWG 14 (polar) 1 x Min. AWG 14 (polar) m Control remoto - unidad interior *4 2 x AWG 22 (Non -polar) 2 x AWG 22 (Non -polar) 2 x AWG 22 (Non -polar) 2 x AWG 22 (Non -polar) 2 x AWG 22 (Non -polar) 2 x AWG 22 (Non -polar) Unidad exterior L1-L2 (monofase) *5 208/230 V AC 208/230 V AC 208/230 V AC 208/230 V AC 208/230 V AC 208/230 V AC Unidad interior-unidad exterior S1-S2 5 208/230 V AC 208/230 V AC 2081230 V AC 208/230 V AC 208/230 V AC 208/230 V AC (monofase) M .5 Unidad interior-unidad exterior S2-S3 *5 tr (monofase) 24 V DC 24 V DC 24 V DC 24 V DC 24 V DC 24 V DC Control remoto - unidad interior *5 12 V DC 12 V DC 12 V DC 12 V DC 12 V DC 12 V DC *1. AsegOrese de conectar la unidad a tierra correctamente. Si es necesarie *2. Max. 50 m, 164 pies S3 por separado, max. 80 m, 262 pies *3. Max. 30 m, 100 pies *4. Se coloca un cable de 10 m, 30 pies al accesorio del controlador remoto *5. Los valores NO siempre se aplican a la toma a tierra. El terminal S3 dispone de 24 V DC frente al terminal S2. Entre S3 y S1, tome medidas para evitar fugas. estos terminales NO estan aislados electricamente por el transformador u otro dispositivo. Notas: 1. El diametro de los cables debe cumplir la normativa local y national. 2. Los cables de alimentaci6n electrica, el cable de conexi6n interior -exterior y el cable de conexi6n exterior del calentador de agua no deberan ser mas ligeros que un cable flexible recubierto de policloropreno. (Diseno 60245 IEC 57) 3. Utilice un cable de tierra que sea mas largo que los demas cables para que no se desconecte cuando se aplique tensi6n. 208/230 V Monofasicos Aislante S1 Unidad Externa S2 de "Control A° S3 Aislante de 3 polos S1 S2 Unidad Interna de "Control A" S3 Zt Atenci6n: Si hay un cableado de control A habra un alto voltaje potential en el terminal S3 causado por un diseno de circuito electrico que no incluye aislamiento entre la linea de alimentaci6n y la linea de sepal de comunicaci6n. Por ello es necesario que desconecte la alimentaci6n principal antes de reparar la unidad. No toque nunca los terminales S1, S2 y S3 mientras este conectada la alimentaci6n electrica. Si debe utilizar el aislante entre la unidad interior y la unidad exterior, utilice el tipo de aislante de 3 polos. No empalme nunca el cable de corriente o el cable de la conexi6n interior -exterior, de to contrario se podrian provocar humo, un incendio o un fallo en la comunicaci6n. 7. Prueba de funcionamiento 7.1. Antes de realizar las pruebas ► Despues de la instalaci6n de tubos y cables an las unidades interior y exterior, compruebe que no haya escapes de refrigerante, que no se haya aflojado ni la fuente de alimentaci6n ni el cableado de control, que la po- laridad no sea err6nea y que no se haya desconectado ninguna fase de la alimentaci6n. ► Utilice un megaohmimetro de 500 V para comprobar que la resistencia en- tre los bornes de alimentaci6n y la tierra es como minimo de 1 ME2. ► No efectue esta prueba an los bornes de los cables de control (circuito de bajo voltaje). AS Atenci6n: No utilice el afire acondicionado si la resistencia de aislamiento es inferior a 1 MCI. Resistencia del aislamiento Despues de la instalaci6n, o despues de un prolongado perfodo de desconexi6n del aparato, la resistencia del aislamiento sera inferior a 1 MQ debido a la acumulaci6n de refrigerante en el compresor. Esto no es una averia. Siga los siguientes pasos: 1. Retire los cables del compresor y mida la resistencia del aislamiento del compresor. 2. Si la resistencia del aislamiento es manor de 1 MQ, el compresor esta danado o la resistencia ha descendido por la acumulaci6n de refrigerante en el compresor. 3. Despues de conectar los cables al compresor, este empezara a calentarse despues de volver a restablecerse el suministro de corriente. Despues de resta- blecer la corriente segun los intervalos que se detallan a continuaci6n, vuelva a medir la resistencia del aislamiento. • La resistencia del aislamiento se reduce debido a la acumulaci6n de refrige- rante en el compresor. La resistencia volvera a subir por encima de 1 Mfg des- pues de que el compresor haya funcionado durante 12 horas. (El tiempo requerido para calentar el compresor varla segun las condiciones atmosfericas y la acumulaci6n de refrigerante.) • Para hater funcionar un compresor con refrigerante acumulado, se debe ca- lentar durante al menos 12 horas para evitar que se averie. 4. Si la resistencia del aislamiento es superior a 1 MD, el compresor no esta averiado. ASCulidado: • El compresor no funcionara a menos que la conexi6n de Ease de la fuente de alimentaci6n sea correcta. • Conecte la corriente al menos 12 horas antes de que empiece a funcionar el equipo. Si se acciona inmediatamente despues de haberlo conectado a la corriente, pue- den producirse danos graves en las piezas internas. Mantenga la unidad conec- tada a la corriente durante la temporada de funcionamiento. 10 7. Prueba de funcionamiento ►Tambien debe comprobar to siguiente. • La unidad exterior no esta averiada. Los indicadores LED1 y LED2 del cuadro de control parpadean cuando la unidad exterior esta averiada. • Tanto las valvulas de gas como las de Irquido estan completamente abiertas. • La superficie del panel de los conmutadores DIP del cuadro de control de la unidad exterior esta protegida por una tapa. Quite la tapa protectors para manejar los con- mutadores DIP facilmente. 7.2. Prueba de funcionamiento 7.2.1. Al usar SW4 en la unidad exterior 1) Tipo TRUZ SW4-1 ON Funcionamiento del enfriamiento SW4-2 OFF SW4-1 ON Funcionamiento del de la calefacci6n SW4-2 ON 2) Tipo TRUY SW4-1 ION SW4-2 ON o OFF Funcionamiento del del enfriaminto Despues de la realizaci6n de las pruebas, ponga SW4-1 en OFF 8. Funciones especiales O © OD ------------- li I Orenge I CNDM - o Fig. 8-1 ----------� ® o ® Ejemplo de diagrama de circuito 0 Cuadro de control de la unidad exterior (modo de reduction del ruido) © Max. 10 m, 33 pies OB Arreglo in situ pr Fuente de alimentaci6n del rele © Adaptador de contacto extemo (PACSC36NA-E) X: Rel6 --- - --------------------I ----------; Orenge I CNDM i I __ x __ =Y _-� x Baun i 0 1 -- o —SW2 SW3 V I Rot i 0 3 Fig. 8-2 -------- ---- i I----------' ® Ejemplo de diagrama de circuito © Adaptador de contacto extemo (PAC-SC36NA-E) (Funcionamiento bajo demanda) 0 Cuadro de control de la unidad exterior © Arreglo in situ © Max. 10 m, 33 pies X, Y: Rele OF Fuente de alimentaci6n del rel6 8.3. Recuperaci6n del refrigerante (vaciado) Para recuperar el refrigerante cuando mueva la unidad interior o exterior siga los siguientes pasos. 0 Fuente de alimentation (disyuntor). • Cuando haya restablecido la corriente, asegurese de que en la pantalla del con- trolador remoto no aparece "CENTRALLY CONTROLLED". Si aparece "CEN- TRALLY CONTROLLED" no se puede recuperar el refrigerante (vaciado) de manera normal. • La comunicaci6n entre la unidad interior y exterior se inicia aproximadamente 3 minutos despues de conectar la alimentaci6n (disyuntor). Inicie la operation de vaciado entre 3 y 4 minutos despues de que se haya conectado la alimentaci6n (disyuntor). 0 Despues de cerrar la valvula de parada de Irquido, situe el interruptor SWP del cuadro de control de la unidad exterior an posici6n ON. El compresor (unidad exterior) y los ventiladores (unidades interior y exterior) se ponen en marcha y empieza el proceso de recuperaci6n del refrigerante. Los indicadores LED1 y LED2 del cuadro de control de la unidad exterior estan encendidos. • Solo coloque el interruptor SWP (de bot6n) an la posici6n ON si la unidad esta parada. Aun as[, incluso si la unidad esta parada y el interruptor SWP esta an posici6n ON menos de 3 minutos despues de que el compresor se haya parado, la operaci6n de recuperaci6n del refrigerante no se puede realizar. Espere 3 minutos despues que el compresor se haya parado y vuelva a poner el interruptor SWP en posici6n ON. • Asegurese de que todos los conmutadores DIP SW5 para controlar el funcio- namiento situados en el cuadro de control estan en posici6n OFF [DESACTI- VADOS]. Si todos los interruptores SW5 no estan en posici6n OFF [DESACTI- VADOS], apunte la configuraci6n y cambie todos los interruptores a la posici6n OFF. Empiece a retirar el refrigerante. Despues de cambiar la unidad de lugar y haber realizado la prueba de funcionamiento, vuelva los interruptores SW5 a la posici6n que se habla anotado previamente. • Despues de conectar la corriente, se puede oir un pequerio "clic" del interior de la unidad exterior. La valvula electr6nica de expansi6n se ire abriendo y cer- rando. La unidad no esta averiada. • A los pocos segundos de funcionar el compresor, se puede oir un pequeho sonido metalico del interior de la unidad exterior. El sonido to produce la valvula de retention por la pequeria diferencia de presi6n de las tuberias. La unidad no esta averiada. El modo de prueba de funcionamiento no se puede cambiar por el conmuta- dor DIP SW4-2 durante la prueba. (Para cambiar el modo de prueba de func- ionamiento durante la prueba, pare la prueba con el conmutador DIP SW4-1. Despues de cambiar el modo de prueba de funcionamiento, reanude la prueba con el conmutador SW4-1.) 7.2.2. Uso del control remoto Consults el manual de instalaci6n de la unidad interior. 8.1. Modo de reduction del ruido (modification in situ) (Fig. 8-1) Si Ileva a cabo las siguientes modificaciones, puede reducir el ruido de la unidad exterior en 3 o 4 dB. El modo de reducci6n del ruido se activara cuando anada un programador (dispo- nible en los comercios) o si al conector CNDM (que se vende por separado) del cuadro de control de la unidad exterior se le ahade una entrada por contacto de un interruptor de Endendido/Apagado. • La disponibilidad varra segiln la temperatura exterior, las condiciones atmosfericas, etc. 0 Complete el circuito como se muestra utilizando el adaptador de contacto externo (PAC-SC36NA-E). (Se vende por separado) 0 SW7-1 en (Cuadro de control de la unidad exterior): OFF s0 SW1 en posici6n ON: Modo de reducci6n del ruido SW1 en posici6n OFF: Funcionamiento normal 8.2. Funcionamiento bajo demanda (modificaci6n in situ) (Fig. 8-2) Realizando la siguiente modificaci6n se puede reducir el consumo de energra al 0-100 % del consumo normal. El funcionamiento bajo demanda se activara cuando se anada un temporizador de venta en comercios o la entrada de contacto de un interruptor de encendido/ apagado al conector CNDM (optional) del cuadro de control de la unidad exterior. 0 Realice el circuito como se indica cuando se utiliza el adaptador de entrada ex- terno (PAC-SC36NA-E). (Optional) 0 Ajustando SW7-1 en el cuadro de control de la unidad exterior, el consumo de energra (en comparaci6n con el consumo normal) puede limitarse como se in- dica a continuaci6n. SW7-1 SW2 SW3 Consumo de energra Funcio- namiento bajo demanda ON OFF OFF 100% ON OFF 75% ON ON 50% OFF ON 0% (Parada) OO Dado que la unidad se pare automaticamente al cabo de 2 o 3 minutos de termi- nar el proceso de recuperaci6n del refrigerants (el indicador LED1 esta apagado y el indicador LED2 encendido), asegurese de cerrar rapidamente la valvula de parada de gas. Si el indicador LED1 esta encendido y el indicador LED2 apaga- do, y la unidad exterior esta parada, el proceso de recuperaci6n del refrigerante no se Ileva a cabo correctamente. Abra completamente la valvula de parada de Irquido y repita el paso 2 al cabo de 3 minutos. • Si la operaci6n de recuperaci6n del refrigerante se ha completado con exito (el indicador LED1 esta apagado y el indicador LED2 encendido), la unidad conti- nuara parada hasta que se torte la corriente. ® Corte la corriente (disyuntor). • Tonga en cuenta que cuando la tuberra de extensi6n es muy larga y contiene una gran cantidad de refrigerante, es posible que no se pueda realizar una ope- raci6n de vaciado. Cuando realice esta operaci6n, asegurese de que la presi6n ha descendido a casi 0 Mpa (man6metro). 0 Atencr6n: Al realizar el vaciado del refrigerante, detenga el compresor antes de des- conectar las tuberias de refrigerante. El compresor podria explotar si entra aire, etc. en su interior. 11 9. Sistema de control (Fig. 9-1) OO SW 1 - 3 — 6 ON (3 Unidad exterior OFF Oe Unidad interior 3 4 5 6 0 Control remoto principal O Control remoto secundario OO SW 1 - 3 — 6 ON OE Estandar 1:1 (Direccion de refrigerante = 00) OFF OO Doble simultaneo (Direccion de refrigerante = 01) 3 4 5 6 0 Sistema doble simultaneo (direccion de refrig- erante = 02) OSW1-3-6 ON OFF 3 4 5 6 S T) 0 10. Refrigeration con temperatura baja • Ajuste la direccion de refrigerante utilizando el interruptor DIP de la unidad exterior. TCableado desde el control remoto Este cable se conecta a TB5 (bloque de terminales del control remoto) de la uni- dad interior (sin polaridad). 0Cuando este utilizando un agrupamiento de sistemas de refrigerante diferente Utilizando un control remoto fino MA podran controlarse como un grupo hasta 16 sistemas de refrigerante. Nota: Si se utiliza un unico sistema refrigerante (doble) no es necesario Ilevar cable a 0. TB1 TB1TB1 SW1 _ Tabla de TB4 TB4 T64 TB4 T64� funciones a© a© © 0 z <SW1> TB5 TB5 TB5 t ON o00000 O Fig. 9-1 Funcionamiento segun el ajuste del interruptor Funcion Activado Desactivado 1 Deses- carchado Iniciar Normal obligatorio 2 Borrado SW1 del registro Ajustes historico de Borrar Normal de fun- errores cion 3 Ajuste de la Ajustes de Ias direcciones 0 4 direccion del a 15 de la unidad exterior 5 sistema 6 refrigerante Precauciones para la refrigeracidn con temperatura baja • Si la temperatura externa es de -5 °C, 23 T o inferior durante la operation de refrigeration, instale un deflector optional para evitar que el viento penetre, en la unidad exterior. • Instale la unidad exterior en una ubicacion donde el viento no pueda penetrar en la parte posterior de la unidad. • Para evitar danos en los componentes, instale la unidad, activela y realice Ias operaciones de mantenimiento en un entorno donde la temperatura ambiente sea de -18 °C, 0 T o superior. • Para proteger el compresor y los componentes electricos, no desactive el disyuntor si la unidad esta instalada en un entorno donde la temperatura ambiente es de -18 °C, 0 T o inferior. • Debera dejar reposar el equipo como minimo 12 horas antes de utilizarlo para qua se calienten los componentes electricos. 12 Fig. 2-6 Fig. 2-9 Fig. 2-12 Fig. 2-15 0 a o� Fig. 2-7 Fig. 2-10 Fig. 2-13 4 Fig. 2-8 s 0 a of 1✓ f -. Fig. 2-11 Fig. 2-18 0 (60) (20) Fig. 2-14 inch This product is designed and intended for use in the residential, commercial and light -industrial environment. Please be sure to put the contact address/telephone number on this manual before handing it to the customer. MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC TRANE HVAC US LLC HEAD OFFICE: 1340 SATELLITE BOULEVARD, SUWANEE, GA 30024, USA BG79U896K01 Printed in Japan GOLD Description of the air handling unit GOLD PX GOLD SD Contents GOLD RX GOLD CX General, Range of Application, Certification................................................................... 2 MechanicalDesign............................................................................................................. 3 Electrical and Control Equipment..................................................................................... 9 Hand -Held Micro Terminal and How to Use the Menus ................................................ 10 ControlSchedule............................................................................................................... 11 DeliveryVersion................................................................................................................ 16 Possible combinations for filter/fan sections, RX, size 004-008.................................... 17 Possible combinations for filter/fan sections, RX, size 011-030.................................... 19 Possible combinations for filter/fan sections, PX, size 004-008.................................... 21 Possible combinations for filter/fan sections, PX, size 011-030.................................... 23 InstallationTips................................................................................................................ 24 20210505 We reserve the right to alter specifications. GOLD Description of the Air Handling Unit General The GOLD RX/PX/CX air handling units are complete with direct -driven supply air and extract air fans, supply air and extract air filters and heat exchanger. The heat exchanger is either a rotary heat exchanger (RX), counterflow heat exchanger (PX) or coil heat exchanger (CX). The GOLD SD single -direction units are supply air/extract air handling units with one direct -driven supply air or extract air fan. A filter is available as an option for all sizes. The coil heat exchanger and unmounted pipework package can be selected for the size 004-120 units. The GOLD has built-in control equipment that can be operated from the hand-held micro terminal in the form of a touchscreen. The electrical and control system is completely integrated into the air handling unit. The microprocessor -based equipment controls and regulates temperatures, airflows and other functions. A large number of functions are built into the system and are simple to activate. If supplementary functional sections such as dampers and air coolers are required, they must be installed in the ductwork (uninsulated duct accessories) or be docked to the air handling unit (insulated duct accessories). Unit sec- tions such as e.g. the multisection and air bypass section can be installed in the air handling unit arrangement of the size 004-120 RX/PX/CX units. With provision for cooling and heating The GOLD is also well suited for cooling and heating. Control functions are ready to activate in the control system and the equipment for cooling as well as for pre- heating and reheating are available as accessories. Field of Application The GOLD units are designed for use in comfort ventila- tion applications. Depending on the variant selected, GOLD units can be utilized in buildings such as office buildings, schools, day nurseries, public buildings, shops, residential buildings, etc. Sensor designations and colours of arrows in this publication conform to IEC 81346-1 GOLD units equipped with counterflow-/coil heat exchanger (PX/CX) and separate supply air and extract air handling units (SD) can also be used for the ventilation of moderately humid buildings; however not where the humidity is continuously high, such as in indoor swimming baths. The separate GOLD supply air and extract air handling units (SD) are designed for applications in which the supply air and extract air flows need to be completely separated from one another or where, due to limited available space, separate units for supply air and extract air are needed. They can also be used individually if only one of the variants is needed. GOLD units equipped with the roof, air intake section and exhaust air hood accessories can be installed outdoors. The GOLD is designed and tested for temperatures, in the surroundings and the air stream, from -40°C to +40°C. However, for GOLD RX the temperature differ- ence between the outdoor air and extract air must not exceed 70°C. For all GOLD CX and SD with a pipework package from Swegon placed outdoors, the expansion vessel must be equipped with anti -freeze resistance and insulated when the design outdoor temperature is lower than -10 'C. GOLD conforms to the requirements set out in the hygiene design regulations VDI 6022, see the separate guide. Certification Swegon has a certificated quality management system that conforms to ISO 9001 and an environmental man- agement system that conforms to ISO 14001 Standards. The GOLD air handling system is also certificated by Eurovent, No. AHU-06-06-319 and the Passive House Institute. EUROVEM7 C E R T I IFI E D PERFORMANCE wvvw.eurovent-certification. com M CERTIFIED COMPONENT 0) We reserve the right to alter specifications. 20210505 GOLD Description of the Air Handling Unit Mechanical Design Casing of the GOLD RX/PX/CX Composed of flush -mounted cover panels and inspection doors. The outer skin is made of galvanized sheet steel, re -painted in Swegon's own grey metallic paint (closest comparable RAL colour: 9007). The inner skin is made of aluminium -zinc plated sheet steel and Magnelis. The entire air handling unit conforms to Environmental Class C4. CE marked. Conform to the provisions of EN 61000- E-2 and EN 61000-6-3 Standards. Panel thickness of 52 mm with intervening insulation consisting of mineral wool. The inspection doors are hung on hinges and are fitted with flush -mounted door handles. The door handles must be opened in two steps to equalise the pressure before the door can be opened completely. Casing performance as per EN 1886 Casing air leakage: L1(M). Thermal bridges: T132. Thermal transmission: T2. Mechanical strength: D1. Filter leakage: F9. Applicable to sizes 004/005 and 007/008 inside a common casing: Common casing with two inspection doors. One of the door handles of each inspection door can be locked. The safety isolating switch is located on the outside of the connection hood. Circular duct connections for insertion joints fitted with a rubber seal ring as standard. The GOLD RX with rotary heat exchanger can be mounted on base beams, a foundation or on a stand. Pre - fitted base beams are obtainable as optional equipment; a stand supplied unmounted is available as an accessory. GOLD PX units with counterflow heat exchanger are supplied with base beams. A set of legs (four legs) to be screwed into the base beams is available as an accessory. Applicable to sizes 004/005 and 007/008 in split version as well as size 011-120: The basic arrangement of the size 004-080 units consists of three unit sections (two fan/filter sections and one heat exchanger section). The size 100/120 units consist of five (RX) or six (CX) sections. Each section/unit section has one or two inspection doors. One of the handles for each one of both outer inspection doors is lockable. On the size 120 units, the inspection door of the heat exchanger section (GOLD RX) is also lockable. The size 014-120 units are equipped with rectangular duct connections for slip -clamp jointing as standard. The size 004-012 units are equipped with circular duct connec- tions for insertion joints fitted with a rubber seal ring as standard. GOLD RX, size 008 GOLD RX, size 030 GOLD PX, size 01Z full face end connection panel The unit is equipped with base beams. On the size 004-020 units, the safety isolating switch is externally located on the connection hood. On the size 025-120 units, the safety isolating switch is externally located on the heat exchanger section of the unit. -.• 20210505 We reserve the right to alter specifications. 3 GOLD Description of the Air Handling Unit Mechanical Design Casing of the GOLD SD Composed of flush -mounted cover panels and inspection doors. The outer skin is made of galvanized sheet steel, re -painted in Swegon's own grey metallic paint (closest comparable RAL colour: 9007). The inner skin is made of aluminium -zinc plated sheet steel and Magnelis. The entire air handling unit conforms to Environmental Class C4. CE marked. Conform to the provisions of EN 61000- E-2 and EN 61000-6-3 Standards. Panel thickness of 52 mm with intervening insulation consisting of mineral wool. The inspection doors are hung on hinges and are fitted with flush -mounted door handles. The door handles must be opened in two steps to equalise the pressure before the door can be opened completely. Casing performance as per EN 1886 Casing air leakage: L1(M). Thermal bridges: TB2. Thermal transmission: T2. Mechanical strength: D1. Filter leakage: F9. Applicable to sizes 004-012, common casing: Composed of one or two sections depending on the vari- ant selected. Possible variants are fan (with space for a filter) or fan (with space for a filter) + coil heat exchanger. The fan section casing has one (sizes 004-008) or two (sizes 012) inspection doors. The handles are lockable. Space for a pleated filter of filter class ePM10 60% (M5) or ePM1 50% (F7) is available and can be ordered as an accessory. The safety isolating switch is located on the inspection side by the inspection door of the fan section. Circular duct connections for insertion joints fitted with a rubber seal ring as standard. The GOLD SD size 004-008 without coil heat exchanger can be mounted on base beams, a foundation or on a stand. Prefitted base beams are obtainable as optional equipment; a stand supplied unmounted is available as an accessory. GOLD SD size 004-008 with coil heat exchanger and GOLD SD size 11/12 is equipped with base beams. Sizes 0041005 and 008 Sizes 014-080 Shows the variant with functions: filter + coil heat exchanger + fan. Applicable to sizes 004-012, split version and size 014-120: Composed of one to three sections depending on the variant selected. Possible variants are fan, filter + fan or filter + coil heat exchanger + fan. The sections for fan and filter have their own inspection door. One of the door handles of the outer inspection door can be locked. The safety isolating switch is located on the inspection side. The size 004-012 units are equipped with circular duct connections for insertion joints fitted with a rubber seal ring as standard. The size 014-120 units are equipped with rectangular duct connections for slip -clamp jointing as standard. The unit is equipped with base beams. C! We reserve the right to alter specifications. 20210505 GOLD Description of the air handling unit Mechanical Design Fans The direct -driven fans are of GOLD Wing+ type, unique axial -centrifugal fans with the focus on excellent power efficiency, uniform airflow and low noise level. The GOLD Wing is patented. Functional sections such as air coolers and bends can be connected directly against the air han- dling unit without appreciable pressure losses. This saves space in the fan room. The fans are driven by highly efficient EC/PM motors with an efficiency class equivalent to IE5, which together with a motor control system developed for GOLD give very high overall efficiency. The fans are approved for continuous operation in tem- peratures of up to 40°C. The fans are tested for, and can manage operation for one hour at 70°C. The fan motors have a motor control system for variable speed regulation and the fans have measurement tap- pings for continuous measurement and regulation of the airflow. The fans are effectively vibration -isolated from the casing by means of rubber bushings/flexible connections. The fans are fixed in their positions by means of locking knobs/screws and clamping bands. These fasteners can easily be loosened, after which the entire fan package can be withdrawn for inspection and maintenance. Filters The filter material is glass fibre. The filter holder has a filter locking system designed for effective sealing and complies with the requirements for bypass leakage to Class ePM1 85% (F9). All filters can be selected as ePM10 60% (M5) or ePM1 50% (F7) filters. The separate GOLD SD supply air and extract air handling units in sizes 004-012 in a common casing can have pleated filters as an option. The units in other sizes/variants have bag filters of ample proportions on both the supply air and outdoor air sides. Pressure sensors for measuring the pressure drop across the filters are incorporated into the control system. Pre -filter inside air handling units Prefilters installed inside air handling units can be ordered as optional extras (does not apply to the type RX Top units). Prefilters are used in ventilation systems, in which the extract air and/or the outdoor air is/are heavily polluted and it is desirable to prevent the fine filters inside the GOLD unit from becoming clogged after a short period of use. The filters are of woven aluminium type or Class Coarse 65% (G4) compact filters. Pressure sensors for measuring the pressure drop across the filters are incorporated into the control system. -.• 20210505 We reserve the right to alter specifications. 1 GOLD Description of the Air Handling Unit Mechanical Design Heat exchanger Rotary heat exchanger RECOnomic/RECOsorptic rotary heat exchanger with a temperature efficiency of up to 85%. The need for heat is dealt with by automatically and variably regulating the speed of the rotor. The rotary heat exchanger effectively recovers cooling energy as well. It is available in a sorption version (RECOsorptic) for mois- ture recovery, which reduces operating and investment costs for cooling and improves indoor comfort levels in the winter, as well as in an epoxy -treated version. Motor control system with integrated rotation monitoring. Purging sector, commissioning plates and pressure meas- urement tappings as standard, ensure that the extract air will not be carried over to the supply air. The RECOnomic/RECOsorptic heat exchanger is patented. Counterflow heat exchanger The counterflow heat exchanger is as standard equipped with centre -mounted bypass dampers and two heat exchanger dampers for variable and automatic regulation of the heat exchanger's efficiency on heat recovery. The counterflow heat exchanger is available in two ver- sions: Normal efficiency (MPE, Maximum Pressure Effi- ciency) and high efficiency (MTE, Maximum Temperature Efficiency) respectively. In the MPE version, the focus is on low pressure drop across the heat exchanger. In the MTE version, priority is given to high temperature efficiency. Internal leakage between air streams conforms to the provisions of Ductwork leakage class L2. In cold weather, and when the extract air is humid, there is risk of frosting inside the plate heat exchanger. The GOLD PX is therefore equipped with anti -frost protection. RECOfrost anti -frost protection The pressure drop across the heat exchanger, extract air temperature, moisture content in the extract air and out- door air temperature are measured. With consideration given to the pressure drop across the heat exchanger, the extract air temperature, the moisture content in the extract air and the outdoor air tempera- ture, the control system individually regulates dampers for bypass and the heat exchanger for section -by -section defrosting without the formation of frost. This enables high annual efficiency, smaller air heaters and pressure - drop -optimized operation during the spring and autumn. Purging sector We reserve the right to alter specifications. 20210505 GOLD Description of the Air Handling Unit Mechanical Design Coil heat exchanger The coil heat exchanger in the one-piece units, GOLD CX, sizes 035-080, are supplied complete from the fac- tory; including mounted pipework package with all the necessary components. The system is normally filled with F liquid, vented, adjusted and performance -tested prior to delivery, but can also be ordered in unfilled condition e.g. for housing improvement projects or if the applica- tion requires filling with another mixture instead of 30 % ethylene glycol. On the size 1001120 GOLD CX one-piece - unit, the pipework package (accessory) including separate control unit are supplied in unmounted condition. ;y Coil heat exchangers and pipework packages are available as unmounted accessories for the separate size 004-120 supply air and extract air handling units (SD) A separate ' control unit for the coil heat exchanger is always included in the supply. The pipework package's valve variably regulates the coil heat exchanger's efficiency on heat recovery and the circulation pump is demand -controlled. In cold weather, and if the extract air is humid, there is risk of frosting in coil heat exchangers. The GOLD CX/SD is equipped with an extremely effective anti -frost protec- tion that measures the temperature of the liquid in the extract air coil and also the humidity in the extract air. Taking the humidity into consideration, the IQlogic control system calculates the lowest permissible liquid tempera- ture without risk of frosting inside the coil. The valve in the pipework package is then controlled to prevent the temperature from dropping below this limit. -.• 20210505 We reserve the right to alter specifications. rA GOLD Description of the Air Handling Unit Mechanical Design Duct Connections Are for sizes 004/005, 007/008 and 011/012 circular and designed for connection to ducts with insertion joints fitted with a rubber seal ring. A duct bend fits directly into the connection. The duct connections are horizon- tally and vertically offset to enable ducts to be run in any direction without blocking one another. The size 014-120 units have rectangular duct connections with a securely mounted connection frame for slip -clamp joint connection. Type METU connection frames are avail- able as an accessories. GOLD RX/PX are also available in a top -fed variant, GOLD RX/PX Top, with all the duct connections upward. GOLD RX/PX Top is available in sizes 004-030. To further reduce pressure losses, a full face end con- nection with larger rectangular duct connection is also offered as an accessory (all sizes). The air handling unit's GOLD Wing+ fans provide a uniform airflow immediately downstream of the outlet making it possible to connect duct bends and functional sections, for example cooling coils, directly to the unit without appreciable pressure losses. If insulated duct accessories are selected, they should be docked directly against the air handling unit. The air han- dling unit is then supplied without end connection panel for the relevant inlet/outlet. Pressure Adjusting Plates (applicable to air handling units with rotary heat exchanger only) The unit is equipped with pressure adjusting plates to ensure that the purging air flow through the heat exchanger will be as it was designed to be. These plates make it possible to achieve correct pressure balance in the unit so that the purging airflow will pass in the correct direction. The pressure adjusting plates are supplied in unmounted condition and shall be positioned by the extract air inlet of the air handling unit. Environment Declaration Swegon AB has a certificated environmental management system that conforms to ISO 14001 Standard and is regis- tered on the REPA Register, no. 5560778465. A Building Material Declaration with a complete list of constituent materials is available on Swegon's home page. Circular duct connections Rectangular duct connections Circular duct connections GOLD RX Top Rectangular duct connection GOLD RX Top We reserve the right to alter specifications. 20210505 GOLD Description of the Air Handling Unit Electrical and Control Equipment General The electrical and control system is completely integrated into the air handling unit. The microprocessor -based equipment controls and regulates temperatures, airflows and other functions. A large number of functions are built into the system and are simple to activate. The air handling unit can be automatically controlled in several ways via the built-in timer or main control system, however it can also be demand -controlled e.g. via a CO2sensor. Manual control is also possible. A large number of functions and settings can be acti- vated/entered via a main control system. Control Inaccuracy: Temperature ± 1°C. Airflow ± 5%. Power Efficiency The design and performance of the air handling unit are optimized for achieving excellent power efficiency. Standards The unit meets the provisions of the ELSAK-FS 1999:5 and SS -EN 60204-1 electrical safety standards. Protection class IP 54. Interference Level The unit meets the requirements defined in the EMC Directive and has been tested according to the provi- sions in EN 61000-6-2 and 61000-6-3 (electromagnetic emissions in dwellings, office buildings, shops and similar environments as well as for immunity in industrial environ- ments). Use of an earth fault circuit breaker The earth fault circuit breaker, if required, should only serve the air handling unit and must be of a type designed for use with the control system of the EC motor. Control Unit — GOLD SD If both GOLD SD supply air and extract air handling units are used in a ventilation system, the supply air unit is fitted with a control unit and the extract air unit is with- out. A communication cable is used to connect them to one another making it possible to control both units. Electrical and Control Equipment On the smaller unit sizes, the electrical and control equip- ment must be connected via the junction hood. Connection cables for hand-held micro terminal, supply air temperature sensor, air heater and air cooler have modular connectors. Other accessories and external functions can be con- nected to an easy -to -access row of terminal connections All electrical and control equipment is collected inside a special enclosure in the centred section of the air handling unit. An extra terminal for a single phase 230 V supply is also provided after the safety switch on the GOLD unit. This terminal can be used for external functional sections and can be loaded with max. 1.5 A. The extra functional sections such as a cooling unit and an electric air heater, must have a separate power supply. GOLD RX/PX/CX On the size 004-020 GOLD RX and the GOLD PX units, electrical and control equipment must be wired via the junction hood. On the size 025-070 and 080 GOLD RX and the size 035-080 GOLD CX units, electrical and control equipment must be wired via the panel on the centre section of the air handling unit. On the size 080 GOLD RX, capacity variant 2, and the size 100/120 GOLD CX units, electric power is connected across an external safety switch and the electrical and control equipment must be wired via the panel on the centre section of the air handling unit. GOLD SD On the size 004-080 GOLD DS units, the electrical and control equipment must be wired via the panel by the fan inspection door. On the size 100/120 units, electric power is connected across an external safety switch and the electrical and control equipment must be wired via the panel on the centre section of the air handling unit. W 20210505 We reserve the right to alter specifications. GOLD Description of the Air Handling Unit Hand-held micro terminal IQnavigator and image management The IQnavigator hand-held micro terminal, has 7" touch - screens and is very simple and user friendly. Commis- sioning and the entering of settings can be carried out intuitively and in steps. Flow images and help texts are always at hand. The hand-held terminal is equipped with a three metre long connection cable that can be connected via quick -fit connector to the air handling unit's control unit. Communication between the hand-held micro terminal and the GOLD air handling unit can also transpire wire- lessly via WLAN (accessory). It is just as simple to use a computer, tablet pc or cell phone via WiFi. Double Ether- net ports and USB connection are available as standard. The preset values are stored and will not be unaffected in the event of a power failure. Its] We reserve the right to alter specifications. 20210505 GOLD Description of the Air Handling Unit Control Schedule Diagrammatic description of the control functions, GOLD RX The built-in control system controls and regulates temper- atures, airflows, in -operation periods and a large number of internal and external functions. In that it is a microprocessor -based system, it can solve highly complicated tasks. The specific components are outlined below each individually in a simplified and sche- matic specification. I*=== limli, •I 1�11 LAfrll i BT' BT3 Temperature sensor, outdoor air. El Electrical equipment cubicle containing the BT1 Temperature sensor, supply air. Positioned in control circuit card and other electrical the ductwork equipment for controlling internal and external functions, etc. BT2 Temperature sensor, extract air. P1 Hand-held micro terminal for setting airflows, T1/T2 Motor control system for variable speed temperatures, control functions, in -operation control of the fan motors. periods, etc. as well as alarms. BF1/BF2 Pressure transducer. Indicates for controlling VVX Variable speed -controlled rotary heat the fan speed so that the preset airflow will be exchanger with air purging operation. maintained. T3 Motor control system, heat exchanger with BPI/BP2 Pressure transducer for checking the filter drive motor and integrated rotation status. monitoring. BP3 Pressure sensor for checking the heat exchanger. Swown" 11 20210505 We reserve the right to alter specifications. GOLD Description of the Air Handling Unit Control Schedule Diagrammatic description of the control functions, GOLD PX The built-in control system controls and regulates temper- atures, airflows, in -operation periods and a large number of internal and external functions. In that it is a microprocessor -based system, it can solve highly complicated tasks. The specific components are outlined below each individually in a simplified and sche- matic specification. Q al BT3 BT1 Temperature sensor, outdoor air. Temperature sensor, supply air. Positioned in the ductwork BT2/BM2 Extract air temperature sensor/Extract air humidity sensor. For RECOfrost anti -frost protection. T1/T2 Motor control system for variable speed control of the fan motors. BF1/BF2 Pressure transducer. Indicates for controlling the fan speed so that the preset airflow will be maintained. BP1/BP2 Pressure transducer for checking the filter status. BT6 Heat exchanger pressure sensor. For anti -frost protection. P1 MG6 Actuator for by-pass and shut-off dampers. E1 Electrical equipment cubicle containing the control circuit card and other electrical equipment for controlling internal and external functions, etc. P1 Hand-held micro terminal for setting airflows, temperatures, control functions, in -operation periods, etc. as well as alarms. VVX Counterflow heat exchanger with bypass and shut-off dampers. BT20/BT30 Temperature sensor for density -corrected airflow. 12 We reserve the right to alter specifications. 20210505 GOLD Description of the Air Handling Unit Control Schedule Diagrammatic description of the control functions, GOLD CX The built-in control system controls and regulates temper- atures, airflows, in -operation periods and a large number of internal and external functions. In that it is a microprocessor -based system, it can solve highly complicated tasks. The specific components are outlined below each individually in a simplified and sche- matic specification. r*=1 42 BT3 P1 IN On Temperature sensor, outdoor air. Temperature sensor, supply air. Positioned in the ductwork. BT2/BM2 Temperature sensor, extract air/Humidity sensor, extract air. For anti -frost protection. T1/T2 Motor control system for variable speed control of the fan motors. xso*: G6 Circulation pump, coil heat exchangers. MF6 Valve actuator, coil heat exchangers. El Electrical equipment cubicle containing the control circuit card and other electrical equipment for controlling internal and external functions, etc. m BF1/BF2 Pressure transducer. Indicates for controlling the fan speed so that the preset airflow will be maintained. VVX BPI/BP2 BT6 Hand-held micro terminal for setting airflows, temperatures, control functions, in -operation periods, etc. as well as alarms. Coil heat exchanger with pipework package. Pressure transducer for checking the filter BT20/BT30 Temperature sensor for density -corrected status. airflow. Temperature sensor, coil heat exchangers. For BP3 Differential pressure sensor. anti -frost protection. GOLD CX, sizes 1001120: Pipework package including control box are supplied in unmounted condition for floor or wall mounting (accessories). 13 20210505 We reserve the right to alter specifications. GOLD Description of the air handling unit Control Schedule Diagrammatic description of the control functions, GOLD SD sizes 004-012, common casing The built-in control system controls and regulates temper- atures, airflows, in -operation periods and a large number of internal and external functions. 0 Because the system is microprocessor -based, it can solve highly complicated tasks. The individual components each specified below in a simplified and diagrammatical description. P1 I J �I I� � ti ' BT2 T1 � E1 O OI 00 it 00 h B1 _ BF1 BT3 Outdoor air temperature sensor. (Applicable to air handling units with coil heat exchanger) BT2 Outdoor air temperature sensor/supply air density sensor (In extract air units: Extract air temperature sensor/exhaust air density sensor) BT1 :*1 T1 Motor control system for variable speed control of the fan motor. E1 Electrical equipment cubicle containing a control circuit card, if included, and other electrical equipment for controlling internal and external functions, etc. BT1 Supply air temperature sensor. Positioned in the E2 Control unit, if applicable, for controlling the ductwork. (Not used in extract air units) pipework package. BF1 Supply air fan pressure sensor. Indicates for P1 Hand-held micro terminal, if specified, for setting control of the fan speed so that the preset airflows, temperatures, control functions, airflow will be obtained. (In extract air handling in -operation periods, etc. as well as alarms. units: Extract air fan pressure sensor) BP1 Supply air filter pressure sensor, if applicable. For checking the status of the filter (In extract air handling units: Extract air filter pressure sensor) 14 We reserve the right to alter specifications. 20210505 GOLD Description of the air handling unit Control Schedule Diagrammatic description of the control functions, GOLD SD, sizes 004-012 in split version and sizes 014-120 The built-in control system controls and regulates temper- atures, airflows, in -operation periods and a large number of internal and external functions. Because the system is microprocessor -based, it can solve highly complicated tasks. The individual components each specified below in a simplified and diagrammatical description. BT3 Outdoor air temperature sensor. (Applicable to air handling units with coil heat exchanger) BT2 Outdoor air temperature sensor/supply air density sensor (In extract air units: Extract air temperature sensor/exhaust air density sensor) T1 Motor control system for variable speed control of the fan motor. E1 Electrical equipment cubicle containing a control circuit card, if included, and other electrical equipment for controlling internal and external functions, etc. BT1 Supply air temperature sensor. Positioned in the E2 Control unit, if applicable, for controlling the ductwork. (Not used in extract air units) pipework package. BF1 Supply air fan pressure sensor. Indicates for P1 Hand-held micro terminal, if specified, for setting control of the fan speed so that the preset airflows, temperatures, control functions, airflow will be obtained. (In extract air handling in -operation periods, etc. as well as alarms. units: Extract air fan pressure sensor) BP1 Supply air filter pressure sensor, if applicable. For checking the status of the filter (In extract air handling units: Extract air filter pressure sensor) -.• 20210505 We reserve the right to alter specifications. GOLD Description of the air handling unit Delivery Version RX/PX/CX, sizes 004-080 The GOLD RX/PX/CX units are composed of unit sections. The unit sections are as follows: • Fan/filter section • Heat exchanger section (RX, PX, CX and RX/HC respectively) • Air recirculation section • Air bypass section • Multisection • Duct crossover section (PX) The basic arrangement of the GOLD RX/PX/CX units consists of two fan/filter sections and one heat exchanger section. The other air handling unit sections are optional, see also the section entitled Complements and Accesso- ries. The unit sections in an air handling unit arrangement are delivered separately or already fitted together with one or several other unit sections as specified below: • The fan/filter section with the fan in the upper sec- tion is always supplied already fitted together with another unit section, with the exception of CX (all sizes) and RX/HC size 014-080. • The heat exchanger section, RX, is always supplied already fitted together with another unit section. • The air recirculation, air bypass, multi and duct crossover sections are always supplied already fitted together with another unit section, with the excep- tion of size 035/040. • The max. length of a delivery unit is 3,000 mm. • An air handling unit arrangement may at most be divided into four delivery units (sizes 004-060). See also Swegon's air handling unit software: AHU Design. We reserve the right to alter specifications. 20210505 GOLD Description of the unit Possible combinations for air direction, RX Top, size 004-008 GOLD RX Top 004-008 can also be delivered as L-concept common casing, and top fed duct connections the same with top fed duct connections in combination with side performance as a RX Top, see the section Sizing, installa fed duct connections. tion, measurements and weight for GOLD RX. For the L-concept the side fed duct connections are to Dimensions and weight deviate, see the following page. have the same performance as a side fed standard RX in a Basic variant ................................................................................................................................ Left-hand version Top Right-hand version J Possible combinations of air directions Left-hand version *i CH MXMAI 0 Right-hand version Outdoor air Supply air Extract air Exhaust air M�j IS 20210505 We reserve the right to alter specifications. 17 GOLD Description of the unit Possible combinations for air direction, RX Top, size 004-008 Dimensions Diagrams show the L-concept with top fed duct connec- tions in combination with side fed duct connections. Top fed left, side fed right Top fed right, side fed left L B 11 B 16 3 01111 524 �I 76 76 0 H H � 0 102.......... 52. 45 45 -1 -45 3 J 100 100 I-��145 A K E E � E C D r L 52 380 18 16 � 0 I � 0 F .....................................� .. .. 52 102 K A B C D E F G H I J K L M 0 Weight, kg 004 800 825 238 393 237 230 690 1085 240 579 750 1550 393 315 288-295 005 800 825 238 393 237 230 690 1085 240 579 750 1550 393 315 288-303 007 860 995 286 426 280 271 814 1295 278 749 810 1670 406 400 346-364 008 860 995 286 426 280 271 814 1295 278 749 810 1670 406 400 360-370 M-91 We reserve the right to alter specifications. 20210505 GOLD Description of the unit Possible combinations for filter/fan sections, RX, size 011-030 Filter/fan sections for basic variants of standard RX and Note that performance, dimensions and weight are dif- RX Top can be combined in a number of different ways, ferent depending on whether the filter/fan section is see below and the next page. RX standard or RX Top, see section Sizing, installation, dimensions and weights for GOLD RX. Basic variants ................................................................................................................................. Left-hand version Standard Right-hand version Q \- a a 0 y Supply air fan, right lower level 10, 4 C` a Supply air fan, right-hand, lower level Supply air fan, right-hand, upper level ................................................................................................................................. Left-hand version Top Right-hand version lut i4 10,t Supply air fan, left upper level t lu 4i Supply air fan, right lower level 4i tIG Supply air fan, right-hand, lower level Supply air fan, right-hand, upper level Outdoor air Supply air Extract air Exhaust air Option Option Option Option outdoor air supply air extract air exhaust air IN 20210505 We reserve the right to alter specifications. GOLD Description of the unit Possible combinations for filter/fan sections, RX, size 011-030 pill Left-hand version 4� Standard Top � a Top Standard 10, Top Outdoor air Option outdoor air We reserve the right to alter specifications. Combinations Right-hand version � a Top Standard Standard Top Supply air Extract air Exhaust air Option Option Option supply air extract air exhaust air 20210505 GOLD Description of the unit Possible combinations for filter/fan sections, PX Top, size 004-008 PX Top size 004-008 has, from PX standard side fed air These side fed filter/fan sections have the same perfor- handling units, a deviating height measurement. mance as a PX standard side fed filter/fan section, see the However, it is possible to order a side -fed filter/fan section section Sizing, installation, dimensions and weights for with a height measurement adapted to each size of PX GOLD PX. Top. Dimensions and weight deviate, see the following page. Left-hand version V Q 4 V Left-hand version Basic variant Top Combinations ............... ....................... Right-hand version 4 * IG Right-hand version V 4 V Top Side fed filter/ Top Side fed filter/ fan section fan section 40 > <3 > 4M Side fed filter/ Top Side fed filter/ Top fan section fan section Outdoor air Supply air Extract air Exhaust air 21 20210505 We reserve the right to alter specifications. GOLD Description of the unit Possible combinations for filter/fan sections, PX Top, size 004-008 Dimensions The diagrams show side fed filter/fan sections with a height measurement adapted to each size of PX Top and centre section. Filter/fan section to the left of the centre section B m H G 4KCA D I f� E Filter/fan section to the right of the centre section -L-F c H D A I E • 617 825 240 1300 181 230 460 1085 238 345 315 93-115 617 825 240 1300 181 230 460 1085 238 345 315 93-119 7 647 995 278 1517 230 271 543 1295 278 440 400 112-150 647 995 278 1517 230 271 543 1295 278 440 400 119-154 * Only filter/fan section ova We reserve the right to alter specifications. 20210505 GOLD Description of the unit Possible combinations for filter/fan sections, PX, size 011-030 Filter/fan sections for basic variants of standard PX and PX Note that performance, dimensions and weight are dif- Top can be combined in a number of different ways, see ferent depending on whether the filter/fan section is PX below and the next page. standard or PX Top, see section Sizing, installation, dimen- sions and weights for GOLD PX. Basic variants .............................................................................................................................. .. Left-hand version Standard Right-hand version M C] 40 40 a C] 0 u [0 ................................................................................................................ Left-hand version Top Right-hand version tlu i4 4lu lu* Outdoor air Supply air Extract air Exhaust air Option Option outdoor air extract air 23 20210505 We reserve the right to alter specifications. GOLD Description of the unit Possible combinations for filter/fan sections, PX, size 011-030 Combinations Left-hand version Top Standard N Standard Top Outdoor air Supply air Option outdoor air Right-hand version 4 1s -<> Top Standard r n a � �LEI-0 Standard Top Extract air Exhaust air Option extract air Pz! We reserve the right to alter specifications. 20210505 GOLD Description of the Air Handling Unit Installation Tips Sizing the Duct System The preset flow is automatically kept at a constant rate if this function has been selected in the hand-held micro terminal. Lower air velocity in ducts and air diffusers mean lower pressure drop and consequently lower energy consumption and a quieter ventilation system. To achieve optimal operating economy and low noise level it is important to design the ventilation system with as low pressure drop as possible. The hoods for outdoor air and extract air, designed especially for the GOLD, are optimized in this respect. Examples of how air deflectors and extruded inlets minimize pressure losses in Swegon accessories for the GOLD. A duct or non -return damper of its own. Zero calibration is an integrated function in the GOLD air handling units. Every individual GOLD air handling unit in a ventilation system must be equipped with its own outdoor air and exhaust air hood/duct in order for this function to operate correctly. Or else, every individual air handling unit must be equipped with a non -return damper or a motorized damper in the outdoor air duct and/or exhaust air duct. CGOL 3 (A) � C 0 GOL (B) Every GOLD air handling unit must have its own outdoor air duct (and its own exhaust air duct/hood). GOL (A) GOL (B) If the use of a common outdoor air duct is still desirable, every branch duct for each GOLD air handling unit must be equipped with a non - return damper or a motorized damper (also applies to a common exhaust air duct/hood). -•• 20210505 We reserve the right to alter specifications. %&I GOLD 0z91 We reserve the right to alter specifications. 20210505 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS GOLD RX/PX/CX Imo', oo —'emu EN - Installation instructions SE - Installationsanvisning DE - Installationsanleitung FIR - Instructions d'installation NO- Installasjonsanvisning DK - Installationsanvisning FI - Asennusohje PL - Instrukcja instalacji RU - MHCTpYKgMq no MOHTa)Ky ES - Instrucciones de instalacion IT - Istruzioni per I'installazione PT - Instrug es de instalagao NL - Installatieaanwijzing CONTENTS 1. Key to symbols............................................................................... 4 1. 2. Lifting.............................................................................................5 2. 3. Unpacking......................................................................................6 3. 4. Serial number................................................................................. 6 4. 5. Splitting/Installation of air handling unit sections......................7 5. 6. Placement....................................................................................8-9 6. 7. Water trap.................................................................................... 10 7. 8. Connection to the Ducting....................................................11-12 8. 9. Electrical Connections, Supply Voltage.................................13-16 9. 10. Connections for the Hand-held Micro / Sensors ........................ 17 10. 11. Installation of sensors.................................................................. 18 11. 12. CX................................................................................................. 19 12. 13. Change in airflow direction........................................................ 20 13. 14. List of terminals........................................................................... 21 14. 1. Teckenf6rklaring............................................................................4 1. 2. Lyft..................................................................................................5 2. 3. Uppackning....................................................................................6 3. 4. Serienummer..................................................................................6 4. 5. Delning/Montage av aggregatsektioner...................................... 7 5. 6. Placering......................................................................................8-9 6. 7. Vattenlas......................................................................................10 7. 8. Anslutning kanaler.................................................................11-12 8. 9. Elanslutning, kraft..................................................................13-16 9. 10. Anslutning handterminal och givare......................................... 17 10. 11. Montage av givare...................................................................... 18 11. 12. CX................................................................................................. 19 12. 13. Byte av luftriktning..................................................................... 20 13. 14. F6rklaring plintar......................................................................... 22 14. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. Zeichenerklarung ........................................................................... 4 Anheben......................................................................................... 5 Auspacken des Zubeh6rs............................................................... 6 Seriennummer............................................................................... 6 Zerlegung/Montage von Geratesektionen.................................. 7 Innenaufstellung........................................................................8-9 Siphon.......................................................................................... 10 Anschluss Kanale....................................................................11-12 Elektroanschluss Kraft............................................................13-16 Anschluss Handsteuergerat and Sensor ..................................... 17 Montage des Zuluftfiihlers......................................................... 18 CX................................................................................................. 19 Wechseln der Luftrichtung......................................................... 20 Erklarung der Anschlussklemmen.............................................. 21 Explication des symboles...............................................................4 Levage............................................................................................ 5 D6ballage....................................................................................... 6 Num6ro de s6rie............................................................................ 6 D6sassemblage/Assemblage des sections d'une centrale de traitement d'air.......................................................... 7 Positionnement........................................................................... 8-9 Siphon.......................................................................................... 10 Raccordement canaux............................................................11-12 Raccordement electrique.......................................................13-16 Raccordement ecran de visualisation et sonde .......................... 17 Montage de la sonde de temperature ....................................... 18 CX................................................................................................. 19 Changement du sens de circulation de I'air ............................... 20 Explication des bornes................................................................. 21 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. The document was originally written in Swedish. Tegnforklaring............................................................................... 4 Lofte............................................................................................... 5 Oppakning..................................................................................... 6 Serienummer.................................................................................. 6 Deling/montering av aggregatseksjoner..................................... 7 Plassering.................................................................................... 8-9 Vannlas......................................................................................... 10 Tilkobling kanaler...................................................................11-12 El-tilkobling kraft...................................................................13-16 Tilkobling handterminal og giver ............................................... 17 Montering av giver...................................................................... 18 CX................................................................................................. 19 Bytte av luftretning..................................................................... 20 Forklaring kontaktklemmer........................................................21 Tegnforklaring............................................................................... 4 Lofte............................................................................................... 5 Udpakning..................................................................................... 6 Serienummer.................................................................................. 6 Deling/Montering of aggregatsektioner...................................... 7 Placering...................................................................................... 8-9 Vandlas......................................................................................... 10 Tilslutning, kanaler.................................................................11-12 El-tilslutning, stromforsyning................................................13-16 Tilslutning, handholdt terminal og foler................................... 17 Monteringof foler....................................................................... 18 CX................................................................................................. 19 Skiftof luftretning....................................................................... 20 Forklaring klemraekker................................................................21 Merkkienselitys.............................................................................4 Nostaminen.................................................................................... 5 Pakkauksen purkaminen............................................................... 6 Sarjanumero................................................................................... 6 Koneen osien erottaminen/yhdistaminen.................................... 7 Sijoitus......................................................................................... 8-9 Vesilukko...................................................................................... 10 Ka n ava I i ita nta.........................................................................11-12 Tehonsy6tt6l i itanta................................................................13-16 K6sipaatteen ja antureiden liitanta........................................... 17 Anturien asennus......................................................................... 18 CX................................................................................................. 19 Ilmavirran suunnanvaihto...........................................................20 Riviliittimien selitys...................................................................... 21 Oznaczeniasymboli........................................................................ 4 Transportpionowy.......................................................................... 5 Rozpakowanie-czgsci skladowe centrali......................................... 6 Numery seryjne............................................................................... 6 Podziaf/Montag sekcji centrali......................................................... 7 Posadowienie centrali..................................................................8-9 Syfonwodny................................................................................. 10 Podfgczenie przewod6w powietrza..........................................11-12 Wfgcznik gf6wny, podfgczenia elektryczne..............................13-16 Podfgczenie programatora i czujnika temperatury ........................ 17 Montag czujnika temperatury nawiewu......................................... 18 CX................................................................................................. 19 Zmiana kierunku przepfywu powietrza.......................................... 20 Listwa zaciskowa.......................................................................... 21 CONTENTS 1. 0603Ha ieHNA..................................................................................4 1. 2. IlogbeM KpaHOM.............................................................................. 5 2. 3. PacnaKoBbIBaHNe............................................................................ 6 3. 4. CepHAHbIA HOMep........................................................................... 6 4. 5. Pa3geneHwe/MOHTam ceKL mm arperara.......................................... 7 5. 6. Pa3MeuleHHe................................................................................8-9 6. 7. BogAHON 3aTBOp........................................................................... 10 7. 8. flpwcoe,gHHeHHe B039YXOBOAOB...............................................11-12 8. 9. F109Kn K)4eHwe nHTaHM,9............................................................ 13-16 9. 10. F109KnloveHwe pyvHorO TepMNHana N,gaTVNKOB ........................... 17 10. 11. MOHTa)K gaT4NKa........................................................................... 18 11. 12. CX................................................................................................. 19 12. 13. 1/13MeHeHHe HanpaBneHHA B03gyxa.............................................. 20 13. 14. OnHcaHwe KneMM.......................................................................... 21 14. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. Explicaci6n de los simbolos...........................................................4 Elevaci6n........................................................................................ 5 Desembalaje................................................................................... 6 Numerode serie............................................................................ 6 Divisi6n/instalaci6n de secciones de la unidad de tratamiento de aire.......................................................................7 Ubicaci6n..................................................................................... 8-9 Colectorde agua......................................................................... 10 Conductos de conexi6n..........................................................11-12 Conexi6n electrica de fuerza.................................................13-16 Conexi6n mando manual y sonda.............................................. 17 Montaje de sensores.................................................................... 18 CX................................................................................................. 19 Cambio de la direcci6n del aire.................................................. 20 Identificaci6n de las bornas........................................................ 21 Legenda.......................................................................................... 4 Sollevamento................................................................................. 5 Disimballaggio............................................................................... 6 Numero di serie.............................................................................6 Suddivisione/installazione sezioni delle units di trattamento dell'aria.................................................................7 Posizionamento.......................................................................... 8-9 Sifone........................................................................................... 10 Collegamento dei canali........................................................11-12 Collegamenti elettrici.............................................................13-16 Collegamento di terminale manuale a sensori .......................... 17 Montaggio dei sensori................................................................ 18 CX................................................................................................. 19 Cambio di direzione dell'aria...................................................... 20 Identificazione dei morsetti........................................................ 21 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. ExplicaSao de simbolos.................................................................. 4 Levantar......................................................................................... 5 Desembalagem.............................................................................. 6 Numerode s6rie............................................................................ 6 Divis5o/instalaS5o de segi es de unidades.................................. 7 CoI oca Sa o.................................................................................... 8-9 Sifao.............................................................................................. 10 LigaSaocanais.........................................................................11-12 LigaSao el6ctrica de forSa......................................................13-16 LigaSao comando manual a sensor ............................................ 17 Montagem de sensor................................................................... 18 CX................................................................................................. 19 MudanSa de direg5o do ar........................................................ 20 ExplicaSao, barras de terminais.................................................. 21 Legenda.......................................................................................... 4 Hetopheffen................................................................................. 5 Uitpa kke n....................................................................................... 6 Serienummer.................................................................................. 6 Verdeling/installatie van secties van de luchtbehandelingsunit.................................................................. 7 Plaatsing...................................................................................... 8-9 Sifon............................................................................................. 10 Aansluitenkanalen.................................................................11-12 Aansluiten krachtstroom........................................................13-16 Aansluiten handterminal en sensor ........................................... 17 Monteren sensor.......................................................................... 18 CX................................................................................................. 19 Luchtrichting veranderen............................................................ 20 Verklaringplinten....................................................................... 21 EN Warning Must be connected by Outdoor air Supply air Extract air Exhaust air Protect from a qualified Electrician. moisture Warning! Hazardous voltage. SE Varning Skall utf6ras av beh6rig Uteluft Tilluft Franluft Avluft Skyddas Fran vata elektriker. Vaming for fariig spanning! DE Warnung Der Anschluss ist von Augenluft Zuluft Abluft Fortluft Vor Nasse schUtzen einem Elektrikervorzu- nehmen. Wamung vor gefahrlicher Spannung! FIR Avertissement Doit titre raccorde par un Air exterieur Air de pulsion Air extrait Air rejete Proteger contre electricien agree. Aver- I'humidite tissement de tension dangereuse! NO Advarsel Skal tilkobles av autori- Uteluft Tilluft Avtrekksluft Avkast Beskyttes fra vaste sert elektrier. Advarsel for farlig spenning! DK Advarsel Skal tilsluttes of autori- Friskluft Indbla9sningsluft Udsugningsluft Afgangsluft Beskyttes mod vaede seret elektriker. Advarsel om fariig spaending! FI Varoitus Liitanta annettava Ulkoilma Tuloilma Poistoilma Jateilma Suojattava patevan sahkSasentajan kastumiselta tehtavaksi. Varoitus — vaarallinen jannite! PL Uwagal Podlgczenia winne Powietrze zewngtrzne Powietrze Powietrze Powietrze Chronic przed bycwykonaneprzez nawiewane wywiewane wyrzucane wilgociq wykwalifikowanego elektryka. Ostrzeieniel Niebezpieczne napigcie. RU BHmmaHHe Pa3peweHO TOf1bKO Hapy)MblN B03AYX npHT04H6IN B039yX OTpa6OTaMblN B039yx BUT51*HON B03,gyX 3aLLAMTNTb OT Bf1arm cneLAman mcTyaneKTpHKy. BHHMaHHe,onacHoe HanpmKeHme! ES Advertencia Debe efectuaria un Aire exterior Aire de impulsion Aire de retorno Aire de extracci6n Proteger contra electricista autorizado. la humedad Advertencia de tension peligrosa! IT Avvertenza Operazione riservata Aria esterna Aria in entrata Aria in uscita Sfiato Teme I'umidita a elettricisti qualificati. Avvertenza tensione pericolosa! PT Aviso Deve ser efectuado por Ar exterior Ar de entrada Ar de saida Ar de extracgao Proteger contra electricista autorizado. a humidade Aviso! Tensao electrica peigosa. NIL Waarschuwing Uit te voeren door een Buitenlucht Inlaatlucht Uitlaatlucht Afvoerlucht Tegenvocht bevoegd elektricien. beschermen Waarschuwing voor gevaariijke spanning GOLD 004/005, 007/008, 011/012, 014/020, 025/030, 035/040, 050/060, 070/080 EN - For weights, see the relevant package SE - For vikter, se respektive kolli DE - Fur Gewichte siehe jeweilige Verpackung FIR - Les poids figurent sur les emballages correspondants. NO - For vekt se respektive kolli DK - Se det paga--ldende kolli for va=gtoplysninger FI - Katso painot vastaavista kolleista PL - Waga, patrz odpowiednie sekcje. RU - Bec, CM. Ha ynaKOBKe ES - Consulte Ios pesos en el paquete correspondiente IT - Per i pesi, vedere it relativo pacchetto PT - Para os pesos, ver o equipamento relevante NL - Voor gewichten, zie het relevante pakket 5 GOLD 004/005, 007/008, 011/012, 014/020, 025/030, 035/040, 050/060, 070/080 GOLD 004/005, 007/008, 011/012, 014/020, 025/030, 035/040 GOLD 050/060, 070/080 GOLD 004/005, 007/008, 011/012, 014/020, 025/030 GOLD 035/040, 050/060 O GOLD 070/080 O Alt. 1 Alt. GOLD RX 004/005, 007/008 t 200 mm o GOLD PX 004/005, 007/008 GOLD 011/012, 014/020 GOLD 025/030 * GOLD RX 0041005 = 800 mm GOLD RX 0071008 = 900 mm 200 mm 200 mm * GOLD RX 0 11/012 = 800 mm GOLD RX 0141020 = 900 mm GOLD PX 0 11/012, 0141020 = 900 mm GOLD RX/PX Top 014/020= 1000 mm GOLD 035/040 GOLD 050/060 te • 0•0 millE, GOLD PX GOLD CX m GOLD 004/005, 007/008, 011/012 GOLD 004/005, 007/008, 011/012, 014/020, 025/030, 035/040, 050/060, 070/080 12 GOLD RX 004/005, 007/008, 011/012, 014/020 GOLD PX 004/005, 007/008, 011/012, 014/020 ______ O ® O OFF GOLD RX 025/030, 35/40, 50/60, 70, 80 cap. var. 1 GOLD RX 080 cap. var. 2 -a Vol GOLD PX 025/030, 35/40 GOLD CX 035/040, 050/060, 070/080 13 GOLD RX 004/005, 007/008, 011/012, 014/020 GOLD PX 004/005, 007/008, 011/012, 014/020 0 GOLD RX 004/005, 007, 008 cap. var. 1, 011 cap. var. 1 GOLD PX 004/005, 007, 008 cap. var. 1, 011 cap. var. 1 1-phase, 3-wire, 230V-10415%, 50Hz PE L1 N 44- 1 O O PE L1 L2 L3 N O O O O O GOLD RX/PX 004 10A GOLD RX/PX 005, cap. var. 1 10A GOLD RX/PX 005, cap. var. 2 16A GOLD RX/PX 007, cap. var. 1 10A GOLD RX/PX 007, cap. var. 2 16A GOLD RX/PX 008, cap. var. 1 16A GOLD RX/PX 011, cap. var. 1 16A GOLD RX 004/005, 007/008, 011/012, 014/020 GOLD PX 025/030, 035/040 GOLD PX 004/005, 007/008, 011/012, 014/020, 025/030, 035/040 3-phase, 5-wire, 400V-10415%, 50Hz PE L1 L2 L3 N 44444 O O O O O PE L1 L2 L3 N O O O O O GOLD RX/PX 004 10A* GOLD RX/PX 005 10A* GOLD RX/PX 007 10A* GOLD RX/PX 008, cap. var. 1 10A* GOLD RX/PX 008, cap. var. 2 10A GOLD RX/PX 011, cap. var. 1 10A* GOLD RX/PX 011, cap. var. 2 10A GOLD RX/PX 012 10A GOLD RX/PX 014 10A GOLD RX/PX 020, cap. var. 1 10A GOLD RX/PX 020, cap. var. 2 16A GOLD PX 025, cap. var. 1 10A GOLD PX 025, cap. var. 2 16A GOLD PX 030, cap. var. 1 16A GOLD PX 030, cap. var. 2 20A GOLD PX 035, cap. var. 1 16A GOLD PX 035, cap. var. 2 20A GOLD PX 040, cap. var. 1 25A GOLD PX 040, cap. var. 2 40A COS WITTIMMIRM 230V 400V * Alternate supply voltage 14 GOLD CX 035/040, 050/060, 070/080 GOLD CX 035/040, 050/060, 070/080 3-phase, 5-wire, 400V-10415%, 50Hz PE L1 L2 L3 N GOLD CX 035, cap. var. 1 20A GOLD CX 035, cap. var. 2 25A O O O O O GOLD CX 040, cap. var. 1 32A GOLD CX 040, cap. var. 2 40A PE L1 L2 L3 N GOLD CX 050, cap. var. 1 32A GOLD CX 050, cap. var. 2 40A GOLD CX 060, cap. var. 1 40A 0 0 0 0 0 GOLD CX 060, cap. var. 2 50A GOLD CX 070, cap. var. 1 40A GOLD CX 070, cap. var. 2 63A GOLD CX 080, cap. var. 1 63A GOLD CX 080, cap. var. 2 80A GOLD RX 025/030, 035/040, 050/060 GOLD RX 025/030, 035/040, 050/060 3-phase, 5-wire, 400V-10415%, 50Hz L3 L2 L1 N PE GOLD RX 025, cap. var. 1 10A GOLD RX 025, cap. var. 2 16A O O O O O GOLD RX 030 20A GOLD RX 035 20A L3 L2 L1 N PE GOLD RX 040, cap. var. 1 25A GOLD RX 040, cap. var. 2 40A GOLD RX 050, cap. var. 1 25A 0 0 0 0 0 GOLD RX 050, cap. var. 2 40A GOLD RX 060, cap. var. 1 32A GOLD RX 060, cap. var. 2 50A 15 GOLD RX 070/080 va r. 1 /-10415%, 50Hz GOLD RX 70, cap. var. 1 GOLD RX 70, cap. var. 2 GOLD RX 80, cap. var. 1 PE GOLD RX 80 cap. var. 2 3-phase, 5-wire, 400V-10415%, 50Hz L1 L2 L3 N PE O O O O O L1 L2 L3 N PE O O O O O GOLD RX 80, cap. var. 2 32A 50A 50A 80A m GOLD RX 004/005, 007/008, 011/012,014/020, GOLD PX 004/005, 007/008, 011/012,014/020 Min. 100 mm GOLD RX 025/030, 035/040, 050/060 GOLD PX 025/030, 035/040 GOLD RX 070/080 230/400V GOLD CX 035/040, 050/060, 070/080 17 GOLD 004/005, 007/008, 011/012, 014/020, 025/030, 035/040, 050/060, 070/080 A >= 1 500 mm B = 7 000 mm (GOLD 004/005, 007/008, 011/012, 014/020, 025/030) 10 000 mm (GOLD 035/040, 050/060, 070/080) C = 0 11 mm 18 GOLD CX 35/40, 50/60, 70/80 IN GOLD RX 004/005, 007/008, 011/012, 014/020, 025/030, 035/040, 050/060, 070/080 EN - See Section 4.10 in the GOLD Function Manual, Installation. SE - Se aysnitt 4.10 i GOLD Funktionsmanual installation. DE - Siehe Abschnitt 4.10 im GOLD-Funktionshandbuch zur Installation. FIR - Voir la Section 4.10 du manuel des fonctions GOLD, Installation. NO - Se aysnitt 4.10 i GOLD Funksjonsmanual installasjon. DK - Se afsnit 4.10 i GOLD Funktionsmanual installation. FI - Katso luku 4.10 GOLD Asennustason ohjekirjassa. PL - Patrz rozdzia# 4.10 w Instrukcji instalacji GOLD. RU - CM. Pa3,gen 4.10 B MHCTPyKLANN onMCaHMFI CpYHKPWN GOLD. ES - Consulte la Seccion 4.10 del "Manual de funcionamiento, Instalacion" de GOLD. IT - Vedere la sezione 4.10 del Manuale delle funzioni GOLD, Installazione. PT - Ver Secgao 4.10 no Manual de funcionamento GOLD, Instalagao. NL - Zie Sectie 4.10 in de GOLD-functiehandleiding, Installatie. 20 The max. permissible load on the corresponding connection is 16 VA. Digital inputs, terminals 4-17, are of extra -low voltage type. Analogue inputs, terminals 18-19 have an input impedance of 66 kQ. Connections for EIA -485 1= Communication connection A/RT+, 2= Communication connection B/RT—, 3= GND/COM. External stop Stops the air handling unit by opening the circuit. On delivery, this function is fitted with a jumper. If the connection is interrupted, the air handling unit will stop. External fire/smoke function 1 External fire and smoke function. On delivery, this function is fitted with a jumper. If the connection is interrupted, the function will trip and initiate an alarm. External fire/smoke function 2 External fire and smoke function. On delivery, this function is fitted with a jumper. If the connection is interrupted, the function will trip and initiate an alarm. External alarm 1 External contact function. Optional: Normally open/normally closed. External alarm 2 External contact function. Optional: Normally open/normally closed. External low speed External contact function. Overrides the time switch from stop to low speed operation. External high speed External contact function. Overrides the time switch from stop or low speed to high speed operation. Demand control Input for 0-10 VDC. The input signal influences the supply air/extract airflow setpoint if the unit is operating in the demand control mode. For connection of a sensor, for example CO2, CO and VOC Circulation pump, heating circuit Independent contact, max. 5 A/AC1, 2 A/AC3, 250 VAC. Closes on a heating load. Circulation pump, cooling Independent contact, max. 5 A/AC1, 2 A/AC3, 250 VAC. Closes on a cooling load. circuit or cooling on/off, 1-step operation Cooling, on/off, 2-step operation Independent contact, max. 5 A/AC1, 2 A/AC3, 250 VAC. Closes on a cooling load. In-service indication Independent contact, max. 5 A/AC1, 2 A/AC3, 250 VAC. Closes when the unit is operating. Damper control 24 VAC. 28= Controlled 24 VAC (G), 29= 24 VAC (G), 30= 24 VAC (GO). Control voltage 24 VAC control voltage. Terminals 31-32 are loaded with a total of 16 VA. Opened by means of the safety isolating switch. Reference voltage Output for constant 10 VDC. Max. permissible load: 8 mA. Control, recirculation damper The recirculation damper can be loaded with max. 2 mA at 10 VDC. 35= 24 V AC (G), 36= 24 V AC (GO), 37= 0-10 V DC control signal, 38= 0-10 VDC feedback signal. The max permissible common load on terminals 31-32, outputs for Heat/Cool and damper output (terminals 28-30) is 50 VA. 21 Digitala ingangar, plint 4-17, ar av typ klenspanning. Analog ingbng, plint 18-19 har ingangsimpedans 66 k52. Anslutningar for EIA-485 Externt stopp Extern brand-/r6kfunktion 1 Extern brand-/r6kfunktion 2 Externt larm 1 Externt larm 2 Extern lagfart Extern h6gfart Behovsstyrning Cirkulationspump varme Cirkulationspump kyla alt. kyla on/ off 1 steg Kyla on/off, 2 steg Driftindikering Spjallstyrning Man6versp6nning' Referensspanning Styrning recirkulationsspjall 4 Respektive anslutning fbr belastas med max 16 VA. 1= kommunikationsanslutning A/RT+, 2= kommunikationsanslutning B/RT-, 3= GND/COM. Stopp av aggregat via brytande kontakt. Byglad vid leverans. Bryts f6rbindelsen stoppar aggregatet. Extern brand- och r6kfunktion. Byglad vid leverans. Bryts forbindelsen utl6ses funktionen och larmar. Extern brand- och rbkfunktion. Byglad vid leverans. Bryts forbindelsen utloses funktionen och larmar. Extern kontaktfunktion. Valbar slutande/brytande. Extern kontaktfunktion. Valbar slutande/brytande. Extern kontaktfunktion. Overstyr kopplingsuret fran stopp till lagfartsdrift. Extern kontaktfunktion. Overstyr kopplingsuret fran stopp eller lagfart till h6gfartsdrift. Ingang 0-10 VDC. Insignal paverkar fl6desb6rvarden f6r tilluft/franluft vid behovsreglering. For anslutning av givare, till exempel COZ, CO och VOC Friliggande kontakt, max 5 A/AC1, 2 A/AC3, 250 VAC. Sluter vid varmebehov. Friliggande kontakt, max 5 A/AC1, 2 A/AC3, 250 VAC. Sluter vid kylbehov. Friliggande kontakt, max 5 A/AC1, 2 A/AC3, 250 VAC. Sluter vid kylbehov. Friliggande kontakt, max 5 A/AC1, 2 A/AC3, 250 VAC. Sluter vid drift. 24 VAC. 28= styrd 24 VAC (G), 29= 24 VAC (G), 30= 24 VAC (GO). Man6versp5nning 24 VAC. Plint 31-32 belastas med sammanlagt max 16 VA. Bryts av sakerhetsbrytaren. Utgang for konstant 10 VDC. Max belastning 8 mA. Recirkulationsspjall belastas max 2 mA vid 10 VDC. 35= 24 VAC (G), 36= 24 VAC (GO), 37= styrsignal 0-10 VDC, 38= aterf6ringssignal 0-10 VDC . Plint 31-32, utgangar for Heat/Cool och spjallutgbng (plint 28-30) far gemensamt belasatas med max 50 VA. 22 23 Specifications are subject to alteration without notice. 10 Installation Instructions, 2020-04-01 OUHLWI �:J OFRII%FV ON�s Intertek C22.2 no113 UL 1812 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION The E1100L-Fi-EC-N energy recovery ventilator provides up to 1000 cubic feet per minute (470 Us) of fresh outdoor air while exhausting an equivalent amount of stale indoor air, creating a well-balanced ventilation system. The E1100L-Fi-EC-N makes use of Aldes' AHRI Certified High Latent Transfer enthalpic cores that deliver superior moisture transfer and can be used in any climate zone. The highly efficient and quiet variable -speed EC motors use on average 80% less electricity of the E1100L-Fi-N at low speed, significantly increasing return on investment. The E1100L-Fi-EC-N is recommended for midsized non-residential spaces or dedicated zones within larger buildings such as classrooms, common areas of residential complexes and indoor parking garages. E1100L-R-EC-N Energy Recovery Ventilator 1000 CFM at 0.4 in.w.g (ESP) Made in Canada 5 YEAR 2 YEAR �� WARRANTY WARRANTY CORE OTHER PARTS Plate Exchanger Material: High latent transfer (HLO Casing Material: Painted galvanized steel 22GA Insulation: 1 "(25 mm) Fiberglass with FSK Drain Connection: G 1/2" (0 13 mm) Duct Connections: 20" x 8" (508mm x 203mm) Width: 36-1/4" (921mm) Height: 23-7/8" (606mm) Depth: 47-1/4" (1200mm) Unit Weight: 204 lb (93 kg); 214 lb (97 kg) with recirculation Shipping Weight: 261 lb (118 kg); 271 lb (193 kg) with recirculation Designed for versatile indoor installation, Aldes light Mounting commercial ventilators can fit almost anywhere and still Supplied with base rails. Support rods by others. provide easy access to the internal components for Rel quick maintenance. The units also offer a choice of five Electrical Requirements continuous operation speeds and a demand -controlled J-1 230V/1 p/60 Hz: FLA 5.6A, MCA 6.OA, MOP 15A high speed exchange mode. 208V/1 p/60 Hz (with field modification): FLA 6.OA, MCA 6.4A, MOP 15A Terminal block for direct wiring to the building's electrical system. Fused disconnect not included. aFrost Control Cycles controlled by a temperature sensor when outdoor temperatures fall below 14°F (-10°C). • Standard: Exhaust Defrost • Optional: Recirculation Defrost (P/N 683950) Blowers VBfRATIUN Four backward -inclined motorized impeller, direct drive EC motor, variable speed, external rotor. Filters FILTRATION Type: Aluminum (P/N 683951) Optional : MERV 8 (P/N 683952), Charcoal (P/N 683953), or High Efficiency/MERV13 Equivalent (P/N 683954) Additional Air Pressure Filter Type Drop with Optional Filters Airflow CFM (L/S) 500 (236) 800 (375) MERV 8 0.04 0.08 Charcoal 0.04 0.08 High Efficiency 0.22 0.35 Dimensions FRONT VIEW Recirculation Port (optional) 1-5/8" 4 $" (41 mm) (203 mm) • I I I I I� I I 36-1/4" (921 mm) 40-3/4" (1035 mm) Anchor 41-3/4" 0 060 m m) SIDE VIEW 8" (203 mm) 23-7/8" (606 m) 6 (zos (iat6mml'"'"� 4 (102 mm) t3-5/e" 20" (i46 mm) (508 mm) (1002 mm) 47-1/4" (1200 mm) (5 Performance BOTTOM VIEW "MMMOMM���1 High speed (Max) 653W —AN1 \MMMMM -. speed (Max) 412W „ \Mm\\MML \mmmmm1 \omm\\mi6. •\MMMM1 . --. .. '1111\ �� ����IIIIIIIIIIIIII ss -1■1. `I■1. �IIIIIIIIIIIIII��IIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIII� `IIII■1.� 1■1■1■111 �IIIIII�IIIIIIIIIIIIIII Airflow CFM * AT 230V Controls 0-10 VDC inputs (for supply and exhaust) or multiple fixed speed options Low -voltage dry contact (24 VAC, 20 VA) for: Occupancy Control (On/Off) Interlock contacts Optional Recirculation Mode 24 VAC, 10 VA output for supply and exhaust dampers (by others) Compatible with Digital Multifunction Control (P/N 611242-FC) B LCD Electronic Multifunction Con- trol (P/N 611227) ®o ®o 20/40/60 Minute Timer (P/N 611228) Speed Control (Low/Intermittent/High) (P/N 611229) n) Mode Control (exchange or recirculation) (P/N 611230) t1 BACnetTM interface (P/N 611235) Ell 100L-Fi-EC-N Core Efficiency 75% 65% �Hiver et €[E 56% Sensible T 45% � -Hiver-Total V 35% W 25% �€te-Total 5% 8 8 8 S 8 8 m 8 S Airflow CFM AHRI core Ref # 10346213 Project: Architect: Location: Engineer: Model #: Contractor: Quantity: Comments: Submitted By: Date: For more information, contact your Aldes sales advisor, visit aldes-na.com, call 1.800.255.7749, or find us on ® Q © lobe E1100L-Fi-EC-N_Spec_ENG_0121, 02021 American ALDES Ventilation Corporation and ALDES Canada. All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution, in whole or in part, of this document, in any form or by any means, without the express written consent of American ALDES Ventilation Corporation and/or ALDES Canada, is strictly prohibited. The information contained within this document is subject to change without prior written notice. ((me- Air exchanger with heat and/or energy recovery core H/E240-Ri H/E650(A)-Fi(P) - H/E650(A)-Ri H/E1100(A)-Fi(P) - H/E1100(A)-Ri H/E1800(A)-Fi(P) - H/El800(A)-Ri AERS-1250i 20161109 a Table of Contents Welcome Table ofContents .'-----.Z Introduction................................................................................................................................ 3 Installation Preliminaries Dox[oments............................................................................................................................... 4 Location 0fthe Unit 5 0fInlet Grilles 5 Of 5 4 Installation a Cabinet O b Exhaust d c Inlet Louver O d Humidity Control O e Du 7 f Air Balancing 8 gUnit Connection ........................................................................................................................ 8 Operation Unit lZ Humidl] Timer .-- 17 Wall Controls 7 Maintenance 18 General information Warranty 19 ContactInformation .............................................................................................................. ZO WELCOME b Introduction You are now the proud owner of an ALDES air exchanger. ALDES thanks you for purchasing this unit, which will provide years of comfort if you carefully follow the instructions in this guide. First fill in the product information section at the end of this guide. This data is necessary for any warranty claim. c Air Exchanger with Heat Recovery This unit is specially designed to exchange the air in your office or small business. This air exchanger will ensure continuous ventilation on request. In winter, it will dehumidify the ambient air to the level set on the control. Odors will also be exhausted with the proper wall -mounted accessory. 0 '11111 INSTALLATION PRELIMINARIES a Box Contents Verify that all parts are included in the package: • Air exchanger • Parts included - (2) % & 1/2 Universal drain - (2) Seal grommets - (2) Nuts - (1) Drain hose "T" connector - (1) 1 1' Drain hose b Installation Kit Contents Additional parts can be purchased to complete the installation. The fol- lowing parts are recommended for a standard installation: • Humidistat (P/N 611224 & 611242-FC) -Timer (P/N 611228) • Wall Controls (P/N 611229 & 611230) 0 LOCATION a Of the Unit The ALDES unit should be installed in an area where the temperature is always above the freezing point. The best location for the unit would minimize the total duct length and the number of elbows. The shorter the ducts and the fewer elbows there are, the higher the airflow will be. b Of Inlet Grilles The ambient air inlet grilles should be mounted close to areas with higher hu- midity levels. Most of the time they are located on the main floor, in the corridor between the kitchen and the washroom, and in the basement, close to the wash- room. They should not be located in a room containing a combustion appliance like a furnace or a fireplace. The grilles can be installed on the ceiling or a wall. Place the grille within 12" (30 cm) of the ceiling. C Of Diffusers The diffusers are normally installed in corridors as far from the ambient air intake as possible. This forces the air to circulate through most of the building. The diffuser can be installed on a wall or the ceiling. If it is located in an occupied area, mounting the diffuser on the ceiling is recommended. This allows the fresh air to be mixed with the ambient air before reaching the occupants, thus improv- ing the comfort level on a cold winter day. A wall -mounted diffuser should be located within 12" (30cm) of the ceiling. d Of the Humiditv Control The control has to be installed where excess humidity is more likely to be detect- ed. On the main floor, it is generally located between the kitchen and the bath- room. If you wish to control the humidity level mainly in the basement, you should install the control in this area. Avoid placing the control in an area with stagnant air (ex. behind a door). The installation of the air exchanger must be in accordance with the applicable codes in your area. 91 INSTALLATION a Cabinet The unit is designed to be installed on a shelf or suspended from the building. When the unit is on a shelf, it is necessary to have some vibration insulators under its casing to prevent noise propagation. The air exchanger must be leveled horizon- tally. This is necessary to drain the conden- sation from the unit. Connect 2 hoses to the bottom of the casing (see illustration at right). The main drain should be connected to the building's drainage system. b Exhaust Louver The exhaust louver should be installed through an exterior wall at a minimum of 18" (46 cm) above ground. Attach the intermediary sleeve to the plastic louver collar with a screw. Seal the gap between the sleeve and the wall. Inlet Louver The inlet louver is installed through an exterior wall, at least 6' (185 cm) from the exhaust louver and more than 18" (46 cm) above ground. Make sure the inlet louver is installed so the insulated vent duct, joining it to the cabinet, is as straight as possible. d Humidity Control The control should be mounted on the wall 5' (150 cm) above the floor. Drill a hole through the wall so you can pass a wire from the control to the unit. This wire contains 4 wires of different colors. Connect them to the front terminal. Follow the color code. There are 24 volts of electric tension passing through the wires. Attach the backplate of the control to the wall. Respect the color code. Install the plastic cover with the help of the fixing screw and the control button, if needed. INSTALLATION e Ducts To maximize the air exchanger airflow, install the ducts as straight as possible. We recommend galvanized steel ducts for long ductwork because of their ease of cleaning and low flow resistance. Refer to the drawing below to connect ducts to the unit. Recirculation port (option) 1-5/8" � 8" OUTSIDE AIR EXHAUST AIR 40-3/4" H650-Fi RETURN AIR SUPPLY AIR 36-1/4" Anchor 01/2" 41-3/4" You can run ducts through floors, ceilings, walls or closets and cover them after- wards with gypsum board. Ducts in unheated areas must be insulated. The last 3' (1 m) of the exhaust duct adjacent to the exhaust louver should be insulated and covered with a vapor barrier. Slide the end of the flexible duct over the unit port. Use 2" duct tape to wrap the flexible duct to the unit port. If necessary, the gaps between ducts and walls or ceilings can be hidden with the rubber strips. Electrical Connection When the humidity controller and all the ducts are installed, plug the unit directly into a 120V power outlet on 230V. DO NOT USE AN ELECTRIC EXTENSION CORD. INSTALLATION f Air Balancing The difference between the exhaust and supply airflow rates should be negli- gible (below 10%). Airflow balancing is especially important in houses with com- bustion appliances or in areas where radon gas has been a problem. Use airflow measuring stations and a magnehelic gage to measure the airflow rates. The speed of each blower can be adjusted independently by turning the adjust- ment knob located on the top of the electrical box. � ? 1 2 46 4 3 SORTIE/FAN OUT ENTREE/FAN IN g Unit connection It is recommended to use 22-gauge wire. BLANC Always have a jumper between 9 & 10. WHrTE BLANC WFTEN RTE Wall -Mounted Accessories a BLANC Wall -mounted accessories must be installed BLANC at approximately 5'(150 cm) from the floor VVH and connected to the device according to the BLANC following illustration. WHrrE Qy BLANC *611224 , emal al VVHrrE Z BLANC VMrrE 611242 = 66611229 VYHFIE D M n'E 611230 Fo _1 >a Fa _1 yLL BLANC ❑ WNRE _1 NO COM NC �� GREEN 14 13 12 11 10 9 ®7❑©©�©�� p ' VERT GREEN JUMPER © ROUGE RED OL611228 BLANC ❑"' WHrrE N61R D BLACK X INSTALLATION For the connection of the Humidistat 611224 or DRY CONTACT, see the following illustrations according to the installation needs. WITHOUT Recirculation Option JUMPER WITH Recirculation Option Option 1: the unit is in EXCHANGE mode at DEFAULT SPEED 14 13 ]2 11 ,o ss ®o©a�©UO JUMPER Option 2: the unit is in RECIRCULATION mode at DEFAULT SPEED ,4 13 12 11 10 9s ®❑©©�UO u JUMPER Synchronization Contact The unit disposes of a dry contact, either normally open (NO) or normally closed (NC) for synchronization fan interlock, with a pulsated air system or other. JUMPER SYNCHRONIZATION FAN INTERLOCK 0 OINSTALLATION Occupancy Control This dry contact offers priority control operation. It can be used to connect a programmable timer or a motion detector to limit the unit's operation periods. When this contact is activated, the unit functions normally according to the wall -mounted accessory. A jumper should be between 9 & 10. 14 i3 12 11 10 9 ®�©©0©❑2 OCCUPANCY CONTROL Supply and Exhaust Damper These contacts make it possible to feed two damper actuators, one for the sup- ply airstreams and one for the exhaust airstreams (24VAC and 1 OVA max each). SUPPLY DAMPER 14 13 12 11 10 9 EXHAUST JUMPER DAMPER Alternately, if you want the unit in exchange mode at the lowest speed, put a jumper from 1 to 3. 14 13 12 11 10 �9 ®❑©©��, D� If you use the unit without a control, depending on the use of the unit, you have to put a jumper from 1 to 5 if you want to be in exchange mode at HIGH speed. 14 13 12 „ » oaa© a©a W S INSTALLATION h Unit Confiquration It is possible to change the defrost parameters and speed range using the jumper on the configuration port. The configuration port is located on the con- trol board, as indicated in the figure below. EXTENDED DEFROST Option For severe applications, in colder areas, it is possible to extend the defrost peri- od in order to prevent ice build-up in the unit. To activate the extended defrost option, add a jumper on the configuration port between terminals 1 and 2 (DEGIVRAGE position). 2 4 6 8 10 1 1 1 3 5 7 9 REDUCED SPEED Option To operate the unit according to the REDUCED speed range (see model spec sheet for performance), add a jumper on the configuration port between termi- nals 3 and 4 (OPTION 0 position). 2 4 6 8 10 00MMM 0M000 1 3 5 7 9 OPERATION a Unit This heat/energy recovery unit is the ideal unit for spacious homes, businesses, daycare centers, clinics, bars, restaurants, etc. The unit will function according to the speed selected using the button located on the side of the device (see figure below). A pilot light indicates selected speed. This speed is called DEFAULT SPEED or speed 390. It is the speed at which the unit operates when no signal is emitted by the wall -mounted accessories (humidistat, timer, etc) connected on terminals 1 to 5. When a signal is emitted by one of the wall -mounted accessories, the unit is activat- ed at HIGH SPEED or speed e39 . 511224 s eme e o a 611242 z ww� N 611229 irWo=Qo 1W 611230 >o 7 a¢ _1 F _1 NO COM NC 14 13 12 11 10 9❑®0�❑❑�❑�2❑� U611228 QFF I UTEVMSSE BASSEVITESSE HIGH SPEED LOW SPEED r MDYERNEYBESSE MEDIOAA SRE#D Y dsd'dsds d'dsdsd"dsRgZoh 4id 1a 13 12 11 1U 9 C❑� ®�©®iu 1 2 J(N3 + + 4 3 SORTIE/EXHAusT FAN ENTREE/suPPu FAN 0 OPERATION b Humidistat The humidistat controls the relative humidity rate. Equipped with a humidity sensor and a electronic system, it efficiently controls your air exchanger to keep the humidity rate in your home below the desired setting. This feature allows you to set the functioning mode of your air exchanger accord- ing to your needs. You can create a continuous air exchange with the outside, recirculate ambient air, or maintain a constant flow of fresh air when there are more people in the house. The humidistat is designed to quickly evacuate all excess humidity. When the humidity content exceeds the desired setting, this feature causes air to be ex- changed with the outside at a high speed until the humidity rate has returned to the desired rate. Afterwards, it will automatically come back to the chosen operating mode. ASHRAE* standards recommend maintaining a relative humidity rate between 30% and 60%. *(American Society of Heating, Refrigerating, and Air -Conditioning Engineers) RECOMMENDED HUMIDITY RATE TO PREVENT INDOOR CONDENSATION" Outside Air Temperature Recommended Humidity Rate 10°C / 50°F Between 55% and 60% 0°C / 32°F Between 50% and 55% -10°C / 14°F Between 45% and 50% -20°C / -4°F Between 50% and 45% -30oC / -22°F Between 30% and 40% **These rates may vary according to the type of construction and fenestration of the building. OPERATION Humidistat Model 611224 The mechanical humidistat controls excess humidity. When the rate of humidity is greater than the value indicated on the adjustment knob, activate the high speed switch, and if needed, the interior -exterior exchange switch. When the appropriate humidity rate is reached, the humidistat will return to its pre -selected ventilation mode. Turn the adjustment knob from the humidity's higher value toward its lower value. When you hear a click, look at the value indicated. This value represents the rate of ambient moisture in the air. You may also wish to operate the ap- pliance at high speed. To do so, adjust the knob to its lowest rate of humidity (20%). This setting is recommended for a room full 25 20 of guests or an extended period of cooking. 3p O 40 AH -%HR 50 0 60 70 SO R aides 0 LO-OPERATION Digital Multifunction Control 611242-FC The Digital Multifunction Controller controls the relative humidity rate. Equipped with a high -accuracy, fast -response humidity sensor and an electronic system, it efficiently controls your air exchanger to keep the humidity rate in your home below the desired setting. When the humidity content exceeds the desired setting, air will be exchanged with the outside at a high speed until the humidity has returned to the desired rate. Afterwards, it will automatically revert to the chosen operating mode. It can be adapted to units with or without recirculation, as well as electronic or relay logic units. The controller should be installed in the place where excess humidity is most likely to be detected. This would generally be between the bathroom and the kitchen. If you wish to control humidity in a basement, the control should be placed there. Ensure good air circulation around the controller. Do not place it behind a door, for example. N OPERATION On/Off I = Electronic HRV/ERV O = Relay HRVJERV O O Recirculatio ON = With recirculation OFF = Without recirculation ON r OFF O 4 TB1 ® G © Aldes Timer Output GAir exchange system, green © Air exchange system, red OAir exchange system, COM 4 Air exchange system, 24 VAC Humidity and temperature sensor ❑ Back of face plate - simplified 0 OPERATION C Timer Model 611228 When you push the button, the unit will con- tinuously exchange air at high-speed for a period of: CU • 20 minutes • 40 minutes =°m^ • 60 minutes This control overrides the mode of operation selected on the humidistat. Valdes C d Wall Controls Models 611229 & 611230 These simple and easy -to -use controls al- low you to loop a variety of modes at the push of a button. Speed Control Model 611229 Function: Provides the ventilation unit with 4 modes of operation: — • Intermittent mode; successive cycles, low -speed 20-minute exchange, 40-minute stop mode Valdes • Low -speed exterior exchange mode • High-speed exterior exchange mode f • Stop mode (when the lights are off) X OPERATION Mode Control Model 611230 Function : Provides the ventilation unit with 4 modes of operation: • Recirculation mode • Low -speed exterior exchange mode E' • High-speed exterior exchange mode " • Stop mode (when the lights are off) Saldes e Maintenance Regularly check that the inlet screen and the exhaust screen are not obstructed by ice or particles. In winter, check every month that the condensate drain opening is not blocked. The filter has to be cleaned with soapy water 3 times a year or more if needed. ATTENTION: Optional high -efficiency and carbon filters are NOT washable. Clean the heat recovery core once a year or when needed. Carefully pull out the core from the unit. Wear gloves when you handle the core since it can have sharp edges. Vacuum the cabinet interior at least once a year, preferably at the beginning of fall. 0 General Information a Warra The warranty period for light commercial ventilation units begins on the date of manufacture indicated on the serial number (modelYYMMXXX where YY is the year and MM the month). Recovery core of an HRV, polypropylene or aluminum, is covered by a limited warranty of 15 years. The enthalpy recovery core of an ERV is covered by a limited warranty of 3 years. Any other component of the unit is covered by a limited warranty of 2 years. This warranty plan does not cover any defect resulting from improper installation, misuse, acts of God and/or other similar causes beyond the control of the manufacturer. It is excluded from this warranty, the possibi- lity of a request for damages or indemnity. Nor should ALDES be responsible for any injury or damage to the pro- perty caused directly or indirectly by our ventilation units (breakdown). How to Claim If any part proved defective, it will be replaced by another piece or re- paired according to the judgment of the company. ALDES takes in charge only the component; all other expenses are the responsibility and liability of the consumer. We recommend talking with one of our technicians before removing any unit. There may be another way to solve the problem. Obtain an authorization number from our customer service department before sending in a unit for service. General Information b Contact information For more details on the installation or the operation of your unit, contact your dealer or the staff of our division. We will be glad to help you. ALDES Phone CAN: 1-800-262-0916 Phone USA:1-800-255-7749 www.aldes.com Product Information Date of purchase* Serial number Store (dealer) *Keep your sales receipt as proof of purchase. Maintenance Sheet Date 0 Circuit Diagram Light Commercial Models: H 6509 HI 1009 HI 800 & E6501 El 1009 El 800 Brown Black Fan out Blue Green Brown -) Blac Fan out Blue HIE 1100 Models ------ H/E 1800 Models _Green Brown Fan in Blue Green Brown � F � BIB Fan in H/E 1100 Models --- Bpi H/E 1800 Models _Green a0 E c H CO Temperature sensor#2 -- (opt) L L_ CO 0 CO CL M a� CL ao a 0. a E Q E E E CO 0 obod 6b vb D o Damper #4 0 .O�t° 4�°.°,° ° G - an ccupancy control ------- -- ---- ---- b -Q o- --- ,} __iF__. Fan o -� interlock f_r Wall • o- ---- . o e-- - �rg�n ------------ control Green Ga p_ __ _________________a_1_a___ Red_ -+-+--- 611242 o- 611229 0__T Black - r ,_ 611230 � ❑ °°� PA I L (�°°{3.•°°°.LED g g oFan out ----- Timer 'djustment 611228 -------- -- ----- O e. p °° IT ° e n:• Mode Fan out ❑ 0 0 Adjustment 0 120-230VAC 0 M N 24VAC N N Door switch circuit diagram -light comm_1116 FIELD INSTALLATION OF RECIRCULATION DEFROST DAMPER ON STANDARD FAN EXHAUST DEFROST UNITS' FOR MODELS H650-Fi * H650A-Fi E650-Fi i H 1100-Fi H1100A-Fi El 1 00-Fi H 1800-Fi H1800A-Fi E 1800-Fi *NOTE: Damper Defrost Kit sold separately. Damper Defrost Kits For 650 models: P/N 683900 For 1100 models: P/N 683950 For 1800 models: P/N 683960 2. Check the Contents • Damper assembly • Metal frame • Bag of screws • Jumper(s) • Plastic bushing Tools Needed: • #2 Phillips screwdriver • Small flat screwdriver • Metal shears • Knife Cut the perforated section on the top of the unit. r 0 3. Fold out the four flanges. 4. Cut through the insulation along the duct flanges. 5. Cut the insulation according to the dimensions below. F-C— 5%FI 0 1�1 I� I � I � 51 7. 8. Pull the actuator's wire through the hole. Attach the damper with the screw provided. Slide the plastic bushing down the actuator wire. 9. Install the metal frame inside the unit. 10. Attach the metal frame with the screws provided. 11. Connect the actuator wire to the 11 th and 12th pin on the unit's terminal strip. 1 0 12. Connect the jumper(s) to the circuit board at the position(s) indicated for the specific model. See circuit diagram (included with unit IOM) for larger view. p- 4 Terminal For Heat Recovery Models: H650-Fi H650A-Fi H 1100-Fi H 1100A-Fi H 1800-Fi H 1800A-Fi Jumper #1: Position 5-6 For Energy Recovery Models: E650-Fi E1100-Fi E1800-Fi Jumper #1: Position 7-8 Jumper #2: Position 9-10 C Jumper 0 2015 American ALDES Ventilation Corporation, Reproduction or distribution, in whole or in part, of this document, in any form or by any means, without the express written consent of American ALDES Ventilation Corporation, is strictly prohibited. The information contained within this document is subject to change without prior written notice. American ALDES Ventilation Corporation • 452119th Street Court East, Suite 104 • Bradenton, FL 34203 - USA 941.351.3441 • 800.255.7749 • 941.351.3442 (fax) • info@americanaldes.com • www,aldes.us damper installation guide -light comm-0715